t <M |r
 
 /^
 
 A HEBREW GRAMMAR. 
 
 ^.^;r^ /^i^i /TT'.j: C ^^^^ 
 
 /yr>^ -^, 
 
 
 / 
 

 
 LONnON! 
 
 PRINTED BY JOHN WERTIIEIMER AND CO., 
 
 CIRCUS PLACE, FINSBURY CIRCUS.
 
 A GRAMMAR 
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE, 
 
 / 
 
 BY HYMAN HURWITZ, 
 
 PROFESSOR OF HEBREW IN UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, LONDON, AUTHOR 
 OF VINDICI.^S HEBRAICISTS, HEBREW TALES, ETC. 
 
 5H)frB CFDition.— IRcDtsctJ anti (IPnlargelt. 
 
 / 
 / 
 
 LONDON: 
 PRINTED FOR TAYLOR AND WALTON, 
 
 BOOKSELLERS AND PUBLISHERS TO UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, 
 28, UPPER GOWER STREET. 
 
 M.DCCC.XLI.
 
 ELEMENTS 
 
 OK 
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 2094044
 
 Bij the same Author, 
 THE ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX 
 
 (in continuation of the elesients) 
 
 OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 8t"o. 9s. cloth.
 
 ELEMENTS 
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 BY HYMAN HURWITZ, 
 
 PROFESSOU OF IIEBKEW IN UNIVERSITY ( OLLEGE, LONDON, 
 
 AUTHOR OF 
 
 •' VIXDICI-K IIEliRAIC.E," " I1EBRE\V TALES," ETC. 
 
 JToucti) CBUiticn. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 PRINTED FOR TAYLOR AND WALTON, 
 
 BOOKSELLERS AND PUBLISHERS TO UNIVERSITY COLLEGK, 
 28, UPPER GOWER STREET. 
 
 M.DCCC.XLVIII.
 
 LONDl'N : 
 PRINTED BY J. WERTHEIMKl! AND CO. 
 FJNSBI'RY CIBCDS.
 
 C N T i: N T S. 
 
 PAOK. 
 
 Preface iii. 
 
 Mode of Writing and Kcading 3 
 
 Nature of the Alphabet 4 
 
 Manner of Indicating tlie Vowels ih. 
 
 Sh'va 5 
 
 Dagesh 5 — 6 
 
 Sounds and their llepresentatives 7 
 
 Table containing the Alphabet !) 
 
 Observations on ditto 10 
 
 Division of Letters 11 
 
 Formation of the Letters 12-14 
 
 Vowel-points 14 — 1 o 
 
 Observations on ditto 10 
 
 Combination of the Vowels with the Consonants 1 7 — 20 
 
 Syllables 21 
 
 On the Letters mdk 22 
 
 Syllables beginning witli two Consoiiiints 23 — 24 
 
 Semi-vowels or Substitutes for Sh'va 25 — 2(J 
 
 Syllables terminating in a Consonant at the End of a Word 27 — 28 
 
 Syllables beginning with Two Consonants and terminating in one 29 
 
 Syllables terminating in Two Consonants at tiie Ivnd of Words ih. 
 
 Syllables terminating with a Consonant in the .Middle of a Word 30 
 
 Sh'va in the Middle of a Word 33—34 
 
 Dagerli Kal 35-30 
 
 A *
 
 li CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Dagcsh Ilazak 37 
 
 Rules to distinguish Sh'vu Initial from Sh'va Final 38—39 
 
 Rules to distinguish short (to) and (• i) from long(r)ri) and (-i).... 39—42 
 
 Remarks on the Vowel ()) when preceded bj b .s, or followed by ^ sh. 42—45 
 
 Reading Lessons 47 
 
 Analysis of the first four Verses of Genesis 48—54 
 
 Reading Lessons with the Literal Translation 55—78 
 
 Accents. — Introductory Observations 79 
 
 Table containing the Forms, Position, and Names of the Accents 80 
 
 Nature and Importance of the Accents 81—85 
 
 Use of the Accents in shewing the Relations of Words considered as") o- _g^ 
 
 Members of a Sentence. 
 
 '} 
 
 Familiar Phrases, in which the Pronouns, and the Verb to be are) „, ^^ 
 exemplified j ^^"^^
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 I DEEM it unnecessary to offer an apology for this 
 little work. If it prove useful, I shall have earned 
 the reader's thanks; and if worthless, an apology 
 Avill be but an additional waste of his time. I pro- 
 ceed at once, therefore, to specify its object, and 
 the persons for whom it is designed. 
 
 It is intended for students desirous of acquiring 
 tlie Hebrew Language, and as yet unacquainted 
 with the rudiments ; and its object is to facilitate 
 the acquisition of that tongue by a methodical un- 
 folding of its constituent parts, and a simplification 
 of its rules ; providing the learner, at the same time, 
 with such preparatory information as may enable 
 him to proceed with ease to the Etymology and 
 Syntax, and to enter with advantage on the study 
 of larger and more recondite works. 
 
 Many, indeed, are the works that have already 
 been published on this subject; but whether their 
 learned authors had forgotten the obstacles which
 
 iv rilEFACE. 
 
 they themselves must be supposed to have en- 
 countered, or whether they measured the average 
 capacity of students by their own, or wliatever else 
 might be the cause, it is certain that their labours 
 do not provide the learner with those aids of which 
 he stands most in need at the commencement of 
 his career. Nay, the very display of learning which 
 distinguishes many of these works, renders them 
 unfit for beginners, who are distracted by the mul- 
 titude of facts crowded on their minds, whilst yet 
 unprepared by previous discipline to receive them ; 
 and whose attention is thus frequently diverted from 
 the main object of pursuit. 
 
 What would be thought of an anatomical pro- 
 fessor who should attempt to explain all the in- 
 tricacies of the vascular system before auditors to 
 whom even the structure of the skeleton is as yet 
 unknown? Such, however, is the method generally 
 adopted in communicating a knowledge of the He- 
 brew Language. The attempt also to explain every 
 tiling on theoretical principles, even to the denial 
 of any anomaly — just as if the Hebrew, granting 
 even its immediate Divine oriofin, had not been for 
 ages the common medium of intercourse between
 
 PREFACE. V 
 
 a, inultitude of iVail luuiian beinirs, whose iiiiauiii- 
 atioiis neitlier will nor can be confined within tlie 
 narrow limits of theoretical rales — has, in no small 
 degree, contributed to entangle the subject, and to 
 retard, if not entirely to check, the progress of the 
 learner. 
 
 I have endeavoured to avoid these defects, by 
 introducing!^ nothins: in the folio win ii: sheets but what 
 experience has taught me it is necessary for the 
 beginner to know : while, on the other hand, I have 
 
 been no less anxious to omit nothing that is really 
 useful. 
 
 As the Orthography, owing to the strangeness of 
 the Hebrew characters, and the peculiar system of 
 the vowel-points, is by far the most perplexing and 
 the least inviting part of the language, I have en- 
 deavoured to lessen the difficulties, by familiarising 
 the learner with the system, in the introductory 
 sections, by plain and progressive rules, accom- 
 panied with numerous examples, the proimnciation 
 of Avhicli is given in English characters ; and by 
 the introduction of short vocabularies, which, while 
 they further exemplify the rules, serve at the same 
 time to make the student acqiiaintetl with the
 
 VI 
 
 PIIEFACE. 
 
 signitictition of iminerous words. And here I eaiinot 
 too strongly recommend to the young beginner, to 
 learn to write the Hebrew characters (directions 
 for which he will iind in page 12 — 13) before he 
 proceeds to combine them with the vowel-points; 
 then to continue the practice with both, till they 
 are as familiar to him as the English letters. 
 
 Those who learn the language without the aid 
 of a living instructor, will find the Analysis of the 
 first four verses of Genesis (page 48 — 54) particu- 
 larly useful, as it will remove the hesitation which 
 the self-instructed ever feel respecting correct pro- 
 nunciation. 
 
 This little work further contains Progressive 
 Reading Lessons, selected from Scripture, accom- 
 panied by a literal translation ; not, indeed, as if 
 I wished it to be understood that a critical know- 
 ledge of any language, and especially of such a one 
 as the Hebrew, can be obtained by mere literal 
 translations, unaided by grammatical learning, but, 
 because I am persuaded that they are, when ana- 
 lytically conducted, the surest means of giving the 
 student a real insight into the use and application 
 of words, and the peculiar idiom of a language.
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 VI 1 
 
 AVith this view, the letters expressing the modifi- 
 cation of the Hebrew words, together with their cor- 
 responding English equivalents, have been printed 
 in a type differing from that of the principal words ; 
 so that the pu[)il may easily ascertain the real mean- 
 ing of every compound, and become gradually ac- 
 quainted with the mechanism of the language. 
 
 As the most correct editions of the Hebrew 
 Bibles are printed with the accents, so that the 
 student cannot open a page without their being 
 presented to his view — the accents being likewise 
 intimately connected with the vowel-points, with- 
 out which, no critical knowledge of the Hebrew can 
 be obtained — it has been thought most advisable to 
 explain them, and to describe their use. 
 
 Lastly, a few pages have been added, containing 
 familiar phrases in which the verb to be, and the 
 PRONOUNS, are exemplified ; not only on account 
 of their frequent occurrence, but also because they 
 are the elements from which the greater part of 
 those fragments which express the modifications 
 of words are taken ; and consequently they can- 
 not be too early acquired. Thus prepared, the
 
 viii PREFACE. 
 
 student will be able to pursue the Etymology and 
 Syntax with case and satisfaction ; and ultimately 
 to reap those advantages from the Sacred Records 
 which their interpretation, founded on philological 
 and grammatical rules, is sure to yield.
 
 ELEMENTS OF THE HEBREW 
 LANGUAGE. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 § 1. — Introductory Observations. 
 
 Mode of Beading and Writing. 
 
 1. In our mode of writing we proceed from the 
 left hand to the right ; but the Hebrews, in common 
 with several other Oriental nations, proceed in a con- 
 trary direction. 
 
 The consequence of this arrangement is, that their 
 words and lines begin where ours end, and their 
 books commence where ours terminate, and vice 
 versa. 
 
 Thus, instead of writing a, b, c, d, etc., they write their own 
 
 (•4321 
 
 characters — I d, g, b, a, etc. 
 It a S N 
 Thus, also, instead of writing the word Abraham in this manner, 
 
 5 -13 2 1 
 
 they would write it in their own characters=m h r b a (omitting the 
 
 3 2 1 
 
 vowels); and read it niah-Hr-ba, = Abraham. 
 
 B
 
 4 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 Nature of the Alphabet. 
 
 2. Their Alphabet, which is given at large in 
 page 10, consists of consonants only, because in 
 ancient times they wrote their words without vowels, 
 these being supplied by the reader. 
 
 Every Hebrew knew, from practice, the vocal sounds with which 
 the consonants were pronounced in the different words, in the same 
 manner as every Enghshman knows the different sounds of a in hat, 
 hate, all, was, etc., and that hit is pronounced knight. The words 
 " long live the hing^'' would, in their manner of writing, be Ing Iv th 
 kng ; or rather in the reverse order — 
 
 gnk ht vl gnl 
 
 4 3 2 1 
 
 Mode of Indicating the Vowels. 
 
 3. This mode of writing and reading continued as 
 long as the language was vernacular; but when it 
 ceased to be so, and could only be attained, like 
 every other dead language, through a written me- 
 dium, the necessity of having visible marks for the 
 vowel sounds was strongly felt : but, as all their an- 
 cient records were written without voAvels, and their 
 alphabet was already fixed*, they could not extend 
 it by the addition of new letters, witliout disarrang- 
 ing the whole system, and remodelling their written 
 document; and these they held in too great ve- 
 neration to attempt the slightest change in them. 
 
 * See the alphabetical Psalms xxv., xxxiv., cxix.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 5 
 
 InstCcad, therefore, of inventing letters to represent 
 the vowel-sounds, they contented themselves with 
 indicating them by points and small strokes placed 
 above, below, or in the middle of the consonants. 
 
 Thus they represent the sound of 
 o in no, by a dot above the consonant, 'n, 's, *g, "l, = no, so, go, lo, 
 e in me, by a dot under the consonant, b, h, m, sh,^be, he, me, she, 
 a in mai/, by 2 dots under the consonant, b, d, g, ni,= bay, day, gay, may, 
 e in bed, by 3 dots under the consonant, bd, fd, mt, = bed, fed, met. 
 In a similar manner they represent the rest of the vowels. (See 
 page 15.) 
 
 Sheva or Slrva. 
 
 4. To indicate that a consonant was to be pro- 
 nounced conjointly with the succeeding or preceding 
 syllable, they placed two dots ( ; ) denominated Sh'va^ 
 under the unvo welled consonant: as, blow, bread, 
 asleep, admire, bold, abrupt. 
 
 Dagesh. 
 
 5. As the Hebrew letters corresponding with our 
 b, </, d, c, p, and th, were in ancient times pronounced 
 either aspirated or unaspirated, according to the place 
 they occupied in a word, a small stroke (-), denomi- 
 dated Raphe *, was placed over them when they were 
 
 * This is only found in ancient Hebrew Manuscripts ; in printed 
 books it is omitted. 
 
 B 2
 
 6 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 to be aspirated ; thus, 3 b, = bh or v ; S p = ph or 
 f. A dot (denominated dagesh) Avas placed in the 
 middle of these letters when they were pronounced 
 unaspirated : as, 3 b, 3 p. 
 
 This dot is by Hebrew grammarians called dagesh Inl, the light 
 or simple dagesh, as it only removes the aspiration. 
 
 6. By a dot in these or any other letters oc- 
 curring in the middle of a word preceded by a vowel- 
 point, they indicated that such consonants were pro- 
 nounced like double letters : as, baner = banner, 
 daffer = dao-o'er. 
 
 This dot is by way of distinction called dagesh hasak, hard or 
 strong dagesh. 
 
 Accents. 
 
 7. Besides the marks before described, the He- 
 brews have several others, called accents, by which 
 they indicate the relative connection between words, 
 considered as members of a sentence, and point out 
 at the same time the syllable on which the stress of 
 the voice is to be laid. They perform, therefore, the 
 same office as our accents, comma, semicolon, colon, 
 period. To understand them thoroughly, requires a 
 complete knowledge of the language. For the mere 
 beginner it is sufficient to know, that, generally, where- 
 ever they occur, there the stress of the voice must be 
 laid. Further explanation respecting them will be 
 given in the progress of the work.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 7 
 
 § 2. — Consonants. 
 
 Sounds and their Representatives. 
 
 1. Most of the sounds employed in the Hebrew 
 are similar to those used in our own language, but 
 they are represented by different characters ; thus — 
 
 b is represented by 3 
 
 V 3 
 
 g, as in go J jl 
 
 d "T^ 
 
 h, as in he H 
 
 w, as in ive 1 
 
 z r 
 
 t 10 
 
 y, as in yes ^ 
 
 c as in can^ or ch in chord* '^^ or*T {of ',i'ordf 
 
 1 ■? 
 
 m D 5) D 57 
 
 n ^ " I " 
 
 s, as in so D 
 
 p s 
 
 f D, „ ^ „ 
 
 * This letter without the point (D), is pronounced hke IT See 
 page 8.
 
 8 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 k is represented by p 
 r 1 
 
 sh \i; 
 
 s t^ 
 
 th or t J^ 
 
 The following Hebrew characters represent sounds 
 which we have not in our language, or for which we 
 have no character. 
 
 ^^ represents the sound heard in emitting the breath, 
 somewhat similar to the e in echo. The Hebrews 
 appear to have considered it as the basis of all the 
 vocal sounds. It occupies the first place in the 
 alphabetical series, and is pronounced either a, e, i, 
 0, or u, according to the vowel -point annexed (see 
 p. 15). In writing the Hebrew in Roman characters, 
 we shall represent it by a dot under the vowel, thus 
 a, e. i, 0, &c. 
 
 n a guttural sound, similar to the rough sound of 
 the German ch in ach, nach. We shall represent it 
 by the letter h with a dot under. \ 
 
 y generally pronounced like gn at the beginning of 
 words and syllables, and like 72g at the end of them. 
 Some pronounce it like X. We shall indicate it by 
 a dot over the vowels a e, i, b, ii. 
 
 ^, or at the end of words j*, sounds like fo, by which 
 we shall represent it.
 
 llElillEW LANGUAGE. 
 
 9 
 
 2. The following table contains the Hebrew con- 
 sonants in alphabetical order, their names, forms, 
 and powTrs. 
 
 h 
 
 4 
 
 n 
 
 ? 
 
 n 
 
 <^ViC 
 
 ^- 
 
 A- 
 
 FORMS. 
 
 Final 
 
 J^ Letters. 
 
 D3 1 
 
 D D 
 
 p 
 
 ■nn 
 
 r 
 
 f- 
 
 I ^ 
 
 p 
 
 P 
 
 r i 
 p 
 
 ") 
 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 
 NAMES. 
 
 Aleph . 
 Beth ,. 
 Gimel . 
 Daleth. 
 He.... 
 Way .. 
 Zain . . 
 Heth . . 
 Teth .. 
 Yod .. 
 Caph . . 
 Lamed. 
 Mem . . 
 Nun .. 
 Samech 
 Ayin . . 
 Pe . . . . 
 Tsadi . 
 Koof . . 
 Resh .. 
 Shin . 
 Sin . . . 
 Thav .. 
 
 POWERS. 
 
 b, V 
 
 d 
 
 h in he 
 w^ or V 
 
 ^l^ 5 in the German 
 '-'^^ (word Nacht. 
 
 t 
 
 y iii y^ • • • ■ 
 
 ch in chord . 
 
 1 
 
 ra 
 
 n 
 
 s in 66' 
 
 f or p . 
 
 ts 
 
 k 
 
 r 
 
 sh ... 
 
 s 
 
 th or t 
 
 NUMEKICAL 
 VALUE. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 
 30 
 
 40 
 
 50 
 
 60 
 
 70 
 
 80 
 
 90 
 
 100 
 
 200 
 
 300 
 400 
 
 This column contains the Rahhiiiical characters.
 
 10 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 Observations on the Alphabet. 
 
 3. The Hebrew words Aleph or ratlier Aluph^ an 
 ox ; Beth^ a house ; Gimel, or rather Gamal, a camel ; 
 Daleth^ a door ; Wav^ a hook or plug ; were origmally 
 given to the respective letters, in consequence of a 
 real or fancied resemblance between their shape and 
 the natural form of the object so denominated. As, 
 however, the beginner cannot be supposed to know 
 the signification of these words, he had better pass 
 them over for the present, and name the letters by 
 their powers : thus, N e', '2 b'. 
 
 m' r k' h' y' t' h' z' w' h' d' g' v' b' e' 
 
 t' th' s' sh' r' 'k' ts' p' f e' s' n' 
 
 4. All the above letters, excepting p W ^ J ^ J^ !!f, 
 appear frequently in manuscripts and printed books 
 under a lengthened form : thus — 
 
 n n a S n ^^ 
 
 5. The following letters require particular atten- 
 tion on the part of the learner, on account of their 
 similarity. 
 
 3-- 
 
 ..b 
 
 J-- 
 
 •S 
 
 T.. 
 
 ..d 
 
 to.. 
 
 ..t 
 
 D-. 
 
 ..h 
 
 J-- 
 
 . .n 
 
 -).. 
 
 . .r 
 
 0.. 
 
 . .m
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. H 
 
 n-. 
 
 ..h 
 
 ) ....w 
 
 n y(7i<</ A D • • • • s 
 
 n.. 
 
 ..h 
 
 r ....z 
 
 V . • ' -^ 1^ final ni 
 
 D.. 
 
 . . f 
 
 ^ ....y 
 
 '^ ts ^ sh 
 
 n-. 
 
 ..th 
 
 " yim?/ n 
 
 ' /* final ts \l/ . . . .s. 
 
 Division of Letters. 
 
 6. Letters are divided according to the organ by 
 which they are chiefly formed : thus — 
 
 V tlT] ^ ^I'e denominated Gutturals. 
 
 2 ^ "^ 3 Labials. 
 
 p 3 "^ J Palatals. 
 
 n ^ 7 t^ 1 Linguals. 
 
 K "I ti^ D ? Dentals. 
 
 Ohs. — Letters pronounced by the same organ, are sometimes sub- 
 stituted for one another. This is hkewise the case with the letters 
 ^ T n S, which are denominated qidescents. See chap. ii. § 2. 
 
 For the division of letters into radicals and seniles, see Etymology, 
 chap. i. § '2. 
 
 7. The letters HSS I^D, without a dot, were an- 
 ciently pronounced aspirated : thus, 1 bh, or v ; J^ 
 gh ; T dh ; 3 h, like H ; 3 ph ; T\ th ; but with the 
 dot they were pronounced unaspirated: thus, 3 b, 
 il g, "1 d, 3 k, 3 p, rn t. This distinction is, by the 
 Spanish Jews, whose pronunciation is generally 
 adopted by the learned, retained only in "2 and S. 
 The German Jews retain it in 1 and H likewise.
 
 12 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 8. The characters ]^ P|, | D, ^, standhig for D, ^, D, 
 ^, 3, occur only at the end of words, and arc, there- 
 fore, called finals. 
 
 Formation of Letters. 
 
 9. In learning to form the Hebrew letters, attend 
 to the following Elements : — 
 
 l^»_The broad point - w '^ l 
 2nd. — -j^j^g perpendicular 1 \ 
 S-^i—The horizontal «^ f-s n - -' 
 4"^_The diagonal S S ^ 
 
 S^^'—The curve ^ U' "7 7 
 
 From the 1st "^5 and 2nd ), are formed : — 
 "* y, 1 w, J g, ] z, J n, j 71 final. 
 
 From the 1st ^, and 4th \ \ /, are formed: — 
 
 K e, i/ e, ^^ ts, t^ te final. 
 
 From the 3rd*^ and 2nd ( ) are formed: — 
 
 ■) r, CI f yi?za/, Q ?« j^?z«/, and j^. 
 
 From the 5th ^ ^, 1st \ 2nd 1, & 3rd "^ (j, are 
 formed : — 
 
 D in, to t, £D f, h 1, p k, D s, and t^ sh.
 
 IlEBllEW LANGUAGE. 
 
 13 
 
 Practice. 
 Write the following characters : — 
 n 111 1 \\ y t h z w h d g b e 
 
 jj DO ^ I'd "» d n ? 1 n 1 J n k 
 
 th t s sli r k ts pes 
 
 n n ty k7 n p f i; f^D >^ D 
 
 AVrite the English hitters corresponding to the fol- 
 lo^ving Hebrew characters : — 
 
 yn f ? ii? ir ^^ 3n dt p jj on 03 ^^^ 
 
 "in DD tr^ ^^^ "ID 
 
 Write the corresponding Hebrew characters to the 
 followinfi; En "iish i — 
 
 AV, k, y, th, t, z, sh, s, r, ph, p, n, m, 1, h, 
 g, f, d, c, b, e. 
 
 Write the English characters corresponding to the 
 Ibllowing Hebrew letters : — 
 
 )r\)y ^^oj :^i;m \:^y^n t^ \^ a u^ 

 
 14 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 : 11K ^n^i "iiN ^n^ a'^n^^^ -ion^i 
 
 '^nnn DID '•:3 iiN^n nK D^'^^^^ ^?1^1 
 
 : y;r\r\ X2^ "l1^c^ \2 U'rh'^ 
 
 I n'7^'7 Nip y^rh^ dv ■^l^^^ D^n'7^^ Kip^i 
 I : ini< DV npD ^n^i nnr 'n^i 
 
 § 3. YOWELS. 
 
 1 . The vowels are represented in Hebrew by small 
 strokes and points variously arranged, and placed 
 either above or below the consonants. They are ten 
 in number ; five long and five short. The following 
 table contains their names (which the begiinier
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 15 
 
 may disregard for the present), forms, position, and 
 power. 
 
 Long. 
 
 NAMES. 
 
 FORMS. 
 
 POSITION. 
 
 rOWKR. 
 
 KAMETS 
 
 T 
 
 under the ) r, q N{ l| "5 fe 
 consonant ) "''^ V Jw t 'F^ 
 
 - • " — ril — 
 
 
 TSERE 
 
 
 under as ^5 §, ^ ^r 
 
 a in ale 
 
 HIRIK 
 
 ! or — 
 
 under aS ^i<, 1 ^^5, ^| bl 
 
 i^inackms' 
 
 HOLEM 
 
 ) or — 
 
 above as IX Or ^<, |, 3 :i# 
 
 '0 111 fiO<j su 
 
 SHUREK 
 
 5| 
 
 !,"fh:SMas^t«|,!n^ 
 
 *t=lft=r*f^ 
 
 f^^/ i"f^ -^ 
 
 
 Short. 
 
 NAMES. 
 
 FORMS. 
 
 POSITION. 
 
 POWER. 
 
 PATHAH 
 
 - 
 
 under aS Nl 4, "1 ^ 
 
 a in icliat 
 
 SEGOL 
 
 V 
 
 under aS X ^, *! fe 
 
 e in met^ set 
 
 SHORT 
 HIRIK 
 
 • 
 
 under aS l< ^ 3 bl- 
 
 i in pin 
 
 KAMETS 
 HATAPH 
 
 t: or T 
 
 under as {;{ or i< 6, 3 bo. 
 
 in son 
 
 KIBUTS 
 
 •.. 
 
 under aS X j^, ^ b«r 
 
 u in hull* 
 
 * The above scale is according to the pronunciation of the Portu- 
 guese and Spanish Jews ; the German and Pohsh Jews pronounce 
 (t) like in bone, (••) like i in hind, and (i) like oio in voiv ; the other 
 vowels thev pronounce like their Spanish brethren.
 
 16 ELEiMENTS OF THE 
 
 Observations on the Voivel Points. 
 
 2. The 1 which supports the point representing 
 long 5 is frequently omitted, and the dot (placed 
 above the left of the consonant) retained: as, 3 bo 
 J go, 1 do. 
 
 3. The "• following long ( \) I, is frequently omitted. 
 To distingish it in such cases from the short (.) i, 
 rules will be given in the progress of the work. The 
 same observation will apply to short {^•.) o, the two 
 dots being frequently omitted ; and to \ for which (••.) 
 is sometimes substituted. See chap. ii. § 7, No. 2 — 4. 
 
 4. The use of the vowel points being only to in- 
 dicate how the consonants are pronounced; it follows 
 that they cannot form a syllable without the conso- 
 nants. To represent, therefore, the sounds of a, e, i, 
 etc., the corresponding vowel points must be added 
 to the letter t^ : thus, 5^ a, Nl e, ^{< j, ^5< u, etc. 
 
 5. The consonants must be sounded before the 
 vowel points: as 3 ba (not ab), ^ ga (not ag). See 
 the next page. 
 
 Practice. 
 
 Write the vowels corresponding to the following 
 vowel points — ^ .. ^ !) i - ... • t; •.. •• !] 
 
 Write the vowel points corresponding to the fol- 
 lowing vowels, a, a, a^ e, u, i, u, i, o, d, u, u, a, a, i, 
 L u, o, o.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 17 
 
 § 4. — Consonants and Vowels. 
 
 Scale of the Alphabet icith the Vowel Points and their 
 corresponding sounds, according to the p)ronunciation 
 of the Spanish and Portuguese Jews. 
 
 ttxtttttt tttt 
 
 Ifi ha, cliFi ya ta ha za \va ha da ga ba H 
 
 T T T TfTT r X ^T r X T 
 
 tha sa sha ra ka tsa fS pa a sa na ma 
 
 a in 
 father. 
 
 la l;a cha ya ta ha za wa ha da ga ba a I a in 
 
 ri b^ K^ 1 p_ ^ 3 a y. p ^ ;b 
 
 tha sa sha ra ka tsa fa pa a sa na ma 
 
 ichat. 
 
 ^ ? 3 * t? n T 1 n "n ;i a x' 
 
 la ha cha ya ta, liu za wa ha da ga ba a 
 
 j:) ty ^ 1 p.. ^ 3 3 5^. p ;i ;^ j' ,,/,. 
 
 tha sa sha ra ka tsa fa pu a sa na ma I 
 
 ^ ? 5 ^. tp n T !!. n T 5 3 
 
 Ic he che ye te he ze we he de ge be 
 
 ^:i I' ?^ 1. 1:5 !^ 3 3 y. D ^. » I set. 
 
 the se she re ke tse fe pe a se ne me I 
 
 ?1 
 
 IT hi chl yl tl hi zT wi hi di gl bl I 
 
 'r\ "'^ ^^ n ^p. ^v 3 ^3 ^^ ^p V3 
 
 thi si shT rl kl tsl fl pT I si ni ml 
 
 fieM-
 
 18 
 
 ? 3 \ 
 
 i hi cl'.i yi 
 
 n tr t^ 
 
 thi si phi 
 
 h b 3 V 
 
 lo ho cho yo 
 tho so sho 
 
 "? 3 3 ' 
 
 t; t; t t 
 
 lo ho cho yo 
 
 r) b^ K> 
 
 tho so sho 
 
 t> ^D !13 V 
 
 111 hu chu yu 
 
 EI.EMENTS OF THE 
 
 ti hi zi \vi hi di gi hi i 
 
 -) p V 3 3 y. p :j p 
 
 ri ki t«i fi pi i si ni mi 
 
 iD h i] in n ii is ix 
 
 to ho zo ho do go bo 5 
 
 n p ^i 3 3 
 
 ro ko ts5 fo po 
 
 y D 3 ^ 
 
 6 so no mo 
 
 2 ill 
 
 pin. 
 
 m 
 
 no. 
 
 t; t; t t; t t; t t; t 
 
 to ho ZO WO ho do go bo o 
 
 lp^l335;DJ)D 
 
 t; I T t; t t; '^t t; t t; 
 
 ro ko tso fo po 6 so no mo^ 
 
 ^tD !in ^T- ^1 n ^ ^5 !13 IX 
 
 tu hu zu wu hu du gu Ini u 
 
 in lb' isj^ n ip Ji^ 13 13 i_y id 13 id 
 
 thu su shu ru ku tsu fu pu u su nu mu 
 
 
 S 3 3 : 
 
 lu hu chu yu 
 
 ^ ^ ^. 
 
 thu su shu 
 
 L) n T 1 n n ^ 3 N> 
 
 tu hu ZU wu hu du gu bu u I 
 
 n p ^ 3 2 y. p ' -^ *^''- 
 
 ru ku tsu fu 
 
 pu 
 
 II su nu mu 
 
 Scale of the Alphabet with the Vowels and their corre- 
 sponding English sounds., according to the pronuncia- 
 tion of the German and Polish Jews. 
 
 •13 ^3 ^ D n T 1 n "^ 5 3 3 
 
 t|t ] t t t t tt t t t t t 
 
 ko clio yo to ho zo vo ho do go vo bo 
 
 nnb^ErnpvssvDJD':'! bone. 
 
 TT T T tItTtt'tttt T 
 
 so to so sho ro ko tso fo po o so no mo lo^
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 19 
 
 ^ 
 
 :d 3 ^ D n T 1 n ^ :i n 3 N 
 
 I III 
 
 li hi ki yi ti hi zi vi hi di gi vi bi i 
 
 n ri b^ K^ n p_ ^ |) 3 j; p ;j t? ' ^'"'^' 
 
 si ti si shi li ki tsi phi pi i si ni mi 
 
 13 r ib in ii ii in in i5 in in iiV 
 
 kow yow tow huw zow vow how dow gow vow bow ow 
 
 in ip i^f i3 i3 iy io ): i^ iS in ^^"^"^ 
 
 row ko'w tzow phow pow ow sow now mow low how | i^ow. 
 
 in in )t )^ j 
 
 sow tow sow show "^ 
 
 'h ^n ^n '' ^b ^n n n ^n n ^5 ^n ^n \^?) .. 
 
 f I in 
 
 'r\ 'T\ ^b^ ^K^ n ^p ^^ ^3 ^3 ^j? ^p '} '12 (MM.* 
 h in in V ID in it ii in in i3 in in i.nj ) ,, . 
 
 \ u in 
 
 in in lb' 1^ in ip i:: is ^^ )V ^d 13 id ^ ru/«. 
 
 S n n 1 D n T 1 n n ^ n n SM ^,-,, 
 n n b^ ?^ n p_ ^ s 3 y_ p 3 ^ J ^^'^«'- 
 
 ^ n n .; 9 n J J ri 1 5 n n n ) , -^^ 
 n J31 b^ ^ n p ^ I 5 ^. D ^ 9^ «'^'- 
 
 'p ? ? ' n I 1 n "? ^ n n «^ ••,, 
 nnb^c'npvssy. p;izp^ p'"- 
 
 ':' n n ^ D n T V n n 5 n n N*) ..„ 
 nnb'tJ^np^;33yD:j;bV «''"• 
 
 T t: t t t ; I t t; t i; 't t; t »; ^ 
 
 'p n n ^ b n T 1 n n 5 n n ^<) „•„ 
 
 ^ D :i ^ \ J" 
 
 nn^^lpvssyp^af ^"^^' 
 
 See pages 17 and 18. 
 C
 
 20 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 Practice. 
 
 Write the English characters corresponding with 
 the following syllables : — 
 
 y ^13 3 3 3 N* IX j< i« t< ^5 \^ X ^< « jj 
 
 T - •• T ••. t; • • V " - T 
 
 1 ^n in n n n n "1 n 1^ *! '^ "n. 'i! ^. i^ 
 
 )h 2 3 ^3 V V " ^ ^ to ID n h ^T iT 1 
 
 ^>! V v., V. ^ ^D D : y, ^ r;_h h 'h 
 
 ^ ^ ^^ T 1 p j? p, 'V ^^ 3 ^3 ^2 V. V, V 
 
 ^^MQ'\ in n n n n n 
 
 Write the following syllables in Hebrew charac- 
 ters : — 
 
 ba ba bi bi ga ge d(3 ho wo zu tii ya ya ya ye 
 
 ki ki 15 n5 so mo so ru sa sa sa se shi shi pi 
 
 pi fu a a a e i i o u o fi 
 
 Read the following words, and write the corre- 
 sponding English characters: — 
 
 ^nS ^Di3 'rv inito m ni vn ni"^ iix-i ^d-i ^:3« 
 
 . ... • T T "T T • T • V • T 
 
 ^-155 ^n^;3 ^Dhsi ^n^n n^i^^* ^;i^y. nio i-i;i ^m 
 
 ^rs^n ^n^^ !ir;D ^ni^:3 ^:in; ^n^b ^irSn ^nin 
 
 lO/'i^ ^'^'^I 'I'^p.'^'D ^'^^I'l^ "^ninix innin nnb^ 
 
 J TO'i^J?. ^i^'l'"^ ^^•^'^? ^rnnin
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 21 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 § 1 . — Syllables and Words. 
 
 Introductory Observations. 
 
 Syllables are either simple or compounded, ac- 
 cented or .unaccented. 
 
 1. Simple syllables are such as terminate in a 
 vowel: as, 5 ba, ^ na, l/il* glu; or in a quiescent 
 letter : as, K? lo, HT zeh, Htt mah. See the following 
 section. 
 
 2. Compounded are such as terminate in a conso- 
 nant : as, 7^ el, tOX at, ^^5 bled, hT\ rule, 73 pull. 
 See §4, page 27. 
 
 3. Accented syllables are such as have any of the 
 accents; a list of which the reader vdW find in 
 chap. iii. 
 
 4. Every Hebrew word must liave an accent, 
 either on the last syllable, as n^B bi-nah, under- 
 standing; or on the one bcfoi'c the last, as n!l"*3 In'nah, 
 understand thou. 
 
 Except when a word is joined to the following by a small stroke 
 (") denominated (Mak-kcph), as y"*? kl-li', in which case the last 
 word receives the accent. 
 
 * This denomination of the grammarians is retained for the sake 
 of distinction, although, strictly speaking, g/u is as much a com- 
 pound syllable as ■ ^ fil. 
 
 c 2
 
 22 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 5. A small perpendicular stroke (i) denominated 
 metlieg {a bridle)^ is frequently added to a vowel to 
 give it its full sound, and to prevent its being slurred 
 over in the rapidity of utterance : as, ^^IH''/ li-di-df . 
 
 This mark may be considered as a secondary accent, and is mostly 
 used to distinguish simple from compound syllables ; and hence, 
 when a letter following it happens to have sh'va, the sh'va is initial. 
 See § 5, chap. ii. 
 
 We shall indicate the Hebrew accent, whenever it is on the pen- 
 ultima, by the following mark ('), and omit it entirely when it is 
 on the last syllable. In all words, therefore, where the accent is 
 omitted, it must be considered as being on the last syllable. 
 
 § 2.— On the Letters ^ H t^. 
 
 These letters frequently lose their consonantal 
 sounds, and are then said to be quiescent or mute. 
 
 1. tC and T\ arc always mute unless they have a 
 vowel point : as, N|l ba, K3 bo, X^5 bl, N^IH hu, t^'H hi, 
 xS le, ^h 15, N"! ra, N*rt ha, HT ze, n^ se, T]^ po, H^ 
 ma, TO la, Hi ne, HJ na. 
 
 2. n occurs sometimes with a dot in it (H), when 
 it is pronounced like h in ah I as, HS hdh^ H/ Idh. 
 
 This dot is by grammarians called Mappik. 
 
 3. 1 is mute when it represents the vowel holem 
 or shurek : as, i^< 5, 15 bo; ^X u, 13 bu. 
 
 1 at the beginning of words is pronounced like15< u: 
 as, ""^l ?^??z^, not vu-mi ; ITlSI u-fd-rd^ not vu-fd-rd. 
 
 4. ^ is mute after (•), (••), (v) : as, ''3 bi, ""i? nl, ""J n^, 
 ^^ ne; also after {^) when followed by "1: as, lyj^ alav,
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 23 
 
 VJ3 pa-nav. In all other cases it is pronounced, and 
 its sound is similar to y in yea when it begins a syl- 
 lable : as, i^V yo-mo ; and to y in boy when it termi- 
 nates it : as, vX d-lay, ^15 goy. 
 
 Additional Examples. 
 b5 .. N3 kri-ra'..{<np sii-sl' ^DID a-bl . /nx 
 ko-va' \1p ba-thi' 'n^{3 pe-le nS|) bi-na' H^^B 
 ko-na' 'nip ka-rfi' Xllp pu . nb lo-ve . . T\jp 
 ya-ma'-nu ^^^^ ho-re-cha . '^nin a-le'-hfi . . n'h'^ 
 
 a-he-ha . . n^pX* ra-sha-nu 13mn tu-bo' blD 
 
 ko-da-sha'nu . . 1i^"Tp oro-tha'nn . . ^rnhlN* 
 
 Practice. 
 
 N*S \h xin N^n xrt n^ 5<3 nb n2 np nr; ^2 iSn 
 ^:3 n;)3 nj3 n^s kS;d n^S^ n*S| n'^^3 ^^b^ xty ht ^S 
 ^t:\s-i ^ij'Nn ^::\\h n*:v n^^^ ry 'y ^'dv v:3 ^^3 
 
 - T T T T;vT TT — T * Tl -T 
 
 'ip ^^ip nip ^!iSn ^^'r^ii n':': nS:i ^Sx vSn* ^St^ h^^ 
 V3ni )h^ Nnp Nnp ^is* n:i ^in \ip ^ip Y)p 
 
 § 3. — Syllables beginning with Two 
 Consonants. 
 
 dra . . IT ghl . . 7^ bla . . 75 
 mra . . 1» fra . . 13 tra . . ID 

 
 24 
 
 
 ELEMENTS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 
 dlu . 
 cla . 
 tree . . 
 
 .hi 
 
 gla . 
 pra . 
 gri . 
 
 • 1? 
 
 bla . 
 sla . , 
 
 l)li . . 
 
 1 . ^a m ale. 
 . h:^ ) I in 
 
 prl . , 
 rdo . 
 dro . 
 
 
 mrl , 
 
 glo . 
 sro . 
 
 
 kri . . 
 bl5 . . 
 
 slij . . 
 
 i^p (machine 
 
 threw 
 pru . 
 
 
 brew 
 tru . 
 
 
 blu . 
 kill . 
 
 • ' = I u in rule. 
 
 ■ 7i? ^ 
 
 shra . 
 bra . 
 
 
 gla . 
 tra . 
 
 • 1? 
 
 bla . 
 cla . 
 
 ; = ya m ivhat. 
 ■ 73 i 
 
 fre . 
 die . 
 
 
 pre . 
 cle . 
 
 
 ble . 
 swe . 
 
 ■•■ = f. 6 in set. 
 
 fri . 
 kri . 
 
 • 1? 
 
 pri . 
 
 dri . 
 
 • 1t> 
 
 bli . 
 gri . 
 
 
 dlo . 
 bro . 
 
 
 glo . 
 pro . 
 
 . -lis 
 
 bio . 
 fro . 
 
 ' '• yo m son. 
 • 1?i 
 
 cru . 
 m'ru 
 
 ■ 11 
 • 1^ 
 
 glu . 
 plu . 
 
 . ^3 
 
 blu . 
 swu . 
 
 • •■ J- ?< in bull. 
 
 Observe. — The two dots (:) under the first of the two consonants 
 are called sh'va initial, because the consonants under which they are 
 placed begin the syllable. In giving the Hebrew words in English 
 characters, we shall indicate the initial sh'va by ('), as ?? b'lo, &c. 
 
 Practice. 
 
 b^ Sn Sn Sn >Sn Ss ^Ss sh^ h:i b2 b S-i
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 25 
 
 ^ 'b) 'b) ^) ^1 ^'^. '^T ^^^, '^^T '^^^ '"^-1 
 
 inS 13 ^Ss i^^ ^tj^ nD ^St: nj it nt n,\ 
 
 nv Sv np n? ^^p np in: p ip n.p h'? 
 
 Nip ^sn ^pri I'^ri nn ni. nn nb' p^ h^ np 
 
 no: lisn. \s*i nxn N*^p x'^'p xSn inj*? nrj^ n'^j'? 
 
 n:D"na nT^:i5 riY^in^ ^^''nir \x"!i'^p ^&<"^b>3 x^b'? 
 
 nKi3"i r\m 'mii hh^ nDns 'yh^ ^n"sb^ 
 
 T ; TT : •• • : T : - t ; ~ ^ ; 
 
 n;^iin nsi:in np^^: 
 
 Substitutes for SNva Initial or Semi Vowels — 
 (-:), (v:), (.)*. 
 
 2. AVhen the first of the two consonants is one of 
 the gutturals V, H, H, t< -j-, which do not easily com- 
 bine with the following letter, (-), (v), or {^) is added 
 to the (:) that they may be uttered more distinctly. 
 These marks may be considered as semi-voicels. They 
 never form a syllable, but must be pronounced Avith 
 the following syllable, in the same manner as letters 
 having sKva initial. 
 
 * They are denominated (-:) hataph patah; (••■:) hataph segol; {^•) 
 hatapli kamels. 
 
 t In a few instances the semi-vowels occur also under non-gut- 
 turals ; as, 3nT1 Gen. ii. 12, &c.
 
 20 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 Examples. 
 
 3. When tlie semi-vowels occur in the middle of 
 a word, as ^^i^l ija-ani, then the preceding vowel re- 
 ceives metheg. See page 22. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 ba-hal6-rai .... ^bSn^ ©-habi ^?qj^ 
 
 za-akii ^prt l)e-emu-nah . . Hi'lDXSi 
 
 tho-ama '^^n tza-aku ^\>^ 
 
 Jtya-hori ^H^ a-holi hr)^ 
 
 Practice. 
 
 nnnx NiSx ^nSs* ^jnx ^:nt:? ^S^^x nnK ^^n 
 nni:in ^^^n ^d^':?:! ^nnn.s* ^ithn* ^Snt< ^Snx* 
 
 T -. - . -. •• -: • •-:]- v:!-.- - -.r -t:it 
 
 nSnn in^x: ^^^jxp nnj;. ^;i>i. njj;. ^^^;^n 
 nn:i^ ^innxn msn ny-!! nSrn n^nys n^^ns^ 
 
 -; . . Tv:iv • -:iT • ••"'-::• t v;|v • «:|- ttv:|-,- 
 
 Words applicable to the preceding rules : — 
 
 my father . . ''15^ alas '*i>? an island. . *^t 
 
 my God h^ me . . . . ^HiiS where ^K 
 
 my brother ^Hi^ I ^;{^ or iX
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 27 
 
 a teacher n^l^ God H) my sister. . ^nhi^J 
 
 raw t^^ a dove .... H^V my house . . "'^''3 
 
 a prophet ^''^) beauty .... ^3V my sou .... ''i?^ 
 
 comfort . . ri^ni3 a curtaiu n^**")* come N5 
 
 an ornament ny thus 113 he came . . . . N2 
 
 humility . . HlDy if, for .... *3 she came . . HN^ 
 
 a corner . . HXiS thus, so . . n!D3 a kid Hi 
 
 the mouth . H^ a prison . . N7| a nation .... ""i^ 
 
 here nb a vessel . . v5 a valley . . N^il 
 
 Avonder . . ^7}^ no, not . . . . t^ 7 a bee .... M^jn"! 
 
 a gazelle . . ""^V to him .... w knowledge . . ny'l 
 
 thirsty K^V to me 'h he NIH 
 
 hard H^j:) to her H^ she N'n 
 
 evil n^'l a lion .... X''!?? he was .... H^n 
 
 a year .... Hi^ the moon Tl^J^ this ^T, IT, HT 
 
 a field nnb^ a brick . . DJlS the breast . . riTn 
 
 a box, ark T\2P\ wliut H^ a seer .... HTh 
 
 the Law, ^ ^^i^ who ^P a stork . . rTl^pn 
 
 instruction I ' ^ hundred n«p a lamb . . . . nSip 
 
 fear i^l)^ a basket . . NJtO 
 
 § 4. — Compound Syllables. 
 
 1. Syllables terminating in a single consonant at 
 the end of words. 
 
 at 
 
 n« 
 
 dan . .["^ bad. .HS . 
 
 ak.. pNt ach-.'^N hits .. yh 
 
 ab . 
 tam 
 
 nj2 ^ what. 
 
 f a in 
 
 r «•/
 
 28 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 pen . . [3 ped . . 13 bed . . 1^ eb . . ^X K in 
 
 red . . in leg . . :h lech . . ^h hem . . Dnj'"^^- 
 
 pin . . !?) did . . m. bid . . nn b. . . . nx ^ ,• ,•„ 
 
 sin . . tS?' fin . . 13 dim . . DT him . . DH^?"'' 
 
 good . . "15 fidl . . ^3 bul . . S^ ub . . !1J<) „ ,•„ 
 
 liim . . dS pull . . h^ wool . . h) wood . -i;| ^«^^- 
 
 kom . . Dp mol . . Sd son . . jb^ ob . • ^^ ) o m 
 
 mon . . |D som . .Db^ shon . . I^ col . . h^'"''' 
 
 shore *lb' gore . . lil bode .13 ob . . 3X ) ^ j-„ 
 
 core . . 13 bore . . 13 sole . . 70 sore . .it^^ "^' 
 
 moon pX3 cool . . 713 rule . . 7^1 ub . . 31X 1 „ ^-^ 
 
 room U)1 doom D11 loom Dl7 noon . . p^ ) *'"^^* 
 
 mar . . ID bar . . 13 war . . 11 ab . . 3^{ ) „ ^-^ 
 
 nar . . 1^ far . . 13 car . . 13 par . . 13 j/'^'"- 
 
 pale . . 73 dale . . 7l ale . . IX ab . . 3^{ ) ^ ^^ 
 
 dare . .11 share 1??^ shame D'^ mar . . lp|«^^- 
 
 pll . . b^3 dil . . Sn Ig . . :i^t^ lb . . 3\S|^• in 
 
 sir . . Tp shir . yp klr . . 1\1 fll . . h'^l^ine 
 
 Practice. 
 
 3X 3S* 31X 31Js* 3iwS* 3iX 3\S* 3\S* 3^{ 3i< 3« 3X 
 
 n3 V3 V3 113 13 113 ^3 J3 J3 3wX 3wX 3J< 
 
 T • • •• T •.. T- •
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 29 
 
 ]n :)"i_ D5 pii h)^ h)^ :p^ to5 n5 nn n^i t3 
 
 5)^ri ^\-i sn nn nn p'r\ ]*n ^;n dpi y-j yi \\i 
 
 nn pn pin mm hit nr n\r ni pn b^i c^i 11 
 
 1*^0 '^V ^^^ ^^^ ?^ p 13 i? to! D^ b^^p m 
 
 top n^ n^v ^|) ^^ nij; ^^j; 'ip ^^p p: y: yt2 
 
 m r\b p yp |*^v ^P^ ^^ iT p^ ?^ ?1 C3p 
 
 :]iD til rio nto nri nri ih |*n e)in jn |ri nn 
 
 2. Syllables and words beginning with two con- 
 sonants and terminatino; in one. 
 
 liazir . 
 
 . Tin 
 
 lialom . . 
 
 ..thhr\ 
 
 emeth 
 
 . . nm 
 
 b'dil . 
 
 .^n? 
 
 b'ar . . . . 
 
 , . . 1x5 
 
 halom . 
 
 . DiSn 
 
 y'inin . 
 
 • r^! 
 
 z'ab . . . . 
 
 . . ^^\ 
 
 d'ror . 
 
 . nh"^ 
 
 in'od . 
 
 . nws*p 
 
 g'dud . . . 
 
 . . 1)1^ 
 
 Torn . 
 
 . Dix^ 
 
 arafel . 
 
 .^s^y. 
 
 d'barim . 
 
 . LDnn-i 
 
 n'bi-im 
 
 D^X^?3 
 
 Observe. — That in all these cases (except in the words ^^, ^^?, or 
 when the last letter is "H : as, "^^ ach, "^^ lach, "y^ me-lech) the 
 terminating consonant receives no additional mark. 
 
 3. But when a word or syllable terminates in two 
 consonants, then both the terminating consonants 
 receive sheva (:) 
 
 -kamt ntop. a-cha^ .... tiQ^H «p«ma«* ^l^ltoX 
 
 k6'sht tO:^'p nu rd "!13 nft^t DS3 
 
 kof-ka'dt . . mpSn ya-shan't . . rii?^^ B^4aTnt . . ritoH^ 
 
 : '■ ■•■
 
 30 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 4. When the second of the terminatmg consonants 
 isK, the (:) is omitted: as, i^tpn hat ; when the first 
 is ^{, the shVa is omitted in both : as, HX^ tsat, 
 e^Nhro'sh. 
 
 5. When the terminating consonant happens to be 
 in the middle of the word, which generally takes 
 place after short accented or unaccented vowels, or 
 after long vowels having an accent, then the ter- 
 minating consonant receives sh'va (:)*, as — 
 
 L <^^ 
 os=»9' 1iTJ< 'ii w iwii l ' .... 7D"13 •aw-iw-c*' .... "iSnp 
 
 JBtoffSrfa . . rilDK^ garseen )n5 wisiPfl't . . tOiH^Q 
 
 T ;<- T . |v ; - . ■» : " 
 
 < T 
 
 Observe. — That no long vowel can form a compound syllable 
 unless it have a principal accent. Except at the end of such words 
 as are joined to the following by (-) makkeph, when the long vowel 
 receives the secondary accent (i) metheg : as, OK'""',?! Gar-Sha'm, 
 
 "h-m Shath-Li'. 
 
 Practice. 
 
 nSp yi2] uhr\ pxi. xSn Sn:! yyi_ Tjn!! ■^^a^{ 
 Tiny., npy. vnp DIN*; ^"S^ tr^nS nx^ ins p^' 
 nSnj "^iSd "iibri ':'iss?> Si^Dj^ nnp ji:^-i S^hb sjnv 
 
 * fjivivi ill lliyye inblanceb lii UHllfLl /w<^, lltluaUM? i( 
 
 ru^^ ^ 

 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 31 
 
 r}'^rpi^ rhm ;;i£)*in m^h rh^) niph riSS^ riS^j^ 
 2prp D"in3 *^x^,p ^^315 nsn p^^ps ^in^N* *;]^rij^ 
 
 nnnn nsin 
 
 Vocabulary consisting of Words applicable to 
 the preceding Rules. 
 
 I. 
 
 grace . . . 
 
 . P 
 
 a pit .... 
 
 . ni!i 
 
 God 
 
 ,M 
 
 heat . . . . 
 
 Din 
 
 a garden 
 
 .. p. 
 
 a father . 
 
 • ^^ 
 
 Avarm . . . 
 
 . Dn 
 
 joy 
 
 M 
 
 a mother . 
 
 .05:? 
 
 good . . . . 
 
 3iD 
 
 an uncle . 
 
 .nn 
 
 a brother . 
 
 ..m 
 
 a row . . . , 
 
 . n^D 
 
 a fish . . . 
 
 • ^^ 
 
 light . . 
 
 ni5< 
 
 dew 
 
 ."^a 
 
 blood . . . 
 
 . Dl 
 
 fire 
 
 . ^^ 
 
 hand . . . 
 
 . n; 
 
 wealth . . 
 
 . in 
 
 a man . . 
 
 tJ^^x 
 
 d'.y 
 
 . DV 
 
 a mountain in 
 
 a nation . 
 
 . Dix 
 
 the sea . . 
 
 . .d; 
 
 a hook . 
 
 T 
 
 not 
 
 .h^ 
 
 a cup . . . 
 
 . Di3 
 
 a spark . 
 
 .p^T 
 
 but 
 
 .>S 
 
 a bag . . . . 
 
 , D^3 
 
 sand . . . 
 
 .Sin 
 
 to 
 
 - "^^ 
 
 a rock . . . 
 
 .^5 
 
 a festival . 
 
 . . :in 
 
 if 
 
 . .DX 
 
 the heart. 
 
 .nS 
 
 a thread . 
 
 . tDin 
 
 daughter , 
 
 . .ns 
 
 moist . . . 
 
 .rh 
 
 palate . . . 
 
 .^n 
 
 a son . . 
 
 ••15
 
 32 
 
 ELEMENTS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 
 
 contention y^ 
 
 skin . . . 
 
 . ^r; 
 
 bitter . . 
 
 .. n^ 
 
 soft, tender "^1 
 
 with . . . 
 
 . ^V. 
 
 myrrh . . 
 
 .. nb 
 
 evil, bad . . ])"l 
 
 a bird . . , 
 
 ..^-^v 
 
 from . . . , 
 
 ...p 
 
 exalted . . DT 
 
 a city . . . 
 
 . yv. 
 
 a sort, kind ^2? 
 
 empty ... pi 
 
 the mouth M3 
 
 a lamp . 
 
 ...^). 
 
 but, only . . p"1 
 
 pure gold 
 
 T 
 
 a hawk 
 
 " n 
 
 a lamb . H^ 
 
 a bullock 
 
 T 
 
 a heap, wall 1^, 
 
 a sack .... pb' 
 
 a flower 
 
 . fs 
 
 a banner 
 
 .. d; 
 
 a name . . D^ 
 
 shadow . 
 
 .h^ 
 
 a secret . 
 
 . niD 
 
 a song .... 1^2^^ 
 
 the voice . 
 
 .h^p 
 
 a horse . 
 
 . DID 
 
 an ox ... . liti^ 
 
 light, easy 7p 
 
 a moth , 
 
 . . DD 
 
 T 
 
 six m 
 
 a nest 
 
 ..p. 
 
 a basket 
 
 ..^D 
 
 there D^ 
 
 T 
 
 a thorn . 
 
 ■ It 
 
 a people 
 
 ••°5? 
 
 a tooth . . |£?^ 
 
 cold .... 
 
 . nip 
 
 a cloud . 
 
 • ^n 
 
 a drum . . ^h 
 
 straw . . . 
 
 .Ij 
 
 a yoke . . 
 
 ..^v 
 
 a hill, heap 7P\ 
 
 much . . . 
 
 ■ 2"1 
 
 upon, over 7)1 
 
 
 11. 
 
 
 
 
 yesterday 7)t2^ 
 
 a lion . . . 
 
 • '1'^ 
 
 truth . . . 
 
 • ^^^. 
 
 a lord y^^ 
 
 a well . . 
 
 ■)N3 
 
 a nut . . . 
 
 . n:i.Nt 
 
 a dream . . Di^'H 
 
 a wolf . . 
 
 2N? 
 
 honey . . 
 
 ^5T 
 
 a spider EJ'^nsy^ 
 
 a garment 
 
 ru':' 
 
 a friend . 
 
 • "f'T 
 
 a fool h% 
 
 alone .... 
 
 ^^h 
 
 veiy .... 
 
 ,1X0
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 33 
 
 truth I?K^p 
 
 a bottle... "TwS*J 
 
 III. 
 
 spikenard *}^) naphtha . . bSIl 
 the head tJ'iXI sin wStOH 
 
 a hatchet |n3 
 a nob . . "lin^3 
 a song . . 'i\f2]^ 
 a writinf]: 1^13J3 
 a treasurer ^2l|^ 
 a sceptre D^3^^^ 
 
 IV. 
 
 a table \rh'^ 
 
 a flask p^3|'P5 
 
 a queen . . ^37^ 
 judgment lOSJi^p 
 a mouse . . '^'^^V. 
 the ground Vpip 
 
 a girdle ^o;3?^{ 
 fist ... . tin:3j^ 
 
 purple . . ]'02r\ii 
 iron .... /.n? 
 a border 133'13 
 a furnace |^53 
 
 §5. — Of Sh'va in the Middle of a Word. 
 
 In the preceding section we have shown, that sh^va 
 preceded by a short accented or unaccented vowel, or 
 by a long accented vowel is final, that is to say, the 
 letter having it terminates the syllables. But when 
 sh'va is preceded l)y a letter liaving .sh'va, as "^^pS 
 cas-pchd; or by a long vowel not having a principal 
 accent, ix^TTyfV yo-V-dali; or when the .s7i'i'rt is under 
 the iirst of a double letter, and the preceding vowel 
 has metheg*: as, l/pH ha-V-hl ; in all such cases 
 
 * When the metheg is omitted, some grammarians consider the 
 sh'va as final, as '•i?i?n.
 
 34 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 the sh'va is initial, or in other words, the letter 
 having it begins the syllable. 
 
 Exmnples. 
 yil m^dn^ np'p*. dun t' f ^ha ^ ^rV[ isfa^^Mm' fj^^X 
 
 <^k?dri ^^ np3n kud uh^uba ^^i|:^ hti k'tha ^ "^ipSn 
 
 ^ 
 
 Observe. — When the letter which ought to have sKva initial is 
 either H, n, N, or V, it receives one of the semi-vowels (••: t; -;) 
 instead of sh'va : as, zar-acha' "lO, o-habi ''?D';^, ma-anu' •"'^_^P, 
 yp-haza-mo 1'9tn^i'** ^^^ P^g^ 25. 
 
 *- ¥ht vuvtd piLLgllllig jir -T u initial ^tiiLiall) nff CTrcrf^ y Wlheg , 
 4o lihiiiiv ttwtt'^t^l Ills cl bU^jle syilaljle. • I - 
 
 /^t^^^^ 

 
 HEBREW l.ANGUAGE. 
 
 35 
 
 Wo7'ds exe^nplifying the preceding Rtdef< 
 
 priests S^^l^^ 
 
 they said 1"1^X 
 
 praise ye I??!! 
 
 a waste HDDK^ 
 
 they shall fear IXi;*. 
 
 a trumpet ^^IV^H 
 
 rulers uhf^J^ 
 
 a broom XtDXtptp 
 
 your way 053'^'^ 
 
 thy silver 
 
 tliy king '?j3^n 
 
 judges U'^^SU 
 
 tliy bread 
 
 thy seed 
 
 overseers D^'llpitf' 
 
 shout ye IJi"! 
 
 she went "^P iT* 
 
 merchants C'lnb 
 
 § 6. — Dagesh. 
 
 (Sec p. 6.) 
 
 1. Examples of Avords in which the dot {dagesh) 
 in the letters n33*l^l is {kal) simple, namely: — 
 
 grass 
 straw 
 
 r'- When they begin a Avord— 
 
 >W'l, rain Um 
 
 a mule . . T}^ 
 
 morning '^|?3 
 a dog. , 1373 
 
 Observe. — The dar/esh i^ omitted when such words are preceded 
 by others termii)ating in one of the qiiicscent letters ">, ), n, X (see p. '2 1 ), 
 as t? iih, hb "h, mh nn^n, ^53 -IN-in. This rule is, however, subject 
 to many exceptions, wliicli will bo noticed in the progress of the 
 work. 
 
 D
 
 36 EI.EMENTS OF THE 
 
 2"'*- When they begin a sylUible in the middle of 
 a word, and are preceded by a compound syllable (see 
 p. 21.), as — 
 
 rebellion . . T\'pr\j2 a berry . . ^Tp. a number ^Spp 
 a coal-pan TMr\T\'l2 a reproach n3")ri a queen riS^D 
 
 Observe. — When the letters n23 ^33 are preceded by a simple 
 syllable : as, ^.^^^ niourning, ?3i< food., I^J? a stone ; or by initial sh^va, 
 as K'-n^ a garment, ''"!? a Hd (except the words ^liltp, D^ril?') ; or by a 
 semi-vowel; as, PDXOybof/, '"l?!!]^ /ove, the dagesh is omitted. 
 
 These letters (nS3 T32) may, therefore, be considered as an index 
 by which the nature of a preceding sKva may be determined. If 
 they have dagesh, which, according to the above rules indicates that 
 they begin the syllable, then the preceding sh'va must of course be 
 final : "ISPP, ^370, must therefore be read mis-par, mal-ca, and not, 
 mi-s'par, ma-l'ca : but if they have no dagesh, then the preceding 
 sh'va is initial: -ITlJ, •l^l'J must be read ya-r'du, ra-d'fu, and not, 
 ydr-dii, rad-fu. By the same rule, words like the following: *??? 
 njil, ?"I337, ought to be read ma-l'cha, bi-g'da, li-g'vul, and not 
 mal-chd, big-da, lig-vul, etc., as some grammarians maintain. 
 
 2. Dagesh hazak {.strong dagesh, see page 6) 
 doubles the letter in which it occurs : as, 13X, D^D, 
 ic-car, sul-lam. 
 
 It is always preceded by a vowel*, and may occur 
 in any letter except "1, y, n, n, X- 
 
 * In some instances dagesh hazak occurs at the beginning of 
 words, but then it must be pronounced with the last syllable of the 
 preceding word: as, "ibS? nj^'D moshel-lamor.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 37 
 
 Examples of words in y-jfiich the dot {Dagesh) i 
 (Hazak) stiwnc/. 
 
 an oak HpNt 
 
 njno 
 
 a gift 
 
 a judge j*"^. 
 
 sabbath < n3^ 
 
 a blind man ..... "l^y 
 
 deluge 7^!lO 
 
 teeth n'pp 
 
 a window ji PH 
 
 a prayer H^Sri 
 
 praise I^pr^^ 
 
 a roll, volume .... npJl^ 
 dread nnntt 
 
 a ])urden XJf'^ 
 
 a hut nsp 
 
 a husbandman .... ^^^{ 
 a goblet, bowl .... J5X 
 
 a bunch ^1^^ 
 
 a staff 7J50 
 
 a word n?tt 
 
 a law nipn 
 
 a bride Tw^ 
 
 a ladder D^D 
 
 a sickle 75^ 
 
 When ^ receives dagesh, it appears similar to the vowel -1 u ; yet 
 it may easily be distinguished from it, as the consonant preceding 
 the voivel u is always without a vowel point : thus, "i-ix ur, "i-i^^ sliilr, 
 ^•15 giii" ; hut when the dot represents dagesh, the preceding conso- 
 cant has always a vowel : as, n-IS iv-va', H-ie' shiv-va', "i.li! iv-var, 
 DJi^ kav-vam. 
 
 Observe. — Consonants having dagesh hazak and sh'va are pro- 
 nounced in a similar manner as two consonants, each having sh'va 
 in the middle of a word. (See § 5, p. 33.) "'1.^'^ is pronounced like 
 >"l3-3^. dab-b'ri ; -nipa like -lip-p-IS puk-k'du ; Nib'^p like iim^p 
 niin-n'so. 
 
 I) '2
 
 38 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 § 7. — Miscellaneous Kemarks. 
 
 1. As one of the gret^test difficulties with which 
 the learner has to contend, is to determine when 
 shVa is initial and when final^ we shall collect 
 here the several rules as given in the preceding 
 sections. 
 
 Sh'va is Initial — 
 
 r\ At the beginning of Avords : as, i3!D, v?- (See 
 chap. II. § 3.) 
 
 2"''. When preceded by another sh'va: as, "^$05 
 cas-p'cha, T10'^\ yish-m'ru'. (See § 5 i.) 
 
 3>-d^ When preceded by a long unaccented vowel : 
 as, 1*10X a-m'ru. (See § 5. ii.) 
 
 4th When on the first of a double letter : as, ^i^H 
 hi-n'nl. (See § 5 iii.) 
 
 5th When followed by either of the letters *T, \ 3, 
 n, 3, D, without dagesh. (See § 6. page 36.) 
 
 6'^. When under a letter having dagesh : as, ^*)5*^ 
 dab-brl. (See §6, 37.) 
 
 7'^. When preceded by metheg : as, I^^J yi-sh'nu*. 
 (See pp. 22 and 33.) 
 
 * This might be taken as a general rule ; for since metheg shows 
 tliat the vowel to which it is annexed is a simple syllable, it follows 
 that the succeeding letter commences the next syllable, and conse- 
 quently if it have sKva it must be initial. Unfortunately, the 
 punctuators have often omitted this useful mark (1) where they 
 ought to liave inserted it, and inserted it where they ought to have
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. HO 
 
 Sh'va is Final— 
 
 V\ At the end of words: as, J|1X at, J^Op kamt. 
 (Sec § 4.) 
 
 2"**. When preceded by short vowels not htiviii;;' 
 luetheg, as p^")K ar-nioii*. (See §4.) 
 
 3'^''. When preceded by a long vowel having a prin- 
 cipal accent: as, HIID^ sho'v-na*. (See § 4.) 
 
 On the Vowels h) and (•). 
 
 2. As (^) represent a long as well as o shorty and 
 as ( . ) is often long although unaccompanied by \ the 
 following rules will be found useful to distinguish 
 them. 
 
 (t) and ( .) are lony whenever they form simple syl- 
 lables, accented or unaccented, or compound accented 
 syllables. 
 
 (t) and ( . ) are short whenever they form compound 
 syllables without having an accent. 
 
 Thus, in D'^^5^ — 
 
 n is a simple syllable because it has a secondary 
 accent, metheg. 
 
 omitted it ; uud grammarians, relying too much on the correctness 
 of manuscripts or the printed text, have given rules respecting this 
 secondary accent, which have no other foundation than the mistakes 
 of transcribers and printers. 
 
 * To these two rules there are several exceptions, which will be 
 noticed in the progress of the work.
 
 40 
 
 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 N is SO likewise, as it is not followed by either 
 dagesh or sli'va final*. 
 
 D"! is a compound syllable, yet (t) is long, because 
 it has a principal accent. The word is therefore pro- 
 nounced ha-a-da'm. 
 
 The first ( . ) in ^nblpni. (Gen. vi. 18.) and in ^^^\ 
 (Gen.xlviii. 20.) are long, because they have metheg. 
 So is likewise the second (.) in D^IUH (Gen. i. 21), 
 because it forms a compound accented syllable. See 
 the following examples. 
 
 T : IT 
 
 . sha-m'ra' . 
 
 . she guarded 
 
 °&- 
 
 . ka'm . . 
 
 . he rose 
 
 JT IT 
 
 . gar-sha'm. 
 
 . he dwelt there 
 
 n^pn . 
 
 . ha-ch'ma . 
 
 . she ivas wise 
 
 nn . 
 
 . riv, or rib . 
 
 . strife, contention 
 
 n*}?] . 
 
 . za-ch'ra' . 
 
 . she remembered 
 
 Wr • 
 
 . yi-sh'nu' . 
 
 . they shall sleep 
 
 \n . 
 
 . ra-na'n . . 
 
 . he shouted, rejoiced 
 
 * Short ( T ) forms sometimes simple syllables, as in Q^t^'Ji^ ko- 
 da-shlm, C^'jn ho-da-shlm, when the short (t) has generally two 
 dots added : thus, Q^t;np|- These are, however, often omitted, and 
 it ihen requires a knowledge of Etymology to distinguish it from 
 long ( T ). See Etymology and Syntax, page 70, under the form 
 
 Sys.
 
 In : IT 
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE 
 
 41 
 
 thci/ slid/ 1 fear 
 a goad. 
 
 But the first (■') and ( . ) in the following words are 
 shart, because they form compound syllables without 
 having the accent, being followed either by sh'va 
 final, dagesh, or a terminating consonant. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 n*lO^ . . shom-ra' . . keep thou 
 
 ^m-h^ . . col-ba-sa'r . . all flesh 
 
 n^5n . . hocli-ma' . . wisdom 
 
 NiS^l . . rib-bo' . . . a myriad 
 
 j-DD*1 . . vay-ya'-kom . and he rose 
 
 * Gesenins, in his " LeJtrgehaitde,^^ pfige 43, asserts (without 
 sufficient authority) that the first (^) in this word ought to be pro- 
 nounced short — dor- ban ; but I have followed Kimchi and other 
 eminent grammarians, who consider it as long. Kimchi^ in treating 
 of this and several other words, such as n??t^J(Exod. xxviii. 20), 
 nm'1'1 (Eccles. xii. 13), Iv'^ (Num. xxiv. 7), adds: — Qnsnp Ij'pnp 
 : npi'pnO in irxi ^h'\ l^yo*:' n'pI nm yopl " We have received it as 
 certain, that these words are read with long kametz, nor have we seen 
 or heard any dispute on the subject." Michlol Katon, page 148. 
 
 f In D|7*X the first (^) is lo7ig, because it has the accent, but the 
 second is short, as it forms a compound syllable without an accent. 
 
 By comparing the words in the tables, the learner will see how 
 very important it is to attend to a correct pronunciation.
 
 T : T 
 
 . zoch-ra' 
 
 w. ■ 
 
 . yish-nu' 
 
 '^1 ■ 
 
 . ron-ni' 
 
 IN")'. . 
 
 • yii^-^"i' 
 
 I51P . 
 
 . kor-ba'n 
 
 . 42 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 . remember thou 
 . they shall repeat 
 . shout thou 
 . they shall see 
 . an offering. 
 
 3. Two clots are often added, by way of distinction, 
 to short (^) : as, vH holi, sickness ; '•'l^f tso-ri, balsam; 
 Dv5^ shib-bo-lim, ears of corn ; D^^in months^ &c. ; 
 but then it is liable to be confounded with (t:), one 
 of the substitutes of sh'va (§ 3. ii). A little practice, 
 however, and particularly an acquaintance with the 
 structure of the language, will soon remove these ap- 
 parent difficulties. 
 
 4. (''•) is often substituted for \ and is then pro- 
 nounced long; but in such cases it generally has 
 either the accent or metheg: as, 7!!^ g'vu'l, IIIK^* 
 yii-shu'-vu, '1^'*P5^ y'chas-yu'mfi, ^z^-? g'vfi'-rcha', 
 nix'pS lQ-la-5'th. 
 
 On the Vowel 1 o, when it is preceded by ^ s, or 
 succeeded by ^ sh. 
 
 5. It has already been stated that 1 is frequently 
 omitted, and the point placed above the left of the 
 letter to which it belongs, retained : as, ^{7 15, in- 
 stead Ni .' ; '^'p'2 bo'ker, instead "Ip^. It has also been 
 remarked, that a point over the left of ^ indicates it 
 to be .b', one over the right, ^ sh. Now to avoid the 
 concurrence of two points, which would happen when
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 43 
 
 i (J is preceded by ^ .s, as in ^iy^ so-iia, or when S is 
 succeeded by tJ^ sh^ as in H^i^, the 1 is altogether 
 omitted, and the words are written N!?b, T\pf2' The 
 point performs, therefore, in all such cases, two 
 offices. Thus, in the first example N^2J^, it indicates 
 the nature of the letter, namely, that it represents 6', 
 and not s/«, and it supplies at the same time the 
 vowel i ; the letter t^ is, therefore, pronounced so. In 
 the second example, Ht^D, the point supplies the 
 vowel i belonging to ^, and indicates at the same 
 time that ^ is <s'A, and got .9. 
 
 In the following examples, however, where ^ is 
 preceded by a letter having either a vowel or sh'va, 
 the point indicates only that ^ is sit; as, /K^O raa- 
 sha'l, /CJ'pn ham-shal. Likewise in the following 
 words : 73^^ se-chel, V3^D mas-chil, where ^ has r\ 
 
 either a vowel or sh'va, the dot indicates only that ^ ^) 
 
 represents .s-. 
 
 When ^ sth is succeeded by (—5), as in 1325' shofar, 
 7^y2 mich-sho'l ; or '^ s is preceded by (— o), as D^3 
 bo'sem, ^ receives in either case two points, yet they 
 may easily by distinguished. For in the first two 
 examples where ^ begins the word or syllable, the 
 first point can only indicate the nature of the letter, 
 and the second its pronunciation; since K' has no j 
 other vowel. In the second example, 0^3, the first : 
 ])oint nmst belong to 3, as it has no other vowel, and 
 the second point can only mark the nature of the 
 letter '^ s^ since that consonant has alreadv a vowel. /
 
 44 
 
 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 From the preceding observations it follows : — 
 
 1'' That ty represents sh, and o belonging to the 
 preceding syllable, when the preceding consonant 
 has neither vowel nor sh'va : as, hw moshfi'l, 7^Gn 
 ham-mo-shtVl. (See No. 1.) 
 
 2"''- That tJ' represents sh only, at the beginning of 
 words, when it must have either ( : ) or a vowel : as, 
 DiS^ sh'lo'in, USy^ shii-lom; and in the middle and 
 end of words, when the preceding consonant has 
 either a ( : ) or a vowel : as,'7{J'^ m'shol, 7pip ma-shri'l. 
 (See No. 2.) 
 
 S""^" That ^ is pronounced so, when it has neither 
 sh'va nor a vowel : as, X)^ sona', i<b^^ na-so'. ( See 
 No. 3.) 
 
 4th. j>f represents s only, when it has either sh'va : 
 as, ^^^ s'no, or a vowel: as, r\^'^ sa'm-ta. (See 
 No 4.) 
 
 5th. j^ represents s and the vowel of the preced- 
 ing consonant, when it has either a vowel : as, D2J^3 
 bo'-sem, or sh'va : as, D^N^J n6-s"im ; or when it ter- 
 minates a word: as, b'Sri ta-fo's. (See No. 5.) 
 
 fi""- That b^ is pronounced sho when it begins a 
 word: as, "iSb^ sho-fa'r; or a syllable: as, 7^^t2 
 mich-shol, or preceded by ( : ), as ''^b^? I'-sho-ni'. 
 (See No. G.) 
 
 an enemy ^)^ 
 to carry . . Xb^p 
 
 2. 1. 
 
 rule thou 7pf2 a ruler . . 7tJ^.^ 
 dominion Sj^cn the ruler ^S^DH
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 45 
 
 3. 2. 1. 
 
 satiety . . V^^ ^ proverb . . 7^^ riches .... "1^'^^ 
 
 to do, makeHE^ lie enquired ^T[ to enquire tJ'"!'^ 
 
 to witlihold ^m the third 'P'h^ thirty . . ^'^hp 
 
 to lay bare P^n he darkened "^^n darkness . . "^K^H 
 
 6. 5. 4. 
 
 a horn . . ISb' spice Um he hated . . ^p 
 
 a bribe . . inb" to lay hold t^Sn a prince . . N'b'; 
 
 a judge . . ^W a carrier . . ^m a field TTp 
 
 a gatekeeper *iy.K^ carriers . . D^Nb^!l a burden . M^12 
 
 languages niib' 7 a maker .. T\'^V he withheld '^b'n 
 
 an overseer *ntob^ to uro-e .... b^Ji flesh .... 1^3 
 
 O T T T 
 
 6. ?!T, n, and ^ terminating a word, are pronounced 
 I^^^, nx, yx : as, n"'3jl^ mag-bi'ah, not mag-hi-ha ; 
 n^l ru'ah, not ru'-ha; V.^'yTl raki'-ang, not rdki-gna; 
 n^n ro-tsaah, not rd-tsd-ha*. r, y 
 
 X^ PracticeK^ , f \-> (X^ 
 
 HT, 1:^1.3 n^b^ n^S n^n^hn n*3:i;. nh5 nm 
 J?i?1^ y.'1TD V.^y^ V.'p'l y.'^^ nin::^ nhSwS* nhs 
 
 * Some, however, pronounce these words niag-bi-y;i, nivah, 
 rakl-VH, ro-tsali.
 
 46 
 
 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 7. n\n* or ^,Ms pronounced ^in>5 .. adonay* 
 nin^Js pronounced . -D'hSk . . elo-hl'm* 
 
 nhm\ is pronounced D^'Sk^'^^^ . . y'ru-shri-la'-ylm 
 
 8. Words consisting of the same consonants, yet 
 differing in sense, in consequence of their having 
 different vowel points. 
 
 to learn "1^7 
 
 he learned "1^/ 
 
 to teach "1^? 
 
 he-taught 1^7 
 
 a brick ninS 
 
 the moon .... 
 a poplar tree 
 frankincense . 
 to her son . . , 
 
 a gate 'Vp 
 
 hair IJ^b' 
 
 a garment H^?^ 
 
 perfect HD^^ 
 
 Solomon nb?^ 
 
 her peace HDi?^ 
 
 God. 
 
 to 
 
 not . . 
 a ram 
 
 
 s« 
 
 Sx 
 
 h^ 
 
 h:^ 
 
 strength ^^ 
 
 to be willing ri!3SI 
 
 he would ni5«{ 
 
 enmity '^^*^? 
 
 a woman nK^5< 
 
 her husband .... HK'^N 
 
 the sun H^n 
 
 a wall riDh 
 
 anger Hpn 
 
 milk 2br} 
 
 fat nSn 
 
 * This pronunciation is very ancient, as may be proved from the 
 Septuagiut and other ancient books. Many learned Christians, 
 however, pronounce these words Jehovah.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 47 
 
 Reading Lessons. 
 
 Genesis, Cliu]). i. 
 I viT r V : ■)- T - •• • ••: T T ■ •• : 
 
 - : .. . ^- I V » ; , T i T :IT I •. JT T ; 
 
 nix ^n^ D^nSs nzDx^i : D^m ^:3-Sy nsnnx: D^^i^^5 
 d^hSni S"i?!1 3iD-^3 niiSn-nx D^nS>? k-i*i : nii<-^nn 
 
 English Pronunciation. Diiiision of Syllables. 
 
 ' B'ra^slil'th' ba^ra' m^ 
 hi'm ath liash^slia^ma'^ 
 yim v'Ath'^ \vk^^!'YQ.i^ : 
 
 2 Vha^a^retsliay'^thri'tluA 
 hu va^bo^^hu v'lio'rshech 
 aUp'ntV tli'liom y'ru'^ach 
 elo'hl'm m'ra=he'*feth al- 
 
 3 p'ncVham-ma^'yiin : Vay^= 
 yS'^Tner elo*hi'm y'hl ,-/r, 
 
 4 va=^y'hi o'r : vay==ya'r elo= 
 hi'm eth-ha-o'r k"i-to'b 
 vay=yab=da'l el6=hiin ban 
 lia=o'r uba'n ha^ho'- 
 sliech. 
 
 I V|T T •• : -J- T 
 
 ' The Spanish Jews who jn-onounce (n) hke t, and sh'va initial 
 Uke sho7't (e), would read this word Beni-sheet ; and riX at, etc. 
 ■^ This word is pronounced ve-ath or we-at, not vdth nor icdt. 
 ^ Like ?/ in bo//. 
 * The two dots after n t'tc, are made use of to indicate flmief^h hazak.
 
 48 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 Analysis. 
 
 Verse 1. 
 
 n"*p'X').5 m [the] beginning. The dot in 3 is dagesh 
 kal (See pp. 6 & 35). The two dots under it (5) 
 sliva initial (p. 23), and must, therefore, be pro- 
 nounced in conjunction with the following con- 
 sonant and vowel "^S' The two dots under "!! are 
 the sign of the vowel point tsere (p. 15). The i< is 
 mute {^. 22); the three consonants and vowel 
 points forming together the simple syllable (p. 
 21) ^?'^.!l b'ra. The dot upon the right of ^ shows 
 this letter to be equivalent to sh (p. 43). The dot 
 under it (^) forms with the following \ which 
 is mute (p. 22). the long vowel hirik (p. 15) ; 
 and theilis pronounced with it, forming together 
 the compound syllable (p. 21) H^^- The accent 
 is on the last syllable. 5 in^ H^^'N'n beginning. 
 
 ^y^ he created"'. The (^) kamets, under 21 and '^is long 
 (p. 39), each forming a sim^ple syllable (p. 21). N 
 is mute (p. 22). Accent on the last syllable. 
 
 D'^nbi^} God\ The (v:) under H is a semi-vowel (p. 25) ; 
 being a substitute for sh'va initial, it must be pro- 
 nounced in conjunction with the next consonant 
 and vowel, thus 7^ elo. The dot at the left of 
 
 '^ ' i. e. God created.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 49 
 
 7 is the vowel point lidlem (p. 15). The dot 
 under H is long liirik (p. 15). being followed by 
 * wliich is mute (p. 22), and forming a compound 
 syllable with final D, thus □"•?! htm. Accent on 
 the last syllable. 
 
 n^J. The ^5 is equal to a (p. 15); T\ is pronounced 
 with it. This word is the sign of the objective 
 case. 
 
 D^p^n the heaven. (-) under H is the vowel point 
 2Xithah (p. 15). The dot in the ^ is dagesh 
 hazak (p. 36), which, as it doubles the letter in 
 which it occurs, makes ^ equivalent to ^^\ the 
 first of which is pronounced with the syllable 
 that precedes it, K^H hash^ and the second is pro- 
 nounced with its own vowel ^ sha. tt ma', is a 
 
 T i- f 
 
 simple syllable having the accent. ^ is pro- 
 nounced like y in yes; the dot beneath it is 
 short hirik (p. 15), forming a compound syllable 
 with the D, thus D) yim. The accent is on the 
 penultimate^ and the whole word is pronounced 
 hash-sha-md-yim. H is the sign of the article the. 
 
 nxV ( : ) is sh^va initial (p. 23). HX has already been 
 explained. 1 is equivalent to and. 
 
 ]**ixn the earth, (t) under Jl and ^ is long (p. 39), 
 forming each n simple syllable, (v) under H is
 
 50 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 the vowel point segol (p. 15), forming a com- 
 pound syllable with f final. Accent on the 
 penultimate. H is the sign of the article {the). 
 The two clots (t) after this word, indicate the 
 end of the verse. 
 
 Verse 2. 
 
 |**ixni and the earth. See the preceding word. 1 and^ 
 n the., y"1i< earth. 
 
 •^OlD ^^^^ ^^^' The small stroke next to H is metheg 
 (p. 22), which shows that (^) is a long vowel, as 
 short (t) never admits metheg ; this being a sim- 
 ple syllable, the ( : ) under * must be sh'va initial 
 (p. 37), belonging to D. The last H is mute (p. 
 21). Accent on the last syllable. The word is 
 read ha-ythcC not hay-thu' . 
 
 'inri without form. Dagesh kal'i^ omitted in H, because 
 the preceding word ends in a quiescent letter (p. 
 35). The point next to H is the vowel o, forming 
 the syllable h tho. The 1 with the dot is the vowel 
 shurek u (p. 15), forming with the H the syllable 
 in hu. Accent on the penultimate syllable. 
 
 in!31 and void. {^) under 1 is a simple syllable. The 
 dot next to '2. is the vowel o. 1 and^ Pb void. 
 Accent on the penultimate syllable.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 51 
 
 ■^^ni and darkness. The clot upon ^ performs two 
 offices; it shows that the prececring H is pnj- 
 nounced ho, and that ^ is sh and not 5 (p. 43). 
 The two dots "^ are sKva foial (p. 38). Accent 
 on the penultimate; and the word is pro- 
 nounced v'ho-shech. 1 and^ *^^n darkness. 
 
 '^V. upon. A compound monosylhihle, joined to the 
 next word l)y (") makkejdi (p. 21), and is there- 
 fore unaccented. 
 
 *^5) the face of. The ^ is unite (p. 23). 
 
 Dinn the deep. A monosyllable. The sh^'a is initial. 
 n is without dagesli, because the preceding word 
 ends in a 7nute (p. 35). 
 
 T\T\\ and the spirit of. The (-) under H is pronounced 
 as if it were under a preceding K (p. 45), v'j'n- 
 (ir/i. \ and "HTi spirit. 
 
 D^riSst God. This word has already ])ecii ex[)lniiiO(l. 
 
 ri$niP [was] hovering. ( : ) vuider 12 is sh'va initial. (-) 
 under "1 is the vowel \\omi pathah (p. 15), form- 
 ins; toirether the simi)l(' syllabic IP m'ra. Tlie 
 three dots under T\ and 3 are segol {\). 15), ihe 
 first forming the simple syllal)le H //<?, the secoixl 
 the compound syllable HS* Accent on the ju-n- 
 ultiniiite. 
 
 E
 
 52 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 *33"7y (See tlie preceding page). 
 
 D)gin the waters. The dot in ^ is dagesh /jazak, and 
 is, therefore, equal to 9^, one being pronounced 
 with the preceding syllable, thus DH, the other 
 with its own vowel (j) which is long «, because 
 it has the accent (p. 39). "" sounds like y in yes. 
 The ( • ) under it is short ?', forming a compound 
 syllable with Jincd D* The word is pronounced 
 ham-ma' -yim. H the, D''.^ waters. The (*♦) indi- 
 cates the end of the verse. 
 
 Verse 3. 
 
 *1§NJ1 And he said'^. The dot in * is dagesh hazak. 
 (See the preceding word.) The dot next to •* is 
 the vowel o. The t< is mute. The accent is 
 on the penultimate syllable. The word is pro- 
 nounced vay-yu-mer. 
 
 O^n^^? God\ (See verse 1.) i.e. and God said. 
 
 ^n^. it shall be. * sounds like y in yes. The ( : ) under it 
 is sNva initial. ( • ) under H is lojig i (p. 39). The 
 second ^ is mute. Pronounced y'ht or ye-hJ. 
 
 *li5*{ light. iX represents the vowel o (p. 15), and is 
 pronounced together with the ^, thus, '^*l^{ g'r. 
 
 'liX'Tll'l and it was light. ( i ) next to \ is metheg, and 
 consequently the following ( : ) is sk'va i7iitial.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 53 
 
 (p. 38.) The small horizontal stroke after the 
 second * is makkeph (p. 21), in consequence 
 of which the word is unaccented, and is pro- 
 nounced with the following word liX, thus va- 
 ylfi-q'r. The (:) after ^ii< indicates the end of 
 the verse. 
 
 Verse 4. 
 
 N*])*! and he saw\ The dot in * is dagesJi hazak. ( : ) 
 under the "] is sit va final (p. 39), K is mute. The 
 word is pronounced vay-ya'r. 
 
 0^"?^^ God\ (See verse 1.) i. e. and God .my. 
 
 T\^ sign of the objective case. (") after T\ is makkeph, 
 which joins it to the next word, in consequence 
 of which it is unaccented, and has the short 
 vowel (v e) instead of (•• a). Compare this 
 word with TNt in verse 1 . 
 
 "lixn the light (see the preceding verse). H the, liX 
 light. 
 
 iiD"''3 that [it loas] good. The dot in 3 is dagesli kal 
 (p. 35). The dot under it (3) is lo7ig i. * is mute, 
 (") is makkeph, which is the reason that this 
 word is unaccented. It is pronounced with tlie 
 following word tab, which has the accent. *3 
 that, yi\:i good. 
 
 E 2
 
 54 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 ^55*1 and he divided^. *1. (see the word ^y\^ verse 4). 
 The ( :) under 5 is sKva final, because the *^ which 
 follows it has dagesh kal (p. 3G). Accent on the 
 last syllable. Pronounced vay-yah-dd'l. 
 
 D^ri'^X God\ (See verse 1.) i. e. and God divided. 
 
 P5 between. The dot in 3 is dagesh kal. The * is 
 mute. 
 
 ^ixn ^Ae /2'^A^. (See the preceding verse.) 
 
 P!l1 and between. 1 is pronounced ?7, not ?;?/ (p. 22)- 
 P5 (see the same word above). 1 a/zJ, l"*? 
 
 "^K'nri the darkness. (See verse 2.) 
 
 Peactice. 
 
 (Gen. i.) 
 
 ■.•')•.• • ;|- T.iT T |;t |v /-: T • v; T|:*- 
 
 a^ttsi' yN'^nS D^nSt^ isnpn : p"\-i^i y\':)i':? ':?y22 n^x 
 
 r 
 7
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 55 
 
 The same verses divided into Syllables, icith the 
 literal translation. 
 
 Observe. — ^The English words connected by hyphens answer to the 
 Hebrew words under which tliey stand : thus, the words ' And-he 
 called' belong to the single Hebrew word N"lp*-1; the words' and- 
 to-t/ie-darkncss,' belong to "^^npl. The English words ivithiii 
 crotchets are not expressed in Hebrew. 
 
 The letters % ^, <=, &c. refer to the explanatory notes. The figures 
 ', ", 3, &c , refer to the order of the Hebrew words. Thus And^-he~ 
 called^ God"^, means that and-he-called are expressed by the Jirst He- 
 brew word ^^R*.-) '^"^^ that Gud corresponds with the second Hebrew 
 word D'n'?S' m.l. stand for more literal; Heh. for Hebrew; in. 
 for masculine; f. for feminine ; }'>• (ov plural. 
 
 Begin at the right and proceed to the left : — 
 
 iSn^P^ 'yy^nh\ Dv 'nix^S ''D'nSwX NJ^p*! 
 
 hccallcd and-to-thc-darkness J day to-the-light God'^ And'-hc-calledl 
 
 nnx DV '"np=h "r\'A -i^y -^-^n^^i rh-'h 
 
 .one day morning and-he-\vas evening And-he-was .night 
 
 the-waters in-the-midst-of an expanse heshall-be God^ And'-Zte-said^ 
 
 » i. e. And God called. ^ ) to the, lis light. ^ \ and, h 
 
 to the, "n^yn darkness. "^ The Hebrew has no neuter gender. 
 
 Every substantive, with which the verb, pronoun, &c., must agree, is 
 either masculine or feminine. The learner need scarcely be reminded 
 that in making a free translation he must either omit the pronouns 
 altogether: as, D''n7.!S! "i?5X*1 and God said; or he must substitute 
 the neuter pronoun [it], as in the word ''^)\ " and he was," i. e. and it 
 was. *i. e. One day. H. e. An expanse shall be. ^ ? in, 
 
 ■^in midst of. '' the, D^O waters.
 
 56 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 '-<- - VT T -I- I •• • : - • • 
 
 And-he-made .to-the-watcrs waters between a divider and-he-shall-be 
 
 the-waters between and-he-divided , the-expanse God 
 
 • i- - I •• '^ I;- TlT - )- ' V -; 
 
 the-waters and between to-the-expanse fj-oni under [were] which 
 
 Andfi-he-called^ .so and- it-was to-the-expanse from-above [were] which 
 
 ^i>h 'T]'A 3>j; \n^-'i ti''^'-::^ y\>n=S D^nSiS 
 
 morning and -he-was evening And-he-was .heavens to-the-expanse God 
 
 : ^;K^ DV 
 
 .second'' day 
 
 The learner may now, by way of practice, proceed 
 to divide the following words into their respective 
 syllables, and to analyze them in the same manner as 
 first four verses, page 47. 
 
 Practice. 
 
 Gen. i. 9—13. 
 
 •i- T - - I- • ■> )T- • v; 
 
 thc-heavens from-inuler the-waters they-shall-be-asscmbled God- And' -he-said' 
 
 : p-^n^i 'r\t'ii'T\ riNnm nnx DipD h^ 
 
 .SO and-it-was , the dry-land' and-«//('-shall-be-seen , one"^ place to 
 
 ^ A divider, or something that shall cause a separation. The mean- 
 ing of this clause is, that the expanse shall form a separation, &c. 
 ** / to the, ClO waters. * This word is not expressed in English. 
 
 « n the, yj'p"! expanse. •' P from, T\m under. ^ ^ to the, ^.''pT 
 
 expanse. ' -1 and, P? between. ? ?3 from, hv. above. ^ i. e. The 
 second day. ' Pronounced yik-ka,-vu, '' i. e. To one place. 
 
 ' i. e. And let the dry land be seen or appear. See note '^, in the 
 preceding page.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 57 
 
 "nippSi px ni^3*S D^nSx Nnpn_ 
 
 and-to-the-coUcction-of , earth to-the-diy-land Cod'-* Aiul'-hc-calkdi 
 
 J y]iD "'3 D^nSiSi x"i*i n'}2\ n^d D:|2n 
 
 .good that- [it-was] God and-hc-saw , seas he-called the-waters 
 
 ";;nt2: nb'j;., ^<^•l /p^n ^^tJ^-^n D^n^ n»N»5 
 
 seeding herb grass the-earth she-shall-gerniinatc God* Aiul-hc-said' 
 in-him his-seed [hath]-which after-Zuji-kind fruit producing fruit<= tree , seed 
 
 "p{<n/ N^ini : p -^n^j. ^nxn Sy. 
 
 the-earth'i And^'she-brought-forth^ .so and-it-was , the-earth upon 
 fruit jiroducing and-tree , after-his-kind seed seeding herb , grass 
 
 that-[itwas] God6 And'''-he-saw'^ .after-his-kind in-him his-seed [had] which 
 ^ third day morning and-he-was evening And-he-was .good 
 
 To render the followino- Readino- Lessons as useful 
 as pos.sible, tlie Hebrew letters expressing the mo- 
 dification of words are printed in ope?! letters, and their 
 corresponding Englisli words and variations in italics. 
 By this method, the learner will be enabled to ac- 
 quire, practically, the import of the prefixes and 
 affixes, and to ascertain the precise meaning of the 
 Hebrew words. 
 
 '■^ •■) and, ? to, n.ipp collection of. ^ m. I. Caushuj seed. 
 
 i e. Ilacimj the propcrtij of ijiehUiKj seed. *-' /. e. Fruit-trees. 
 
 •^ /. e. And the earth brought forth. « i. e. And it was evening 
 and it was niorninLr the third dav.
 
 58 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 (Genesis, xxix. 4 — 11.) 
 
 ^bV' Sn'^ 1/!3X^1 AmV-he-sa\d^ unto'^-them" Jacob", 
 
 VN*^ ^nX ?«^-Bi-ethren'',/ro??i-whence [are] 
 
 pnD ^nDS^l DP\H ye? And-thei/sald^from-liaran 
 
 SnS ^DX-'^'l J ^in!3X we [are]. And-he-sa\dto-them, 
 
 ■; T ■■■ t- •.ir—. 
 
 ninj'tl t?/'"^'^ ' B^i^.T.'l know-?/e Laban [the] son-o/ 
 
 ; ^^VT* ^1/^X^1 Nahor ? And-thei/-sa\d, ?t,'e-know 
 
 "Qi/E^n DH? Hi-X^l And-he-sa\d uuXo-them, Is ^e-dcc 
 
 T -: V T V ^ - 
 
 Di?^ ^"l^N^I "17 to/am*^? And-thc/j-said^pes.ce'^i 
 
 ^n!l /HI T\tiT\^ and-heho\d, Rachel /(2S-daughter 
 
 ; ^|X^n"Dy. TIJ^^ Cometh with the-sheep^. 
 
 DVn lij^ ]n "IDN^I ^rtrf-/ie-said, Lo, yet ^/;e-day [is] 
 
 tlpXn ri^'N^ /HJ great"^ [itis] nottimeto-ie-gather£(/ 
 
 |X^n '^pp'H n^pSn tlie-cattle ■, water-?/e' ^/le-sheep, 
 
 J ^yi ^dS^ and-go [and] pasture. 
 
 •' ?. e. And Jacob said unto them. ^ i, e. My friends. '^ •!? in 
 
 this word, and l1 in QI^^l! are the signs of interrogation. ^ i. e. Is 
 
 he well ? ^ i. e. He is well. * nJJ3 the accent is on the last 
 
 syllable, showing it to be the participle feminine, used to indicate the 
 present tense, viz. ' she cometh.'' But nX3 in verse 9, has the accent 
 on the immltimate syllable, indicating it to be the ixist tense, and it is, 
 therefore, rendered ' she came.' s jNV is the name for small 
 
 cattle, such as sheep, goats, &c. '' i. e. It is yet early in the day. 
 
 " m. I. Make ye, or cause ye the sheep to drink.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 59 
 
 Sd^3 x':' ^"IpN'^;! Aml-tlie>/-siud, not ice-shall-be able'' 
 ^SpX^. I^i^, 1)1 until that thci/-shall-hQ-assemh\ed 
 ^SS^I B'^inyn-^a all the-f\ocks, md-thcj/shall-ToW' 
 
 —.\r: ■ T -:iT r 
 
 **^ ^VP Pi^O"^^ the-sione //w«-abuvu [/AeJ-mouth- 
 
 ll^'P^^Tll nK3n ofthe-v/eW, and-we-shall-v,'R\er'' 
 1/ : • : •• : - 
 
 : ]X^n ///e- sheep. 
 
 ^S"lD ^^"liy While-yet-Zie [was] speaking 
 
 "UV " nX!l Smi B^V with-^Ae//.'', «»J-Rachel came with 
 
 *I^N jX^n </ie-sheep which [belonged] 
 
 ^ nyi ^3 n^3X7 to-Z^e^'-father ; for a-shepherdess 
 
 '"ItJ^X^ ^rr^l : X**?! she [was]. /!;»/- 27- was when 
 
 TlS SnTHt^ :2DT riN*"l Jacob -saw' Rachel [the] daughter- 
 
 •• T V I -:l- T T 
 
 ''^^} pS o/Laban [the] brother-r/ 
 
 JX^'nXI "IDi^ ///.s motlier, «/«/-[the]-shecp-f/ 
 
 i^X TlX dS Labau [the] brothcr-r////6'-mother, 
 
 '' 3hy^ ^5"^1 a/M?'-/ie-approached' Jacob", 
 
 DXn~nX ^.S^l rtv/J-Z/e-rolleJ ;/;e-stone 
 
 ^ft) 7y^ //'OJM-above [the] mouth-o/ 
 
 ■nX ' pJ^-^1 nXSn //;e-well, and-he-v,-atered' the 
 
 " ^ e. We cannot. '' /. e. And the shepherds will roll. *^ See 
 
 note', p. 58. '' i. e. During the time he was speaking to them. 
 
 * See note ^ p. 58. 'The feminine of i^li^ a shepherd. ^m.]. 
 
 As ichich he saw Jacob, i. e. just as Jacob saw Rachel. '' i. e. And 
 
 Jacob approached. ' See note ', p. 58. Pronounced va>j-fia^Jik.
 
 60 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 ^nX I5S jN^ sheep-o/Laban [the] brother-o/ 
 
 ^PV\ p^^l • ^^^ hls-mother. A ncP- he-kissed^ Jacob' 
 
 NSS^^I 7m7 <o-Rachel, and-he-Wfted-un 
 
 J ""15^1 '^^P"^^ /jis- voice, rt«(/-/ie wept. 
 
 ^2 hn'p 2D^l "I5;!1 ^n(/'-/ie-toldiJacob2to Rachel that 
 
 Kin ^^3^{ "^nX [the] brother»'-o/-/«e7--father he [was], 
 
 nplTD "'D1 «/uZ-that [the] son 0/ Rebecca 
 
 Ijfll "1**1/^1 Nin he [was] ; a/icZ-s/je-rano/M^s/te-told 
 : n^nX^ [it] to-/ier-father. 
 
 (Genesis, xxxi. 36—43.) 
 
 'l^X'^1 3py.^ jy**! yl/irf'-/ie-answered' Jacob2 a;»?-said 
 
 '^y^'STlD p77 <o-Laban, What [is] ??i2/.trespass ? 
 
 *3 "^flXgri HD What [is] 7H7/-sin ? that 
 
 J ''*inX P^hhl thou-hast-\)\irsued after-nie. 
 T-:r t| :;- T '^ 
 
 P\^^f2 ^3 [Now] that thoii-hast-searched 
 "n23 ^ /3 /3"nX all-7?i?/-vessels, what 
 
 75Q riJ^V^ hast-thou-iomidfro7n-a\[ [the] 
 
 ^ There are three dots in the letter ^* The first is diujesh, 
 indicating that 1 is pronounced like ch in chord. The two other 
 dots are s/i'va final. (Seep. 29.) ^oo< nb3 to iveep. ^i.e. 
 
 That he was a relative or kinsman. *= The second (t) in 
 
 this word is shoi-t, because it forms a compound unaccented syllable. 
 (See p. 41.)
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. Qi 
 
 D^b' ^n^n^'^Ss vesscls-r/ %.house ? place [it] 
 
 ^^^ *1.r^^ "^^ here before 7ft^-brethreu 
 
 ^^nXI. a7?(Z-i%- brethren, 
 
 rjp W^^pl'*') and-thei/-shall-dec\de^ between 
 
 njB^ B'^nb^j;^ ni : ^J^pSJ' ?<i-two. This twenty years'' 
 
 ^VD"! '^^>'}>! ^r'^^J ^ C^^'^^^ been] with-f//ee, %-ewe3 
 
 N7 'j^-IJ^l a«(Z-%-she-goats not 
 
 ^73^ have cast-their-young 
 
 N7 ^?NV ^S'NI and-lthc-] rams-o/%-flock not 
 
 ' nS^llO : "^inS^X have I eaten. Wiat-jcas-torn [of 
 
 ^ilN5D"^^ beasf^] not-Aare-/-brought 
 
 ^3if< ■^•^^'^X unto-//iee, [but]-/ 
 
 n^tSn^, ?i"«5-oW2^efZ-to-bear-the-Ioss''; 
 
 *" nitJ'p^'^ ^1*P //■o?«-???_y-hand Jjt&f-i/iOJi-requiic-il'', 
 
 ''f15^^^ CV '^''fl^J^il [whether] stolen &?/ day or-stolfi)-i^ 
 
 DV3 ''n^;n : nS^S night, [where] /-was m-^Ac'-day 
 
 ' 3*111 ^JppJSt consumed-?He [the] heatf^, 
 
 n7^y3 nipl rt?i(i- [the]-frost m-^Ae-night, 
 
 " i. e. That they may decide. ^ Ihh. year. ^ m. I. A torn 
 
 one,y. '' ni. I. I-shoukl-m\ss-Jier, i. e. I was obliged to account 
 
 for whatever was torn by beasts. "^m. /. Tliou-icuukht 5cc/i;-[her], 
 
 i. e. the toi-n one, i? ought to have had dagcsh. Tliis and the pre- 
 ceding tense are in Hebrew in the future ' ''^?p,^: ("•.) i" this 
 and the following word, is substituted for (-1), and has, therefore, 
 metheg annexed. (See page 42.) - lit. The dryness, or the drought.
 
 C2 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 ^fliB^ T^JT^l and-she''-war\dcred ?H?/-sleep 
 
 'h'^l '''yV!^. from- mme- eyes. This-[is]-to-we 
 
 ^n''!3^ n^K^ D'^'lb^JJ twenty years'' m-%-house=; 
 
 n^l.b'y.'ySIX ^''f^l^y. l-servecl-tnee fourteen 
 
 ^j^jnbl ^r\^3 nj^ years •'/>'*-two-o/%-daughters, 
 
 ^3t<^^ S''^^ ^^"1 ow?-six years /or-%-cattle; 
 
 '^J^lSb'.^'ni^ »^7nri1 o«cZ-thou-didst-change my-wages 
 
 "irh^ 'hh : B''P nnb'y ten times. Unless [the] God-of 
 
 Dd?^ ^riSx ''nJ^ ?«?/-fatlier, [the] God-o/ Abraham, 
 
 n^^n pnV V "1^^^ ««(? [the] -fear'^-f/ Isaac. kKZ-been 
 
 Dpn nri^ ""S y for-we*^, surely now empty 
 
 '^^P^TjV^ thou-tvouldest-have-sent-7ne-awaj/ 
 
 V.^^THXI. \^;ij^/n5< ?»7/-affliction a«(?-</ie-labours-o/ 
 
 Wrb^ nXn '^35 ?H^-hands God sawf, 
 
 : mi^ n^i^l rt?ifZ-Ae-decided§ last-night. 
 
 "I^X^l P7 ]j;3 ^Hf?-he-o«,9(«recZ Laban aw7-said 
 
 fliiSn npyi ':'X unto Jacob,— r%-daughters [are] 
 
 S^^Sni ^riilll ?H_y-daughters, and-the-sons [are] 
 
 |i<5?ni ^J3 mi/sons, and the-catt\e [are] 
 
 " I. e. My sleep wandered, &c. '^3t^' sleep, being of the feminine 
 gender. ^Ileb. year. '^i. e. I have now been twenty years, &c. 
 
 •^ i. e. He whom Isaac reverenced, namely, God. "^ i. e. With me. 
 
 ' Ilcb. saw God, /. e. God saw. s Or rebuked.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 63 
 
 nriX-nP'X Sbl '^JX^ ?«^-cattle, and-nW whicli thou 
 
 XP"V nXn seest, to-me it-[is]» ; 
 
 n^ ''ri^D/l ai)d-to-7iti/-dDughtcrs wliat 
 
 ix Di*n rhinh nb^y^ shaii-u\o ^.-thcsc //»-.-day, or 
 
 ^^?'^? IH'^Jl? r/«/o-?/i(?«V-chilcb-e/< which 
 
 \ '^l?^ they-Jiavc-hom, 
 
 Nathan's Parable. (2 Sam. xii. 1 — 1-2.) 
 
 -"PX tnrnX nin^ ^St^'•''1 Aml^ ^/^e-Lonl-' sent Natlmn to 
 
 T T :• T : ~ ; ■ ~ 
 
 r /X X2'^1 1)1 David, and-he-came unto-Jdm, 
 
 T •• T- • r 
 
 Vn D'>t^OX 'it:^ iS I^N^I awWie-saidto-ZH-w. Two men were 
 
 n^lJ'j; im " nnX n^J^a ?«i one= city' ; one rich, 
 
 ' n^n y^l^b : tJ^Xl inXl «»(Z-onepoor. 7>;-//;c rich man was^ 
 
 XT ■ 't ; T T V : ' 
 
 1i<f2 ri5in n|':^n^ JX'i flocks r/^^Z-lierds much very''. 
 
 ° /-3"pX ^"1/1 y1?;(Z-to-?/iC poor- man notliing* at- 
 
 nj^p nnX n^n3"DX \'P all. save one* httle5 ewe-lamVS 
 
 ^}\> "1^^? which [lie-had] -bought, 
 
 V/.D .1 a7?(Z-/(e-nourishc'd-/(er, 
 
 ** ?M. I. To me, he, z'. e. is viine, or belongs to 'iiie. ^ m. l. In- 
 
 thc-city one. *= /. c. The rich man liad. '* /. c. In groat 
 
 abundance. ^ i. c. And tlic poor man had nothing, &c.
 
 ^4 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 i^y /"l^Fll a«(?-s//c-grew-up \vith-/i»«, 
 
 lirr* 1''3!l"DV1 and-\v\t\\ his-chMren together; 
 
 '' 73Xri " iflSD from-his-morse\ she-used-to eat, 
 
 iD3^^ and-from-his-c\i^ 
 
 *' ni^tJ'ri she-used-to drink, 
 
 ''iSK^ri 'ip'*n3^ and-iii-his-hozom she-used-to-We^ 
 
 i/Tlflll and-she-w&s Xo-him 
 
 i^D^I t n!33 «s-a-daughter. ylrtrZ-</«e/-e-came*^ 
 
 "l^P^n tJ^'N 7 'n'?n «-traveller fo^-i/ie^-rich^-man-, 
 
 nnp7 //tDH^I aH/Z-/«e-had-compassion to-take 
 
 ii^<^^ /ro?;i-;i25-[own] -flock 
 
 i"lp3^^ and-from-Jns- [own] -herd 
 
 nib'y 7 <o-make-[a feast] 
 
 n*1N7 /o-i/ie-wav-faring-man 
 
 17 5«{3n tvho-hRd-come unto-him, 
 
 T — 
 
 -n^ npn a«(Z-/ie-took <^e 
 
 K^Xnn K^\^n^n£rn3 kmb-o/<Ae2-poor3-man2 
 T T • T " : ■ 
 
 K'^Xp nW'^1 a»fZ-prepared-2'<<^y;^/'-<Ae-man 
 t 1^7X NSn that-kad-come nnio-him. 
 
 T •• T - 
 
 t|J< '"in^l ^»(Z-z<-kindled« [the]-anger-o/ 
 
 a ns a morsel, hit, or piece of bread. '' These three verbs are 
 
 in Hebrew in the future tense, a mode of expression generally em- 
 ployed to indicate an action which is frequently or usually done. 
 *= iZe&.and-he-came. ^ m. I. And he made her, i. e. he dressed the 
 
 lamb. ^ 7)1. I. And he kindled ; ^i^ anger, being masculine.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. G5 
 
 tJ^^jO 11"^ David against-the-man, 
 
 • T • T 
 
 9^ *1/!DX'^1 "IXD exceedingly, and-he-sakl unto 
 
 ''2 nin""^n tnj Nathan, [as] /Ae-Lord'-livetli-tliiit 
 
 K^^Xn niO"ti a son-o/-dcath» [is] ^Ae-man 
 
 • T •;iT I v 
 
 nE^^Sn-nXT : nXI rib'^n that-doeth tlus. ^wZ-^^ie-lamb 
 
 I^NI Dpy D^^rij;!!'!^ dW"^. he-sIudl-Tpay fonr-fold, l>ecause 
 
 nin nnin-nx nb^y /^e-did this" things, 
 
 V - T T - V T 'y 
 
 : S^n"^? 1i!}ii Sj^t rtMfZ-because Ae-^/e'tZ^ not' pity*. 
 
 nnX nn-Sx tni n^X^'l /In^i Nathan^ said^ to-David. Thou 
 
 T - • T V I T T V i - 
 
 "nDX'n^ tJ'^Xn [art] <;ze-man. Thus said [the] 
 
 ^DIJX Sxib^' mSx nin^ Lord God-r/Israel, I 
 
 "7^^ "H/'^^ ^"^^n^P anointed-</i€e/o?'-a-king over 
 
 ^^J^S^n 'DiXI Sx'lb'^ Israel, a>id-I delivered-thee 
 
 :h)i<^ I'P from the-haind-of Saul 
 
 n^^-nX ^S n^ri^l ^H(Z-/-gave to-t/<ee </ie-house-o/- 
 
 ^l^^'HXI ']'^^."fX f^-master'', and-the wives-of 
 
 ^jTn3 'I'^^^X thi/-master vdo-thy-hosom, 
 
 n^3"nX ^7 njriS^I ^n^Z-Z-gave to-</ic« </ie-house-o/ 
 
 mD DX1 nn^inn ':>^?"1b'^ Israel «/«Z-Judah, and-\i little-^ 
 
 ^7 nSDkl then-I-ivould-add to-thee 
 ' : » J- : 
 
 ""A son of death the man," i. e. the man ivho did this, deserves 
 death. ^ Jleb. masters. The plural of this word being mostly 
 
 used instead of the singular. <= i. e. If these be too little (few), I 
 would add as many and as many more.
 
 66 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 J;TO tnjnSI n^nS as-they and-as-they\ Why 
 
 *l!2*l'nX ■p^J^l hast-thou desTp\sed-the-word-of 
 
 J^nn *r\\tvb r\)ri\ the-Lord, to-do tohat-is evW^ 
 
 Wn.nn^S* nX 1''rj?3 m-/i?s-eyes=? Uriah the-mtt\ie 
 
 i'lnS ^^r'n ?/;o^<-7^rts^smitten ivith-the-sword, 
 
 /^riD? i/nj^XTlNI and-his-wiie thoti-hast-tAlien 
 
 inXl n^'X7 ^7 to-theefor-a-w\fe,mid-h\m 
 
 !l3"inS n^"in ?Af;i(-/;rt.<t<-slain icith-(Jte-s\\ord-nf 
 
 * P^X s5 <//e-sons-(>/ Ammon. 
 
 (Psalm xxiv. 11 — 15.) 
 
 ''h"^)^W ' B'>;5"'^D7 Come-^e chMren, hearken-?/c unto- 
 I. ' ' vie : 
 
 : D5n^7^. n\n^. 'nXi; [TheJ-fear-r/ the-Lord /-R77/- 
 
 teach-^o(/. 
 
 ^ D\^n f Snp ^>*n-^a who [is] ^/^e-man <Aa<-desireth lite, 
 
 : niD " niX77 S'^Z:^^ innX [that] loveth days <o-see-good ? 
 
 ynS ^^iSJ'^ "11^? Keep %-tongue//w»-evil, 
 
 tn^lP "13^.^ '^''n|5t^^ rt«(7-%-lii)s//w/J-speaking deceit. 
 
 nVJ-nb'ri y"jD n^D Depart /row-evil a«r?-do good, 
 
 * ^"^^111 ^^^^ ^'(^? seek peace (/»//-pursue-it^ 
 
 " t. e. As many and as many. * From Hii'j; to do. ^ Heb. 
 
 The evil, i. e. that which is evil. '^ i. e. In his sight. '' Lit. go ye. 
 ^ ^/h^. 11 a son, plu. D''33 sons, or children. '" nS")^ fear, nST. 
 
 fear of. 6 This word is never used in the singular number. 
 
 '' From ni<"^ to see. ' HDi^' a lip. ^ Ifch. liiin.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. Qj 
 
 (Isaiali Iviii. witli slight alterations.) 
 ^gnS :3^."17 Dh3 Break to -t he -huw^vy tIn/An-ead, 
 
 n;j; xnn Dn.^n^: D''*;yi «»rz'-[the] afflicted^ poor' bring- 
 
 ■' into [the] house ; 
 
 in'^DDI Dhj; "nStin-'^3 when ^/wH.peest [the] -naked Mor- 
 eover- Am ; 
 
 ♦''Dl'J^ri^ ^'^ ^'ib'IlD^ and-from-thy-fiesh [do] not hide- 
 
 ■^ " • " : -^ : • thyself. 
 
 njy" nin'1 ^^1D.i^ T{< Then shah-thou-caW and-the-Lord 
 
 ' >vdl answer ; 
 
 * ^J3T ^/^S'^'l V1l3'<R thou-shalt- cry, and-he~icUl-say, 
 
 • ■• • " : ^ — : Here-I-«??i. 
 
 (Proverbs vii. I — 4.) 
 
 J^.'ni ' "'D'lVP "I^^P' "^^^ .%-son, keep /H//-coramandment5 
 ■ ■ '■ ■ ■ ■ o»J-live ; 
 
 : ^''i^y_ "pti'^*! '"^fl'lini and-my-\'AVi as-the apple-o/ thhie- 
 
 '' ' • ^ •' eye.s. 
 
 ^*'fliy2lV^S"'^y- B']?^P Bind-^pw; upon %-finger5, 
 
 \ 'l!!!? ni7"7y S^n3 write-^/^em upon the-tahlc-nf thlne- 
 
 heart. 
 
 nX '^ninX nJ2nn7 '^^/!D^< Say »«;o-wisdom, %-sister thou- 
 • . -: .:x- v: ^,^,.^^ . 
 
 : Xlpri n^^57 yiiD^ ^-^wZ-a-fnend M- understanding 
 
 * ??i. /. If thou shouldst see. "^ m. /. Not f^lialt-thou-liide-thyself. 
 
 ^ Sing. "^jyP mits-vtih, a command. ^ T\'i\T\ a law. 
 
 ^ m. I. The little man; a name given to the apple of the eye from the 
 reflected image it presents to the beholder. ''ninx a sister, 
 
 s i. e. Consider understanding as thy friend.
 
 68 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 m'f:i'^ ^"^^^ "nnX '3 For length-o/ days [is] m-hcr- 
 '■••'■ ■ " ' ■•■ ' ■ right-hand, 
 
 : 1U31 "l^p (^SxDb'S {«-/ier-lcft-hand riches and-honor. 
 
 DVb ''311 T\'^311 Jler-ways [are] ways-r/ pleasant- 
 
 •X. •• • - T JV T : 
 
 ness, 
 : U)hiy n'Tlil^n^'^DI r/n^Z-all /^er-paths [are] peace. 
 
 T T ;•.• • ; T : 
 
 Proverbs vi. 6 — 11. 
 
 Svy n^^rSi^ lh Go to [the] ant, [thou].sluggard ; 
 
 i DDHI n*'D'Tl ri{^1 see her-ways, and-he wise. 
 
 T -:i- T iv T : •• : 
 
 PVP "^^"r^ 1"^^ Which not to-Zicr^ [a] guide, 
 
 SSJ'/^^ IDb^' overseer, aj^cZ-ruler. [Yet] 
 
 rly^n'^ T*^'5^ r^fl ^SV^e-provide^/i m-summer /;e?'-meat, 
 
 J nSii^/b ^""^D^ ^ niJX sAe-gathere^/i /^-harvest /ie?'-food. 
 
 '22'^P\ V^V '^T\fTlV ^"""^ ^o"?"" sluggard ! irilt-thoit- 
 '■ ' " "' lie down? 
 
 ^fljtTD D^pn Tl/ID when wilt-thou-arise from-thy- 
 
 '■"''•' ' ■' ~ ■^ sleep ? 
 
 "fii^lD^'i byp *'ni3^ tO>^p [Yet a] little sleep, [a] little slum- 
 • " ■ ' ■ ber, 
 
 : ^y^b ^'^T p^Sn tOy^ C^] bttle Mdmg-of hands, toAie 
 
 ' = • ''' ' '■ down,— 
 
 ^2^{<1 "npnpS'X^^ And-lie-ivill-come /«I-6-rt-traveller 
 '■' " >'"'•' ■' i/;^-poverty* 
 
 : \yt2 ^^^'^ ^*liDn/!2l and-thy-want rts-rt-man [with a]- 
 '•'" ■ • • • " shield^. 
 
 ^ "Who has neither guide, nor overseer, nor ruler, yet provideth, etc. 
 •> Heh. She gathered. '^ Heb. Until when. '' nj!^' sleep, 
 
 e noijri slumber. ^ i. e. Thy poverty will come suddenly. 
 
 8 I. e. As an armed man.
 
 ^ y:^ 
 
 HEBREW i.angil\(;e. ^^i) 
 
 (Jiint. ii. 10—14. 
 
 said to- )itc, 
 
 '^■^?r"'r';n ^7 TO Arise" /«//-love, »;y-beuuty, a/^r/- 
 
 J 1]7~^^/^ come-away*'. 
 
 *iny^ Vrit?rt n^.ri-^^ For lo, ///r'-w^nter hath-passed, 
 
 \\^ "^Sn t)Sn D^^n ///e-rain hath-flitted-away, /.e-is- 
 
 gone'^. 
 
 p>X3 ""^Nnj B'^^V^n 77/e-blossoni5 /wiv-appeared om- 
 
 //(C- earth, 
 
 " y-'^,^D ^I'^J"] nj?. ^//e-time-r/song* hath-comc, 
 
 nJj;-1N3 j;!2t^J -linn Sipl «wZ-</*e-voice-o/ ^/^^-turtle AoM. 
 
 ie(?/?-lieard t«-o?<r-land : 
 
 H'^^^S np;n niSJ^^n yy^e-fig-tree .^/;e-//fl?/,-embalmed 
 
 /(C/'-green-fig,?, 
 
 nn ^3n^ nn^D D'^^S-ini (?/???- ^/^e- vines, [the] tender-grape, 
 ■) ^ ' ■ ?/(e_y-/«/re-yielded fragrance. 
 
 ■ Tt vi'y.l !=I7"" ^^(7 Arise mij love, ?////-beautv, ^»^/- 
 
 come-awav' 
 
 "^P^ ''l^D^ WV il/y-dove! [who art] ?-/;-^Ae-cleft- 
 'y' ^/;e-rock, 
 
 11\S^J2"nj< '"'J'^X^n [(>] /et-7ne-see %-countenance, 
 
 "TjSip nX '•^V.'^Ct^'n /''^we-hear%- voice; 
 
 ^"iJi '^'P'lp"*? f«'" sweet^ [is] %-voice-', 
 
 t nlXj ^i){~lQn r/»r/-^A_y-coiiiitenance [is] comely. 
 
 ^i. e. My beloved exclaimed. ^ Heb. arise to thee (an idiomatic 
 
 expression). "^ ^^VT). a female friend, companion. ** Heh. and 
 
 go to thee (an idiomatic expression). * Heb. he is gone to him, 
 
 (an idiomatic expression). ^ m. I. Were seen. * Heb. the song. 
 
 ^ m. l. He has touched, i. e. arrived. '' m. I. Cause me to see. 
 
 ' III. 1. Cause me to hear. ^ i""??")^ from HX") to see.
 
 70 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 (Cant. vi. 2—4.) 
 
 pSn ^1)1 Sip [The]-voice-o/' ?/;^-beloved — he 
 
 I ■■ ■ I knocketh ! ' 
 
 ''jninx ^T'^nna " " open-to-?«e, ?H^-sister : 
 
 ''r\JpP\ ''f^JV "n^yn »i_y-love,/»^-(love,TO^-innocent-one! 
 
 S^"iS*SD^ ''L^*{<iet^ for-m)j-\\e&d 2S-filled [with] dew, 
 
 " : rh'^ '^ppn ''niXlp myAocks [with] f//e-drops-o/-[the]- 
 
 night." 
 
 ''riijrill'nj^ ^'iT^tp,^'^ I-have--p\it-off mi/sarme.A 
 ni^sS^ n^^^K how shall-T-pnt-it-^ on ? 
 
 Tl" T ; V TIT ' 
 
 ''S^TriS* '''PlVpn /-Arti-e- washed ?H?/-feet, 
 
 : DD3t:^ n:D:D\^ how,«/irt//-/-defile-i/;m? 
 
 ...--. ^ 1^ .. 
 
 ^inn-p i"I^^ nS^ ''ih i/y.beloved put-forth /;w-hand 
 
 from ^/(e-lattice, 
 
 J V/^ ^DH ^J?t5^ «?irf-?/i^-bowels 3'earned*= ior-him. 
 
 (Man's Nothingness. Job xiv. I — 10.) 
 T\W^ n^T tn^ Man born-o/ woman 
 
 X • ; T T 
 
 : T^T'^^nb^ ^''^\ nVp [is] short-o/-days and-ixxW-of 
 
 trouble, 
 
 ^te'^l N^^ r^i^S Z//.e-«-flower /;e-cometh-forth 
 and-is cut- on ; 
 
 ^ Heh. and. '' T/eJ. her, because J^.^^? is of the feminine 
 
 gender. ' An expression denoting great compassion. 
 
 '' Lit. And saturated, or satiated of.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGF^. 71 
 
 "•'' • " ■ abidcth^-not' 
 
 ^'^TV.. ^np3 nrbjrSll^ E^'en upon him'' hast-xHOU- 
 
 '■"''■ i> ^ ■•■ ' " opened tJn'iie-eyes ? 
 
 » <^i*^'t% judgment with-^/;ee ? 
 
 N^t^D "liriD jn'^r^P Wlio c«»-i)roduce<^ clean from- 
 
 uncleau ? 
 
 : nnX XS Not one-'. 
 
 T V 
 
 l'';^^ g<?i^'!)*in-[:X if determin«Z [be] his-days,^ 
 
 'Tj^^^ ' 1*'L^^^"12D/!: [ifthe]number-o/'/;«-month5 [be] 
 
 It- ttt; ";■ •!,; 
 
 \vith-^//tr, — 
 
 : "ihyi nSi fi'^^b'y T'p^n [if] hls-bounds thou- have-made— 
 
 ■ '' ' ^ ' '^ ■• which Hie-cannot-pass: — 
 
 hlW VS^'O nyb' [Then] turn fromn^on-Um, and- 
 
 ^ ■ ■ ■ T T • . let-him-cea&e", 
 
 t iDV *l''Db'5 n^^^'iy until //c-s7/.'///-acconiplish, as-rt 
 
 ' ^ ■ ' '■' ~ hireling, //;'s-day'\ 
 
 nipri yyb ti** ^3 For there-is to-the-tree a-hope, 
 
 ^VHI "^^yi ri"}3''"D{< if /;e-s/<oi(W-be-cut-down, agaii 
 ' ' • ■ " '" ' ■ ivill-he reproduce'*, 
 
 Sinn nS ' i<npjin rt«rf-/«/s-suckers-?r27/ not-cease'". 
 
 * m J. And he shall not stand. '' Heb. tliis''\ i. e. upon this being. 
 
 " Ileh. shall give, i. e. who can expect purity from impurity. '^ i. e. 
 
 None. "^ The first (t:) is short (6). ^ ?«. Z. And not he sliall 
 
 pass. " i. e. And let him cease to suffer. '' i. e. Until like a 
 
 hireling he shall have accomplished his task. ' Ilth. And again, 
 
 i' Ihb. and he will exchange, i. e. produce fresh branches. ' >SV«y. 
 
 r\\},y\'' a suckei-^, ""iripJV his sucker. '" L e. Will not fail.
 
 72 ELEMENTS OF TUK 
 
 i^n^ T*~IX3 rp^'DX If he should-hecome-oU inthe- 
 
 earln //zs-root 
 
 J iyT3 n^^; ^^V^^ aml-m-the-dnst shouhlhe-d\e his- 
 
 stem". 
 
 n^lS^ D''S n^lD From-the-scent-of water Ae-jnY/- 
 flounsh ; 
 
 : ' VLDi"iD3 y^D nbyi a/iJ-he-will-produce «-harvest^ as- 
 
 ' a plant*^^. 
 
 t^Sn^l ni^'' '"l!3i1 i?»<-man dieth «»(:Z-wasteth-away. 
 T v:!-.- T vr.- : 
 
 * i*X1 '' D"1i< VIJ^I ^"'^^ man^ expireth' aHfZ-where 
 
 -: TT >-:- [is] he? 
 
 " 2. e. Should its root become old, — should its stem die, yet the 
 tree will again revive, etc. ^ "i"'Vi^ a harvest, or according 
 
 to some, a cutting, i. e. youn(j sJioots. *^ V^jJ a plant. Thus 
 
 several of the versions, Jarchi, and other commentators, who con- 
 sider this word as a noun : many grammarians, however, consider, 
 it as a verb, and then the words V^Jl 1^? ought to be rendered, 
 'as when fresh planted: '' ^l?, ^'"^^^ ^??-— 
 
 These words have this in common, that they all signify man, yet 
 there is some distinction between them. The first, derived from 
 ^97^ fjround, earth, is mostly applied to man in general, or 
 mankind, common, earthhj man. The second, derived from ^35<, 
 to be sick, mortal, includes the idea of mortality, i. e. mortal man. 
 The third, derived from "12|, to be strong, includes the idea of 
 strength and p)Ower. Hence the propriety of these terms in their 
 respective places, and particularly of the word ^^Vi'). ' and he 
 had become tveaJc' The literal sense of this verse is, 1.^.?1 and 
 the powerful man dies, ^^.H*! having previously been deprived 
 of his strength.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 73 
 
 {^Tlic same seiitiineats expressed hij the inspired Psalmist. 
 Psalm ciii. l.")— 17.) 
 
 ^^jy, >-^f)\f|-l5 C'i^X ^la" /(7Y?-grass [are] A/s-days; 
 
 T T ■ T 1 V ••• ; 
 
 S)J3"»{.{"| "i^'m^y ''n^"^ ""S For[a]-wind passeth over-/(»/t 
 '■' "• ^' ^ ' ' (i/t(l-/ie-exh\s-not 
 
 :''i.'!DpP 1)V ^IT3^ {>5b*'1 and-it-shM not know-/<»«'^ agaii 
 
 ' • '•• • - : liis-[own] place. 
 
 nin* nOm But-[the]-mercy-o/ //;t'-Lord 
 " oSiyn^.l D^^^yiS [is]-/o;--ever aml-exer 
 
 1''{<"1'' 7^ upon tbose-^//rt/-fear-///w/, 
 
 : D^^i ^1?!37 iripn^l ««^/-///.s-righteoupness [extciuisj 
 
 ^o-chi]dre»,'5 children. 
 
 '^ Or flourishes. '' The primitive meaning of n-1"l is, vind, 
 
 air in motion, but it is also used to denote the breath, a breath of air, 
 the Divine Spirit or Soul. This clause may, therefore, be rendered 
 either, ' i^o?- a breath passes] over (or through) him, and he exists 
 no more, i. e. a breath of air is sufficient to deprive him of his 
 mortal existence ; or, ' For the spirit,' i. e. the Divine Spirit, the 
 soul, etc. 
 
 '^ The translators of the established version, having probably adopted 
 the opinion of some interpreters and commentators, that the pronouns 
 refer to )"'V Jloicer, have rendered them by it. I have, however, 
 followed Abcn Jochia, who considers the pronouns as referring to 
 tJ'iJK man. As for the phrase, ^ And the place shall not know him 
 again,'' it must in either case be considered as a poetical expression. 
 
 ^ m. I. From everlasting and until everlasting, /. c. the mercy of God 
 abideth forever, and extends to those who fear liim.
 
 74 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 {Gud known fivm his ivories. Job xii. 7.) 
 
 '^"Ifll. nitons /NJi' Ask [the] bcast.s-, and-theif-ivill- 
 • " • ■ teach -///fc: 
 
 : '^S""I.il'^') D^pt^n S]iyi rt;«/-[the] blrds-o/ </ie-lieaven, 
 
 ■" ■ ■'"■'" : and- they^-icill-tsW thee : 
 
 ^phl flNV ^''ly it^ Or speak to-«/ie-earth, and-she- 
 
 ivill-tedch-thee. 
 
 J D^n '^Jl'l ^7 ^13D^1 and they -will-itW thee f/^e-fishes- 
 
 " ■ • • ' " ofthe-sea'^. 
 
 rh^'h^'S, Vy~^h V2 who knoweth^ not2 m-all these* 
 
 t nXT nnb'y n*in''"1^"'*3 ^^^"^ the-haml-of-the Lord hath- 
 , ' '■ "" • ■ ■ done this" ? 
 
 TtS^ D^S^. i"1^3 '^2^'^^ //r'-whosei-hand- [is] ?/;e-soul-o/ 
 ■ • all-f/ie-living 
 
 : * B^^t^'lb'S"?^ n^^l o«J-[the] spirit- o/- all men ? 
 
 jniri f 'p^ nt^ J^Sn Doth-not [the]-ear2 distinguish* 
 /, • ' " ," ■' words^? 
 
 : ' i7"Dy.t?^ 75i< "T|ni ««J[the]-palate [the] food it tastes ? 
 
 n^^n S''P'^P''^ [Is-there -not] wisdom- m-</?e-agedi 
 
 : njin;^ D^'^p^ ^"IN*") rt«f^ [iu] length-o/ days under- 
 
 standiii;;*? 
 
 ^ Heh. and she will teach thee, i. e. each of them will teach you. 
 ^ Heh. and he will tell thee. "^ /. e. And the fishes of the sea will 
 
 tell thee. '' /. e. Who cannot discern from all these that the 
 
 power of the Lord has formed them. « m. I. ' And the spirit of 
 
 all flesh of man;' alluding to the animal spirit — that even this is not 
 the effect of mere organization. ^ m. I. Shall taste to him, i. e. 
 
 what is agreeable or disagreccable to it. The word iip[] is it not, must 
 be understood in this clause as well as in the following. * The 
 
 words and whence do they derive it ? must here be understood, and 
 the next verse must be considered as the answer.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 75 
 
 ni13;i1 n,»^5n i^>^ \Vith-A////(CJod)[<fre]-wisclom«/«/- 
 
 strength 
 
 : n^inn^ nVj;, i^ To-him [belon-] -counsel and- 
 
 understandirig. 
 
 (God's Omniscieiice. Psalm xciv.) 
 
 rtin^ B''j;tJ'i ^n^-ny iiow-iong^ [shaii thej wicked, 
 
 ^ '■ -^ ■■ -- - [-0] Lord ! 
 
 n W_ B^'i^trn TO""iy. Hovv-long^ [the] -wicked, s/w//- 
 
 thei/-tn\im])h ? 
 
 ^X3T njn^ ^^j; r%-people. Lord, M^^-crush^ 
 
 MUj;^ '^ri*7mi rt«(Z-%-heritage ?/u'_y-afflict^ 
 
 ^y^in'' 1:11 njD75< Widow «//r^straiiger ^//t'y-slav'' 
 
 : ^n-^1''. D^pinn «Hrf.orphan.? <//ey-murder": 
 
 H'TIX'T' xS ^1/!:N''1 ^"^^[yet]-they-sa^^ God* shall^- 
 • ' not--see''; 
 
 : iby "^nSx r^^'XSi a>id^-he^ shall--not^ regard 2 — the 
 
 I ■•'" *• •■•:'•- ' : God-o/Jacob<^. 
 
 DJ^3 B''*iy3 ^^''5 Consider-ye brutes, amonrjst-the 
 people, 
 
 : 'h^'y^'t^ TO D'^ypD^ ««(Z-[ye] fooL., when r^v7^^e-be- 
 
 wise ? 
 
 "^^p^ N*^n JTX y;pjn //e-</»/<-phinteth [the] -ear ../u<//- 
 
 //c-not-hear ? 
 
 : D'>!ll-iS'::'n J^y -|>;i^ DX Or-//e-</ta^formcth [the]-eye5/i«//- 
 
 not-he-see ? 
 
 n'^pi^ X7n S^iil ^D^^D //e-^/i«<-chastises nations shaW- 
 
 notViC^-punish*? 
 
 " //('/». Till wlien. ''Tiie corresponding Hebrew verbs are 
 
 expressed in the future ,^7/^/// crush, they ^hall or will afflict, etc. 
 ^ i. e. The God of Jacob will not regard.
 
 70 ELEMEiNTS OF THE 
 
 nin^ : nyi mX "I^SdH Ih-tUat teacheth-man knowledge^ 
 
 T ; ^-IT T T .. - ; - ..11 1 
 
 — tlie Lord — 
 
 D"IX D^imi^ yiV //e-knoweth </(e-thouglits of man 
 
 T T : : " ^-1" 
 
 X 7!in n^ri"''5 although tliey [are] vain. 
 
 VJT Tf 
 
 {Goers Omnipresence. Psalm, cxxxix. 7 — 14.) 
 
 ?]n^"lD X?^ n|X Whither sJ,all-I-go froni-thy 
 spirit ? 
 
 • ^*^^^ "^ ^''2'^D 1i!l**\1 o?H7-whither //■ow-^/i'_y-presence 
 T : V \ r.r ■ T T : s/«<//-I-flee ? 
 
 ^n^^ W^ D^O^ DD^'DJ^ if ^ ascend-//;^ [into] heaven there 
 
 J ^^^n Sii^i^' nV^^I onrf-s/io«ZcZ-/-make?«_y-bed [in the] 
 ''■•■■ = 't < - : grave behold- i7io?<-«rf- there. 
 
 ^nSJ^'^S^D ^^^ [in ^ take the wings-o/ the-dawn 
 
 * Knowledge, nyT The Hebrew verse ends with this word, 
 which, as it leaves the sense incomplete, has probably induced the 
 Translators of the Established Version to add the words ' shall he 
 not know' (yj.'! ^^lI). But as there are no such words in the He- 
 biew text, I have preferred the opinion of Ahen Ezra, who considers 
 the clause T\Vy[ Clb? ^Wt^T] as connected in sense with the follow- 
 ing verse ; viz. He that teaches man knou'ledge, namely, the Lord, 
 he knoics the thoughts of man, etc. This rendering is congenial to 
 the whole context. For whereas the nicked consider the Deity 
 as too exalted to concern himself about their foolish thoughts and 
 vain actions, the inspired Psalmist declares, that since the Divine 
 Being has bestowed knowledge on (2"]'?) insiijnificant man, he knows 
 likewise his thoughts, although those thoughts are vain. (See Ahen 
 Ezra, Comment.; and Mendelssohn s Translation of the Psalms.) 
 
 * From thy face, i. e. from thy attending presence. The word D^JS 
 is never used in the singular number.
 
 IIKHRKW LANGUAGE. 77 
 
 : D'^ nnnxa njSj:'^ if I dwell in-the uttermost-part- 
 
 of-thc sea 
 
 '>Jn:jri '?|n^ DD^-D^ Even there ///y-haiul slmllAc^A-me 
 
 : ^3''P^ ''^jni^'^') ""'^''^ %-right4iand- sIkiH^AwW- 
 
 >■■■ ■ : I"-: 1 ; j^jgl_ 
 
 '"'JS'lti'."* ^^^'n-'^X npis*1 //--/-say but darkness ../»<//- cover- 
 
 :^J"iy!l nix nS'Sl '^«« [the very] night [is] hght 
 
 ' ' ■"•' ■^ •'" • about-?/;c. 
 
 I ■ -•■!" I" ' - thee, 
 
 '' '^''N^ DV3 nSvl «'"^ night giveth-light'^as-</<e-day-' 
 
 " nniXS riD'^rn^ /'/-■« darkness ///.y; lights 
 
 T ir T •• -:i- 
 
 ^n^'^lD Tl^Jp nnX"*!! ^""'" thou ^//(>^^-/;«s^fornled ut/j- 
 
 ' = • " '■!" "' '■ reins: 
 
 • *'?3X ?t:!5!3^ ^35hfn f^'ou-hast-coxeied-me in-tlte-womh 
 • • I •••;•.• : •/•• •.. : o/?»7/- mother. 
 
 niX'lii ^3 ^j; ^"li^ I-?r///-praise-thee because fearfully 
 
 ''' T^/SJ distinguished-have-/-iee«. 
 
 ^*'b'y/!2 S^N/SSD wonderful cife %-works — 
 
 J '' l'^i2 DVIV "ti'Sil ««('/-that-W(i7-soul knoweth [it] 
 
 '- • : - ; well : '' 
 
 " Kiinchi renders this word * shall ohsciire me^ from ^.\ the evening. 
 •^Lit. ' Shall not darken,' hide or conceal. ^ Lit. ' Sliall cause 
 
 light,' i.e. shine, gire light. '' The double comparative 
 
 indicates that the things compared are both alike. "^ i. e. They 
 
 are both alike to God. ^ Lit. 'Thou hast possessed,' 
 
 from nbfj to obtain possession, to become proprietor of a thing. 
 
 s From n?Q to separate, to distinguish by particular regard — allud- 
 ine: to the fearful and wonderful characteristics of man. 
 
 '' i. c. Wonderful are all thy works ; and that my soul should be 
 capable of knowing and discerning it, is not the least wonderful.
 
 78 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 {True Worship. Micah vi. 6—8.) 
 
 nin^ Ulp^ n^3 WUh-what shall-I-come-hehre 
 ^ '• "'"'■ "" the-Lord? 
 
 " Dnp ''nSxp f\3^ shall-I-hend to-the-God-of 
 
 heaven ? 
 
 ni/ij^S ^^^"^(^^D SJi(dl-I-come-heiore-hi7n ivitli- 
 burnt-ofFerings ? 
 
 V'r\1^ "^iS D'^SjyS mVi-calves-o/ a-vear-old ? 
 
 ^'h^^ '^^aS*^ nirr n^Tn Can-tke-Lord be-pleased with- 
 ■ ■ '^ ■ ■ ■ * ■ thousands-o/' rams ? 
 
 ^ ''bn^ 'rii25"l3 ^nY/z-wi^riadsw/rivers-o/oil? 
 
 <>y2i^3 '"113!l [r,^n s/w/Z-Z-give ;y?^ first-born [for] ?«^- 
 transgression ? 
 
 : ^^S13 nXtSn ^' ''^tpl? '•l? f/je-frmt-o/m^f-body [for the] sin- 
 
 ' • ' • ■ of-my -soul ? 
 
 l^itSTl^ D"li< ^7 l^iin //e-/irts-to]d thee, man ! what [is] 
 
 good ; 
 
 ^D/3 tJ'nil nin''"n^^ oHrf-whatrequires2</ie-Lord'/?w»- 
 
 • ■ ■■ ^ '■ ~ thee 
 
 "tO^J^^-P rOb^yOX *3 but to-do justice, 
 
 ^npn n^nXl a/KZ-to-love mercy. 
 
 ♦ ^^d^?:? ^y ^?? ^3^^VD1 aHrZ-humbly <o-walk with-thj- 
 
 God. 
 
 * TVie height, i. e. the heaven. '' Lit. Sons of a year ; a pecuhar 
 wav of expressing the age of persons or animals. '^ '^??1 « 
 
 myriad, ten thousand. ** I^B the belly, womb, body. 
 
 « Lit. The doing of justice. ^ XzY. T/^e love of mercy, 
 
 s The infinitive is here used instead of the adverb.
 
 UKHREW LANGUAGE. 7!) 
 
 CHAPTER lil. 
 § 1. — Introductory Observations. 
 
 Accents. r\m} '^'^Vp 
 
 1. Accents are peculiar marks or characters placed 
 above, below, at the beginning, or end of words, and 
 in a few instances between them. 
 
 No part of Hebrew grammar is attended with greater difficulties 
 than the Accents. Grammarians do not agree concerning either their 
 exact number, names, or powers ; and many of the most learned have 
 honestly acknowledged their inability to unravel this complicated 
 system, or to explain satisfactorily, why its authors have employed so 
 many signs, or why they have, in many instances, preferred one set of 
 accents to others of the same value. To give even an abridged state- 
 ment of the contradictory opinions on this sul)ject, would require 
 more space than my limits would allow, and a minuteness of detail 
 wholly inconsistent with the object of an elementary work. Indeed, 
 most willingly would I have spared the learner the embarrassment 
 arising from the multiplicity of the signs, similarity of the forms, and 
 strangeness of the names of the accents, were it not from their close 
 connection with the vowel points, on which they exercise a consider- 
 able influence, and for their great utility in pointing out the relation 
 between words considered as members of a sentence. Nevertheless, 
 instead of perplexing the student with rules that cannot be under- 
 stood without a tliorough acquaintance with the general structure of 
 the language, 1 shall, for the present, only subjoin a table (to which 
 the learner may now and then refer) containing tlie forms, position, 
 and names of the accents ; and point out their general uses and 
 importance.
 
 80 ELEMENTS OF THK 
 
 2. Tal)le coutairiing the forms, position, and luinies. 
 
 'I 
 
 3. 
 
 rosrrioN and names. 
 
 HP 
 
 4 
 
 Distiiictives. 
 
 piD3 fjlD or J pj'pp 
 
 • • iS*nn;n^ / n^nx 
 
 ■ • i^^i^ ^p.l 
 
 Sn^ 5)^1 
 
 . . . *«nnt3--nn3D 
 
 'tT\. 
 
 Spnt 
 
 • ■ • • tD;r£ • • N*b::*3 
 
 n^nn 
 
 n^n^^ 
 
 rhhh^^ 
 
 nT2 
 
 T ■• T TT •• ;)- 
 
 T : - T : T • : 
 
 nSini / tJ^n3 
 
 N D^DQ 
 
 '^Placed between words 
 as n^3i-lb3| (Gen. xvii. 
 21.) This accent is also 
 called n''P"l5^ when it 
 occvus before — ~ as — 
 
 n-rn -inna ' rnb'yp 
 
 (Gen. xvii. 25.) 
 
 I'OSITION AND NAMKS 
 
 Conjunctives. 
 
 ^^' ^^yy or n^^i)!: 
 
 X T T J- 
 
 ^*?"^|^ 
 
 ■ ■ tnstop x^hn 
 XDi?: 
 
 • • • • nS^33 ^^D-|>D 
 
 V3V p nn^ 
 
 I V v"v 
 
 The following' occur only in the 
 Psalms, Proverbs, and Job. 
 
 -invi 
 
 iSiy irsn^ 
 
 y;ni^ D'li 
 
 ■ • • • xpnoi xpnr 
 • • • • "Tianai Np^i.T 
 
 To the above may be 
 added fli^? ("), which 
 is placed between two 
 or more words ; and ( i ) 
 3D^ metheg (see p. 22). 
 
 When this mark ( i )is 
 placed at the right of 
 sh'va, as in "'Hn, it is 
 called ^^V? gang-ya. 
 
 *There are some instances in which thisaccent is used as a conjunctive, 
 t Called also '^D'^^) and used sometimes as a distinctive of the 4th class.
 
 TlEimEW LANGUAGE. 81 
 
 § 2. — Nature, 1\se, and iMroirrANCE of 
 THE Accents. 
 
 1 . The Hebrews, like many other ancient nations, 
 were accustomed to accompany their public reading 
 with a kind of song or cluuit*. The accents were, 
 therefore, to them a species of musical notes by wliich 
 they regulated the particular moduhition of the voice 
 and intonations in reading. Hence the name rii3''3^ 
 n'gi-no'th, from p^, to plai/ on a musical instrument^ to 
 sing or chant. 
 
 2. But one of tlie principal uses of the accents is 
 to point out the syllable on which the stress of the 
 voice is to be Liid. In tliis respect they are similar to 
 our accents in the words hfhnan, Int/ji/tne, coun'tenance, 
 presume; with this difference, that in Hebrew, the ac- 
 cent can only be placed either on the last syllal)le, 
 termed vh^ beloiv, i.e. last; as, D^hSn* N-^S n\p\sn.5 
 B'rashl'th bara' elohi'm; or on the one before the 
 last, termed tVJ^ above, i. e. penultimate ; as, D''.pt^^ 
 sha-ma'-yim, ]*'y^ a'-rets, Ph tlirZ-hu, ^HS brZ-hfi, 
 
 * This custom, in as far as regards the public reading of particular 
 portions of Scripture, such as the law {Pentateuch)., Haphtoroth 
 {Sections from the Prophets), etc. is still retained by the Jews, who 
 accompany the reading of each of these portions by peculiar melo- 
 dies, regulated and represented by the accents. These melodies 
 being merely national, and having no influence on the sense of Scrip- 
 ture, cannot be of any use to the student.
 
 82 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 '^^n hr.'sliech, nn rn'ach, npnyp mVa-hd-feth, d^? 
 ma'-yim* (sec Gen. i. 1 — 2t). 
 
 The necessity of laying a stress on a particular svllable in words 
 consisting of more than one syllable, is obvious ; for without it, 
 such words could not be distinguished from monosyllables, and 
 would either have no meaning at all, or a different one from that 
 which the speaker might wish to convey. Thus, for instance, 
 manage would sound like man age ; acorn like a corn. Thus also 
 in Hebrew, V^^. ze-ra {seed), would sound like Vl nj., which would 
 signify, ' this is had.'' "IC^'^ ba-sa'r {flesh), would sound like 1*^* ^^3 
 which means, ' the prince came.' 
 
 3. In English, the accent frequently distinguishes 
 between nouns and verbs : as, to contract., a con' tract., 
 and often alters the meaning of words, as desert (a 
 wilderness), desert (merit). The same is the case in 
 Hebrew. Thus, n^"'3 bina'h, accented on the ulti- 
 mate, signifies understanding; but the same word 
 accented on the pe7iidtimate, ^Tjl bl'nah, signifies 
 understand thou, ""p^p kumi', signifies my rising ; but 
 "•^^p ku'mi, signifies rise thouK Thus also ""NS b5-i', 
 Tny coming., %'^ bo'I, come thoii^ ; 133 ba'nfi, with us ^ 
 lis banu', they did build ; TV\J2 ma'rah, she is hitter., 
 T\y2 mara'h, he resisted., rebelled. 
 
 * As the translations of these words have already been given 
 in pages 51,57, etc. it was not thought necessary to repeat them 
 here. 
 
 t In order not to distract the attention of the learner, we shall 
 confine our examples, whenever it can conveniently be done, to a 
 fev»f of the first chapters of Genesis.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 83 
 
 The preceding examples sufficiently show the necessity of attciid- 
 injj to the situation of the accent. But as the particular rules hy 
 which that situation may grammatically be known, cannot be well 
 understood without a previous acquaintance with the general structure 
 of the language, we shall reserve tlieni fur their proper places; and 
 notice only the two following: — 
 
 4. First Rule. All words terminating in n com- 
 pound s}dlable (p. 20), formed b}' a long vo^\el, lime 
 their accents on the last syllable : as, n'g^w^n?, ^^'hSn*, 
 Dinn, S^nn (Gen. i. 1—7).^ Of the same character 
 are the followini*- ^\^ords : /Hil qredt. ibp little, "lp3 
 a rive)\ ^HT f/^W, in!3, soon^ '^'^'^ blessed., "''''?? to learn., 
 n^i^ one that learns, 3iiy^ he shall forsale, ^mT\ 
 thou shalt rule., 733 over all. This, of course, com- 
 prehends all masculine and feminine plurals: as, 
 ri>S\!p lUihts, D'p^^ days. 
 
 This rule is founded on a principle maintained by grammarians: 
 viz. ' That vnacceiited long vowels cannot form a compound syllable.' 
 Hence, when, from causes to be hereafter explained, the terminating 
 syllable is deprived of its accent, being joined to the following word 
 bv ^i?^, or when the accent requires to be removed to the penulti- 
 mate*, the long vowel is changed, generally into its corresponding short 
 vowel : thus (t) into (-), ( •• ) into ( •• ), '"I into short (t), etc. 
 
 This will explain to the student wliy the same word often ap- 
 pears with different vowel points, without clianging its signification. 
 Thus, nX, r\^\ (Gen. i. 1.) have (••) under ^^, because they have the 
 accent, but in verse i, 7, etc. the same words are without the accent, 
 being joined to tiic words following them, and are, therefore, pointed 
 
 * As in n-ch from :^Y'r ^?.P- f'"^>'" ^9N ') "^^-^ instead ,"■) i 
 (See pag2 85.)
 
 84 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 "riS and not riX. It is the same with the word ?b chul, and "?3 
 chol, all (see Gen. i. 30). Also with the word "^TV^ ya-a-zob, 
 (Gen. ii.24.) and -'t^'pn tim-shol (Gen. iv. 7.) which otherwise would 
 have been njy;'., S>b'?pJil*. 
 
 5. Second Rule. All words consisting of, or 
 terminating in, two short vowels, the penultimate of 
 which is neither followed by dagesh nor sh'va final, 
 or, in other words, forming simple syllables (p. 20), 
 have their accent on the penultimate: as /nnn/J^HT 
 
 N^"^ /nSt^D'^D (Gen. i.) Of the same nature are the 
 following :^|^y. an eye, ^T\ the foot, VW two, D;3^* teeth, 
 JT'^ a house, 1>!^^ a gate, J.*!,! wi7ie, /y nighty |*^j^. sum- 
 mer, J^Il]^ seven. 
 
 This ride is founded on another principle maintained by ancient 
 grammarians : viz. That sliort voivels cannot forvi Sf/llables tinless 
 they are folloived hy dagesh or sh'va final. Hence, when neither of 
 these take place, the vowels must have either metheg or a principal 
 accent ; and whereas metheg cannot come on the penultimate syllable, 
 unless that syllable be succeeded by sh'va initial, it follows that 
 all such words, to which the preceding rule applies, must have the 
 accent. But this rule, though generally correct, is not without its 
 exceptions. 
 
 Observe. — That most of the accents as exhibited in the preceding 
 table, are placed on the syllable on which the stress of the voice is to 
 be laid. 
 
 * In cases where such changes would operate against some other 
 grammatical law, the long vowel is retained, but receives metheg: ex- 
 amples are '^^.^ (Gen. ii. 13. 14.) 1*;;^ (verse 13.) Tin (iv. 12.) 
 ■nj:' (iv.23.)etc.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 85 
 
 There are, however, some which arc always phxccd on the first 
 letter of the word : as, L ^'^<D, ~ ^^r'\. etc. and others which are 
 always placed on the last letter: as, IL ^"I^P, — ^P-^l^ etc. In all 
 such cases, the real place of the accents can only be known from 
 analogy. 
 
 — Npij? and >*9V"? have the same shape, but the former is always 
 placed on the tonic syllable, whether ultimate or penultimate, whilst 
 the latter comes on the last syllable ; and when analogy requires the 
 accent to be on the penultimate, then the 1. is repeated : as, -inn 
 (Gen. i. 2). 
 
 When words have two dissimilar accents, as DnyjOp"! (Gen. i. 15.) 
 the first is considered as metheg, and the second as the principal 
 accent. 
 
 To avoid the concurrence of two principal accents which would hap- 
 pen when words accented on the last syllable are followed by accented 
 monosyllables, or by dissyllables accented on the penultimate, the ac- 
 cent of the first word is frequently removed from the ultimate to the 
 penultimate*: as nS^^^^ S^ip^ (Gen.i. 5.) instead ofi^y^; J^IX 'Pim (Gen. 
 xii. 1-3.) instead ornhii^ ■ X; nnsn (Gen. xiii. 9.) instead of I^SH, 
 ( .. ) being changed into ( ... ). In some cases the first word is deprived 
 of its accent, and joined to the next by (') ^li?'? : as, t^'^^^"3Ty;: (Gen. 
 ii. 24.) instead of ^TJ!*., (1 ) being changed into short (o); ^?"'=|? (Gen. 
 xii. 1. (instead of '^/., (■• ) being changed into ("). See Observation 
 on Rule 1. p. 82. 
 
 § 3. — Use of the Accents in Showing the Relation 
 OF Words considered as Members of a 
 
 Sentence. 
 
 1. The second use of the accents is to show 
 tlie relation subsistino; between words considered as 
 
 =^ This is denominated "li"^:^ ^103 removed hack. 
 G 2
 
 8(> ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 members of a sentence or period. In this respect 
 they are divided into conjunctives and distinctives 
 (see the Table). The conjunctives have this in 
 common, that they indicate a close connection be- 
 tween the word accented with either of them, and 
 that which innnediately follows it, as may be seen 
 from the following examples : Q^ri^^ "l^^^*"! and God 
 said, '^y^ '•n^. there shall he light, ~ii^ ^H^'T a^id it was 
 light, S^nSx K"7*1 and God saio (Gen. i). 
 
 2. The distinctives represent pauses of various 
 degrees, according to the order in which they are 
 classed in the Table. 
 
 The precise nature of these pauses cannot exactly be defined, as 
 some of them frequently indicate longer or shorter pauses, according' 
 to the places which they occupy in a sentence ; but speaking gene- 
 rally, they may, in some respect, be compared to our marks of 
 punctuation ; and this in the following manner : — 
 
 Those contained in No. 1 (p. 79), represent the 
 greatest pauses, somewhat similar to our Period and 
 Colon. 
 
 No. 2. . . . Colon & Semicolon. 
 No. 3. . . . Semicolon & Comma. 
 No. 4. . . . Comma & Semicomma. 
 
 3. The accents comprehended in No. 1 and 2, are 
 the most important, because they point out the simple 
 sentences of which a compound sentence may happen 
 to consist, as well as the principal members: thus.
 
 IIF.BRKW LANGUAGE. 87 
 
 p1?p accompanied by (J) marks the end of tlic verse*, 
 whether the verse contains one or more propositions : 
 
 as, : y^W Oi)] yT-'n]) nnj^-^n;,! And-there-was- 
 eyening and-there-ivas-nwrnhKj the-third day (Gen. 
 
 i. 13.) nin; ^yya \n x)lJ2 nbi But-Noah fmmd 
 
 grace in-tlie-eyes of the Lord (Gen. iv. 8.) 
 
 I^^*'^ (0 marks the next principal division, and 
 generally occnrs in verses containing two or more dis- 
 tinct propositions : as, "lix-^nn niN* 'r\\ V^% nCXn. 
 And-God-said^ Let-there-be light; and-tliere-was light 
 (Gen. i. 3). See also the next verse. 
 
 Sometimes, liowever, ( -^ ) is placed oiilv by way of emphasis (see 
 Gen.i. 1), where ^^j?^^ has the accent, although the verse contains 
 only one proposition. 
 
 7iJD (.-. ) marks the next principal division, and 
 generally occnrs in verses containing three distinct 
 propositions. 
 
 'A?''^'.)- V'.[i;k W^- Ti^- ^'.^^ r^^ v:pi^^ 
 
 And God made the expanse; and lie divided between the 
 icaters which were under the expanse, and between the 
 waters ichich icere above the expanse: and it was so 
 (Gen.i. 7). 
 
 * There arc, however, instances in which p-I^^D marks the end of 
 a verse without the sense bcint^ comjdcted (see Gen. xxiii. 17).
 
 88 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 It is likewise often placed before a parenthesis (see 
 Gen. i. 28. ii. 23), and has very frequently the force 
 of a comma only. The other four indicate sometimes 
 greater and sometimes lesser divisions, according to 
 their situation, regulated chiefly by the length and 
 shortness of the verse, as the learner may perceive, 
 by perusing the phrases in which they are found*. 
 
 The principal distinctive accents, and especially 
 p^7p (') and n^IlNI (a)^ in consequence of the pauses 
 which they produce, frequently change sh'va into 
 a vowel, and the short vowels into long ones: as, 
 
 ^;k-^jx /; nri«-nnx thou ; ^^r'V-^ % i'^<^nd; p«- 
 
 p5<; DW-DW; Dp-D^^ (Gen. i). 
 
 The preceding observations, it is hoped, will be found sufficient 
 to give the learner a general idea of the Hebrew accents. To enter 
 into further detail on a subject so intricate would be a waste of time 
 and labour. I shall, therefore, conclude this article with a few 
 examples, showing the use of the accents in determining the sense 
 of particular passages. 
 
 1. riin^ "l^X*1 (Gen. iv. 6) signifies, 'And the Lord said,' 
 because "1^N*1 has a conjunctive accent, which shows it to be 
 closely connected with the following word : but the same words, 
 riinpte (Gen. xxiv. 12) signify, 'And he said, Lord!' 
 
 * Thus, Zakaph katon upon V^P!"}^ represents a greater pause 
 than the same accent upon 0\'lpr\ (Gen. i. 7). See also verse 2, 
 Gen i., where this accent on the word -inbj is equivalent to our 
 colo», but on Q'H^^^: in the same verse, it is only equivalent to our 
 
 coiniita.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 80 
 
 because IfpS'l* has a distinctive accent, showing it to be disjoined 
 from tlie following word, and forming a phrase by itself. 
 
 2. <^^^ iO (Gen. xxiv. 33) with a conjunctive accent on ^^p, 
 signifies, 'I will not eat;' but the same words with a distinctive 
 accent on N? : thus ?3i< N7, would signify, ' xYo, / will eat ' (see 
 Gen. xviii. 15, 21. xix. 2). 
 
 3. *?JJJ OnnnX 15y,lp'UGen. xxiv. 34) without the accents, 
 might either signify ' Aiul the servant of Abraham said, I am,' etc. 
 or ' And he said, the servant of Abraham I am,'' i. e. and he (Eleazer) 
 said, I am Abraham's servant. The distinctive accents on "ipx'l 
 and on ''33X show that the last is the true meaning. 
 
 4. 7'^!!?^n '^^c'^D might signify, ' the redeeming angel;' but 
 ^n'K ?N'3n -|- "^frsp^n (Gen. xlviii. 16) signifies, ' The angel who 
 redeemed me.'' In the former case, the conjunctive accent on '=l^?'?'l 
 would show it to be closely connected with /^^SD, as every qualifying 
 word is with that which it qualifies or defines. In the second ex- 
 ample, the accent ( A ) shows that "=1^?'Il' is less connected with 
 pNiin than this word is with ""riX- 
 
 5. D""j'3sn •in-vj;n':i oyDC'S rribn |p -isn npy;. '':.:?-i 
 
 (Gen. xxxiv. 7). Whether the word 01(9^? belongs to the pre- 
 ceding or to the following clause, cannot be determined by the text, 
 but the ( A ) on this w'ord shows that the authors of the accents had 
 
 * The (- ) under ?o is in consequence of the distinctive accent. 
 
 t This accent, though placed in the Table amongst the conjunc- 
 tives, is frequently used as a distinctive, and generally shows that 
 the connection between it and tlic word which follows it, is not so 
 close as that which subsists between the following and that which 
 comes immediately after it.
 
 00 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 considered it as separate from tiie following clauses*, and that the 
 sense is as given in the Established Version: viz. '■And the itons of 
 Jacob ccDiic out of the Jickl when (or, as soon as) thei/ heard it: and 
 the men,' etc. 
 
 6. n^S? Sl^t? rirn!?y^ r\ir^\ (Gen. viii. 2,) might either signify, 
 ' and behold a torn olive leaf in her mouth;' or, ' and behold an olive 
 lea f torn (i. e. plucked off) ivith her inouth.^ The distinctive accent 
 ( «. ) on n.^J and the conjunctive accent ( •» ) on ^'}'0 show that the 
 second is the true meaning of the text : intimating that it was not a 
 floating leaf torn by the waves, but one ivhich the dove had jjlucked 
 off] and from which circumstance Noah concluded that the waters 
 were abated. 
 
 7. Without the accents it would be doubtful whether ?11|n 
 (Gen. X. 21 ) relates to C£^' or to riQ^.; but tlie conjunctive accent 
 under HQ^. shows that it is closely connected with ?i"I5n, and that 
 7i"15n ns*. "'nx ought to be rendered ' the brother of Japheth the 
 elder," as it is in the Established Version ; and not ' the elder brother 
 of Japheth,' -f as some translators have rendered it. For were this 
 the meaning of the text, the accents ought to have been thus, 
 ^171'^ DQ*. '•^^{ which, however, is not the case. 
 
 * In the Jerusalem Talmud (Tract Avodah Zarah) this word 
 (oyOti'D) is indeed added to the list of words which, according to 
 the Talmudists, VIj^k} Dn? ps have no preponderance, i. e, are un- 
 determinable, as they may belong to either part of a sentence ; it is, 
 however, evident from our present system of accentuation, that its 
 authors were of a different opinion. 
 
 t Thus Vater and other German translators, ' der dltere Bruder 
 des Japhet.^ But as in all doubtful cases the authors of the accents 
 ought to have some weight, I prefer, in this instance, the rendering 
 as "iven in the Established Version.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 91 
 
 Simple Phrases, in ichich the pronouns and the Verb 
 TO BE are exemplified. 
 
 ♦ '">J3 "'nriXV"''^''nX ^piv^ I-[am] %-father, a«fMhou-[art] 
 
 Jiif/son. 
 
 ' '^'^J^S -"J^i^l ^^^i< ^pJX I-[am] %-mother, rt»^Mhou-[art] 
 
 ?H^ daughter. 
 
 • ^'nins; m) ^^^''n.S ^;i^ I- [am] %. brother, ««cMhou-[art] 
 
 mi/-s\ster. 
 
 * "^^X N*^ni ''IN* t^^n He- [is] ?«7/-father, a«(Z-she-[is] 
 
 w;_y- mother. 
 
 • ^32 N^m i^X X^n She- [is] his-moXher, an(l-hc-[k] 
 
 Iier-non. 
 
 • ^J'^nN* nnXl '" ^''^33 l^niS* We-[are] %-sons. fl;K/-thou- [art] 
 
 oi/r- father. 
 
 ♦ ^JninS* ;;iX1 '^^nX ^IDNJ We-[are] ?%-brother5, aml-thoa- 
 
 [art] o(;r-sister. 
 
 * ''niJ3 ^ 1^1X1 "^^a '"CJ^lt^ Ye- [are] ;/;.y-som',a«(Z ye- [are] //(//- 
 
 daughters. 
 
 • l^'nii^ 'pi T:^ '"On They-[are]/^/s-sons,micZ-they-[are] 
 
 ///s-daughtens. 
 
 n^ni "Pp^^l '"n^ri They-[are] i/oitr-sons, and-they- 
 ./&2^|-,i»^ [are] ?/0H?'-daughters, 
 
 ♦ "'53'^;iNt iXni '" D5^X X\n She- [is] ?/ow-mother, ««J-he-[is] 
 
 yoiw father. 
 
 The terminations marked'" are used when the person or 
 persons addressed, or to whom the possessive pronouns relate, are of 
 the Mascuhne Gender; those marked^'^are Feminine; and the rest are 
 common to both Genders. 
 
 a 3S a father. ^ I? a son. '^ D^< a mother, 
 
 '' ri3 (I daughter. *• nx « brother. ' nhx a sister.
 
 92 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 • yri3 ^nX?1 ^Jn '" HT Tlii.s-[is] o»r-son,rt?icZ-this-[is] our- 
 
 dauglr.er. 
 
 *"^|0'^nvSin'p.^V"Sn''33n^X These-[are] tlieir-sons, cmd-these- 
 
 [are] </;e//'-brothei'.s'. 
 
 : nt^'iS i^^rn. SJ'^* X^n lle-[is a] man, OHfZ-she-[is a] wo- 
 man. 
 
 tnSTN^n X^n ty^NH nn.X Thou-rartl <Ae-man. She-[is]</i3 
 
 woman. 
 
 tnxTnnnr^n Tin ny^n Tins^bov'. This^gh-ii. 
 
 T-;i — V - "^1 — ' o 
 
 :niy3n nxi • ny^n ni This-[is] the-hov. This-[is] the- 
 
 girl, 
 niiy^^n • riVii.i^ BnS;^^ These-' boys'. These^ girLi. 
 
 " t nWs*n 
 
 ninj;3n nW ' S'^'ny^n n^X These- [are] the-hoys. These- [are] 
 
 ^/;c-girls. 
 
 : H35 n}) HL^'XH n^^T This-[is] the-woman, fm J-this- [i,-] 
 
 /;er-son. 
 
 : n^j;n IT X^l 1]l"in ni XS This2-[is] noti the-w&y, neither-[is] 
 
 this the-city". 
 
 : n] no ♦ nr ^o ^vho-[is] this? what- [is] this? 
 
 : J2 "D'0, ^0 What /i«re-/-done to-thee ? 
 
 : nW HD • nXT HD what- [is] this ? who- [are] these? 
 
 '♦'"^ptJ^ ni3 • nnX ^p who- [art] thou? What- [is] %- 
 
 name ? 
 
 : nX ^0 ^12 Whose daughter- [art] thou ? ^ 
 ♦ ap^^n riT ^p |5 whose son-[is]thisladV<= 
 : 'm Hw^^ nS^iS* ^\^n r/^e-man who saw me. 
 
 * m. Z, Not this the way, and not this the city. 
 
 •* 7n. L Daughter who thou ? '^ in. I. Son who this ///e-lad ?
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 03 
 
 : rj!! "It^'{< n^!in The-\wn»e which hc-built. 
 : jbj"D nyp. ^;)iNt I- [am a] little'-' boy^. 
 
 : niirjp niri ^:Di^^ H'^^ a] litties gh-p. 
 
 T - |. T-:i- • T 
 : D!Dn D'^5< ^^n^< Thou- [art aj wise'' man^ 
 
 T T T - 
 
 : Sn| TjSp ^^^n He- [is a] grcaf king^. 
 
 : nOnn nS^'iS* N^n She-[is al wlse^ woman^ 
 
 : B'^X^V^ B''?^."'. ^^n^X We-[arc] hungry r/«(/-thirsty. 
 
 : riDnX* nny n^n |;D Cainwas[a]tiller-r/[the]-ground. 
 
 : ^f\~b2 DN* nn^n n^n Eve was mother-o/'all-living. 
 
 : p.^3 ''^^,^!l ")i! 7-//r/«-been'^ [a]-stranger> in-the- 
 land". 
 
 : '^J^ C'^^"^ '^^"^ Where //f/s<-</<rm-been, ?«?/-son? 
 
 : ^n3 ri''\1 nb^N where /K/s^</io«-been, wy-daugh- 
 '■•■■' " ter ? 
 
 : ^3'?nX n^52 ^J^^n ll^^e-Z/are-been zn-^/^e-house-o/oK?-- 
 
 brother. 
 
 : n^n Dip^a Bri^^n lV/«a-e-been2/;2-<///^^-place-. 
 : n^D' tri'\1 nS re-/(afC-^not^bceiv* there. 
 J nb ^"n ITliil^ V}^ IHssons cuid-Ias-daughters were- 
 
 T T ; T T , 
 
 here. 
 
 J P|P5 ''^7 "^.'! There-is to-me silver, i.e. I have 
 silver. 
 
 : '"^HT ^^— — to- ///cc gold, /.c. thou hast gold. 
 
 " Strictly speaking. ^'^. signifies ' there exists,' and T^^ ' there exists 
 not.' 
 
 '' The dative Pronouns arc frequently used to denote possession 
 without the word ^''.V
 
 94 ELEMENTS OF THE 
 
 5 nti'n3 ']7 l^'' There-is to-thce copper, i.e. thou 
 hast copper. 
 
 J 7l'n^ T7 — — Xo-hiiii iron, i. e. he has iron. 
 J 7''*73 Pr) — — io-her tin, i. e. she has tin. 
 
 ♦ rri^y ^J 7 — — io-us lead, i. e. we have lead. 
 
 ♦ n';3 '" ^37 — — to-yon [a]-house, i. e. you have 
 
 " ■' ^ a house. 
 
 ♦ B^riS ■''15^ — — io-i/ou houses, i.e. you have 
 
 houses. 
 
 ♦ I^V ""BH^ — — to-//<eHi fa] -slave, i. e. thev have 
 
 J S^^^y 1^7 — — to-them slaves, i.e. they have 
 
 • T -: ' V T , 
 
 slaves, 
 
 ♦ nX i/ ^'^n Is-there to-him [a]-brother, i. e. 
 "" ""•" has he a brother? 
 
 } |3 1/ ^^'n Is-there to-him [a]-son, i. e. has 
 he a son } 
 
 : ipT 3i< ^J7"2y^ There-is to-«s' an a<?ed+ father'-, 
 /. e. we have an aged father. 
 
 ♦ '^^P} ^^ ^7-^> There-is to-me an aged* mother^, 
 i. e. I have an aged mother. 
 
 J IB V pK There-is-not to-?«e [a]-son, i. e. I 
 have not a son. 
 
 J nS 1^7 yn There-is-not to-Z^er [a]-daughter, 
 i. e. she has not a daughter. 
 
 ♦ "T^r'^ I-? ^''^ 1^ To-him was [an]-onIy-'' son-^, i. e. 
 he had an only son. 
 
 : riTn^ n!l f^n'^ri P^h To-Z^erwasran^onlv^dauo-hter^ i.e. 
 
 JT'*~ T'ITT l-_l ^ O ' 
 
 she had an only daughter. 
 
 : i*^ Vn B^S"] D^JS Many sons were to-him, i. e. he 
 
 had many sons. 
 
 : B'^nX "17 VT\ N 7 Not^ to-him' were- brothers, i. e. he 
 had no brothers.
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE. 05 
 
 : nb/u^7 n^n £"715 [A] -vineyard [tliere]-was to-Solo- 
 
 • ' ^^ "*' nion, 2.6. Solomon luid a vinevard. 
 
 , t=«_ ss-^t, h^?:5*T5^ flilti^ Fields and vineyard.? shaU-he to- 
 
 ' ': : r ■ ^: '' tJice, I. e. thou blnilt have fields 
 
 and vineyards. 
 
 : *^J3y V^ ^h T/u\ij-v,'eve' not' vvith-?rte. 
 
 : isy '■ riTifi nnx Thou'" s/K^/<-bc with-Zim. 
 
 : hl?:3V •'■''"'nn n^> Thou-^,s//a/M)e \vit]i-/<ev. 
 
 : 1]^y n^n'' N^n He-,v/u<//-be with /Aec^. 
 
 : ^Jf^y r\^r't\ X\"I she .s/za/Z-be with- «s. 
 
 :B3^;' n^nj ^:n: we s/^r///-be with-yo^-. 
 
 : Sn^y VT]P) UP\^ You'" s/iall-he with-tlnm"'. 
 
 J |n?2y_ nj''^Pf1 |ri>* You^sAa/Z-bewith-^/^em-^. 
 
 : tSSy Vn'' Dn They'" shall-he with-you^. 
 
 : ^jriN* nj^^nn |n Thev .s//«//-be with-«5. 
 
 : n^nri y\"1^ BlesseiV thou-skalt-he"'. 
 
 : n.^nri np^l3 Slie-idU-hQ- blessed'-'. 
 
 : Dpn n^.n^ N*^n He /a7/-be-[a]-wise-[man]. 
 
 : nn ^:57 ]'i03 Vrr^. r/(ey-5/////M)e r/s-chafrbefore [the]- 
 
 wind. 
 
 : ■' rii3DSx nj^^nri " DS^tJ^J ro»?--wives s/;a//-be widows. 
 
 "" Will or shall be. '" Wilt or shalt be, etc. 
 
 «: Wm icomen. '^ HJD^S a icidow.
 
 <)r, ELEMENTS OF HEBREW. 
 
 : D'^jVUN^ DX " T]''T\ '^^'3, Ml/son be [a]-fatlier to-the-needy. 
 
 ; V T T ••-.•; • ; 
 
 J B''*iy7 DX '"•Tl ^ri3 i/^-duughter be [a]-motlier io-^/ig- 
 ""•'" ■■ ' "■• ' " poor. 
 
 : B''ihnx vnr\ n^S AVhy icm-mu-he kst. 
 
 : HTT' DDnn VIV ^f2 who knows-Uchethery he-rvill-he* 
 
 wise-*. 
 
 J r\0^ r? n^nn X7 nousham not^ be- unto-/<mi as- 
 
 «-creditor. 
 
 • '" nST^n T]^jr\1_ ^\yi The-altar^ shall-he' square'. 
 
 J B'^tSyi^D I'^O^Vn''. ///s-days^ 5/iaZ^bei few^. 
 
 : Brii3iS*5 ^^n^ H7 neyshnir-notn^e^-as-their-Mhers. 
 
 t rrri^l rrin rrri mn** The Lord was, is, andshall-he. 
 
 ' j?. m. -Vn Je ^e, '' p-f- '^J)-.--?} ^^^ye- 
 
 THE END. 
 
 J. Wertheimciand Co., Printers, Circus Place, Finsbury Circus
 
 ; 
 
 THE 
 
 ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX 
 
 (in continuation of the elements) 
 
 OF 
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE, 
 
 BY HYMAN HURWITZ, 
 
 professor of HEBREW IN UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, LONDON, AUl IIOR 
 OF VINDICI.K HEBRAIC.E, HEDREW TALES, ETC. 
 
 i!ri)(rt €Dltion.— Jiljbistti ant) (Snlarscfi. 
 
 LONDON: 
 PRINTED FOR TAYLOR AND WALTON, 
 
 BOOKSELLERS AND PUBLISHERS TO UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, 
 28, UPPER COWER STREET. 
 
 M DCCC.XLl.
 
 LONDON: 
 
 I'RINTED BV JOHN WERTHEIMER AND CO., 
 
 CIKCU8 PLACE, KINSBURY CIRCUS.
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 To enable the learner to read and write the Hebrew 
 Language with comparative ease was the chief ob- 
 ject of the First Part of this work. The road to the 
 venerable structure having thus been cleared, the 
 student may now imagine himself standing at its 
 portal, waiting for an introduction to the interior, and 
 a right of admission to the sacred treasures which it 
 contains. To afford him this passport, and, if we 
 may vary the metaphor, to pl^ce in his possession 
 the keys by which the several caskets are to be 
 opened, is the aim of the following pages. They 
 unfold the Etymology and Syntax of the 
 Language. 
 
 A mere catalogue of the names of Authors who 
 have written on Hebrew Grammar, with the titles of 
 their works, would occupy no scanty chapter in a 
 Bibliographic Dictionary. To promise therefore any 
 novelty, in respect of the usual forms common to all 
 Grammars, would be both idle and presumptuous. 
 Let it suffice to say, that after a careful perusal of 
 the standard works, the Author ventures to affirm,
 
 IV 
 
 that nothing of the least apparent practical importance 
 or utility in the volumes of i5ew Gamiach, Jarclii, Ahen 
 Ezi^a, M, and D. Kimchiy Abraham de Babnes, Elias 
 Levita, Ben Zechy 8^c., BiLvtorf, G/assius, Schult'ens, 
 Michaelis, Vater, Geseniiis, 8<;c., has been overlooked. 
 Neither have any of their decisions been neglected, 
 but after due thought, and from a conviction that they 
 were either erroneous, or foreign from the purpose of 
 the present work. If I might advance any pretension 
 to novelty, it would be in reference to a higher object, 
 to a more permanent interest; namely, that of making 
 a knowledge of the Hebrew Language conducive to a 
 philosophic insight into the structure and essential 
 principles of language universally. Deeply convinced 
 that words are the signs of men's tlioughts, and not, as 
 grammarians one after the other have agreed to assert, 
 the representatives of tilings, I have omitted no oppor- 
 tunity of impressing this truth on the student's atten- 
 tion ; and instead of contenting myself with that 
 artificial classification or arrangement which assists 
 indeed the passive memory, but, when exclusively 
 relied on, tends to depress the higher powers, I have 
 endeavoured to re-infuse into the words the living 
 spirit by which they were once animated ; opening 
 out the rich and productive, though comparatively 
 few, sources, from which they are derived, still split- 
 ting and ramifying, under the various modifying 
 causes and influences. With this view, I have sought 
 to fix the attention, first, on the primary image, and
 
 then on the derivative signification ; and to exhibit 
 the influence of the former on the latter, which is too 
 often overlooked by the Translators, and lost in the 
 idiom of a difl'erent language. ''Accustom yourself," 
 observes the well-known author of the Aids to Re- 
 flection, " to reflect on the words you use, hear, or 
 read, their birth, derivation and history. For if 
 words are not things, they are living powers, by 
 which the things of most importance to mankind are 
 actuated, combined and humanized."* "Home 
 Tooke entitled his celebrated work, ETrta irTipotma, 
 Winged Words: or language not only the ve/ncle of 
 thought, but its wheels. The wheels of the intellect 
 I admit them to be; but such as Ezekiel beheld in 
 ' the visions of God,' as he sate amongst the captives 
 by the river of Chebar. ' Whithersoever the spirit 
 was to go, the wheels went, and thither was their 
 spirit to go: for the spirit of the living creatures was in 
 the wheels also.' " t 
 
 In short, throughout the whole work I have de- 
 signedly addressed myself to the active faculties of 
 the intellect, rather than to the mere memory ; yet not 
 on this account neglecting, or less solicitous, to fur- 
 nish the student with whatever aids may abridge his 
 labour or tend to facilitate his progress. 
 
 The Hebrew is generally considered the most 
 simple of all languages. If by simplicity is meant 
 
 * Prefarc p. xi. -j~ Ihiil. yy. vii. viii.
 
 VI 
 
 the simplicity of sentiment or of style, nothing can 
 be more just. In the Sacred Records you find none 
 of those 
 
 swelling epithets thick laid 
 
 As vai'iiish on a harlot's cheek, the rest 
 Thin sown with aught of profit or delight. — 
 
 In them is plainest taught and easiest learnt, 
 What makes a nation happy and keeps it so. 
 
 Paradise Regained. 
 
 But when the term simplicity is applied, as it often 
 is, to the words of the language, and when simple is 
 opposed to compound, nothing can be more erroneous. 
 In point of fact, scarcely can a single sentence be 
 shown, in which the greater part of the words are not 
 compounds, that is, composed of the principal word 
 and of one or more modificatory letters, the relics or 
 abbreviations of other words: and as the latter, 
 though not numerous, are susceptible of various com- 
 binations, the same word will often appear under a 
 variety of aspects, lo the perplexity of the young 
 student, and, not rarely, even of the advanced scholar. 
 These difficulties I have endeavoured to remove — 
 
 1.?^. By explaining the modificatory letters, shew- 
 ing their derivations, distinct signification, and the 
 manner in which they are either prefixed or affixed 
 to the principal words. 
 
 2fid. By presenting, throughout the etymological 
 part, the modificatory letters, in a type diff'ering from
 
 vu 
 
 tluit ut' the principal words, by which means the 
 learner may easily find out the root of each. 
 
 3?'d. By various tables, exhibiting at one view the 
 principal modifications of which each of the essential 
 parts of speech is susceptible. 
 
 4t/i. By short and appropriate exercises. — These, 
 whilst they will in some measure break the tedium 
 more or less inseparable from grammatical studies, 
 may at the same time serve as a criterion by which 
 the student may ascertain his own progress. 
 
 In treating of the different parts of speech. Orien- 
 talists generally begin with the verb. I have, how- 
 ever, preferred the method adopted in teaching the 
 European languages, as that to which the student 
 may be supposed to be already accustomed. The 
 same consideration has influenced me in the arrange- 
 ment of the different parts of the verb. Those who 
 are in the habit of teaching the Hebrew language, 
 know how embarrassing it is to the learner to begin to 
 conjugate a verb from what appears to him the wrong- 
 end, namely the third person instead of the first. In 
 this work, therefore, the verb has been placed in the 
 order which it occupies in the grammars of modern 
 languages. No inconvenience can possibly arise 
 from these alterations, as the general structure of the 
 language is so fully explained in the introductory 
 chapter to the Etymology. 
 
 In what regards the Syntax, the Author hopes that 
 it will be found as plain and as comprehensive as the
 
 VIU 
 
 nature of the subject would admit. The introductory 
 chapter to this part of the work should be read with 
 particular attention, as it contains the principles on 
 which most of the rules are founded. 
 
 Though it is highly advisable that the learner 
 should at first confine his reading to the Sacred Re- 
 cords, yet it is desirable that he should, after having 
 made sufficient progress, become acquainted with 
 the uninspired writings of the Hebrews. With this 
 view, several extracts from scarce books are given in 
 the Appendix. A few specimens of translations from 
 various languages have been inserted, to show the 
 capabilities of the language. 
 
 Lastly, an Index, containing most of the words 
 explained in this work, has been added; forming an 
 extensive Vocabulari/ of the language, and supplying 
 in some measure, the want of a Dictionary. 
 
 On the whole, the Author hopes he may be allowed 
 to say, that by availing himself of the labours of those 
 who have preceded him in the same career, and by 
 the unwearied attention which he has himself be- 
 stowed on the subject, he has been able to condense 
 in this volume more useful and interesting informa- 
 tion on the Hebrew Language, than is to be found in 
 any similar work of equal extent. 
 
 University College, London, 
 January, 1841.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Nature of Words and their Classification 1 to 5 
 
 Derivation 6 „ 13 
 
 Roots 14 „ Hi 
 
 Conjugation 17 „ 18 
 
 Form of Words 18 „ 20 
 
 Manner of Forming Substantives from Verbs 20 „ 28 
 
 Inflection and ^Modification of Words 28 „ 33 
 
 Nouns and their Modifications 33 ,, 35 
 
 Prefixes 35 „ 40 
 
 Affixes 41 „ 43 
 
 Gender 44 „ 47 
 
 Number 48 „ 52 
 
 Case 53 
 
 Absolute and Constructive State of Words 54 „ 38 
 
 Explanation of Tables, I. II. III. IV. bS „ GO 
 
 Change of Vowels in the Process of Declension GO „ G2 
 
 Immutable and Mutable Vowels G2 ,, 63 
 
 Classification of Nouns G3 „ 84 
 
 Adjectives and their Variations 85 „ 87 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives 87 ., 89 
 
 Numerals 89 „ 94 
 
 Pronouns O.t 
 
 b
 
 X CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Personal Pronouns, Table IX 96 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns 97 to 98 
 
 Relative Pronouns 99 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns 100 „ 1 03 
 
 Primitive and Derivative Verbs 103 „ 104 
 
 Character and Signification of the Several Forms or | ,^^ , „„ 
 
 Branches of the Verb, as Kal, Niphal, ^-c ^ " 
 
 Moods and Tenses 109 „ 110 
 
 Participles 114 „ 115 
 
 Paradigm of a Perfect Verb, 1st Conjugation, Table X. 113 
 
 Remarks and Observations on the same 116 „ 122 
 
 Verbs whose roots contain one of the letters V n n X 122 „ 128 
 
 2nd Conjugation 128 „ 130 
 
 3rd ditto 130,, 133 
 
 4th ditto 134 „ 137 
 
 5th ditto 137 „ 142 
 
 6th ditto 142 „ 144 
 
 7th ditto 144 „ 148 
 
 The Verb rvr\ to he, and H^^n to live 148 „ 150 
 
 8th Conjugation 150 „ 155 
 
 Tables, XI. XII. XIII. XIV. 155 
 
 Doubly Imperfect Verbs 156 „ 161 
 
 Irregular Verbs •• 161 „ 162 
 
 Quadriliteral and Pluriliteral Verbs 1 62 „ 163 
 
 Objective Pronominal Affixes 165 „ 166 
 
 Tables XV. XVI ]66 
 
 Separable and Inseparable Particles 167 „ 173 
 
 Introductory Observations on the Syntax, Nature^ 
 
 of Prepositions and their Constituent Parts .... ) " 
 
 On the Several Kinds of Propositions 180 „ 186 
 
 Subordinate Members of ditto 186 „ 187 
 
 Pleonasms j 3g 
 
 Ellipsis 13g 
 
 Syntax of the Noun and the Article 189 „ 1 93
 
 CONTENTS. xi 
 
 Page. 
 
 Cases 193 to 199 
 
 Number 199 „ 201 
 
 Repetition of Nouns 201 „ 202 
 
 Syntax of Adjectives 202 „ 203 
 
 of Numerals 203 „ 20S 
 
 of Pronouns 208 „ 212 
 
 of the Verb .TH 212 „ 214 
 
 Tenses 215 „ 220 
 
 Application of the Tenses 220 ,, 227 
 
 Moods 227 „ 231 
 
 Imperative Mood 231 „ 233 
 
 Subjunctive and Potential Moods 233 „ 234 
 
 Participles 234 „ 236 
 
 Concord of the Verb 236 „ 239 
 
 Government of the Verb 239 „ 241 
 
 Particles 241 „ 249 
 
 Arrangement of Words 249 „ 236 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 I. Folly of Idolatry 259 „ 260 
 
 II. Origin of Ditto 260 „ 261 
 
 III. Wisdom 262 „ 263 
 
 IV. Copy of a Letter from the Roman Senate ) gp^ ^„, 
 
 to the Jews y " 
 
 V. Ditto from Jonathan the High Priest to) ^^^ ^„^ 
 
 the Spartans 3 
 
 VI. Tales from the Talmud 267 „ 268 
 
 VII. Fables 268 „ 269 
 
 VIII. Anecdotes 269 „ 270 
 
 IX. Moral Maxims 271 „ 272 
 
 X. A Metrical Paraphrase of the 8th Psalm-... 272 „ 274 
 
 XI. Truth 274 „ 275 
 
 XII. Hope and Fear 275 „ 276 
 
 XIII. The Contented Shepherd 276 „ 277
 
 xii CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 XIV. Rules of Life 278 
 
 XV. The Metamorphosed Physician 279 
 
 XVI. Philanthropy 280 to 281 
 
 XVII. De Consolatione Philosophise 282 „ 283 
 
 XVIII. God Save the King 284 „ 287 
 
 XIX. La Tourterelle, &c. 287 
 
 XX. Morgen-Gedanken 288 „ 292 
 
 XXL La Part en za 292 „ 298 
 
 XXII. Sonetto del Marini 298 „ 299 
 
 XXIII. Non Ebur, neque Aureum 300 „ 301 
 
 Register of Words. 303 „ 313
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Introductory Observations. 
 
 1. EtYxAiology is that part of grammar which 
 treats of the derivation of words, and of their classi- 
 fication and modifications in connection with their 
 derivation. 
 
 Nature of Words and their Classification. 
 
 2. Words are articulate sounds which mankind 
 use as signs of mental conceptions and thoughts ; and 
 language* is the denomination given to the collective 
 number of words by which human thoughts are 
 conveyed. 
 
 3. As the representative of thoughts, language 
 must contain signs corresponding with the various 
 
 * In Hebrew flK'? tongue, or HQB' Up^ these being the chief organs 
 employed in the production of articulate sounds. 
 
 n
 
 4 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 species of conceptions which the mind is capable of 
 forming ; and since all human beings are similarly 
 organised, and consequently subject to similar im- 
 pressions, — since they are all endowed with similar 
 intellectual faculties, by which they are enabled not 
 only to notice those impressions and consequent 
 feelings, but likewise to trace them to their correspon- 
 dents in nature, and thus to become acquainted 
 at once with the phenomena of nature and of their 
 own minds, — in short, since human thoughts differ 
 only in degree, but not in kind, and all languages 
 are only so many different copies taken from the 
 same original, it follows that the words or signs of 
 which languages are constituted must all admit of 
 the same classification ; and, consequently, that the 
 Hebrew can have neither fewer nor more essential 
 parts of speech than the English or any other lan- 
 guage. 
 
 4. The most philosophical classification of words 
 is perhaps the following : — 
 
 [a] — Such as indicate the objects of thoughts, or 
 the subjects of discourse. This class comprehends 
 the names of beings with which the mind becomes 
 acquamted through the senses; as, ^iX iigbt, t^^liuhid, 
 ^^ Jire, y]^, a tree, Sec, or by its own intellectual 
 faculties, as Sx God, nn a spirit, r\2mf2 thouofit, 
 reflection.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 5 
 
 [b] — Such as serve to express whatever is atfirmed 
 respecting the objects of contemplation. This chiss 
 comprehends verbs, or words denoting action, pas- 
 sion, being, or modes of existence, whether physical 
 or intellectual : as, t|l"l to pursue, ^"ll^ he or it was 
 pursued, '2\i^r\ to reflect, think, iScc. H^n to be, to exist, 
 '&\^ to be red, DDH he was wise, /l^ to be great. 
 
 [c] — Such as serve to qualify or to particularise 
 either the subject or the predicate when they happen 
 to be general terms. This class comprehends Ad- 
 jectives, Adverbs and Definitives.* 
 
 [r/] — Such as serve to indicate the relations of 
 things ; or words, in which the expression of general 
 relations has superseded or diverted the attention of 
 the mind from their primary particular meaning — 
 viz., the relation of origin, dependency, cause, pur- 
 pose, medium, instrumentality, similitude, junction, 
 &c. This class comprehends Prepositions and Con- 
 junctions. 
 
 [e] — Such as indicate particular affections or emo- 
 tions, as, joy, sorrow, exultation, surprise, &c.t 
 
 * It will be shewn in the progress of the work, that the words 
 included in this and in the following class are, in reality, Nouns, 
 or Verbs, used for the particular purposes described ; so that, 
 strictly speaking, these two alone are the most essential parts of 
 speech. 
 
 t Many grammarians will not allow Interjections to be called a 
 part of speech, considering them as mere instinctive or mechanical 
 ejaculations. That they are so, when uttered under the immediate 
 impulse of passion, cannot be denied ; but as they are frequently 
 
 b2
 
 6 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 As the student is, however, supposed to be already 
 familiar with the usual grammatical classification, we 
 shall retain it, and distribute the words of the Hebrew 
 language into Nouns, Adjectives, Pronouns, Verbs, 
 Adverbs, Prepositions, Co72J unctions, and Interjections * 
 The introductory notices prefixed, will sufficiently 
 enable the student to distinguish between those which 
 are primitive and essential distinctions, and those 
 which are secondary, and in part technical — i. e. 
 belonging to the art rather than to t\\Q philosophy of 
 grammar. 
 
 Derivation. 
 
 5, In all languages we find clusters of words allied 
 both in sound and in signification ; such, for instance, 
 are the following English words : — love, lover, lovely, 
 loving, loved, beloved, loveliness, 8^x. ; just, justly, 
 justify, justijler, justifiable, justification, &^c. ; but, in 
 Hebrew, this has an especial claim on the student's 
 attention : thus — 
 
 used in representing our own fast emotions, or those of other per- 
 sons, and as, in all such cases, they are uttered as deliberately as 
 any other word, I think they are sufficiently entitled to be num- 
 bered amongst the parts of speech. 
 
 * The early Hebrew Grammarians reckoned only three parts of 
 speech : 1 — D??' the name, in which they included nouns and ad- 
 jectives : 2 — /VJl the verb : 3 — ^^^ the particle, in which they, 
 included the other classes.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 t/'N"l rosh, the head, the chief and principal part of the body 
 ri^'p'X'n ra-sh«7/?, chiefness, principalness, beginning. 
 liSi'X'n n-^hon, first, in order or dignity. 
 
 "TT 7/!2 nir7-]och, to reign, 
 ^7/D mo-lflch, one that reigns. 
 *\)12 rna-lach, he reigned. 
 
 Tw^ ci-loh, to ascend. 
 ri/V b-leh, one that ascends- 
 Tw^ b-lf7h, a burnt offering.^ 
 H/V ii-lrth, he ascended. 
 TvT^ a-leh, a leaf. 
 7^ al, upon, above 
 
 "■X 
 
 •JT'p me-lech, a king. 
 nS?^ mal-cflh, a queen. 
 ■H^D/^ may-chtith, a kingdom. 
 
 11^7^ el-yo«, 77205^ high. 
 Tw^J^ ina-n\e\\, an ascent, step.* 
 n^yD ma-'dldh, upwards. 
 
 n 7VJ na--d\(lh, exalted, raised. 
 
 T '^:i- 
 
 ^7j^ e\i, a pestle. 
 ri/VFl^f/i'-a-lah, a conduit or 
 
 Now it is evident, that in these and similar col- 
 lections of words, there can be but one primitive, 
 from which the rest are derived. Equally evident 
 is it, that by knowing the sense attached to the 
 primitive, and the manner in which it is varied, 
 
 * Lit. The place where, or the instruments by which one ascends ; 
 also one that causes to ascend. 
 
 t i. e. What ascends upon the altar. 
 
 t The words ?iy ol, a yoke; ^/IV b-lfil, a child; 7V\ na-al, a 
 shoe, sandal; ^^VV^ man-iil, a lock, bar ; 7''J^'p m'il, an upper gar- 
 ment, See., owe probably their origin to the same primitive, although 
 they are placed by lexicographers under different roots. 
 
 ^ i, e. Through which water is made to ascend.
 
 8 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 in order to express different objects, or different 
 shades of meaning, together with the various modi- 
 fications of which each part of speech is susceptible, 
 the labour of learning a language is greatly abridged. 
 Hence the importance of attaining a thorough know- 
 ledge of the primitives. 
 
 G. As the only purpose of language is to commu- 
 nicate thoughts and judgments (which when clothed 
 in words are called propositions), and as every judg- 
 ment must contain at least a subject and a predicate, 
 and every proposition, a noun and an attribute*, it 
 follows that these tv>^o species of words must have 
 formed the very rudiments of language. But, as if 
 both could not have been invented at the same time, 
 it has been made a question which of the two has a 
 right to claim the priority. Most of the Oriental 
 grammarians have decided in favour of the Verb. 
 Many eminent philologists, however, maintain that 
 the first invented terms were Nouns, because the 
 objects by which men found themselves surrounded, 
 and on many of which their very existence depended, 
 would naturally claim their attention first. This is, 
 indeed, in some respect true ; but it proceeds on a 
 mistake, which we have sought to preclude in our 
 
 * Substantives are often used as predicates ; but then they are 
 always accompanied by the verb to be, which is, however, seldom 
 expressed in Hebrew, except when past or future time is indicated.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 9 
 
 definition of language. Assuming that words primarily 
 correspond to things, these writers have not perceived 
 that tlioiigh the things must have existed, and in most 
 instances have been seen, prior to their modes of ap- 
 pearance, as moving, acting, or being acted on, yet 
 by means of the latter only are they first brought into 
 notice, so as to become the distinct objects of human 
 consciousness — that is, thoughts; and that words 
 immediately refer to our thoughts of the things, as 
 images or generalised conceptions, and only by a 
 second reflection to the things themselves. The 
 following consideration will shew this truth in a still 
 clearer point of view : — It will readily be granted 
 that before names could have been assigned to objects, 
 the objects themselves must have been known. 
 Now, as all the knowledge we possibly can have 
 of objects, consists in an acquaintance with their 
 qualities, properties, or modes of existence, which 
 indeed are so many signs by which things are mani- 
 fested to the mind through the senses (for the sub- 
 stratum which supports the properties, as it is not an 
 an object of sensation, can only be inferred by the 
 mind*) ; and as all these are attributes and not sub- 
 stances-\, it follows that the mind must have a notion 
 of the attribute, before it can form a distinct concep- 
 tion of the object. It follows further, that in every 
 
 * See Maimonides' minn '•IID" no'p.T 
 
 t Sec Mr. Coleridge's definition of the word substance, in his 
 " Aids to Reflection," Aphorism xii. p. 6.
 
 10 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 such conception, the attribute by which the object 
 is distinguished from every other being, must form a 
 part ; and, consequently, that the class of words 
 which gram-marians denominate nouns, must origi- 
 nally have been verbal (somewhat like the words 
 called participles), expressive of some property or 
 circumstances by which the named object was charac- 
 terised. And, indeed, such is still the character of the 
 far greater portion of Hebrew nouns, even of those 
 which designate natural objects : thus — 
 
 T[r\ rttki-a, tJie firmament, lit. the expanse, or that 
 which is ejcpanded. 
 
 n^n hf/m-m^7h, the sun*, lit. tlie hot one, as being 
 the source of heat. 
 
 D'nn he-res, another name of the sun, from its dry- 
 ing and burning power. 
 
 nil? Vha-iicih, the moon'\, lit. the white one, from its 
 pale light ; and from this circumstance several 
 other substances appear to have derived their 
 names : as — 
 
 * Another name of the sun is ^"Q^ shemesh, which is prohably 
 a compound ; viz. ^^ Q^ sham ash, the distant fire ; and D^P^ 
 sha-ma-yim; D?'? ^^ sham mayim, the distant water. (See Jarchi's 
 Comment on Gen. i. 7.) 
 
 f The moon is also called D^J ya-ra-ah, from its dilating and 
 increasing light: hence HT,'!, a month; — from which it appears that 
 the Hebrew months were originally lunar.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. .11 
 
 njj^/ \ih\\tk (\tvK7]'j^ the white, amongst trees (po- 
 
 pulus alba, the ivhite poplar). 
 Hp7 Yho-nah (Xiftaroc), the ivhite, amongst odori- 
 ferous gums ; frankincense. 
 lii^r 1 b^7non {Lebanon), the white mountain ; from 
 its whiteness, being constantly covered with 
 snow, 
 nj^/ Vha-uTiJi, a brick, from the white clay of 
 which it is formed. 
 njlppn hd-b'n^7//,* galbaniim, a fragrant gum; from 
 its cream-like colour, 
 ^n hflfyl ,/. T\^U hr/-y^7h, an animal, a living being; 
 lit. a breather, or a being that breathes j breath- 
 ing being the characteristic of animated beings. 
 P|iy off J (I bird, fowl ; lit. the flier, or that which 
 flies. 
 ^^y^ s^7-ir, the goat ; lit. the hairi/, the shaggy : and 
 from the same circumstance — 
 n*liy^ s'b-rah (Jiordeum), barley, from the roughness 
 
 of its awn. 
 n*!^^ or ^^p s'b-rah, a tempest; & 'IJjb' sa-ar, horror. 
 
 * Most lexicographers place this word under the root ^/C i it 
 is, however, probable that ^?n itself received its denomination 
 from its colour. Hence also the Rabbinical P^pn hJlbon (albumen), 
 the white of an egg. 
 
 t These are real Onomatopoeia, — ''O /?«?/, imitative of the sound 
 heard in forcibly emitting the breath ; ^1^ of, that heard in the 
 starting of a bird. Of the same character are the words ^^ esh, 
 fire ; "'"•** or, light, fire ; D-'lT ru-ah, wind ; and many others.
 
 12 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 7. This being the case, we can easily comprehend 
 how the same word would be frequently used both 
 as a noun and as a verb : as a 7wun, when it was used 
 as the subject of discourse ; and as a verb, when it 
 was used as the prediaite. Thus, the word'nit^ in the 
 following sentence is used as a substantive : as, ^1^^ ''T}] 
 There shall be light, or light shall be (Gen. i. 3) ; but 
 in the following phrases it is used as a verb : thus, 
 liX Ipbn The morning {was) light (Gen. xliv. 3.) 
 D^7 'lii^l. And it will be light unto you (1 Sam. xxii. 
 10) ; ^^^J^. ^*li>^ My eyes have become light (1 Sam. xiv. 
 29) ; i. e. capable of perceiving by means of light. 
 Thus also the before-mentioned word ^H hay, a living 
 bein"', or a beins: that breathes, is used in the follow- 
 ing phrases as a verb* : as, ''11 n?^') And Salah lived 
 (Gen. xi. 14); ^H ^^5 ^pi^ "ti^ My son Joseph liveth still 
 (Gen. xlv. 21) ; — and 153 ca-hdd, the liver (lit. the 
 heavy, the weighty, being the heaviest part of the body 
 in proportion to its bulk) signifies also it is heavyf 
 (Gen. xlvii. 4) ; and it was heavy (Gen. xlvii. 13). 
 
 * It is likewise frequently used as an adjective : as, ""n lltJ' a 
 living ox ; ''D ^./^ a living dog ; ""D 1^3 raw flesh ; (?. e. in the 
 same state as when living). 
 
 + Hence also 1^3 ko-bed, weight, heaviness ; ri-n33 k'ba-dwth, 
 difficulty ; 1133 ka-bod, honour, glory, literally, weight, (gravitas) ; 
 and *1?I kab-bad, to honour ; 13?P wi'chab-bod, one that honours ; 
 "1233 ?ijch-b«d, honourable, one that has become honourable ; 
 *13?!3 w'cliM-bf/d, one that is honoured ; "^^3?^ jnach-bid, one that 
 Causes heaviness, an oppressor ; ^SSrilp w?7^-cflb-b«d, one that
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 13 
 
 It is moreover frequently used as an adjective : as, 
 
 1^2 ^^f2 a heavij biirdoi. 
 
 8. In all these examples, it is evident that there is 
 no distinction whatever between the noun and the 
 verb; but even in those where a distinction exists, 
 it is so slight, as clearly to show the common origin of 
 the words : thus — 
 
 ^131 d^7-bor, to speak, 
 ^y^ (\7)hck, one that 
 
 speaks, a speaker, 
 ^5*1 d(7-b^r, lie spake, 
 ^^"^ d(7-b(vr, a word, or 
 
 thing. 
 ^bi^ H-mor, to say. 
 '^^^s a-mwr, he said. 
 ^^i^ q-mer, a saying, 
 
 !l*)p k<7-rob, to he nigh, 
 to approach. 
 
 !l'np kd-vah, he or it came 
 
 near. 
 ^1j^ fkrt-rtib, one that is 
 .or I nigh, related, a re- 
 ^' 'P \_lative, kinsman. 
 
 i'ljP. ke-veh, the inner part 
 of the hodi)^ the intes- 
 tines, boicels. 
 
 t^'lp kor-brtn, an offering, 
 y^p k'rdbyCOfifiict J battle. 
 n!l^p kiv-hd\i,relationship, 
 approachment. 
 
 9. There are, indeed, many verbs which owe their 
 derivation to nouns : as, for instance, '13^* to throw 
 dust; )t^3^ to smoke, from ]^V^'\ smoke; ThJ2 to salt, 
 from TwO salt ; there are likev/ise many nouns which 
 
 honours himself, pretends to be honourable ; with their numerous 
 modifications. 
 
 * From "isy dust. 
 
 -)■ This word is probably derived from ^'^ Jtre ; smoke being the 
 sign of fire. Hptt salt, is probably compounded of '"10 what, H?
 
 14 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 cannot be referred to verbs, as K'J^"! the head; 7T\. the 
 foot^ leg; 7T\. ci standard, flag, banner, c^t. ; but this 
 does not at all invalidate the preceding arguments ; 
 as these words, though now considered as primitives, 
 may owe their origin to verbs which had fallen into 
 disuse*, or to such as have not reached us ; for it is not 
 to be supposed that the Hebrews had no other words 
 than those contained in the Sacred Records. Both 
 theory and fact lead me, therefore, to conclude that 
 the Hebrew nouns were originally verbal'ia ; and 
 the verbs ought to be considered as the elements of 
 speech, not on account of their priority of invention, 
 but because they generally contain the primary sig- 
 nification of words. 
 
 Roots. 
 
 10. The part of the verb containing the primary 
 signification which runs through all its branches and 
 derivatives, is the wflnitive mood^, or the name of the 
 
 moist, i. e. that tvhieh contracts moisture, and vJT and 7^. are 
 probably derived from one of the several roots which signify to 
 explore, remove, reveal, &c. This is, however, mere conjecture ; 
 and indeed we are too far removed from the infancy of language 
 to speak decisively on the origin of words. 
 
 * See S. de Sacy's remarks (Grammaire Arabe, § 231), on the 
 word 3j^,^> whose root nj2^ does not occur in Arabic, though it is 
 very frequently used in Hebrew. 
 
 f Many Grammarians consider the third person masculine past 
 tense, as the root ; thus, V'7 he went, "^t^^ he kept. But as the
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 15 
 
 action. It is called by some Hebrew grammarians 
 *lip9 ma-kor, the fountain ; by others, ^^p sho-resh, 
 the rout, radix. It consists generally of the three 
 
 notion expressed by this form of the verb is too complex to be 
 considered as the primitive, I have preferred the opinion of those 
 grammarians who regard the infinitive as the root. Thus the 
 n31 nns (a grammatical work, generally attributed to D. Kimchi.) 
 
 ^D^ ^^^^^ t^npji Dv'pnn nVs* Ss"? C't^ ^51^E^♦ nnx im c'* 
 'DnDTJn ni'?ij?2n "pd nix^'v i3?Dni irjnn C'X'i imn n'pnnn xint^' 
 ' nr n"! nin"? 3L"in "'jjn onxn ^DS':^'D ni::'y^ nn::»nnn i^\m 
 
 " There is one word which is the root to all these parts {i.e. the 
 past, present, and future tenses, &c,); it is called wio^or, the fountain, 
 because it is the principle of speech, and the root of contemplation. 
 From it proceed all the before-mentioned parts of the verb. It is 
 the thought to do a thing. Thus, when a man says, ' Behold, I 
 intend to build this house,' — the thought to hiiild must precede the 
 deed ; and on this account it is called "ilpO the fountain." 
 Thus, likewise, Abraham de Balmis, in D"l2X HJpD (Peculium Abra?.) 
 
 : o'pinn 'pycn I'-y nb^ dx •'3 I'ah noxn \ih Tino'? 
 
 " The infinitive mood is the root of every action, &c. And there- 
 fore, should any one ask you what is the root of *mQ? la-mad-tl 
 (/ did learn), do not answer "IW la-mad {he did learn), but ""27 
 la-mod {to learn)." 
 
 The infinitive must not be confounded with the abstract noun, 
 which is likewise the name of the action : as, 3nx to love, n3r]S love ; 
 WK' to hate, HS^?^ hatred. They are nearly allied in their signi- 
 fication, and are, therefore, often substituted for one another. The 
 difference between them will be explained in the Syntax.
 
 16 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 consonants, forming either monosyllables (when the 
 middle letter happens to be 1 or ^) : as, t^'iS bo, to come, 
 to enter; )^3 bin, to understand, perceive; ^^il* gur, to 
 sojourn : or dissyllables, as "?j7n h«-lr?ch, to walk; *^b^ 
 sh«-mor, to keep, to guard ; Vy^'\ to swallow. 
 
 11. The three consonants of which the primitive 
 is composed, are called radicals; whereas those which 
 are added for the purpose of diversification, are 
 termed serviles.X To distinguish the radicals from 
 each other, we shall call them the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd 
 
 * Many of the ancient grammarians very justly considered these 
 and similar roots as C!'?^ h'l-literals, because the middle letter has 
 more the character of a vowel than a consonant, being always 
 quiescent, and often omitted : as "ll^ to sojourn, "^l he sojourned, "'3 
 a sojourner, ^'C. See Aben Ezra in Hinv and D.''3f5<D ; and Abraham 
 de Balmis in Peculium Abrce, — De Partitione Verboi-um. 
 
 •f Roots consisting of four or more letters are, comparatively 
 speaking, few in number. They are mostly either of foreign origin, 
 as DSn? an order, edict ; or compounded, as ^i^vf tvicJced, worth- 
 less, from v3 without, and ?J^! merit, utility ; t3''P?J^ thick mud, from 
 3J? thick, and t3''P niud or clay. 
 
 That many of the tri-literals are, most probably, likewise com- 
 pounds, appears from several words cited in the preceding notes ; 
 numerous other examples of the same kind may be seen in " Vindi- 
 ciae Hebraicae," pp. 42 — 46. 
 
 X The serviles consist of the following exclusively : — > 1 H 3 X 
 n CJ* 3 ? 3 while no letter of the alphabet is excluded from 
 tlie formation of the radicals. We shall distinguish the serviles in 
 most cases by open letters, thus, 3 ^, &c.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 17 
 
 letters of the root. Thus, S is the first, y is the second, 
 and 7 the third letter of the root 7Ji)3 p^76l, to act ; ^ 
 the first, !l the second, and ^ the third letter of the 
 root 'ih^ shi/-bor, to break. 
 
 Conjugations. 
 
 12. Primitives may consist of any three letters of 
 the alphabet, but they receive diff'erent names, ac- 
 cording to the particular consonants of which they 
 are constituted, and form different conjugations. 
 
 13. Such as have neither of the following letters — 
 \ J, X, for their first radical, nor 1 or ** for the second^ 
 nor X or H for the third radical, and in which the 
 second and third are not the same letter, are called 
 D^p/SJ^ perfect ; because in the various changes which 
 the primitive undergoes, the three consonants remain 
 unaltered: sls, 1^\ to remember ; ^^^^2] I remembered ; 
 pn|lT a remembrance. 
 
 These verbs form the first conjugation. 
 
 14. Such as have i for their first radical, are deno- 
 minated D^lpn defectives ; because the i is dropped 
 in many of the derivatives ; as, jnj to give ; 
 \T\^ (instead of p^S^) / will give ; Hjn^ (instead of 
 
 r\yr\'p) a gift. 
 
 Tliese form the second conjugation.
 
 18 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 15. Such as have ^< or *• for the first radical : as, 
 hbi} to cat, ]n\ to hwtv* ; i^ for the third, as t^^D 
 to Jindy n for the third, as T\1^ to redeem; 1 or * for 
 the second letter, as Dip to rise, \'11 to understand ; are 
 called D'TI^ quiescents, because these letters are either 
 mute or changed into other letters. 
 
 These form the third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh Conjugation. 
 
 16. Such as have their second and third radicals 
 the same, as 'il'l^to measure, are called Dv^S!? double ; 
 the middle letter being frequently dropped in the 
 derivatives : as, lb^ (instead of ^H^^) Iic'dl ineasure; 
 ibb (instead of ^^0?) iti order to measure ; H'^D 
 (instead of ri"]"!^) a measure. 
 
 These form the eighth Conjugation. 
 
 Form of Words. 
 
 17. The consonants, together with their appro- 
 priate vowel -points, constitute what is denominated 
 the/(?rw? of the primitive; and any alteration made 
 in it, either by the omission or mutation of any of its 
 letters or vowel-points, or by the addition of one or 
 more letters, will necessarily produce a different/bnw, 
 indicative of a variation in the signification ; as may 
 be seen from the following examples : — 
 
 * The ' is often dropped, as Vl^? (instead yi''K) J xvill hnow.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 19 
 
 Thus, from the infinitive 12^ sha-hdr, to break, 
 (used both as a noun and as a verb), are derived — 
 
 r' The participle active and passive — 
 
 (Used as nouns and verbs, and 
 forming, with the personal pro- 
 nouns, the present tense: as 
 "12^ ^;3i< / break. 
 
 2"^ The third person preterite, as — 
 
 ( From this, the rest of the tense is 
 
 j formed, by pos^-^x^H^ fragments 
 
 "11^ Sh^/-bflr, he broke. ^^ ^^^^ pronouns: as, ''ri")!^ / 
 
 ^ broke, p]1'2^ thou brokest. 
 
 T ; - T 
 
 3"' The imperative, as — 
 
 f From which is formed the future 
 
 I tense, by prefixing fragments of 
 
 ^21^ sWhoV, break thou, m. j ^j^^ pronouns: as, ^^m I will 
 
 ^break, '^BJi'Fi thou shall break. 
 
 4'^- Nouns used in this sense only : as, "\2p she-ber, 
 a break, breach, injury ; ]T\'^p shib-brt-rDn, a break, 
 caUDiuty, destruction; "^S^'P mfsh-bf7r, a breaker, wave, 
 billow. 
 
 ^^^- Other infinitives, which in their turn give 
 birth to nouns, participles, and other parts of the 
 derivative verbs. 
 
 18. To understand this thoroughly, the student 
 must bear in mind, that every attribute expressive of 
 transitive action may be considered under various 
 points of view : —
 
 20 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 !"• As expressive of simple action : — 
 
 hbii to eat, 7D^? he did eat. 
 
 T - T 
 
 2"^* As expressive of simple passion : — 
 
 *^pXn to be eaten, /5?!?l. ^^^ '^'^^ eaten. 
 
 3"''- As expressive of intense action : — • 
 
 7^^^ to devour, consume, 75X he consumed, devoured. 
 
 4''' As expressive of intense passion : — 
 
 72X to be devoured, consumed, 75X be was consumed, &c. 
 
 5^^- As causing another to act : — 
 
 7J3Xn to cause to eat, i. e. to feed, /^DXH be fed, &c. 
 
 
 6*^- As being made to perform an action : — 
 
 73Xn to be caused to eat, to be fed, 7!]Xn he was fed. 
 
 't:jt 
 
 7^^' Reflex action, or such as is performed by the 
 agent on himself: — 
 
 ?3Xnn to consume, devour one's self, 75Xrin be consumed bimself. 
 
 The first of these divisions may be called the primi- 
 tive, the other six, derivative verbs. Their technical 
 names are, V\ Pa-al ; 2"^ Niphal ; ^'\ Piel ; 4^ 
 PUi-al; 5%Hiph-il; 6% Hoph-al ; 7^ Hith-pa-al. 
 
 Manner of foriming Substantives 
 FROM Verbs. 
 
 19. Substantives are formed from verbs in various 
 ways : — 
 
 1" By changing the vowel-points of the root: as, 
 y]^ a king, from iptp to reign ; b^iji food, victuals, 
 from 7b^^ to eat.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 21 
 
 2"''- By dropping- one of the radicals : as, [5 a gar- 
 den, from pil to shelter ; ^5 a stranger, from ^15 to 
 sojourn. 
 
 y"'- By adding- one or more of the following letters 
 \ n, I, 12, ^, n*, to the root: as, ^2^'^ food, provision, 
 (lit. what is eatable or eaten) ; fl/^XD a knife (lit. an 
 instrument used in eating), from ^bK ; T[)T>'t2 c(ittlc\ 
 (lit. what is purchased, or the medium of purchasing); 
 ^^Vp liarvest, or a reaper, from "n^j!) to reap, cut doivn. 
 
 ^ih. j^y ^j-^g three preceding methods combined : 
 as, ^^Pi'fp a gift, from [hj to give; PltSp a bed, 
 n^D a staff, tribe, from nb^ ^o stretch out, incline ; 
 ^'^/'^t^ the end, completion, from ri73 to finish, complete. 
 
 * These letters may be called the Formative Letters. — They are 
 either prefixed, affixed, or inserted in the middle of words, by which 
 a great variety of forms are produced. 
 
 •j- This word, derived from njj^ to 2'x^ssess, to purchase, to obtain, 
 favours the supposition that cattle were in the early ages regarded 
 as the chief measure of value, the same as money in our days. This 
 appears to have been the case during the Trojan war, as is evident 
 from the Iliad, B. YI.— 
 
 " For Diomed's brass arms, of mean device, 
 For wliich nine oxen paid (a vulgar price). 
 He gave his own of gold divinely wrought, 
 A hundred beeves the shining purchase bought." 
 And though silver had already in the time of Abraham become 
 the chief standard of value, yet cattle were equally used as the 
 medium of exchange, even in subsequent times, as appears from 
 Genesis xxxviii. 17, and xxxiii. 19; nD''J^p being rendered by most 
 of the ancient translators, lamb. Thus Sept. (ti.ivon'. Onkelos 1?7""^» 
 Vul. agiiis. 
 
 c 2
 
 22 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 7^^f2 (mish-kal), Weight ok Common Measure 
 OF Words. 
 
 20. To be able to refer words to their roots, and 
 to ascertain the difference between them and their 
 derivatives, a model, pattern, or common measure, 
 with which words in general may be compared, is 
 necessary. 
 
 For this purpose, the ancient grammarians selected 
 the word ^J^S*, and borrowed from it and its deriva- 
 tives their grammatical terms. 
 
 21. Imaoinino: that the essence of the verb con- 
 sists in action, and the word 7j^3 signifying to act, 
 they employed this word to denote the verA in general, 
 whether active, passive, or neuter. 
 
 22. Considering the 3'"^ person sing. 7?i. preterite. 
 
 * The middle letter of "PVS being one of the gutturals, which are 
 subject to peculiar laws of punctuation, has induced several modern 
 grammarians to substitute the verb "'pS or ?b|5 for it. I have, 
 however, retained it, as it is used by all the ancient grammarians; 
 and even the moderns have adopted it, as far as relates to the tech- 
 nical terms Nipkdl, Piel, PudI, \'c. And, indeed, it matters not 
 what word we take as a common measure, provided the difference 
 between the gulhirals and non'guttiirals be pointed out ; which 
 ouffht to be done in either case.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 23 
 
 as the root of the primitive verb; and the same person 
 of the derivative verbs as the principal words from 
 w^hich their respective tenses, moods, &c. are formed ; 
 and these words being, in the verb under considera- 
 tion, as follows — 
 
 1st, 7j^3 Pa-al, he acted, 
 
 2nd, 7^11 Niph-al, he icas acted upon, 
 
 3rd, 7^3 Pi-el*, he acted ivith intensiti/, ^x. 
 
 4th, 73)3 Pu-iil, he ivas acted upon ivith intensiti/, 
 
 5th, 7''y?n Hiph-il, he caused anotJier to act, 
 
 6th, 7y.^n llopli-al, he ivas caused hi) another to act, 
 
 7th, 75^3rin liith-pa-al, he acted upon himself, — 
 
 they adopted them as technical terms, to indicate 
 the principal branches of the verb in general. 
 
 And this is indeed the process of the human mind when it begins 
 to reflect. An impressive, single instance is taken, or rather ob- 
 trudes itself on the recollection : it is then discovered that the 
 properties or attributes noticed in this instance, are common cha- 
 racters in a large number of instances : and thus, the individual 
 impression is raised into a general or generic conception ; and the 
 word by which it was named, becomes a general term : and general 
 terms applied to the purposes of classification, in the aid or ordon- 
 nance of the memory, are technical terms; without which no art 
 nor science can be taught. 
 
 * When the second radical is a non-guttural, it receives Dagesh, 
 (See Part I. 32) : as, ^'^\> he sanclijied; "^W he was shallercd; 
 '^"llpr^i? he sanctijied himself.
 
 24 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Thus they denominated all verbs denoting simple 
 actions, Pa-al or h^_ kal (i. e. light, simple), because 
 the root is here found in its simplest form ; whereas, 
 the other branches have either an additional letter, 
 or a dao-esh in the second letter of the root. Those 
 that denote simple passion, or the passive voice, 
 they called 7j?5? Niphdl ; those that denote intense 
 action, they termed 7]^,$ Pi- el ; and so on vv^ith the 
 rest. 
 
 23. As the conjugations of verbs are regulated by 
 the letters of which the root consists, and as the root 
 7J^2 consists of 3 Pe, y Ain, and 7 Lamed, they de- 
 nominated the first letter of every root, 3 Pe ; the 
 second ^ Ain ; and the third / Lamed. 
 
 Thus they called the h of "iS^, Pe ; the h Ain y 
 3 
 and the "1, Lamed. 
 
 Thus they likewise denominated all verbs having 
 3 for the first radical, as — 
 
 \^y^ to aioproach ; 7Si to fall ; (2nd conjugation*) y'3 
 
 Those that have 5< for the first radical, as — 
 
 7bj^ to eat; IDJ^ to say; (3rd conjugation) X"£5 
 
 Those that have ** for the first radical, as — 
 
 'y^*' to sit; yn** to know; (4th conjugation) ^"3 
 
 * The first conjugation, as we have already observed (p. 17), they 
 called ^V^^\ and the 8th, D^^-1D?-
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 25 
 
 Those having" 1 for the second radical, as — 
 
 '^^i^ to sojourn ; ^)^ to return ; (5th conjugation) V'J? 
 
 Those having- J< for the third radical, as — 
 
 N^^ to find ; t<hp to call ; (6th conjugation) X"7 
 
 Those having n for the third radical, as — 
 
 nip to obtain ; Hk*! to sec ; (7th conjugation) H"^ 
 
 And by this means, they readily distinguished the 
 ditierent conjugations from each other, and ascertained 
 the peculiarities belonging to each. 
 
 24. By having thus a standard, or common mea- 
 sure, with which to compare words, we may easily 
 ascertain their general meanino-. 
 
 Thus, by knowing that Sj^fi is the 3"' person mas- 
 culine preterite of all active transitive verbs, 7p.i2 the 
 active participle, and 7^y3 the passive participle, we 
 may be certain that "fp3, lu?, "1^^, are the 3"^ person 
 vi. pret. ; that IpiS, "1^17, ^2W, are participles active; 
 and "l^pS, l^u7, "H^^^, are passive participles. Thus, 
 also, by knowing that the form, which the 3'''^ person 
 m. preterite of instransitive verbs assumes, is mostly 
 7j^3, we may, without hesitation, say that jpT, 0y, See. 
 are intransitive verbs, and the same will hold good 
 with every other part of the verb. 
 
 25. In the same manner the forms of nouns and 
 adjectives may be ascertained by comparing ihcm 
 with a similar form deduced from 7^3 ; and by know- 
 ing the grammatical changes of which the form is
 
 26 THE ETYxMOLOGY OF 
 
 susceptible, we may at once know the changes which 
 most words, having a similar form, must undergo 
 in the process of declension. 
 
 Thus, all words consisting of three radicals (of the 
 P' conjugation, p. 17), having (t) for their first and se- 
 cond vowel-points : as, ^1*^ a luord^ D!3n a lulse man, 
 nnt^o/^/, &c. are said to be o{h^^'t2 (the form) SjJS' 
 
 Those that have (^) for the first, and (..) for the se- 
 cond : as, y^T} a court, \^\ an old man, are of the 
 form 7^3* 
 
 Those that have (0 for the first, and (\) for the se- 
 cond vowel-points : as, 'T'[!53 an overseer, ^''Vp harvest, 
 are of the form ^''^fi- 
 
 These that have (j) for the first, and (i) or (1) for 
 the second vowel-points : as, JHX a lord, /Hi great, 
 '^T\'3, blessed, D^^J^ mightjj, are of the forms 7ij?3 and 
 
 All words of the above forms have their acjent on the last 
 syllable. 
 
 Those that have _ for the first, and (v) or (-) for 
 the second vowel-point : as, jTX an ear, nri2J^ a bribe, 
 are of the form 7^2 • 
 
 Those that have (•••) or (-) for their first and second 
 vowel-points: as, *^7p a king, Y'^^ land, '^VJ* /t boy, 
 "^T). an instant ; or (-) for the first, and (v) for the 
 
 * The vowel-point (-) in this and similar words, is substituted 
 for {■■■), on account of the guttural letter.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 27 
 
 secund vowel-points: as, ISP a book, ike. are of the 
 form Syi and ':'j;fD*- 
 
 Words of the last-mentioned forms huvo their accent on the 
 penultimate. 
 
 ^^Pf^ judgment, from tOS^ to judge, is of the form 
 
 7^5^ ; 12 beins the formative letter. 
 HD/^D a ki/igdom, from "^^D to reign, is of the form 
 nSjJ^p ; D and n being the formative letters. 
 ytSD « p/^;/; (from V'^}), ^^ knowledge (from j;n). 
 (/« knmv), are of the form 7j^9| ; D being the 
 formative letter, and i in the first, and '' in the 
 second word being dropped. 
 f^yr\f^ a gift (from \T\) to give), is of the form nSjJQ-j- ; 
 J the first radical being dropped, and D and 
 n being the formative letters, 
 ^il a stranger (from ^15 to sojourn), is of the form 
 
 7$, the second radical being omitted. 
 |5 a son, from niS, is of the form J?2, the third 
 
 radical being dropped. 
 ?)? a shadow, from 77V, is of the form 73 ; the 
 first of the double letters being dropped. 
 npiS a roll, volume, from 77^, is said to be of the 
 form npSp; 12 and H being the formative let- 
 ters, and the second radical omitted. 
 
 * These forms are, by some grammarians, called Segolates. 
 
 I The second radical of this and the following form receive Da- 
 gesh, to show the absence of the first radical. If we take the verb 
 "^I'S as the common measure, these two forms will be *li^^ & iT]i^^'
 
 28 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 The preceding examples, it is hoped, will be deemed 
 sufficient to give the learner a general conception of 
 the formation of nouns, which is all that is aimed at 
 in this chapter. Further information on this intricate 
 subject will be found in Chapter III. 
 
 Liflection and Alodijication of Wot^ds. 
 
 20. Whoever considers the rapidity of thoughts, 
 will allow that even the most concise language is but 
 a slow instrument for the purpose of communicating 
 them. Attempts have, therefore, been made in all 
 languages, especially in those of ancient date, to 
 shorten the process, by expressing all such general 
 notions as are applicable to whole classes of words — 
 as, for instance, the gender, number, and case of 
 nouns, the moods, tenses, &c. of verbs — by inflections 
 (probably taken from some already existing word), 
 instead of doing it by entire words. The Hebrew is 
 particularly remarkable in this respect ; for it not only 
 expresses the before-mentioned grammatical acci- 
 dents by inflections, but also such words as occur 
 most frequently in discourse ; as, for instance, the 
 article, the; the conjunction, and ; the relative, who, 
 which, thai ; the possessive pronoun, ?ni/, thy, his, &c. ; 
 and both the nominative and objective, when they 
 happen to be pronouns. By this means, whole phrases 
 may be expressed in single words : as, ^^?r!^?!! he will 
 love me, "^^C^!! ^^^d he will love thee ; ^^^^V^'l'^ I have 
 caused thee to go forth, &c.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 29 
 
 27. The manner in which this is effected, is no 
 less ingenious than remarkable, and shows, most 
 clearly, that language is neither the result of acci- 
 dent, nor of capricious compact, but the product of 
 mind — of mind fully aware of the object in view, and 
 endeavouring to effect it in the simplest way possible. 
 But before we proceed, it is necessary for the student 
 to know the personal pronouns. These are — 
 
 Si?ig, 
 
 ^;j<*or ^?bis*.. I 
 
 xnj he 
 
 N\n she 
 
 Plur. 
 
 m or i:3n^^f§ 
 
 n^n or DH .. .they, 7n. 
 nan or \n they,/. 
 
 * This word is considered as a primitive. It is, however, proba- 
 bly derived from ^^X, or rather njJJ to exclaim, or to commence a 
 discourse (X and J? being mutable letters). See Cant. ii. 10 ; Job 
 iii. 2. It means, literally, the exclaimer or speaker. 
 
 -|- nriX is evidently derived from '3X* The dagesh in n indi- 
 cates the absence of 3, which is still preserved in some of the dia- 
 lects : as, ^'^^ ^j)} i^'_' ^ \\. The D is, perhaps, a contraction of ns 
 (sign of the objective). The same observation is applicable to the 
 words ^^, ^B^, \^^, instead of ^}^, DJ^fN*, \^}^- 
 
 X N-in is probably derived from the verb HVT to he, Hin one that 
 is (written sometimes with S), and means, literally, a being. It is 
 frequently used instead of the substantive verb. 
 
 § This appears to be the plural of ^?^X, although written with n.
 
 30 TIIK ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 2?. Now, instead of expressing the pronouns by 
 separate words, fragments of the personal pronouns 
 are subjoined to the nouns, and amalgamated with 
 them. 
 
 Thus, "°l\ a hand, ''T * 7ny hand (lit. hand /, or be- 
 longing to the speaker); ^T thy hand (\\tJumd 
 thou, or, belonging to the person addressed) ; ^1\ his 
 hand, QJ*T, t I/our hand, ^^''T our hands, ^^T"! :|: and 
 oar hands, Sec. 
 
 Thus also ^'yi a ilwyI, '^^'2'1 mij word, tl15*l ^^^y 
 word, ^'yp^. his word, ^"^l*^ her word, ^^^.^"^ our word, 
 D^^*^^1 tScc. See Declension of nouns, Tab. II. 
 
 29. Obs. 1. — As the accent can come only either on the ultimate or 
 the penultimate syllable, it follows, that when words are thus aug- 
 mented by additional syllables, the accent must be removed from its 
 original place ; and hence, in order to accelerate the pronunciation, 
 a change in the vowel points becomes necessary. Thus, in "l^^"^ the 
 accent is upon the syllable ">j? ; but in ''7.?1 it is placed upon "'^ ; the 
 first vowel-point ('•) is therefore changed into (:) ; and in DHH^'^, 
 
 * These terminations, denominated affixes, are evidently con- 
 tractions of the personal pronouns: thus, ■•, from ''^X, /,- ■•), from X-in 
 (still more evident in the word ■liT'S his mouth, i. e. ''? mouth, N-IH 
 he; •inib' his field, i.e. T]^^ field, S-in he); -IJ, from -I^N* we. 
 
 ■\ t| and 25* The derivation of these terminations is very un- 
 certain. It is supposed, not without reason, that ''P^^^ had originally 
 a form for the second person sing, and plur. : as, n3X or riDJX thou 
 D3X or D33X you, from which these fragments were taken. 
 
 \ This letter (l), used for the conjunction and, is evidently a 
 fragment of the noun IJ a hook, a thing that joins.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 31 
 
 wliere the accent is removed still f'urtlier, being placed upon DH, 
 a still greater contraction of the vowel-points takes place*. 
 
 30. Obs. 2. — Vov/el-points which are thus liable to be changed, are 
 called viutable. There are, however, many which, as they constitute 
 the characteristic distinction of the words in which they are found, 
 can, on that account, not be changed into any other, and are retained 
 notwithstanding the removal of the accent. They are, for this rea- 
 son, called immutable. Such, for instance, is the i in "ipi^ a 
 keeper, guard, it being the characteristic of the active participle. 
 Such also, are all the short vowels followed by dagesh, indicative 
 of their being derived from the derivative verb ?ys (Ti52) : as, H??? 
 a mariner, D?!? a ladder ; or from roots whose 2nd and 3rd radicals 
 are the same ; npnjjl praise, n?SJjl jyrai/er, &:c. &c- 
 
 31. The definite article is expressed by the pre- 
 fix ni, as n*n the hand, and all the cases (except the 
 genitive), are expressed by single letters taken from 
 prepositions : as, Iw to a hand (/ being taken from 
 7i< to) ; n*P from a hand (p being taken from p 
 
 from) ; 1\^ with or in a hand, ^^'^yp fjvm oar hands, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 32. In the same simple manner are the persons 
 and tenses of the verb indicated. The past, by post - 
 
 * Similar contractions, as Gesenius justly remarks, are found in 
 other languages : as, Ilarjjpyuov, for ITorr/p If-iov ; ecca and eccum 
 for eece ea and ecce evm. 
 
 t This fragment (n) is probably derived from ^^D there is, or ID 
 behold. Some grammarians suppose it to be taken from the Arabic- 
 article ; but I see no reason why we should have recourse to the 
 language of Arabia, in cases where we can more easily refer words 
 to their Hebraic origin.
 
 32 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Jiving fragments of the pronouns to the verb; and the 
 
 future, by prejLving them. Let us take, for instance, 
 
 the three principal parts of the primitive verb 1p3: — 
 
 Infinitive *lp3 lu visit. 
 
 Imperative 1p$ visit thou, m. 
 
 3'"'* person m. past . . np5 Jic visited. 
 
 Now, subjoining to the last n (from rtH^J tliou), we 
 have -Rips visited thou, i.e. thou hast visited; ^^ (from 
 ^J^{ we), we have ^^1pj3 visited ice, i.e. ice have visited; 
 DJ31 (from DJ3I^{ ye), and we have S'^lp? visited ye, 
 i. e. ye have visited ; denoting the past time by the 
 position of the root. 
 
 33. Thus, also, by prefixing ^? (from '•^Sl /), to 
 Tp^, we have "^p?^ I-icill-visit ; ri (from H^lX thou), 
 we have Hp^^ thou-shalt-visit, &c. &c. ; indicating by 
 the prefixes, not only the person, but likewise (by 
 their position), that the time is future. Further, by 
 subjoining other fragments to this, or the past tense, 
 the objective pronouns are likewise indicated : as, 
 ^nnp$^ I-will-visit-him, ^H'^rnpip I-Jiave-visited-him, 
 ^^rinpip I-have-visited-thee, ^^"Ip^^l and-he-will-visit- 
 7ne, &c. 
 
 It is this which gives the Hebrew language that 
 conciseness for which it is so remarkable, making its 
 words keep pace almost with the thoughts which 
 they represent.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 33 
 
 Having thus given a general outline of the structure 
 of the language, we shall proceed to treat, in the fol- 
 lowing chapters, of each part of speech separately. 
 
 CFI AFTER II. 
 
 Nouns and thehi Modifications. 
 
 34. Nouns are generally distributed into — 
 
 T. — Common nouns, or appellatives : as, tJ'^t^ a 
 
 man, |5 son. 
 
 II. — Proper names : as, 7X'l|J'*. Israel, D'li^ Aram, 
 uhm'^\ Jerusalem. 
 
 35. Proper names, are the names of particular individuals, thus dis- 
 tinguished from others of the same kind. Common names are, on 
 the contrary, the names of genera and species ; and, unless they are 
 accompanied by some restrictive sign or word, denote citlier the 
 whole species or kind: as, HIH^ y-'^'in npn:?-1 Dnj< Lord! thou 
 helpest man and beast (Ps. xxxvi. 6), — or any one of the kind : as, 
 n^-V OniJ nSD "//e that Jcilleth a man (/. e. any man) shall be 
 put to death" (Levit. xxiv. 21). As the Hebrew has no indefinite 
 article, the context alone can show in which of the two senses the 
 noun is to be understood. 
 
 36. The restrictive words, by which appellatives are made to express 
 particular individuals, are called definitives. Sucli are, the article 
 the ; the demonstrative pronouns, thisj that, &e. ; the pronominal 
 adjectives, w_?/, fhi/, &!c. The restriction is, however, more frequently
 
 34 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 effected by the annexation of another noun, which serves to define 
 that which precedes it : as, 1? soji, 'n?^''W son of a king, V.^T\^ 
 son of the king, or the son of the king ; ^^"i^T]"^ Israel's son, or 
 the son of Israel. 
 
 37. Nouns are frequently varied or altered, in 
 order to express the different modifications of which 
 they are susceptible. This is done in various ways : — 
 
 I. — By altering one or more of the vowel-points : 
 
 as, (5 .50^/, |5 sofi of, Dn*}?S"j!l Abraham s son, "ll"! 
 word, *ll"^. word of, 1|7^^"'^1'^ the ivord of the king. 
 
 II. — By adding one or more letters either at the 
 beginning or at the end of the words : as, ^5"^,^ tlie 
 word, ni^ni and the ivord, '>'):il my word, B3''i;i^. 
 i/our word.s. 
 
 38. Letters added at the beginning of words are 
 denominated Prefixes ; those that are added at the 
 end, are termed Affi.res. 
 
 The Prefixes leave the accent of the words unaltered, and 
 therefore produce no alteration in the vowel-points ; but the affixes 
 draw the accent from its original place toward the termination, 
 and therefore produce, generally, a change in the vowel-points. 
 See the preceding examples, and Art. 29. 
 
 39. Every word thus varied by additional letters, 
 may in some measure be considered as a compound ; 
 and as every compound is best understood by know-
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 35 
 
 ing its constituent parts, we think it most advisable 
 to explain the prefixes and affixes before we treat of 
 the general properties of nouns. 
 
 Prefixes. 
 
 40. The following are the prefixes of Nouns : — 
 n — with dagesh in the following letter : as, '^H^H, 
 n or n without dagesh : as, ^i^^•^, express the 
 definite article tJie ; for which reason, this letter 
 (H) is called the definite H, 
 Obs. n is used before nouns beginning with any letter capable 
 of receiving Dagesh: as, ^lUi a river, ^M-in* the river. 
 n is used before nouns beginning with either of tlie letters .^ /jZ.^.. . cu 
 *!, y, n, Xt r as, lit< li^ht, niN*n tU Ught ,• nn a moun- '-'^A^^ ^/ 
 tain, *inn the mountain; "TIJ^, a servant, li^H the 
 servant; ^tkl head, K^^j"l^ the head, 
 n is used mostly before nouns (not being monosyllables) 
 beginning with J^, H, or T\, having long unaccented (t) 
 
 * The effect of dagesh after a vowel, is to double the letter in 
 which it is placed. — (See Part I. p. 36) This word must, therefore, 
 be pronounced han-nd-hd'r. The dagesh is, however, sometimes 
 omitted: as, "i'I^^jLI the river, Q''"!/:'^ the children. 
 
 t As the Gutturals "•, V, H, n, X, cannot easily be pronounced 
 double, the Dagesh would be useless in them ; it is, therefore, 
 compensated by changing (-) into (t) or (•••). Before n, however, 
 the original vowel (-) is mostly retained : as, ■^5?''^'!!' the darkness. 
 Sometimes also, before n : as, ??!7D the vanity. We also find ^nn 
 the living, and ''^T} and '•n^. These deviations are, however, too 
 unimportant to be longer dwelt upon. ^ 
 
 M^A^^. #'^ r^^ V. _.
 
 3G THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 for tlieir first vowel : as, [Jj; a cloud, ^JJH the 
 . . cloud ; ^7hn the milk ; D^^MH the mountains* 
 
 n or n — without dageshf in the following letter, indi- 
 cates interrogation : thus, ^^K^ a keeper, ^12^7^ 
 the keeper, ^J^m ^ keeper?— '±ifi 'm n?:trri 
 the keeper of my brother {ciiii) II \. e. Am I the 
 keeper of my brother? (Gen. iv. 9.) 
 
 Ohs. — This is called the interrogative H. It is used before 
 any word in a state of interrogation : as, N ? not, N 7^ is it not ? 
 ^\ there is, EJ^^H is there .? [Before the gutturals it takes, mostly, 
 (-) : as, ^J^^^ thou, •'J5 npNlH art thou my son ? H^n is it 
 timefj j aikcwi s c before words beginning with any letter having 
 4'-////^>^ -~Sh-.7jp. thus, njna a hlessi7ig, r\'2yin the blessing, ^Tpi^ 
 a blessing ?% 
 
 * Before participles, -| is often used as a relative pronoun : thus, 
 "1©?t3n the teacher, or ivho teaches ; "^^^y^ who ox which goes ? 
 
 ■f" In a few instances we find Dagesh after the interrogative lI : 
 Si%,T\yo^>l\ whether fat? (Num. xiii.) D''3l^05n whether in camps? 
 (ibid.) We likewise find PJ^^O whether strong ? (ibid) ; but in these 
 cases, the context easily shows that they are interrogatives. In 
 ^5'1'^n whether my ways ? 3t?''*n will it he well ? (cited by some 
 grammarians), it is equally evident that the n is interrogative ; as 
 the definite n is seldom found before nouns having the pronominal 
 afiixes, or before verbs in the past or future tense. 
 
 + The reason of this change is, lest two initial Sh'vas should come 
 together — thus, '^?'^^l), which is contrary to the genius of the 
 language.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 37 
 
 1 ami (from )) a hook, plug), is used to express junction, 
 and connection in general : as, ^pl *^^Vp1 V"^). 
 rh'h) nV) tj-nni f.p.1 ani Seed-time and harvest, 
 dind-cold, and-heat, diwd-summer, ^nd-winter, 
 and-dai/, m^d-Jiight. (Gen. viii. 22.) And with 
 the definite article, HI a/id the : as. Mini "^j? 
 
 Thine, O Lord, [is] the- greatness, and-the- 
 strength, and-the-^7orj/, and-the-t?/c^orj/, and- 
 i\iQ-7najesty. (I Chron. xxix. 2.) 
 
 !? in, with (probably, from i<i3 to enter, to come in), is 
 used to express the relations denoted by the 
 ablative case, or by the prepositions, in, ivith, on, 
 among, at, &c. : as, '^^J^'^m-a-land, pi^5 with- 
 a-stone, ^H^ OYi-a-moimtain, 7^*^^^^^ amongst- 
 Israel, *1^^? in, on, or with a word or thing. 
 
 5 as (probably from T\2 thus, in this manner ; or from 
 ("^3) np5, so, thus,) is used to express compari- 
 son and proportion generally, and answers to 
 the words as, so, according to, about, almost. 
 Sec: as, f^.i^? diS-a-land, I^JiJJ as-a-servant, 
 nS^XI iLhout-an-ephah, ^^l? as-a-ivord. 
 
 7 to, for (from St^ to, is used to express the relations 
 of tendency and purpose, denoted bythe dative 
 case, or by the words to, for in order, &c. : as, 
 y^^b io-a-land, "l^"]? to or iox-a-thing. 
 
 Ohs. 1. — To express the relations denoted by the letters 
 h, 5, 5, definitely)" either H is annexed, as 11*^02 in-the-word,
 
 38 
 
 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 *)nn3 a.&-t[\e-word ; or, which is more usual, tliell is omitted, 
 and its vowel-point is placed under those respective letters : 
 thus, "^yi^ in-the-a^ord, ^5"^5 as-the-worc?, ^yrp to-the- 
 word*. 
 
 2. — When H occurs before these prefixes, it indicates inter- 
 rogation : thus, jSriy to-the-w«, (S/D if-to-the-w« ? 
 
 V 
 
 I * The prefixes ?, 3, 3, 1, are frequently added to other words : as, 
 ; p|51 Vna great and-small, N-IH) >3K / and-^^e, nn^l V?N he-eat and- 
 ! drank, niPltJ'pl ?b^5.? to-eat a.x\d-to-drink, &c. Their proper points 
 are (:) — thus, ?, ?, ?, V The (:) is, however, frequently changed for 
 other vowels, which causes great embarrassment to the young stu- 
 dent. — To prevent this, he is requested to attend to the following 
 rules : — 
 
 I. ] is changed into -I (pronounced •IK) before words beginning 
 with either of the labials Q, D, 1, 3 ; or before words begin- 
 ning with any letter having Sh'va : as, 'l^S.-l and-a-qarment, 
 t^?'!-'! and-honey. 
 II. It is changed into J before words having a distinctive accent 
 
 on the first letter : as, V.^\ DH^ bread and-wine. 
 III. Before words beginning with Sh'va, the letters "?, 3, 3, re- 
 ceive (~^i)*. as, "1313 in-the-z^orc^-of, I?*!? as-the-ti'orcZ-of. 
 "•31.7 to-the-««or£?-of. Before the gutturals, definitely, «*-*« 
 |Miii*, they follow the same rule as the definite n. (Art. 40). 
 IV. Before words beginning with \ the letters 7, 3, 3, 1, receive 
 (-r i), '' becoming quiescent : as, ''D* he-shall-ie, '^'<y\ and-he- 
 shall-6e, *^* days-oi, *»''3 in-the days-of, V^ as-the-days-of. 
 V. Before the semi- vowels (-:) (•••;) (t;), they receive the corres- 
 ponding short vowels : as, ri^X truth, H^XI and-truth, ^'Q^% 
 m-truth, &c. : ^VD half, ^Vm ^VHS, ^^fn3, »vn^, *3XV 
 VI. Before l3''n?N God, they take (.. ) ; N becoming quiescent : 
 
 thus, ^'rh^);, ^'rh^)., &c. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^<^rjM 
 
 ^
 
 / / THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. , 39 
 
 p/or to*, from \^from, is used to express the relation 
 
 ^*7/ of origin, cause : as, *i5p ivom- a-nation, ^y^J^ 
 
 ^'^ from-a-t/iing, ^5*^^ from- speaking, tJ'^X^S from 
 
 or out-of-rt-w^/z, See. ; and with the definite 
 
 article, 7yi2 from- 1 lie : as, IS^TSn^ from- the 
 
 desert. 
 
 Obs. — After adjectives, it denotes the comparative degree: 
 as, *l!l5fp pin stronger-than a-rock. — (See Adjectives, 
 Alt. 87.) 
 
 41. To the preceding may be added the particle 
 nt^ or "ni<, which, though not a prefix, always pre- 
 cedes nouns in a definite state, and is often joined to 
 them in order to express their objective cases : as, 
 ' In the beginning God created D''p|^n n^ the heaven, 
 pxri n^l and the earth;' '?|toi<-ri^1 T?^"^^ ^55 
 ' Honor ihj-father dind-thy-moiher ;' -m nriJ< ^ii^lt'X 
 fpV ' And- Israel- loved Joseph.' 
 
 VII. Before ''^"'^ and its variations, also before Hin^. they take 
 (-): as, nVn^Sl, ili6, ^3nK1, n\n*1, cl-c. As these 
 changes are chiefly for the sake of euphony, and as they 
 do not affect the signification of words, I deem it unne- 
 cessary to enter into further detail. 
 
 * P before the gutturals. 
 
 I From this punctuation of the prefixes before the word nin^, jt 
 is evident that the word was anciently pronounced ''5"'^* Had it 
 been pronounced Jehovah, as some learned men suppose, the points 
 must have been i^^^i^*?, i^J'T'?, '^)p\ as the words in No. IV.
 
 40 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 E.vercise. 
 Translate and analyse the following words :— 
 
 ni / : i-ii 
 
 /pxx?!) /pxt? yn^*Si /pxS /p.^^'' 'H^r' 'P-^t' 
 
 T T V T T ; T T V : '^ '' " f "''■•": '^ ^ 
 
 a 
 
 t;t; t;t-; t;t; t;t- t:t^ tT" 
 
 T ; T •• T ; T ; ■•■ ; T : T ; T 
 
 Render the following into Hebrew : — 
 
 A dayll, and a day, as a day, in a day, to a day, and to a day ; 
 
 the day, and the day, as the day, in the day, to the day, from the 
 
 day, and from the day ; from day to day. 
 
 >^t. A woman^, to a woman, the woman, to the woman, and to the 
 
 •,\ woman, and a woman, from a woman, from the woman, and from 
 
 ,*j the woman. /^^^ 
 
 ^Jfee ""slave**, %i. slave, and the slave, and a slave, a slave? as 
 >:^ slave, as the slave, to a slave, to the slave, from a slave, from the 
 
 slave, and to the slave. 
 
 * A way, oi ! immd. fLand, fiinrtli % A wise man. § Wisdom. 
 
 '-^yL^' 
 
 ^.iS^/' ^ c?
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 41 
 
 Affixes. 
 42. The following are the principal Affixes: — 
 
 riT? . . .with the accent on the last syllable, is used to 
 denote the feminine gender : as, ^''i< a man, 
 Hj^X a woman, N''^^ a prophet, nx'^^i a p?'u- 
 phetess ; 'Ip^^ a visitor, nipifi a female visitor. 
 
 Obs. n— with the accent on the penultimate, is sometimes used 
 to express tendency towards a place: as, pH Haran, 
 Hi^n towards Haran ; ^^iJ the south, H^l^^ towards the 
 south. Nouns terminating in H, change that letter into 
 ri: as, r\1^ Marah, Hfl^D to Marah. 
 
 TT T ITT 
 
 n— without the accent, is likewise added, sometimes, by 
 way of euphony : as, H 7 v for 7 v night. In such 
 cases n is said to be Paragogic. 
 
 n~ . . .with the accent on the penultimate, is used 
 to denote the feminine participle : as, tOSi^ 
 one that judges, a judge j f. -HbSi^ : also 
 
 DV . . .is used to indicate the plural of masculine 
 nouns : as, S^X''^.? prophets, D^lpiS visitors, 
 DV a day, U'ly^ days ; n}^ a year, D"*3&J^ years. 
 
 D*7^ . . .is used to express two of a kind : as, S^^V tivo 
 days, S^-p^SJ^ tico years. 
 
 ni . . .is used to express the plural feminine: as 
 ^'^V.} (I girl, a young woman, ^i*IJ^^ girls ; n?"! 
 p. T\ST\T\_ doors.
 
 42 
 
 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 
 The following affixes are used to denote the posses-^ 
 sive Pronouns : — 
 
 ■JA^iiZ^^ 
 
 '—my 
 
 m. 
 
 ^Tthy 
 
 i his 
 n— her 
 
 T 
 
 i|i~our 
 Dp^your 
 p-r-your, /. 
 D— their, m. 
 |— their 
 
 y'ti} a song, m. 
 ^y'li^ my song 
 
 nyp a song,/^-r! 
 '^r\y^ my song\ 
 '^'^nWthy —m". 
 fjnTK^ thy — /. 
 Sr\y^ his — m. 
 
 '—my 
 Y" thy, 7n. 
 
 V-his 
 
 T 
 
 n^T^er 
 !|y— our 
 
 '^y^ thy song, m. 
 
 Ijn^K^ thy song,/. 
 :^ in^SJ^ his — 
 
 HTJy her — 
 
 sij"|>^ our — 
 *B5T^ your — m. 
 
 * ]^yp your — /• 
 
 S^^SJ^ their — m. 
 
 IT ' 
 
 ]y^ their — /. 
 
 When the things possessed are plural. 
 
 B''TIS^ songs, m. Di*!**^ songs,/. 
 
 ^Tl^ my songs 
 
 f^m^^ her — 
 
 iT T • 
 
 ^jriT^our — 
 B^^'^^K^ your — m. 
 IjnWyour— /. 
 Brt^T*^ their — m. 
 
 IT T • 
 
 tnn^K^ their — 
 
 fj^J^ thy 
 
 Vy^ his 
 
 n'^Tti^ her 
 
 T i; • 
 
 n^'^'^'i:; our 
 
 — m. 
 
 ^ril^T'K^ my songs 
 
 ?]'>n^n^^ thy — m. 
 
 TjWWthy — / 
 
 IWTti'his — 
 
 JT • 
 
 n'^niwher — 
 
 ^^WWour — 
 
 *D3'>'i;^ your — m. gS'^rilT^ your— m. 
 \y-your,f. *|9''T^your — / t3''niT£J^ your— /. 
 Dn^-their,m. *Bn''"};K' their — m. -m'^H^yp their— m. 
 p^-their,/. * IP'' W their —/. flpWn^C^ their— /. 
 
 DD, |3, on, in, are denominated heavy affixes, because they 
 
 
 always have the accent ; the rest are denominated li(jht affixes. 
 
 \ 
 
 niTvf '/'
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 43 
 
 41. To the preceding affixes may be added, the 
 termination ''—, H*— and HJ, by which patronymics, 
 or nouns denoting extraction, are formed from 
 proper names : as, *^"l!iy a Hebrew, f. fl'^^.^y, or 
 nn^y, from n;iy Heher; ''i\m an Ammomte, /. 
 mm, from pay Amman. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 Add the possessive pronouns to the following 
 nouns: — 
 
 rrm a law, n^p a hut, like m^ ; D^D a horse, 113^ 
 a strong man, like T^ 
 
 Render the following into English : — 
 
 /•^^^ri. '^tT\\ '^^r^ > ^t?}? / *^^tti /t'^'^P 
 ; *T|S^?n /'TiS^nS /'^S?'?^ /'^SttS 'TiS^a /"^(pSlIO /"^^^^ 
 
 /nb'7^ / n|S»ni /jns^ip ' dtoS^^ 'DTO^D 'C'P/P 
 
 * Camels. f A king. t A queen. \ A]mmtgiL»mimmfm^VQ\'^n.
 
 44 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 TT;--; t;;- tt;- t :. t. 
 
 Gender. 
 
 42. There are two genders, the masculine and 
 the feminine. Of the masculine are — 
 
 r' Names of males and their functions : as, D^ 
 Shem, i^5, a father, p3 a priest. 
 
 2"^^ Names of nations, rivers, and mountains : as, 
 DJ^ a people, t^p-S Canaan, *^^i a river, ['^T. the Jordan, 
 /12r\2 Carmel, ''^'•0 Sinai-f. 
 
 * Kingdom. 
 
 ■f To consider inanimate objects, or their names, as masculine 
 or as feminine, appears very irrational ; and yet, if we except the 
 English language, the absurdity of thus making a distinction where 
 nature has made none, and where none can be required, prevails in 
 almost all languages. To account for this anomaly, some authors 
 have supposed, that in the infant state of the world, mankind 
 actually imagined that all objects of nature were animated, and 
 consequently attributed to them sexual distinction ; considering those 
 objects which manifest themselves by their power and activity — 
 as, for instance, the Wind, the Sun, &c. — as masculine; and, on 
 the contrary, those that appeared of a passive nature — as, for in- 
 stance, the Earth, the Moon, &c. — as feminine. Others suppose, 
 that the framers of language were guided by some subtle kind of 
 reasoning, which discovers, even in inanimate objects, something
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 45 
 
 3^'^- Names of seasons and months : as, y^iji the 
 Spying, ^J) Winter, jD'*^ Nisan. 
 
 4"'- Names of metals : as, iriT gold, f|p3 silver. 
 Except ri^n^ copper, which is used in both genders, 
 and n'iSy lead, which is supposed to be feminine. 
 
 analogous to sex. These explanations are, however, not at all 
 satisfactory ; for independent of the absurdity of supposing the 
 framers of language to have been so subjected to the fancy as not 
 to distinguish between a real animal and a block of wood, or that 
 they should have possessed such refined notions as to discover 
 the most distant analogies, there is this objection, — that, on 
 either supposition, the different names belonging to the same 
 object must have retained the same gender: but this is contrary to 
 fact. Thus, for instance, of the two names '"l^ll?, H'lJ, given to the 
 Moon ; the first is masculine, and the second, feminine ; and of the 
 
 .3.21 
 
 three denominations of the Sun, t-"^/^, Dnn, Httn, the first is femi- 
 nine ; the second, masculine ; and the third, of both genders. The 
 real cause of the before-mentioned anomaly, as it regards the Hebrew, 
 appears to me this : — that in the infancy of language, especially 
 amongst a pastoral people, which the Hebrews were, the chief sub- 
 jects of discourse were unavoidably persons and domesticated 
 animals. In these, they observed the natural distinction of sex, 
 which they endeavoured to indicate in their language ; and they 
 did it in a very simple way : viz., by adding n — a mere breathing 
 and certainly the softest and most delicate of consonantal sounds — 
 to the masculine: thus, y* a child, hoy, i^'}T. a girl; 1^.3 a lad, 
 youth, n^^a a lass, maiden ; "T'J?'^ a he-yoat, '^yW a she-goat ; 
 t^.?3 a lamb, Hw'SS a ewe-lamb ; tix. &c. Animals which did not 
 often come under view, or in which the distinction of sex was not 
 obvious, were left undistinguished, and their names were used in 
 cither gender, just as the fancy of the speaker happened to suggest
 
 46 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 43. Of the feminine are — 
 
 P' Names of females and their functions : as, 
 r\'lt Sarah, hW Ziilah, DwNt a mother. 
 
 2°''- Names of countries and cities : as, ^K^{< 
 Assyria, D^/^^T*. Jerusalem. 
 
 S'"'^- Names of the double members of the human 
 body* : as, \VA ear, hy^, foot. 
 
 4**" Names having the following terminations : — .^ 
 T[-;r, as n3'l!3 a blessing ; or H*, as, HHiy a Hebrew 
 
 woman. 
 HiT", as ^)'>^^ a nurse, fl^lbp incense, fT\^^t^ glory, 
 
 np« truth. 
 n-— ,asrin'lp«^2^rwi/?o', a fever, f^T\) quietness, pleasure^ 
 n^r, as 'H^p'X'n. beginning, f^'^iiri form, pattern, f^^l^J? 
 
 a Hebrew woman. 
 rri , as ri^p70 a kingdom ; or Hi, as DiHK a sister. 
 
 at the moment ; and hence the origin of the epicene. It was the same 
 with the names of inanimate objects. They were used indiscri- 
 minately in either gender ; or, as Aben-Ezra has expressed it, in his 
 usual laconic style, -inapJl -ini^T n^»n mi 13 \>^^ ^? " Whatever 
 has no life, male it or female it." This promiscuous use of the 
 gender, probably prevailed during the infancy of language and for 
 a long period after it. But when the language became fixed by 
 writing, and especially by authoritative books which served as 
 models to subsequent writers, the gender of nouns became, in some 
 measure, likewise fixed. And thus it is, that what in its origin was 
 a matter of indifference, became, in the course of time, a law, from 
 which we cannot now deviate, without being guilty (in the eyes of 
 the half-learned, at least,) of a grammatical impropriety. 
 
 * Except "IJ a hand, V.V an eye, which are used in both genders.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 47 
 
 44, Many nouns are used in both genders, and 
 are therefore said to be of the common gender : as, 
 T\T\ the wind, ^^ Jire, Hillip a camp. 
 
 Amongst these may be numbered the Epicene : as, 
 7D5 a camel, ^1 a bear, riiV a dove, ITl^pn a stork, male 
 or female. 
 
 E.ve7^cise. 
 
 Render the following into Hebrew : — /' / 
 
 As my songs, m. And from thy/, songs,/. Their m. songs ?h. 
 and her song. My camel and his camels. To her camels. And 
 to her camels. And from the king and queen. To her kings and 
 to the queen. To her king and to the queen. From their kings 
 and from the queen. As my king and as your kings. And to 
 the queens. My kingdom and thy kingdom. Her kingdom and 
 his kingdom. From kingdom to kingdom. Our kingdom and the 
 kingdoms. And in my law. As their laws. And from thy law. 
 As my hut. And from thy huts. And to the strong man. . 
 
 Formation of Feminine Nouns. 
 
 45. Feminine Nouns, as has already been observed 
 (p. 41), are formed by adding H— or H— — to the mas- 
 culine: as, y>^ a king, HS/^ a queen ; 7*1*15 great, m. 
 iP^"^^ f. ; pii^ an educator, foster-father, ^l5p^< a foster- 
 mother, a nurse ; 1pi2 a visitor, '^'yp'^^ or niDiS f.* 
 
 * Some receive Dagesh in the last radical: as, Cn^^ ?rt. red, 
 f, n»^^?; flDj? m, small, little, f. r\pp-
 
 48 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Obs. 1. — Masculine nouns terminating in n— , form their feminine 
 by changing (•••) into (t) : as ^J?") a shepherd, nj^"l a shejjherdess*. 
 
 2. — Those that terminate in H or y, receive n— — instead 
 Or-: as, VOit^' a hearer,/. nyDIS:' or HypiEJ' ; ni? one that runs from 
 danger,/. T\rn2\. 
 
 3. — Many nouns express their gender by different words: 
 as, ^^ father, CiX mother; I'^H a he-ass, pns a she-ass ; IpH a bride- 
 f/rooni, n?3 a bride; "l^V. m. a servant, f. ^^W a bond-maidX- 
 
 4. — The feminine of HS a brother, is nins sister ; of I? a son, 
 n? a daucjhter ; t^n a father-in-law, riltsn a mother-in-law . 
 
 Number. 
 
 46. Hebrew nouns admit of three numbers ; the 
 Smgular, Plural, and Dual. 
 
 Formation of the Plural Number Masculine. 
 
 Masculine nouns form their plural mostly by 
 adding DV§ ^^ ^^^^ singular : as, y''Q a king, D'^p/^IT 
 kings. — (Vide Affixes, p. 41.) 
 
 * In some of the derivative verbs, the n is changed into ri""- 
 (See Verbs). 
 
 •j- Those that terminate in N, receive only an additional n : as, 
 K^b m. a carrier, f HXf !l or nstrj- 
 
 J In these and similar words, it will be found that the masculine 
 nouns express functions and attributes peculiar to males, and the 
 feminine such as are peculiar to females. 
 
 § The *• is often omitted ; especially when the singular terminates 
 in ^ : '•i^ as, a nation, ^''33 (instead of C^l^) nations ; '^)7. (instead of ''!'!?) 
 a Levite, D*1.i? (instead of D^?1?) Levites ; 1 is likewise frequently 
 omitted: as, nii< a sign, p. nhX instead of WTIK- 
 
 ^ Also r??'?, which is, however, a Chaldaism, and ought, there- 
 fore, to be considered as an exception.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 49 
 
 Formation of the Plural Number Feminine. 
 
 47. Feminine nouns form their plural, by adding 
 ni to the singular : as, 1X3 a well, nilX!l* — (Vide 
 p. 41.) 
 
 Ohs. 1.' — Those that terminate in H— or 0, change these termi- 
 nations into ni : as, iTjy.a a girl, riilJJJ girls ; n>inil a virgin, ri'vin? 
 virgins; ^l-i^ a letter, nn]lX letters; rij?^3t? a ring, riij?3p rings; 
 n^ri^ a coat, tunick, HUri? tunicks. Some, however, retain the n : as, 
 ^% a door, ninp'n. doors ; ri^p, a how, n'ln^^i? hows ; n''3n lance, 
 niTT'Jn lances. 
 
 Ohs. 2. — Those which terminate in H* or JT"— change these ter- 
 minations into rn* : as, i^^"!?? a strange woman, ^iVl^J strange 
 women ; JT'"l?J? a Hehrew tvoman, p. m*")^]^- 
 
 3. — Those that terminate in ri"!, change (-1) into (••.), and 
 add nV : as, H-l^pO a Iwigdom, ni*?7^ kingdoms. 
 
 4. — Many masculine nouns take JTI for their plural: as, 
 3X a father, r\M^ fathers ; ^??? a seat, throne, p. riiXD3 ; and many 
 nouns feminine take DV for their plural : as |5j? a stone, p. '2''??^ ; 
 
 n-iy^ barley, p. onyt^. 
 
 5. — Some nouns take indiscriminately either the masculine 
 or feminine plural *: thus, "'1'^ a generation, p. C'l'l'^ or nilH; njK' « 
 year, p. ^""V^ or n'lJt?' ; p?n « window, p. D''J'l^n or ni:i?n-|-. 
 
 6. — The names of liquids, seasons, metals t, and some col- 
 lectives, are always used in the singular number : as, S^T gold, »1D? 
 silver, IJ!! wine^ \'Q^. oil ; ^^?^ spring, ^").n winter, ?in sand, P3X dust. 
 
 * See Note, p. 44. 
 
 t Also ^5'l?n, which ought to be considered as an exception. 
 
 X The names of liquids and metals are sometimes found in the 
 plural : but then the word must be considered as expressive of dif- 
 ferent sorts.
 
 50 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 To the preceding may be added abstract terms and proper names, 
 which, from the nature of their signification, do not admit of the 
 plural : as, "^^lI^ love*, n^?t^ hatred, &c. 
 
 7. — Some are used in the plural only : as a^*n life, D'-pqi 
 mercij, D^JS the visage, facey ^'"'71 reins, n'nt< stables. 
 
 Obs. 8 — The following are rather irregular in the formation of 
 their plural : as, 03 (instead HJ? or 03?) a daughter, p. rii33 ; ninx 
 a sister, p. riVriN ; ni^ an ox, p. Q""?!^ ; p^^ an open place, a market, 
 p. D*i5j^; tJ'^N a man. p. ^'^''^, but more frequently ^V^; "^W « 
 woman, p. niB'X, but more frequently Cti'i" 
 
 Dual. 
 
 41. The dual expresses two of a kind; and is 
 formed by adding D^— to the singular, whether it be 
 masculine or feminine : as, DV day, W'h\ days, UW 
 two days ; ^^ a thousand, 0^371^5 thousands, D^fipX tivo 
 thousands ; 1^.} a shoe, npj;:? or D^JJ^ shoes, D^j;]} a 
 pair of shoes i nS'jl a door or gate, Ti^Twl gates, D^n?*^^ 
 double doors. 
 
 Obs. 1. — Nouns terminating in H— , change this letter into D: as, 
 nSB* a year, Cl'P?^ tu'o years ; HStt a hundred. D^p**^ tivo hundred. 
 2. — Things that are double by nature or art, are used in the 
 
 * Some of these are found in the plural ; but then they must, like 
 the preceding, be understood as expressive of different kinds : thus 
 nitD^n wisdoms, i. e. the sciences ; riiM2Jil understandings, i. e. dif- 
 ferent objects or degrees of understanding.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 51 
 
 dual instead of the plural : as TV- an eye, ^'!]tV eyes ;* 'Ij hand, D!'1* 
 hands; ^>'}.footy ^')};i feet ; npb Up, D^ps'rp dps; ITS ear, D.^^.tS ears. 
 Ohs. 3, — Q.^??^<0 a pair of scales, a halance ; D^nf^TO pincers, 
 tongs ; D^pT a hand mill (consisting of two stones), admit not of 
 the singular number. f 
 
 4. — The following, and a few other nouns, form their dual 
 by adding D^- to the plural : thus, HOin « wall, riiJDin f. walls, 
 D^p'on double walls; i<i3"i. a myriad, niSS") myriads, D!p3"! two 
 myriads. 
 
 E.vercise. 
 
 L_Give the signification of the following, and form 
 their feminine gender : — 
 
 Give the signification and form the plural of the 
 following : — 
 
 T • • • T T ■ T j " 
 
 * Some of these are found in the plural number; but then they 
 have mostly different significations : thus, rii^^^J? springs, fountains; 
 nnj tenons, portions ; ^''7^1 times; as D^JT ti'?^ three times (lit. 
 steps) ; &c. 
 
 ■f To the above may be added, D!p water, ^\^^ heaven, which 
 occur always in the dual form. 
 
 E
 
 C-. ^' ^y^ 
 
 ,/ 
 
 52 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 1 Give the signification and form the dual of the 
 following : — 
 
 rnsty ' n:tj^ ,r\i^^ ,m /T ,h^i >rhi >h]i^ '^hi^ 'DV 
 
 
 Render the following into English ; — 
 
 =^nS-rx-na^5^ : ^^ Mm n'^ni'i ^^rtj^i /^^S^^y "nS»j 
 ="n"i:i5< ''p]J2rh 'Tm ^"pn /^St^Di ''ntob' ''r^fp 
 
 -T I - •-: ••'V -T ,;/.^TT-:i- 'It- 
 
 1 Give. - 13 Son, f. D^??- 3 n^ Heart. * HV. Eye. ' V^_. Way. 
 ® They shall observe. "^ Go not. * Insert o/. ^ Sinner. ° Withhold. 
 10 73.T Foot. " A path. '- For. '' Evil, i-* They run. is Honor. 
 16 Ji^' Wealth. 1' First, chief. ^^ HN-n^ Produce. ^9 3X Father. 
 20 nx Mother. =1 Go. -Ant. ''Sluggard. ''See. '^ And be wise. 
 -6 Which not to her, i. e. who has neither. " Chief. "^ Overseer. 
 ^^ Ruler. 20 ghg provideth. ^i Summer. "- Dp^ Bread, provi- 
 sion. 33 She gathereth. 34 Harvest. '" Food. ^6 "p^g sluggard says. 
 t There is. " A lion. ^' Without, street. '' An old lion, ^o A 
 wide place, a market, ^i I shall be slain.
 
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 53 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 '7 SM>.v.» 'fi 
 
 
 T : -t; 
 
 1 J^2 a daughter, f. ni33- * Are. ' Cattle, sheep. ' What shall 
 I do ? 4 We will take. ^ We will give, f' Ye shall give. '' Ye 
 shall take. « 1P. A boy, youth, p. OnV?' " \\>\ An old man, p. 
 D"'?i?.!- ^" "li^? Horned cattle. ^^ We must go. '- Ye shall not do 
 any work. '' ^?V. A servant, slave. ^* '"'^';? A female slave. 
 
 '5 npn? or n^na cattle. 'O a stranger. '■' Who is. ■" "1V.;^' A gate, 
 ;). Dnyb'. '''Go. =" P.?? T-iiidj country. ''Birth-place. " ^yhich 
 I wilf'show thee. " Thou shalt go and take. °* nnst^'P A 
 family. -^ ri^3 A house, ^''3 house of. 
 
 Case. 
 
 49. Most of the relations denoted in Latin, Greek, 
 and other languages, by cases^ are expressed in He- 
 brew by the prefixes D, 7, i, i, and by the particle 
 nx (Art. 40, 41), or by the prepositions ?^ to, JP 
 from. (See Declension of Nouns, Table I.) 
 
 50. The relations denoted by the Genitive are 
 indicated by the mere position of the words, or by 
 some slight alteration in them, as will be shown 
 
 presently. 
 
 e2
 
 54 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Absolute and Constructive state of Words. 
 
 51. A word is said to be in an absolute state when 
 it requires no other word to define it: as, ^^V,:(i servant, 
 slave, p. Dnny^ ; ^1^^ a word, p. D'^:21_-, 'b^ or 'Ss a 
 vessel, p. Dv^' 
 
 52. A word is said to be in a state of construction, 
 when it requires another word to define or to limit its 
 signification : such, for instance, are the first words 
 in the following examples : — 
 
 DI^^!l^? *T5J?. • • servant of Abraham, or Abraham^ s servant, 
 DnilK ''I^J^ • . servants of Abraham, 
 "n?^!! ^5"^ • • ^b^ word of the king, 
 ^T)}^, ^51 • • ^ word of falsehood, i. e. a false loord*, 
 T\t2i^ ""l^"^ • • words of truth, or true words, 
 711.5 ^75 • • ^ vessel of iron, or an iron vessel, 
 ^Pp w3 . . vessels of silver, or silver vessels. 
 
 53. In all these instances, it is the first word that 
 undergoes the change, if any (just the reverse of what 
 takes place in other languages), and it is therefore said 
 to be in a state of construction. To understand this 
 more clearly, the student is requested to bear in mind 
 the remark made in Art. 36 ; namely — that one of the 
 methods by which general terms are made to express 
 particular objects or individuals, is, to place one or 
 more words after the noun whose signification is to be 
 
 * These examples show clearly the origin of Adjectives.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 55 
 
 limited. 13y way of further illustration, let us take 
 the general term ly^, in the following sentence : — 
 n^j; npV N*S Dnnna ' .4 servant luiil not be correcled by 
 wordi (Prov. xxix.) Here 1^^. is used indefinitely, 
 and means any servant ; but as the sense is complete, 
 the word 13^. is said to be in an uidepeudent or in an 
 absolute state* ; but in the phrase Dri^ns* njJJ. n^xn. 
 *^7^^[thc] servant-of Abraham (or Abrahams servant) 
 said,' "l^J^. is used in a restrictive sense; and as it de- 
 pends on the following- word DrTl!!*!:^ which defines and 
 limits it, it is said to be in a state of construction or de- 
 pendence*. Thus, also, in the phrase n.!3^ ■pJ"! ]*'pro 
 ■•J^X ' To wash [the]/e'e^-o/'[the] servants-of my lord,* 
 'hTsfeet of, and n.?J^ servants of, are in a state of de- 
 pendence or construction : the absolute state of the first, 
 being SH^J?. servants, and of the second, Dv^l/cc^. 
 
 54. The noun which is put in a state of construc- 
 tion, must precede that which defines or qualifies it: 
 thus, i{< 1D10 a father s instruction (not ID^D inX) ; 
 '^hn m the kings house (not H^S ^W)- 
 
 55. The definite n, when required, is placed be- 
 fore the definite word, but not before the word in 
 
 * This state of the noun is denominated by Hebrew grammarians, 
 T1Q3 separated; whereas, the constructive or dependent is called 
 Tl-lfOp or "=19P? approached. It would, perhaps, be better to name the 
 first, the independent state, and the second, the dependent state. 
 However, for the sake of convenience, we shall sometimes denomi- 
 nate the first, the Nominative ; and the second, the Genitive.
 
 56 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 construction ; because this is already defined by the 
 word which follows it : thus, as in the preceding ex- 
 ample, '^S^n n^5 (but not ^hj^L\ n-'an, nor-^iS^ n^5L)). 
 
 56. As both words present only one precise con- 
 ception, they are, in some respects, considered as a 
 compound word ; and for this reason, the first is often 
 joined to the second, by ^j?^, and then loses its prin- 
 cipal accent : as, ]3 a garden. \1V'\^ [the] garden of 
 Eden, Dnp-^^7p king of Sodom. 
 
 57. To facilitate still further the pronunciation, 
 the first word is often abridged by rejecting or con- 
 tracting one or more of its vowel-points : as, — 
 
 fl.''3 a house, fT'S house of, HPSri n'»2 house of prayer, 
 1J a hand, "^1 hand of, '^^f^D 1! the hand of the king. 
 
 58. Nouns terminatino- in H— , chano-e this termi- 
 nation into T\— : as, TH^^ a song, '''lyi T\y'P the song 
 of my beloved, ITnin a law, H^D T^T\ the law of Moses. 
 
 . Those that terminate in H—, retain the H, but change (•••) into 
 ( ■• ) : as, i^.^C.p a camp, V?^"]"^'? '^•^^P Israel's camp, "^.^iPP cattle*, 
 I3?''3i^ T\'^p'p) the cattle of your father, 
 
 59. The following have their absolute and construc- 
 tive state singular alike : — 
 
 * But tlie genitive of i^^pO « purchase, is riJpP" 
 When the H is merely added for the sake of euphony, it is rejected 
 in the genitive : as, H?.''/ jiight, ? v night of.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 57 
 
 P'- All names whose vowels are immutable (see 
 Ch. III.) : as, y^ a sv/ig, T^ a citij, n**^!! a covenant, 
 D^D a horse, H^l the luind, 7ip voice, 1^ a stranger, so- 
 journer, ^^D{< a prisoner y ^^d^T\ a disciple, pJS a 
 priest, y\^ an enemy. Sec. 
 
 2'"^- All nouns of the following forms— [rt] Sj;b : 
 as, tIN* ear, tyin a month, im a bribe. Sec. [b] S?| 
 as, "^/P a king, Ipn mercy, 1))) a boy, ^T\p the dawn. 
 Sec. [c] h]^J^ : as, nSp a book, IS^J ashes. 
 
 S""''- All feminine nouns having the following ter- 
 minations — n— , n^, f\-, H^t: as, n^ibj? a crown, 
 T\^h^ an ujider-garment, T\\1''y_ friendship, HJ^Sin a 
 worm, n^iJ^i^^ beainnimj- . 
 
 60. The plural and dual terminations, D"*— and D^— 
 are changed into *— : as, Dnn^ words, C^\sn nn^ the- 
 words-of-tJie-man ; D''£J'J women, wives, "^/^n ^ti'J ^//c' 
 A'zV/^-'i- ^^/^Je^ ; D'p/j; cye.y, D^^^XH ^;?'j; the-eyes-of-the- 
 men. 
 
 61. The plural termination Hi remains unchanged, 
 but the preceding vowels suffer a slight alteration : 
 as, D)^^ fathers, ^O^n^* nUN* thy fathers' fathers ; 
 ni!D*l!l blessings, U'l^'^ nilD'^3 bkssino-s of heaven. 
 
 E.ve raise. 
 Render the following into Hebrew — 
 
 The king of Israel. The law of God. The words of my Lord. 
 The house of my fathers. The song of Moses. The way of shi- 
 ners. A word of truth. The eves of the woman. The hands of my
 
 58 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 sister. The vessels of the house. The blessings of thy father. 
 The sons of my friend. The first of all thy produce. Your 
 father's cattle. The king's camp. 
 
 The annexed Tables will enable the student to see 
 the principal modifications of nouns at one view. 
 
 Explanation of the Tables. 
 
 Table I. — The Roman letters in the first column are abbre- 
 viations for Nominative, Dative, Objective, Ablative, Comparative, 
 Conjunction. 
 
 The second and third columns contain the prefixes and their 
 powers, as used indefinitely or definitely. 
 
 The fourth column contains a noun of the singular number with 
 the prefixes, used indefinitely. 
 
 The fifth column contains a noun in a state of construction. 
 
 The sixth column contains a noun plural with the prefixes, used 
 indefinitely. 
 
 The seventh column contains the same noun with the prefixes, 
 used in a state of construction. 
 
 The eighth column contains a noun of the singular number with 
 the prefixes, used definitely. 
 
 The ninth column contains a noun plural with the prefixes, used 
 definitely. 
 
 Table II. — No. 1. contains the pronominal affixes, and their 
 powers. 
 
 No. 2. contains a noun masculine, with the pronominal affixes. 
 No. 3. a noun feminine terminating in H— with the affixes. 
 
 62. Obs. — Each of the nouns contained in the tables, may be further 
 varied by the prefixes : as ''"}?'l? ^o my u'ord ; objective '•l^T^l?^
 
 S I. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 2. 
 
 1. 
 
 
 
 the ^ 
 
 Dkf 
 
 Ind. 
 
 
 
 
 
 , n tl.e. 
 
 ^^ to tl.e. 
 
 ' a 
 
 ' 7 to a 
 
 N. 
 D. 
 
 
 
 ^,>^*,^^ or ri§^ I lie. 
 .1-1 !■• 
 
 ' a 
 
 Af. 
 
 
 
 ge,^^^^D '"'•"111 llie. 
 
 ^P from a 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 B'ln^ 
 
 , 1 in the. 
 
 3 with a 
 
 ?■ Ab. 
 
 
 
 g'^nn'^ 
 
 3 as the. 
 
 3 as a 
 
 Com. 
 
 
 
 &nn^ 
 
 ni and the. 
 
 ) and 
 
 Con. 
 
 
 
 : 11. 
 
 
 
 
 their/ 
 
 
 1. 
 
 
 
 
 I L .._ 
 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 a word, 
 words. 
 
 
 1 , 
 
 ''■n'Tin 
 
 ^ >3 
 
 a law. 
 
 
 
 1 . . d; "^ninin 
 
 ninin j ' 
 
 laws. 
 
 
 
 [11. 
 
 
 
 1 "^"ipb 
 
 
 a visiter. 
 
 
 |.... ''Ipis 
 
 visiters. 
 
 
 
 1 "^in^Hi^? 
 
 nm*j 
 
 beloved. 
 
 
 
 t 'T^ 
 
 nps 2. 
 
 visiting. 
 
 
 
 
 ■ , , -e,. 
 
 them i^e. 
 
 DJ? 
 
 witli. 
 
 • 
 
 t -. '^^ 
 
 -Sj; 
 
 upon. 
 
 ■ ^v 
 
 / £^/Ln^ 
 
 Or ^T.^i^ 
 
 r K 
 
 nri for ^p,nr\- 
 
 cs ^n ; as, 'inniS for i"Ti« Job XXV. 3. 
 
 7 Or ^nifris- 
 
 ^N 
 
 Or ^T5.
 
 DECLENSION OF A SUBSTANTIVE.— TABLE I. 
 
 9. 
 
 8. 
 
 7. 
 
 6. 
 
 5. 
 
 4. 
 
 3. 
 
 2. 
 
 1. 
 
 the words. 
 
 B'lain 
 
 the word. 
 
 words of 
 
 na'i 
 
 words. 
 
 D'-iaT 
 B'lai^ 
 
 word of. 
 
 -iai 
 iai^ 
 
 a word. 
 
 -lai 
 .a.> 
 
 Dei 
 
 n rr n iiie. 
 
 IKD. 
 
 N. 
 D. 
 
 B'laiFi nK 
 
 lain m 
 
 'larns 
 
 B'W 
 
 lai-riK 
 
 i?T 
 
 ri-nKo.nKii'e. 
 
 'a 
 
 Ac. 
 
 B'na'^na 
 
 ■la-ina 
 
 '13^S 
 
 B'la-na 
 
 i3ia 
 
 laia 
 
 na, ha from Hie. 
 
 'a fioiwa 
 
 1 
 
 B'-iai3 
 
 iai3 
 
 '1313 
 
 D'laia 
 
 la-ia 
 
 1313 
 
 a, a ill ti.e. 
 
 a with a 
 
 j-Ab. 
 
 D'naia 
 
 nai3 
 
 '1313 
 
 B'-iais 
 
 ■laia 
 
 1313 
 
 3, 3 as the. 
 
 3 a, a 
 
 Com. 
 
 anaini 
 
 laini 
 
 'laii 
 
 B'-iani 
 
 la-ii 
 
 laii 
 
 ni, HI and the. 
 
 ■Jand 
 
 Con. 
 
 WITH THE PRONOMINAL AFFIXES.— TABLE II. 
 
 lBn»-'«-p- 
 ( W:/-P- 
 
 1 Biai 
 
 }.--.'Dn«i.3i 
 
 t ;^Dmin 
 
 1 . . Dn'niiin 
 
 D3-... 
 
 <13 . 
 l^i'r.p 
 
 '"In^fp- 
 
 
 
 
 "S: 
 
 '■ 
 
 t B3iai 
 
 t B3»iai 
 
 ).■•- Dsniin 
 ]■■ Dp-'fitiin 
 
 wniiri 
 ^'niiiB 
 
 innai 
 n'lai 
 
 iniin 
 
 'iiai 
 
 nil 
 
 iniin 
 
 T'nliin 
 
 •^131 
 
 •!|niin 
 ■ri'nnin 
 
 ^I'rnim 
 
 '131 
 
 'niin 
 'niiin 
 
 B'131 J 
 
 mini 
 miin ) 
 
 a word, 
 words, 
 a law. 
 Jaws. 
 
 INFINITIVES AND PARTICIPLES.— TABLE III. 
 
 } Bam 
 
 ! Bins 
 
 t BaifJiB 
 
 J. ■• BsnpiB 
 I---. B3aw?< 
 
 «i|li3 
 
 flipis 
 
 •iipiis 
 
 lipis 
 
 llpis 
 
 'ipi: ; 
 
 ^3»ipia 
 
 cnpis 
 
 Tipiis 
 
 1|'ipiS 
 
 ^i'lpis 
 
 npis 
 
 ^33fflS 
 
 nains 
 
 lams' 
 
 1I3WN 
 
 ^awx 
 
 'aiiN 
 
 Mips 
 
 flips 
 
 iipi 
 
 lips 
 
 '"11p2 
 
 'Ip? 
 
 PREPOSITIONS.— TABLE IV. 
 
 BO'^. 
 
 ■ B3''?a. 
 
 us. 1 
 
 her. 
 
 him. 
 
 thee/. 
 
 thee, ,11. 
 
 me 
 
 IJSH 
 
 riSJ! 
 
 IBS? 
 
 1?? 
 
 ^sy : 
 
 'SVl 
 
 ^^'Sjj 
 
 0',^ 
 
 T^X 
 
 I',"?!; 
 
 1!^| 
 
 '"^SJ 
 
 ' Not expressed, 
 especially iu pause. 
 
 * Sometimes wilb 3, 
 . ribnN Gen. ix. 21. ' 
 
 ' The ^ is sometimes omitted. ^ -.^ / 'In poetrv 112 ; n*, l^?-'!^ for G•T2^3. » Or ^m.f:15' 
 
 arinn for 'nnri- • Or l^ai 
 
 tilh in ; as, iniiN for i-liN ,lob xxv. 3. 
 '"OrTti:!?.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 59 
 
 my word, '''^y^P from my tcord, ''"I3']-"I a)id my word, &c. "i"*?"!?! and 
 to his u'ord ; ''I?"!? as my ivords, C^"!••?']^ «« ^ter words, 1!,"!?T'I and 
 thy ivords /. ; Dnn;?'ip-1 and from their ivords, &c. : ''n'jiria in my 
 law, '•niiril. and my laws, Vnhin^ in his laws, "^I^'jirinV arid in 
 thy law, &c. 
 
 Table III. — No. 1. contains an example of a Participle Active 
 and Passive, with the pronominal affixes. 
 
 0^5. — Participles being frequently used as nouns, are varied like 
 tliem : as, 1pit^' a keeper, guardian, D Y?D "'Plti' the keeper of the 
 vessels, D^")Pti'n the keepers, n^^ri '•"ipC' the keepers of the house, 
 ^nnin '•ipt^p-l and to the keepers of my law, or to those who keep 
 my law. 
 
 No. 2. contains an example of an Infinitive mood with the prono- 
 minal affixes : as, ^P3 to visit, '•lip? my visiting, T1P3 thy visiting, 
 &c. ; "l^lf* to keep, to guard, ''IPt^ my keeping, or guarding. 
 
 G3. Ohs 1. — Infinitives, from the nature of their signification, do 
 not admit of all the variation of nouns. They may, however, receive 
 the prefixes o, ^j 3, 2 ; as, Tlp?? in visiting, "Ip?? as visiting, "^p?? 
 for visiting, or to visit, i. e. for the purpose of visiting ; 'Ips?'? from 
 visiting ; and also the pronominal affixes ""IP?? in my visiting, i. e. 
 being engaged in the act ; ''IP?? as my visiting, "'"^P?? to his visiting, 
 '\1\^^^ from, by, or because of his visiting, TIP?? in thy visiting, &c. 
 
 2. — In the latter case, the pronominal affixes have some- 
 times an objective signification : ''"'P^/f '° keep him ; '''l^ijc 
 n"JPu'>1 to cultivate her, and to keep her. (Gen. ii. 15.) 
 
 Table IV. contains examples of Prepositions (originally nouns) 
 with the pronominal aflSxes. 
 
 64. Obs. — Some Prepositions take the pronominal affixes of the 
 singular number : as, ''? to me, "y to thee ; others, those of the 
 plural number : as, 7^ to, V^ to me, T'Z^ to thee.
 
 GO THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 The student may, by way of exercise, decline the following 
 words: ^iS light, ^V. a ivitness, like "^V (p. 42). Thus 'i^^,'!^: 
 n^sn a prayer, like ^y^ (ibid). Thus, '•n^^QJ^-— 3?^ the heart, 
 like 13? ; — nnis light, like nnin ; — "iOi:i^ a keeper, like 1i?."lS ; — 
 l-tpS o?ic //m< z's «;/s/7(Y^ like ^inX ; — ib;^ to keep, like Ip?" 
 
 65. From the preceding rules and observations, it is evident 
 that the modification of nouns arc principally expressed by prefixes 
 and afiixes. As those are common to all nouns, it follows that, 
 strictly speaking, there cannot be more than one declension. 
 However, as several of the vowel-points are subject to a variety of 
 changes in the process of declension, a further classification is ne- 
 cessary in order to ascertain the principles upon which those 
 changes are founded, and the rules by which they are regulated. 
 This will foi-m the subject of the following chapter, to which, such 
 students as are desirous of having some information on this part 
 of grammar, are referred. Those, however, who are contented with 
 a general knowledge of the language, may pass on at once to the 
 4th chapter. J^^'J ^;i:^4£ ^ Z^^- 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 On the Changes which some of the Vowels 
 undergo in the pllocess of declension. 
 
 Introductori/ Remarks. 
 
 66. It has already been remarked, (Art. 29 — 30), that in conse- 
 quence of the removal of the accent — which frequently takes place 
 when nouns ai*e put in a state of construction, and always when 
 they are augmented by the affixes — such of the vowels as 
 are not characteristic of grammatical distinctions are often 
 changed for others, or entirely omitted ; by which means the words
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 61 
 
 are abridged, and their pronunciation facilitated. These changes 
 depend chiefly on the grammatical forms * of the words and their 
 Etymology (though often on usage onlyf) and cannot well be as- 
 certained without classification. The method which the ancient 
 grammarians adopted was this: — they enumerated all or most of 
 the forms of which the nouns of the language were susceptible, 
 and specified under each form the changes to which its vowel-points 
 were subject, together with such words as deviated from the general 
 rule : and thus they exhibited the Etymology and the change of the 
 vowels at the same time. As the forms of words are, however, so 
 very numerous as almost to overburden the memory, modern gram- 
 mariansj have endeavoured to abridge the labour, by distributing 
 
 * By the grammatical form is meant, that form which a word is said 
 to have according to its Etymology. Thus, the words "IV. a ic'Uncss, 
 D??' a name, and, />* shadow, have apparently the same form ; yet, the 
 grammatical form of the first is /S, (Art. 25, p. 27,) the ( •• ) of 
 which is immutable, and it is therefore inflected thus, *1V. '''7V> ^nV^ ''IV, 
 Sec. The second, derived from a verb whose third radical is n, and 
 which is here omitted, is said to be of the form VS ; the ( •■ ) being 
 mutable, it is inflected thus: nv), ^^f, niDC?, niop', &c. The third, 
 derived from a verb whose second and third radicals are alike, and 
 one of which is omitted, is said to be of the form /— S* The ( .. ) is 
 likewise mutable, and the second letter receives Dagesh on being 
 augmented: thus, T'V, tV, 'IfV' 
 
 ■\ Thus, 3!??T and "l^^? have the same grammatical form (>'V.?), yet 
 the first retains ( .. ) thus, ''3>?J, '';?^?? ; but the second changes (:), 
 into (-), and ( •• ) into ("0 in the genitive plural : thus, "'l^^.,?' Thus, 
 likewise, 15"^ and "^^l are both of the form (?J^S), yet the former is 
 inflected, "in'H, n?% D'1?1, &c., but the latter, ^03, "hm, D^^Of &c. 
 Hence the difliculty of giving general rules that shall not be liable to 
 several exceptions. 
 
 X J. S. Vater was the first who adopted this arrangement, which 
 has been much improved by Gesenius and other grannnarians.
 
 62 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 the nouns according as their vowels are either immutable, mutable, 
 or of a mixed character. Tlie chief objection against this arrange- 
 ment, is that before the student can know whether a vowel is mutable 
 or not, he must often have recourse to the Etymology of the word ; 
 and as this cannot well be ascertained without some knowledge of 
 the grammatical forms, he is left to mere conjecture, and the clas- 
 sification becomes almost useless. This inconvenience we have 
 endeavoured to remove in the following Tables, by adding the 
 grammatical form to each division, and by specifying the chief forms 
 belonging to each class, together with most of their exceptions. 
 
 The following rules and observations will, it is presumed, facili- 
 tate the acquisition of this difficult and, to beginners, embarrassing 
 part of grammar. 
 
 Immutable and Mutable Vowels. 
 
 67. Immutable are — 
 
 1st. — All long vowels followed by either of the quiescent letters, 
 6^, ■•, 1 : as, (^t) in J^fl a chamber, t;^'^<"^* a poor man ; (V), in t^'H 
 poverty, t^? between; Ct), in D''3 a purse, bag\ ; (-1), in l-l^;}; a tvhelp; 
 and (1) or {j_) not followed by (•••) or (-), as D'13^ « cup, 103 « priest, 
 minister. 
 
 * This word is sometimes written without ^ : thus, ^1 ; but this 
 makes no difference, the vowel being equally immutable. 
 
 ■j- Except some words of the form CVS) : as, Hjl a hid, "'"'.l*?. a lion, 
 which change (V) into (t) or into (:) ; thus ^n?* ti''!!'?^" CVD; 
 as 'hn sickness, V^n- QV.^) -. as, n^ rebellion, DnO- 
 
 X -1 is sometimes changed into (••.) ; as, J^-ISB' a week p. flij?^^' ; 
 ri-13^» kingdom, p. rii»3^0- 
 
 § 1 is sometimes changed into (••.) followed by Dagesh : as DilX 
 red, f. n01i>* p-. U^m^- Dnj; naked, forms its plural D^S-ny.- 
 This is an anomaly, having dagesh after a long vowel, which is 
 contrary to rule.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF 
 
 NOUNS. - 
 
 -TABLE 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 
 ClaSB. 
 
 /■ 
 
 their, ffi. 
 
 /• 
 
 your, m. 
 
 our. 
 
 her. 
 
 his. 
 
 thy,/. 
 
 thy, ,.. 
 
 my. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 lis 
 
 Absolute slate. 
 ■lis ligl'l- 
 
 Form. 
 
 '.IB 
 
 
 BliK 
 
 
 D?liS 
 
 M^iN 
 
 Rnis 
 
 lli** 
 
 ^lliN 
 
 niN 
 
 
 
 eri'-iis 
 
 
 B3"li(« 
 
 M'iN 
 
 ?',?" 
 
 T^iN 
 
 T.I-iN 
 
 ^MiN 
 
 '1'lS 
 
 '1)K 
 
 B'liN p. 
 
 I. 
 
 
 Dpnx 
 
 
 DSP'IS 
 
 «|?1¥ 
 
 ap;ix 
 
 ^ns 
 
 P'^? 
 
 ''Ip'IV 
 
 P"ix 
 
 P'lV 
 
 pnx aju.t man. 
 
 b'ss 
 
 I 
 
 
 t=n'l';!'is 
 
 
 D?'|T1S 
 
 W'l?'^^ 
 
 O'lTl^t 
 
 vpns 
 
 Tp-'IX 
 
 1'R'IV 
 
 ■p.'1V 
 
 'p'lV 
 
 Q'p'is P- 
 
 
 
 DOT 
 
 
 D35T 
 
 «»■! 
 
 ROT 
 
 iCT 
 
 ^51 
 
 1^^ 
 
 'fil 
 
 D1 
 
 01 blood. 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 O!?'?! 
 
 
 tJp'O"^ 
 
 U'Sl 
 
 ri'OT 
 
 van 
 
 xm 
 
 T'?"^ 
 
 >OT 
 
 '01 
 
 D'ai p. 
 
 II. 
 
 
 D^jJilB' 
 
 
 DjVa'B* 
 
 w'jJJlB' 
 
 nSsjity 
 
 i'7y,iB' 
 
 #,12* 
 
 ■JI^SJIB* 
 
 '^JJIB* 
 
 ''7V0 
 
 '?!J^B*»f»". 
 
 Sjjis 
 
 
 
 DD'!?!2?B' 
 
 
 D?'i?y.'K' 
 
 «''?X'B* 
 
 n'^SJiB' 
 
 vhn^ef 
 
 l^'psi'ti' 
 
 Ti'bjJIE' 
 
 '^y.iK* 
 
 'bs^^ 
 
 D'^JJW P- 
 
 r 
 
 
 DTVp 
 
 
 031'Xp 
 
 "TXp 
 
 ni'Sp 
 
 iTS|7 
 
 ^?vp 
 
 1T5(|? 
 
 '1'Vp 
 
 TXp 
 
 TXp harvest." 
 
 Ws 
 
 
 
 OD'I'Vi? 
 
 
 Q?'Tsp 
 
 '3'TV|? 
 
 i^TVp 
 
 VTVi? 
 
 ^n'vp 
 
 I'TVp 
 
 'TVp 
 
 'TVp 
 
 D'I'Sp P 
 
 III. \ 
 
 
 DX''?a 
 
 
 0?'?"'?? 
 
 i^x""?)? 
 
 w'?? 
 
 ix"'?o 
 
 •^M 
 
 ^r'?o 
 
 'rha 
 
 1"'?^ 
 
 |"^D an inlerpteler 
 
 Vss 
 
 I 
 
 
 Dn'x>'?i? 
 
 
 D?'V''?l? 
 
 ""X""?!? 
 
 D'¥'^? 
 
 VS''?P 
 
 •^Tb'? 
 
 T?*?? 
 
 <x'Sn 
 
 'V'?!? 
 
 D'S''?B P- 
 
 IV. 
 
 
 °i;i 
 
 
 °?131 
 
 '^1?1 
 
 n-ia-^ 
 
 n?l 
 
 1151 
 
 1151 
 
 '1?1 
 
 151 
 
 13^1 3 ivord. 
 
 ''K? 
 
 
 
 Dn'1.31 
 
 
 O?'"!?'^ 
 
 ""lai 
 
 0'151 
 
 i-!?1 
 
 Tl?1 
 
 1'1?1 
 
 '151 
 
 '1.31 
 
 D'151 P- 
 
 j 
 
 
 03P! 
 
 
 D53p! 
 
 "3f!! 
 
 m 
 
 i^pr 
 
 ^3|1! 
 
 ^3p.l 
 
 '3p| 
 
 m 
 
 ptanol.lman. 
 
 ^i'l 
 
 V. j 
 
 
 D?';?p.' 
 
 
 D?'5|?t 
 
 '3'3|3t 
 
 ^m 
 
 VJp! 
 
 rm 
 
 1'Jl^! 
 
 m 
 
 '3p? 
 
 0'3pt 1' 
 
 
 
 D3T!! 
 
 
 t333"|i! 
 
 ^IIT 
 
 fis-n 
 
 1311 
 
 VT- 
 
 1?11 
 
 •511 
 
 Ill 
 
 TC»"»'- 
 
 ^5?? 
 
 
 
 On>3-!"5 
 
 
 D3"31'i 
 
 13W 
 
 0'?"!1 
 
 i'r,i 
 
 T3T1 
 
 T^ll 
 
 '511 
 
 '311 
 
 D'311 P 
 
 VI. 
 
 
 o^SJ 
 
 
 D3"!!;; 
 
 "123 
 
 fl^!??. 
 
 iiM 
 
 11W 
 
 VP 
 
 'lyj 
 
 1W 
 
 ■1JJ3 a boy. 
 
 
 
 
 Dri'iiJ 
 
 
 D?"!B3 
 
 "•■!X3 
 
 C'lW 
 
 1'1!!3 
 
 i:iK3 
 
 yy,^ 
 
 'ij?? 
 
 '1BJ 
 
 D'1!!3 P 
 
 Ibl.l. 
 
 ■epi hpfore tlif affixes ''3~,
 
 w 
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF NOUNS.—TABLE VI. 
 
 iiiy./- 
 
 lliy, m. 
 
 my. 
 
 T>^ 
 
 11?P 
 
 '1?P 
 
 insp 
 
 Til? 
 
 'ISP 
 
 •^t^-jn 
 
 ■^tflO 
 
 'E'lC 
 
 TnC! 
 
 YB-nn 
 
 '^■^n 
 
 ^Vn 
 
 ^•^'s 
 
 'I'-f* 
 
 Tb'« 
 
 ^'^•« 
 
 '"?■>! 
 
 ■^nia 
 
 •siriio 
 
 'nio 
 
 T|;nto 
 
 i|^niD 
 
 •niD 
 
 T.^D 
 
 i;^a 
 
 ".Sn 
 
 T'^C! 
 
 T;^n 
 
 "-h 
 
 T^3 
 
 Tb 
 
 "S3 
 
 Tb 
 
 T^? 
 
 <b 
 
 W 
 
 w 
 
 '0^ 
 
 ^nia^ 
 
 •^'no^ 
 
 'ntae> 
 
 •^yis 
 
 1?.'i«< 
 
 '?'.is< 
 
 T5P^ 
 
 T3P« 
 
 'a>- 
 
 w 
 
 l!*n 
 
 '%n 
 
 i:sn 
 
 T^n 
 
 'sn 
 
 ^?03 
 
 i?i?i 
 
 'Ss3 
 
 •r^m 
 
 ■]im 
 
 <S»? 
 
 ISO 
 
 '■;.?? 
 '^10 
 
 na 
 <Sn 
 
 'S3 
 
 
 Absolute Stule. 
 
 
 "IgjD a book. 
 
 D'-lSIp P- 
 
 gj-in a month. 
 
 D'EJ-in p. • 
 bss . ..... 
 
 D'S'K P- 
 
 no Jfii'. 
 D'nio P' 
 t ■hn s.ck.i.-,,. 
 n D"Sn p. 
 
 t '^3 a »e,.,el 
 D'Sl P- 
 ap n name. 
 
 niag* p. 
 
 3'iN an cn.ni, 
 D'3'iX P- 
 
 ,.r,an„„„>, 
 
 D'sn p. 
 
 So; a 
 
 P 
 
 t In pause ^^H**^?'
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF NOUNS.— TABLE VII. 
 
 on-iin 
 
 Dn'nhin 
 
 amp 
 
 
 DsnWp 
 Dj'ni'?jp 
 
 D3>rihin 
 D3'ni3^a 
 
 «^p 
 
 u'niWp 
 
 «rinin 
 irniiin 
 
 W'ni3-|3 
 
 an^jp 
 ri'ni'jijp 
 
 aw?* 
 n'nipSa 
 
 irii'jp 
 vni^p 
 
 vnhin 
 in;?* 
 
 inp-ja 
 vnipia 
 
 ina'?!? 
 vnip'^a 
 
 ■ Or a branch of a candlestick. 
 
 m 
 
 ''in'pJp 
 
 '^nP19 
 YrtPii 
 
 ■^Dp"?!? 
 t Or n:,;. 
 
 Ip'jJP 
 
 '5P- 
 
 "MS 
 T'i'JP 
 
 'nhin 
 
 "pip^P 
 
 Tp'ra 
 
 ha 
 P" 
 ™l? 
 
 'r 
 
 w? 
 
 m.iB 
 nhin 
 
 njE* 
 mp 
 
 npl? 
 nip"!? 
 
 np'?a 
 nip'?^ 
 
 ■»D a basket. 
 
 D'^P p. 
 
 nyh a sliepherd. 
 D'jhP' 
 
 neT>9 "ort. 
 p"tyj?(p P' 
 
 niVm p- 
 nnin » i»*. 
 niiin p 
 
 nJB* » year. 
 
 niJB* ?■ 
 
 nS'lpables.ing 
 
 nip-ip p- 
 
 np'?» » I""". 
 nip'?D p^ 
 
 a
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF NOUNS. -TABLE VIII. 
 
 Class. 
 
 f- 
 
 "-""■ 
 
 /■ 
 
 your, m. 
 
 our. 
 
 her. 
 
 his. 
 
 %,/. 
 
 %, „. 
 
 my. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Absolute state. 
 
 Form. 
 
 1 1 °07K3 
 
 Djniv? 
 
 «raJ 
 
 nrngj 
 
 in'jW 
 
 •^ip^yi 
 
 1W 
 
 '""K,? 
 
 rriy,? 
 
 rrilji a gifi. 
 
 rhs^ 
 
 
 ; ' Dn'nny: 
 
 
 D3'nny;. 
 
 u'ninyj 
 
 n'nny: 
 
 I'rt-ig: 
 
 TW1K3- 
 
 TO^t^ 
 
 'rtig? 
 
 nny;. 
 
 rtiX5 p- 
 
 XII.2 
 
 ] Dn'riinfEJ' 
 
 
 Da'ningu* 
 
 
 annBt* 
 n-ninsK' 
 
 inn?::' 
 
 
 
 'ninsE' 
 
 nnsB> 
 ningE' 
 
 nnSB* aboodmaid. 
 
 ninsE' p. 
 
 Ibid. 
 
 
 1 °09?C 
 
 I D3ria?n 
 
 unoppi 
 
 OTMn 
 
 inppn 
 
 ■^naan 
 
 T??5C 
 
 'riMn 
 
 nojn 
 
 nOSn wisdom. 
 
 rhi^ 
 
 
 1 Dri'riiopn 
 
 
 D3'riiD?ri 
 
 ■ 
 
 n'niQjn 
 
 vnia3n 
 
 •Jl^ninsri 
 
 Ynio?n 
 
 'rtosn 
 
 niosn 
 
 niB3n p. 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 D3p-ie!i 
 
 wene? 
 
 nri-iM 
 
 m-iQH 
 
 •'inioS: 
 
 ^TO? 
 
 'TOB 
 
 ^2 
 
 mDa^acrowo, 
 
 n^s 
 
 XIII. ( 
 
 1 1 Dri'niieK 
 
 
 BJ'rtitJK 
 
 U'niitfi!? 
 
 ri>piii?jz 
 
 vnh£?j7 
 
 ^)oiioa 
 
 T0"^2 
 
 'niipy 
 
 niiif)]^ 
 
 nhaa^p. 
 
 
 
 DByaD 
 
 
 D3PB3B 
 
 «ny3Q 
 
 nnysti 
 
 inj(30 
 
 •^W5e 
 
 iwaa 
 
 'nV3B 
 
 nsjae 
 
 njjae » ""s- 
 
 rhs& 
 
 
 
 Dn'nVse 
 
 
 D3'nj??B 
 
 W'PWB 
 
 n'nyiEi 
 
 vnyie 
 
 •^:rty?b 
 
 YOtoB 
 
 'rt5i?t) 
 
 niysB 
 
 niysQ p- 
 
 
 
 o?'3>«. 
 
 
 D3"3?! 
 
 1J>3!< 
 
 ri"3x 
 
 ?n V3S 
 
 T?¥ 
 
 ^•2!< 
 
 ■?!< 
 
 '3S' 3N 
 
 2f< a father. 
 
 
 
 
 oO'rtat! 
 
 
 D3'ni3^? 
 
 U"ni3s 
 
 D'rii3N 
 
 vrii3?? 
 
 T-W^S 
 
 •^•"3!^ 
 
 <ni3(^ 
 
 ni3N. 
 
 ni3« P 
 
 
 
 
 DI^'D*^ 
 
 
 D?"n« 
 
 i3>riK 
 
 O'DN 
 
 V, vns 
 
 T^i^ 
 
 ■^'nN 
 
 <nN 
 
 'nt? 
 
 ON a brother. 
 
 
 jj 
 
 
 Di^'r!(<. 
 
 
 Q2"ns 
 
 «'ns 
 
 C'D^ 
 
 i'n« 
 
 ^'m 
 
 TC"^ 
 
 'TO 
 
 '^^? 
 
 D'PIN P- 
 
 
 
 
 DnhN 
 
 
 DpnpiH 
 
 wnnx 
 
 anins 
 
 ininx 
 
 '^rtnn 
 
 ^riins 
 
 'niriN 
 
 niPis 
 
 rtnS a sister. 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 Dn'nvns* 
 
 
 DS-nvriN- 
 
 imi-rtN' 
 
 n-pvnx 
 
 vni'piN! 
 
 Y.ni'ns 
 
 I'ni'riN 
 
 'nvi;is 
 
 ni'CiN 
 
 rt'PIK P- 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 Dri3 
 
 1 
 
 031^13 
 
 i:n3 
 
 ari3 
 
 ms 
 
 W 
 
 ■V?? 
 
 '1?? 
 
 ns 
 
 nS a daughter. 
 
 
 
 
 Dn'niJ? 
 
 
 D3«ni33 
 
 «'ni33 
 
 • 
 
 n"ni33 
 
 Vrt33 
 
 TOiW 
 
 TJjii? 
 
 »rii33 
 
 ni:3 
 
 ni33 p- 
 
 
 
 
 DH'iJ 
 
 I 
 
 D3'S 
 
 W'S 
 
 ri«s 
 
 lira va 
 
 Tl 
 
 T? 
 
 'S 
 
 '3 
 
 ns «.ou,h. 
 
 
 
 
 ^"p 
 
 ! 
 
 D3;j^ 
 
 13:.!?' 
 
 ^'j& 
 
 in-B- i'tj' 
 
 T-tJ- 
 
 T!?' 
 
 ".J!' 
 
 nfc; 
 
 figl a Inmb 
 
 
 -)
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. G3 
 
 Observe. — ('■) and (••) are likewise immutable when they are either 
 a compensation for Dagesh ; as the first {■•) in tJ'^n (instead of ^y^), 
 an artist; the first (•• ) in J^IH (instead of ^''^.^) a deaf person ; or in 
 words derived from verbs of the 3th Conjugation (VJ?) -. as, IT a 
 stranger, p. C'^T, /, nni, &c. IV a witness, p. ^''lV,f. niy : — and from 
 the 8th Conjugation (D'S3|) : as, ]i^ a shield, p. D'??^- 
 
 2nd. — All short vowels followed b}^ a letter having dagesh* : as, 
 '1?3 a bride, "13^^ a husbandman, QpP a ladder, &c. — (See Part I. 
 page 33). 
 
 3rd. — All short vowels followed by a letter having Sh'va Jinalf : 
 as, 13"ji5 an offering, 10/^ a table, especially when the first letter is 
 formative : as, ^^'^P judgment, n^TS a native. 
 
 4th. — As the change of vowels does not extend beyond the penul- 
 timate, it follows that the antepenultimate is immutable|;. The first 
 vowel of the following and similar word will therefore be retained : 
 as t^nn conception, nnst;"P a family, •^^C'v consolation, '^^v'? terror, 
 J1"13T remembrance, &c. 
 
 5th. — Sh\-a at the commencement of words is always retained, 
 except in words of the form (i^/V?) ; as, i^3~Q a blessing, where it 
 is changed into (.) : (See class XL) — and in the form QV^), where 
 it is changed into (.) or (•). 
 
 Obs. — Vowels not included in the preceding rules are mostly 
 mutable. 
 
 Classification of Nouns. 
 
 68. Nouns may be distributed into thirteen 
 Classes. — (See the annexed Tables.) 
 
 * Except '^'^^, from which we find i^l^v? ^i^^ CM*?/?* 
 t Except the forms >y>V^ and n?y3 : as, nnpCi' a handmaid, 
 •^tI^P a queen, >^'}'^l a young woman, which change their short 
 
 vowels into (:) : thus, ninpL^, niD^rp, nny;- 
 
 I Except HTin? a bright spot, p. riiin? ; pnn a vision, gen. P'TH 
 p. nijvtn ; n33n)p „ chariot, gen. n^snp p. nn3"!0-
 
 64 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 I. 
 
 G9. The first Class comprehends monosyllables 
 and dissyllables whose vowels are immutahk : as, 'lii^ 
 light, zip the voice, p'''lV a just man. 
 
 The words belonging to this class have, of course, their absolute state 
 and their genitive alike, and retain their vowel-points before all the 
 pronominal affixes. (See Paradigm No. 1.) 
 
 Words of the following grammatical form belong to this class: — 
 
 (73) — as, *1T a stranger, (lit. separated) tTS exalted, superior^ 
 
 ISJ^ a singer, "^^ or lb^ a prince, 1!^ or ^^* an oppressor. 
 
 (t7jj!^3 and 73) — as, ^T a wreath, harder, 15 a sojourner, *1i 
 a lamp; *15<SJ^ a relation, ^J^3 pain. 
 
 (Ty$ and ^3+) — as, D'*3 a purse, pD a sort, species, yp 
 a wall ; ^^5 a master, 7^'2p a path. 
 
 (SiV? and §^iS)— as, ^It^ light, 'niy skin, \\T\'2 strength ; 
 lion an ass, ixb^ leaven. 
 
 * The genitive singular of these words is "i|?^ and "IV* Of the 
 former we find likewise ^.?"]^ your prince ; otherwise they retain 
 
 (t) : thus n^, nnb', nK>, orinb^, &c., nv, onnv, &c. 
 
 -f- Except 1>??, which has already been noticed. 
 
 + Except "i^y a ciuj, p. Dnj?, ny, ny, -riny- 
 
 § Except DV a rf«y, p. D>p^ or niOJ ; gen. p. V\ or niO^\ — *ttj 
 ^^^:, &c. ; Q3^P:, DH^P^^, &c. ; c?Ma/, D;pV-_Except likewise, I'lK' «« 
 
 ox, p. D*"))^; nin a //^or??, cniq or D'-Hin- 
 
 II See the second Note in the following page.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 65 
 
 (S^yS) and ^3*)_as, "l^^l a whelp, ri,T)f the wind, H^Sf a 
 table, board ; 7^Dil a boundary, E^^l? a garment. 
 
 [h'\^^,t ':>iy?), ^3)— as, T'li^ mighty, ]>'>'1j; (for ]'*<'-nj;) a 
 tyrant ; ^liS^la hero, "lis^ a drunkard ; *T^Dy « pillar. *1^3ri 
 
 power ; I'l'lpri m"««^, |i''!2^? « poor, needy person. 
 
 (SiyS^, S'^J[fi?3) |'as,n'>nSJ'D«rfe5^ro?/er; p2'^'(^ a treasure, - 
 (SiyS)^, S'ij;3^)"| tr^a'pD a garment; ^S'Op a song. 
 
 (h'^V.^r^^ ^VP^") fas, c]ii;i^ ^/^e/.v^, niniJ^ « c/^c/t,- n^DSi? 
 
 ( 7^y3i!i) I a disciple ; J^iJ^J^ pleasure. 
 
 (.m—n'h^^^) ras.nnnx e;?rf,ri^:)S»§ kingdom; n'^^^pa 
 
 (f1'>^j;£)) I rmwaw^- n^'^iSn (for n^^X"!) 6eg^•nn^/^^. 
 
 To the preceding may be added many words of the following 
 forms :— (|i^3) : as, p'pri a window Root, ^n. (fiiyS) : 
 
 * Except P^'^ a market, p. Q'^plt^; ^•1"^ a kettle p. t3"''in- 
 t The vowel under n is denominated ni-13|l nns Furtive Patltach. 
 It is dropped in tlie process of declension : as, TlS, "^^3• 
 f Except liSV a bird, p. QnSV 
 § p. nv?70- Thus also from rT-nriri //?e nether, or /o?<;e>- pflr/, 
 
 «. nrnnn-
 
 G6 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 as, n^^5 captivity : Root,n75 (^^^^3) : as, n^D3 a covering, 
 
 garment (fT'yfi) : as, n'^^V}^ * a lance. (iSJJID) : as, N^iD an 
 
 outlet, or going out: Root, N^ ; X^iD /ear,t_(XyD) : as, 
 
 i^b^ a /«^r(/e;? : Root, ^'^ (^)l^^ ' ^^' ^?f?^ « co;2i50ca- 
 
 i/o«.— (biy'^ri) : as, trin^'in /zert; ivine — (hv}:?^!^: as, X^N^ 
 production, issue : Root, X^\ 
 
 Obs. — Most words of the form ^V^r>, as li^*. honour, respect, X 3J1? 
 a ivriting, retain (t) in the genitive singular, and in the absolute 
 plural : as, V^V. a neck-chain, p. D"'i?^y. ; some, however, take (-) 
 in the genitive singular, and dagesh on being inflected ; thus, t^t 
 time, season; gen, VPX ; ''3^T, D30|, j9. C?^?' Many words of the 
 form ^V? receive likewise dagesh: as, D*iri a myrtle, p. Cpin. ; 
 l^yp Utile, p. D^^j;p few ; D3H a pond, p. 0'^^• Sometimes, 
 however, dagesh is omitted : as, '^'QV^, D^'''?^^' From ^T\ honey, 
 we find V^"^.- 
 
 II. 
 
 69. The second class comprehends monosyllables 
 having mutable (t) : as, D"^ blood, derived from verbs 
 of the 7th conjugation (TP), and dissyllables which 
 have a similar vowel for their ultimate, and an immu- 
 table vowel for their penultimate : as, "l^iX a treasure, 
 1'D)^ cor flection. 
 
 * Plural D^ri^pq or nin^jri, Qn^nin^pD- 
 
 f Yet, of this we find D^t^-lb- 
 
 I The only inflections with which this word (^0?) is found in 
 Scripture, are >^^^} and ^3203 ; but in the later writings, we find 
 it inflected in the following manner: — ^P?, gen. '^^'2 or 3713 — 
 
 nn?, &c. D'?n?, '?{i3, Dn^?^?, &c.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 07 
 
 Obs. — The change consists in this. — 1st, (t) is changed mostly 
 into (-) in tlie genitive singular and before the heavy affixes : as, 
 D% gen. 01, D3P1 (for CD?P^.) ; "IV'""'^. gen. "IV'IN, D^lYlX, &c. 
 2nd, In the genitive plural, and before the heavy affixes, (t) is 
 entirely omitted (Sh'va being substituted for it) : thus, p. CPI, 
 
 gen. "'P'=i, nDn''P% &c. ; p. nnvis, gen. r-inviws*, C3n''nnviN*, 
 (See Paradigms, No. II.) 
 
 Words of the following form belong to this Class : — 
 
 {V^) as, T* a hand, r\ a fish.-^^-^^% SjJIS, Sy>t) as, 
 /^^ri a palace, 3^^J7 a musical instrument, a harp, ^313 a star, 
 hm.' ^VJ^^ ^Vr^) : as, nji a thief, "133 a talent, thp a ladder. 
 (wh- t'?J?3, tSy3): as, |^33 a furnace, ]^i;(^ an offering, 
 tn9^ a table — (SjJ^^, S^S^, ^^) : as, '^Jpb a curtain, 
 covering, rTlT^ a native, p^p a tabernacle, a dwelling-place, 
 \D0fp judgment — (jSj;ii^,'Sj;iD, hvj^) : as, J;DS a removing, 
 march, HDID a foundation, 3S5'iJ^ a sojourner. 
 
 III. 
 
 71. The third Class comprehends words which 
 have a mutable (t) or (••) in their penultimate, and 
 
 * From *1^ we find I^^T. I?lv ^o'"' hand. 
 
 t Several words of this and the following forms take dagesh : as, 
 }Qii< a ivheel, l^iti* a rose, 35^0 a high place, a place of refuge, 
 p. Q^iaiS, D^ap'itr, ^Zi^P, &c. These belong to the eighth class. 
 
 t Some words of these and the preceding forms retain (t) in the 
 genitive plural, &c. ; others reject it : as, V^P a plant, ''V}2il2 ; 
 
 F
 
 68 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 an immutable vowel in their ultimate syllable : as, 
 y)i\) harvest, ^h^ an interpreter, "^1^5 blessed, \)y^V. 
 pain, labour. 
 
 The change consists in substituting (:) for (t) and (••) ; thus, "•"'Vi', 
 fjen. I^VP, n^VP &c. ; X'h^*, '^'^^> ^V'*??' &c. \\2^V, cjen. li3-"i»:y, 
 
 —^yn-vv, ^iu-yv, &c. 
 
 Observe. — As two Sh'vas cannot begin a word, it follows that 
 in words wherein (^) is preceded by (:) ; as, fnV"! hunger, pn^| g?j 
 unwalled toivn, the (:) must be changed into a vowel ; and hence 
 from the first we have in the genitive P^V.^, and from the second 
 "uirns his, &c. 
 
 Words of the following forms belong to this class : — 
 (S^yS, S^y$. t ^ij/|)' t S'^yS) as, nni a generous, liberal 
 man; ji^X a master, lord; "Tl^""]^ blessed ; 'i^^f^i^faithftil, 
 
 (|iSj;fi, ]^h)l$) as, tim pl^r a remembrance. 
 
 (pj;|> tiSfi) as, ]Sm joy; |ir sorroic. h\iLf}) : as, 
 Dip?5 a place ; (S^SD) : as, p3p «/2 intelligent man, 1^'h'^ 
 an interpreter. 
 
 * (••) is, however, retained in the genitive singular: as, "fvP? 
 gen. X'h'Q' 
 
 f Except ti'w an officer (perhaps of the third rank), and y-13^ 
 a week, which retain {■•) : thus, C'Ci'v^, DiynC' ; to distinguish 
 them from W^y'b'^ the third time, niyn^ oaths. 
 
 X A few words of this form, as lino pure, 7\1^ great, change 1 
 into short (t) on being joined to another word by Makkeph : thus, 
 nnp, ~7'\^- Several words of this form take dagesh, and change 
 (i) into (■•■) : as, DHX red, p. D^^'^^i; : Di-y naked, D^P^^-
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. G9 
 
 IV. 
 
 72. The fourth Class comprehends all dissyllables 
 having (^^) or (^..) for their vowels : as, ^l"! a word, 
 ^1? the heart. 
 
 The change consists, 1st — in substituting (:) foi' the pemdlimate 
 (t) or (..), and in changing (t) ultimate into (-) in the genitive 
 singular, and before the affixes D3, 13 : thus, "1?"^, 15% ^57'^"^., 
 &c. ; ''131, V'^l, 6cc. ; Cl'131, &c.— 2nd. In the genitive plural 
 and before the heavy affixes, penultimate (t) or (..) are changed 
 mostly into (.), more rarely into (-)* ; and ultimate (t) into (:) ; 
 
 thus, ''131, D3n?i, I3n2i, nnnni, inn.^i- 
 
 Words of the following forms belong to this class : — 
 
 (y^^^\ as, ^ni gold, DDn a wise man, ^Hi a river, ib^ll 
 
 jiesli. 
 
 (p)l^\ as, 'njjb' a hair, ^Jj; a grape, ^7^ a rib, fjiJJ a 
 
 twig, ^c, 
 
 V. 
 
 73. The fifth Class comprehends dissyllables 
 having mutable (..) for their ultimate, and mutable (/) 
 for their penultimate : as, ]pT aii old man. 
 
 The vowels are subject to the same changes as those of the pre- 
 ceding class. To this class belong all words of the form (7^.?) : 
 
 * Thus D3n a loise man, gen. DpG, p. D''P3n, ^cm. p. ''0?n ; eiJB 
 a wing, dual and p. D??^?* H^n. p. '•sp* 
 
 t Some words of this form take dacjesh : as, ?^^ « camel, \^'^ the 
 rabbit, jerboa, ]9|5 little : thus, ^01 ^03, ^^3, ^^m, D\^»a, &c. They 
 belong, of course, to the 8th class. 3^n rnilk, has its genitive 
 singular 37q ; 137 ?c/;//t:, I??- 
 
 1- 2
 
 70 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 as, lyn a court, 1?3 the liver, "l>li^ short, "IDJ a plug, nail, &c. ; 
 (XyS)*: as, i«»9 unclean, ^^^ full, &c. 
 
 Ois. — ^V <//(. ////(/Z;, ^ina the shoulder, 1^4 « /'CdZ^c, 7T2 i^lunder, 
 robbery, from their ^cra. .% thus— ^in?, '^.X, "^.-U or '?;>., "i^?., or Tl.fl.- 
 
 VI. 
 
 74. The sixth Class comprehends all dissyllables 
 which have their accent on the penultimate : as, '^yjj. 
 a wai/ or road, ^V.^ a gate, "^Sp a book, 2^"in a mo?ith, 
 '*)'? ^/Z^"//^, pX biiqidty, vanity. 
 
 Words of this class have their genitive and absolute state singular 
 alike ; except those of the form 7V^^ (as HID death), which drop 
 (•••), and change (t) into (•_) in their genitive singular, and retain 
 (•_) in their inflections: thus, niD, ''Hl^D, inVD, &c. And those 
 of the form "P!?, (as 7\^, a ram,) which drop the (.), and change 
 (-) into (..) in the genitive singular; retaining (..) in their inflections ; 
 thus, P*"^, v''S, "^p^N, &c. From ?!1.IJ wroncj, injustice, we find, 
 however, gen. ^)yi instead of VlV ; i^iy instead of iViy, /. H^^j; ; 
 
 but p. niViy- 
 
 Words of the following forms belong to this class : 
 
 (7i/S' >'JJ£))— as, "rhp a king, l^;] a hog, 1^5 « gciryiient, 
 "nSD « Aoo/t, p7n a portiofi. 
 
 * These, however, retain (..) in their genitive singular and plural. 
 Thus, a^^, gen. s. i<^P, gen. p. 'f<^p- Likewise, 2p)l the heel, 
 gen. s. 2pV, (but gen. p. ''?PV)j 1^'^ « sleeper, gen. p. '•J??^ Dpb, 
 <;'en. ^J- ""DPf , &c.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 71 
 
 The vowels are subject to the following changes : — 
 
 (■••) ultimate is changed into (:) before the affixes of the singular, 
 in the genitive plural, and before the heavy affixes : as, ^.^O, ^3?P, 
 ^3^0, D3|^^, D3^3^??, &c. ; 1.^3, n?3, &c. But in the absolute 
 state plural, and before the light affixes, it is changed into (t) ; as, 
 D''??'? hincjs, ^?^P my kings, DHJ? garments, ''^35' 
 
 (...) penultimate is changed mostly into (-), but sometimes into 
 (.) before the affixes of the singular, in the genitive plural, and its 
 heavy affixes. Thus, ^ of '^l?'?? ^"^ I of "1^3, are changed into P 
 and 2 ; as, '^7^, '"I??,* n^3, Dnn^!l ; but in the plural, and its 
 light affixes, it is changed into (:) ; as, C??'?, &c. 
 
 (..) penultimate is mostly changed into (.) or (...) ; as, ISO, ^"iDp, 
 *"!1?P ; P./^D, ''P/D- <-^'C- In the plural it follows the same rule as 
 penultimate (•-•) ; thus, D^^Sp, ''1?P, &c. P?''"l.?ip, &c. 
 
 (f Sj;i)_as, ]TN* an ear, \^^n a month, C^np holiness, 'I'TH 
 breadth, *!|"lj< length. 
 
 The vowel point (j.) is changed into short (j), and (•.•) follows the 
 same rule as in the preceding forms. Thus, ^^IJ), "'t^'l^? ^''^,'T7> 
 
 •• ; T + 
 
 * Some words retain the (•-•) ; as, %a?., n?.?, "n^?, &c. ; "J^n, >l'?n- 
 Others take either (.) or (-) in the genitive plural ; as, l^v ^ cliild, 
 gen. p. 'i^'. or n^> 
 
 t The word 7^3 ivork {action), changes (l_) into {^). It 
 is thus inflected. — "Pys, gen. W^, '^V^, i?V^, &c., DS^ys, 
 &c. ; plural, D^^V,?, '^VQ, ^^y?, D^^'pys : ^n« a tent, is 
 declined in the same manner. Vjl^j VC^ ^^' '^r'^^' "'■'51??' ^^' ! 
 
 But p?«rflZ n^Vci''^, ^i^'^, ^i^'^ ; .'/e/i. 2J. ^.Vnx, D3^i?nX, &c. ; 
 
 INn a form, ilN:^ or ■n^^r)• From ]*0p a handful, we find ivPi-J ; 
 7'53 greatness, "'''l^; 
 
 ■ j Many words of this form have their plural like those of the 
 preceding form; as, -\\>^, Q^R? ; OD^, Q^pni, $<Q.: 1^3, n?j, 
 n3b from their plural, ni3n3, T\^r\^, ninb^
 
 72 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 (SyS' T3) — f^s, 7)^ lorong, injustice, 'TjlJl the middle, T\)J2 
 death; H^T* an olive, 7"'7 night, p"* uvV^e, Ty o« eye. 
 
 The changes of the vowel-points of these forms have already 
 been explained. 
 
 ('[-^y£))_as, ^"IS) fruit, n5 a kid, n.Nt a lion, J ^h':' c/tee^, 
 jaw-bone, v3 « vessel. 
 
 (:) is changed into (.) or (.,) ; and (.) into (:), in the singular: 
 as, '^3, ^n?, &c.; V^.?, "^f?^' In the plural most of them 
 retain (:), and change (.) into (r) ; thus, CD'HI' § '^''•"l'!^: or ^'"'''1^:, 
 gen. j)^' ^"*•^i'> &c. — v| changes (:) into (..), and retains (.) ; thus, 
 D^^3 gen. pi. '% ^b, ^'b, 1'E?. &c. ; Q?^^3, &c. 
 
 Q'^p) — as, ''Snil sickness, J *^^ affliction, ''*1^ or '''Tif &a/m, 
 
 ^"nn burning, anger. 
 
 * Gert. s. nn— ^n\t &c. ;;. D^rin, ^nn, ^i^pn &c. nJ^ gen. r^— 
 
 '?'y, "irV., &c. p. (dual) D:rj;. ^e«. 'A'V. — '^% T?% &c. But 
 m3^y, signifies springs, fountains, and its genitive is 1^1^''^. Thus 
 likewise, i;y>? a spring, well, p. D''?^J?'? or ni3^D, ye«. p. '<yyr2 and 
 mvyo- Several other words of this form have their plural in this 
 manner : as, ^''.n a host, ^vIO ; "i^J^ a young ass, ^''yV.- — H^a 
 a house, forms its plural CflS, and retains the long (t) and dagesh 
 through the plural inflections: thus, gen. ''^S* — ^JilS, T'li!^, &c, ; 
 contrary to general analogy. 
 
 t Most words of this form change (:) into (••) in pause ; thus, 
 ■••-IS, '•15, 'rh: 
 
 X The plural (dual) of ^n^ is ^\'jh, gen. '^jh- 
 
 § A few words of this form change * into ^ in the plural : as, vPl 
 a ring, p. ^''^^^Q ; ^ri? a simpleton, p. D'^ni) or ^'^riS ; >2V a 
 gazelle ; p. D'^^V or Q'^'^V ; /. n»ny p. nixaV- 
 
 It In pause ^Vn, ^V, nv-
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 73 
 
 VII. 
 
 75. The seventh Class comprehends all words 
 having (..) mutable for their ultimate, and an immu- 
 table vowel for their penultimate: as 7pt2 a luiler, 
 ixgent, inn a father in law, IHX a lover, Nllb^ a hater, 
 enemy, i<D3 a covered seat, a throne, ^HiD a merchant ^ 
 7j!)D a staff, Ti{< an enemy. Likewise some of the 
 monosyllables derived from the Hv : as, W a name. 
 
 (..) is mostly changed into (:) ; as, ^^px, D^SpX, ^nflS, h\>^, 
 ri1?P^, 13Jin, S;c. ; or into (-.) when the middle letter is a gut- 
 tural : as, ^?nx, nn;i<, &c. ; DnniD, nqiD, &c. Before \ D? ; 
 and |3 it is changed mostly into (.,) ; as, ^}XP, ^/i'^.'?, i^?/!!^, 
 sometimes into (.) ; as, ^?>*, D^:?r^^^ ; "^^y^! , ^^P^ ; and into (-) 
 when the 2nd or 3rd radical is a guttural : as, ^^H^, Dp^ni^, 
 
 'mp, &c. 
 
 In the genitive singular (..) is mostly retained, though in some 
 instances it is changed into (-) ; as, n3|p an altar, gen. n3tP 
 Si"?, gen. S^.P or VpD- 
 
 Words of the following form belong to this class : — 
 
 (Sj^2, ^];^iD)_as, npiS a visitor, pb « priest, yi^ a 
 raven, I'HIX an ambush ; ^|iy a blind man, Jl^j; a stammerer, 
 DpJ^ a dumb person. 
 
 ('^J^Sp, ^J^Sp)— as, "iDpp a nail, mpP a mortar, m^p 
 a Icey, ^ib^D a tenth part, tithes ; J3pp a poor man.
 
 74 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 (^3 ':'j;iS) — as, nSiS « u-onder, nj;^^ rt/? appointed time, 
 a festival, C'piD a .v/ifl/'c / * D?^ a «awe, |5 « ^o'^ t ]*J^. « ^''ce. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 7G. The eighth Class comprehends all words 
 which double their last letter by dagesh on being 
 augmented : as, ]5 a garden, ""^^ mi/ garden ; 1? the 
 heart, "^47 mi) heart ; pH a law, statute, '•pH my statute ; 
 7tt5 a camel, vO^ my camel, ^ pOil tlty camel, &c. 
 
 The vowel which precedes dagesh becomes immutable, and is 
 therefore, in most cases, retained through all the inflections. 
 
 Words of the following forms (derived from roots which have the 
 second and third radical the same) belong to this class. 
 
 (+ /3) — as, 7D a basket, 1^ a pail, bucket, D^ or W the 
 sea, DJ^ or DJj^ a people, *T1 soft, tender, yi a poor man. 
 
 These retain (-) in the genitive singular and in the inflection §. 
 
 * With Makkeph.— "D^^ I?- The plural of this word (I?) is 
 D'P3, (je,i. p, \3?— \33, ^>.;2, &c. D?^?.3, &c. 
 
 f rV. and a few others of this form retain (..) through their inflec- 
 tions, except in the genitive plural and the heavy affixes : thus, ''W. 
 1V3^, &c. p. D^Vy, 'VV., 1\Vy, (jen. p. '^, n?^VJ^, S:c. 
 
 t Many words of this form have (t) or (-) in their absolute state : 
 as, DJJ or DJ^; generally (t) in pause; as, H ^; ^1, a heap, '?5; 
 but always (-) in the genitive and the inflections. 
 
 § Exce))t "JV the side, ns a small piece, morsel, ^? the tlireshold, 
 which take (.) in the inflections : thus, ''"^.V, *J[n£i, ^'^V, D^flS. From
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 75 
 
 (73) as, 1^ a tooth, 7!if a shadoic^ 17 the hearty Vp end, 
 
 Ttn the palate, JJ'K fire. 
 
 These retain generally (..) in the genitive singular*, but change 
 it into (.) in the inflection: as, 'W, i^K', p. mp\, \1)EJ', >ip, 
 
 (73) — as, 7iy a yoke, pH a decree, 73 all, the ichole, fy 
 might, poiccr, strength, tin a drum, UT\ innocence. 
 
 Some of these retain 1_ in the genitive ; as, ?y gen. ^V ; others 
 change it into short (t) with Makkeph : as, "PC, -'?' 
 
 Before the inflections, (J.) is mostly changed into (••.): as, ?y 
 YV) '^?V, though sometimes into short (j): as, ''tJ^; especially 
 before 1 and D? ; as, pn, *pn, ^pn, D3pn ; TJ?, >-ry, ^-^y^ or ^-rV. 
 
 (SfiD, Si3D)— as, TiyDa p/ace of strength, a fort, ^JJ^, 
 
 iT^y^ "^DF iTj;D, sjt^^; "t^? « shield, ^m, p. m^^, "^m, 
 
 (t\ being here immutable. 
 
 Many contracted words derived from roots whose second letter 
 is J, as n^ face, countenance, anger, (from ^J^? to breathe thnntgh 
 the nose, to snort), and ri3 a danf/hter (from ri53 feminine of 1? a 
 so?i), belong to this class, and are inflected in a similar manner : 
 thus, ^5^, ^?N*, iSX ; plural, (dual) D^SN*, g. p. 'm, '^^, T^^, 
 
 &c. 'm, 1^^, &c. p. rim gen. p. i^i^?, 'rii3?, Tp"f, 
 
 "in a mountain, we have in the plural ^''U}, gen. p. ^l^, ^l^, &c. 
 (t) being a compensation for dagesh. Thus likewise, "•?, pure, se- 
 lected, Dn?, nn, &c. 
 
 * Except a few which take (■••) with Makkeph: as, "A/, '\l^' 
 t But D^^?^ signifies two; and C^^' gears, ''T^ mg years, '^''}}^ 
 thy years. Several words of this form change (..) into (_) : as i? a 
 stand, basis, iS? ; IP a nest, with Makkeph 'IP ; but in other 
 respects regular "'?p, &:c. From t^'^? fire, we have itJ'^*, Q$?*^ and 
 D3p*i< instead of D?P'^5-
 
 76 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 "n?p13^, &c. Many words of other forms receiving dagesh on 
 being augmented, belong likewise to tliis class : as, /^\ a 
 camel, l^I time, ^"^^ the day of rest, the sabbath, ""^J^ a poor 
 (Jmmble) man, 8[C. Most of these have already been noticed 
 in the jn-eceding notes. 
 
 IX. 
 
 77. The ninth Class comprehends all words ter- 
 minating in n— ; as, TTW a field, HJ^.I * a shepherd, 
 T\^\ beautiful, handsome, Hir]^ a camp, njj^l a seer, 
 n^I'^Q appearance, colour, vision, T^^V-J^ ivork. 
 
 1. 1^— is changed into i^~ in the genitive singular: as, ""IV."! 
 
 (/en. nj;T ; n-i.^, nYf • 
 
 2. Before the inflections it is dropped : as, "'P, Cl^Vn, "-J^n, *J?'"i, 
 
 &c. ^T, "^"p, V^, &c. p. nnb, gen. p. 1-in"^', ;rinp; or p. 
 
 an^ (by analogy), gen. p. ^If , ''1^, ^^f , -"l^^'^, &c. 
 
 3. Before the affix of the third person masculine singular, n is 
 mostly retainedf : as, -innb, •inb'Vjp, -inxnt), &c.— Third person 
 
 /. s. nx"i» or nx-|D, nbyo, or n'^yp.t. 
 
 * Words comprehended in this class, are derived from roots 
 whose third radical is n ; they form their feminine by changing (•••) 
 into (t): as, nj;h a shepherdess; m. ns^, /. HQ^; n^j; one that 
 ascends, f. Hpy- Except >"153 one who weeps, weeping, HSV one 
 who ivatches, a watchman, and a few others which form their femi- 
 nine n»33, i'T'dV- 
 
 T • ? T • 
 
 f This is likewise the case with some nouns not terminatin<T in 
 n: as, ^'?J^ a concubine, 'inmhsi; T a hand, -IHT. 
 
 : Abeu Ezra (in ninv) asserts, indeed, that this form (^'^VJp) 
 is inadmissible : I have, however, followed Kimchi, who justifies 
 its usage.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 77 
 
 Words of the following form belong to this class : — 
 
 (njjia nj^3, ny|)_as, nm, the breast, /;, nim; n;3j'^ « 
 
 reef/, a sconce, p. D''^|^ or Dillp ; n|?j; a /er//, p. D'^^JJ ; HN*;! 
 arrogant, p. B''Xil ; njj^'H* a friend, companion, p. B'^J^'l ; HJ^h 
 p. S''j;h ; nip a purchaser, p. B'^Jp. 
 
 (H^^D, nj;^P)— as, njpQ p. (by analogy) B^;ip^; n^TO 
 second in rank, double, p.B^y^D; Hiri^, p. niillD, dual 
 S^^np. (n5;D)_as, ntSS « stqf, branch, tribe, p.'^'^t^n or 
 nit2)b ; nSD o/^e ^Ag^ ^fnVce^, jo. B'^^D, &c. 
 
 78. The following four Classes comprehend nouns 
 feminine terminating in m— , H— , M— . 
 
 Those that terminate in H— have this in common : — 
 
 1st. — That they change H- into n— in the genitive singular, and 
 before D?, !?• 
 
 2nd. — That they retain n and t in the rest of the inflections of 
 the singular number. 
 
 3rd. — That they form their plural by changing H— into ni, which 
 termination is retained through all the plural inflections. 
 
 For the changes to which nouns terminating in n are subject, 
 see remarks on Class XHI. 
 
 X. 
 
 79. The tenth Class comprehends all nouns termi- 
 nating in n— , preceded by an immutable vowel: as, 
 n*|^;i5 strength, n^nri a prayer, supplication. 
 
 * nV.I, nJC^p, and nnpp, retain (••) in the genitive singular.
 
 78 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Excepting the genitive singular, and before 03 ^^^ ^?) '^^ already 
 noticed in the preceding observation, botli vowels arc retained. 
 The plural is formed by HI, and the absolute state plural and its 
 genitive are the same. Thus, '"I'J"'^^ gen- ^I'^^h — ^^l^"'-^! 5 /*• 
 
 nnnji gen. ni"i'nii,_''rii-in^, ,S:c. 
 
 Words of the following forms belong to this class : — 
 
 (phw, nSiys), nS'>j;3)— as, nS''D.N{ a meai; Hniij;. 
 
 service, labour; H^^Hil or TvT^^ greatness, joy. 
 
 (nS^yS, n^^y3)— as, n^l^Iin a hmise, nnjl^n an early 
 fig- 
 
 [Th% nS''3, nSfi) — as, n'1^ distress, anguish, HOj^ 
 standing corn ; Hll^b^ old age, Til^'i provision ; HyS under- 
 standing. 
 
 (n^3, np^, n^S) as, np3 a &r/(/e / n^^ a measure ; 
 
 nSD a hut, tabernacle, T\'\^T\ a law. 
 
 (HpSD, npSi^) as, npSfl a prayer, n?r\P\ praise; H^^D 
 
 a roll, volume. 
 
 fT\]!hP\, ny^) — as, n5^ a smiting, wound, HDS a tempting, 
 temptation ; T\^SP\ a law, instruction, miJ^ an acknowledg- 
 ment, thanks. 
 
 XI. 
 
 80. The elventli class comprehends nouns having 
 the same termination as the preceding, viz. H— , but 
 preceded by mutable (t) or (••) : as, T\)p a j/ear, T\^P 
 .sleep.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 79 
 
 '"■"7 ultimate has already been explained; and (t) or (.. ) penulti- 
 mate are changed into (:), except in the plural absolute. Thus, HJC', 
 gen. r\}^. 'np, Sec. Plural niJC^, gen. niip* 'n^p, &c. 
 
 Obs. — Words having (t t ) for their vowels, preceded by (:), change 
 (:) into (.) or (-) : as, HSn^ « hlessincj, cjen. n3"}3, ^nsn?, ^Ty^y^. 
 Sec, p. riisn^, gen. ni3")3, ^rii3"l3- See the examples under the 
 
 form njjy^- 
 
 Words of the following forms belong to this class : — 
 
 (nyj, nj;3)_a.s, nj^ a year, T^^l fair, beautiful, Ti"^^* 
 aportio77, HS^f Up ; nX3 a corner, nN23+ a hundred. 
 
 (y-nSjJ.i/D, nS^.)— as, n^j; advice, counsel, HJJ^ sleep, 
 riDn anger ; H^'liD an inheritance, H^^iD a device. 
 
 righteousness, gen. <np1V' "^"^^^ ^ rebuke, gen. fTn^^ ; 
 H'n^p a rf«/«, iSe/z. ri'n^p_ll ; H'l'nn terror, g<?;2. fl1"in ; 
 n 7^^ a carcase, gen. TT2^y 
 
 * n''^!"'^? (Est. ii. 9.) is a deviation from the rule. 
 
 i .p. ninep' or (dual) Q^psp', gen. p. r-iinpb or 'nfc'; n^s 
 
 fl« oa/7?, retains the first (t) ; thus, gen. ^7^, T>/^, &c. 
 
 + p. niiSp, dual Q^ns^D, instead of D^nxp- 
 
 § Most words of this form retain (..) in the genitive: as, '"l"!?^, 
 gen. rn.3t«-''n"12J? ; nm'^ cattle, has its genitive ripn|l-''npn^l ; 
 nntjy « crown, gen. ^y^V.; '"1?'VP, (/en. ^5/^*P* (See observation 
 on Class XHI.) 
 
 II P' ^'"'■'J^i?, i7<?H. niiyi?- Vniiyp (Exod. xxv.) is a deviation 
 from the general rule. Several words of these forms retain (:) in 
 the genitive: as, ^yj'P a cave, gen. ^IJ^P ; "^^^^ «« aqueduct, 
 gen. n?yj|1-
 
 80 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 XII. 
 
 81. The twelfth Class comprehends feminine 
 nouns chiefly derived from words of the forms p^.g' 7^p 
 and 7jjb ; as, for instance, ri37D a queen, from "^79 ^ 
 king ; H'ly.JJ a young woman, a girl, from ^J^ll. a boy ; 
 •^"^TJJ ttid, assistance, from 'HT^. an aid, help ; H'lnp a 
 hiding-place, shelter, from ^HD a secret place, shelter, 
 protection; '^J'^H ^ waste, ruin, from i^h dryness 
 desolation. 
 
 n— has already been explained. The short vowels (-) (...) (•) 
 and (t:) with the following (:) are retained, except before the abso- 
 lute state plural, where the shoit vowels are changed into (:), and 
 the (:) of the second letter into (t).— Thus na!?^, p. niS^JD; 
 
 nnj;5, p. niiyj ; nn-in, p. n'mn ; nsin, p, niann ; rh'cb, 
 p. rvh'd^- 
 
 Words of the following forms belong to this Class : — 
 (nSy^, nSjJS), fhv^) \ —as. n^jSj; a young woman, HD^^ 
 (HSj^S) \ and, rh'd^ a robe, garment ; HPIpE?^ 
 
 Jorj, n^il^ love, nb':23 or, n'^^2 a ewe-lamb, fllhl « girl, 
 nnS^ a bondmaid; Hfi'^ri a reproach; H^'iri a rwz«, r/e^o- 
 lation, T\h'2T\ wisdom; T\J2r\V cunningness. 
 
 T ; T T : T ° 
 
 XIII. 
 
 82. The thirteenth Class comprehends feminine 
 nouns terminating in H— H— — H^ — ^ H— > or H— — 
 as, H'nj^ rt mistress, rijh^* « cor/^, HJ^.^^ « ri/^^if. 
 
 * This word has several other forms. (See Kimchi in D''Ji'"lK').
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 81 
 
 The Genitive and Absolute state singular are the same : as, ^l^.P. 
 (/. ^Irl* — On being augmented by the pronominal affixes, ri re- 
 ceives dac/esli, the last vowel is changed into (:) and tlie penultimate 
 (...) is either retained, as ^1^,0? cattle, ''iilpn?, ^Plpns, or it is 
 changed into (-) or (.) as ri"?.^*^"P keepincj, trust, ''J^IIP^P ; ri"l3!!— 
 ''n')2i- Penultimate ^ is mostly changed into short (t) ; as, T\'iO\) 
 incense, ^^"jPi?** 
 
 Obs. — Most Nouns belonging to this class have two forms for 
 their absolute state : as, 0133 and n"l''3il — Httna and riJDna — 
 nonJ'P and non^p zvar, — n:i^^ and n3->:p a fillar, nyVlfl and 
 ^Vy\'!^ a worm (in the same manner as the participles ri"l.P.iS and 
 iTlpS)' Now, the singular is regulated by the first form (termina- 
 ting in ri— ) as already described ; but the plural is regulated by the 
 termination H--, and hence the plural of ^1.53 is riiT25 — ""nn^^il, 
 &c., without dagesh (from •^"f?!)' Thus likewise from T\'C>Jt>)2 — 
 
 *nr?n'?p; but p. ni^n^p _ >nipq"?p (from n^n^'P)- From 
 n3^-p-^ri?-Vp, but 2?. nn-VP-^nn-VP- 
 
 Words of the following forms belong to this Class: — 
 
 trh^^i!^, nSj;i3, rhv^. nSyS) — as, nii^^, r\'-\\:>'^ t ; 
 
 rh'D^ blue, or sky-coloured ; f1*lJli3 a crown, chapiter; 
 f1j;bin a worm, Tri^y ability, fl^Hi copper. 
 
 trh^t^i, nSy3, nSyis, nSvsw-as, n'r^^ a mantu, 
 
 rW^pafever ; TV^t^X a letter, ; ri'ISS a covering, the mercxj 
 seat, riDD3 spelt, (\\t. the shornY Tw''2iy § an ear of corn. 
 
 * But from n'L^'n^ we have 'J^^'C?, "^W^?.- From n"i3t*'P hire, 
 we have ^ni^^P- 
 
 ■f p. r\)yci^ (from nnoy) y. niipy- t nnjix- 
 
 § p. w^h^^, g. '•!?3^^'•
 
 82 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 m'^vsD, rhvm or n^ys^)— as, nnnS^a or njprhp 
 
 7rar, HPiaJi^Dt afamihj, H^^DD ?7//e, dominion ri?)";^P- 
 ,£>/or?/, splendour; ^^^l^^? a ■ycrc/c. 
 
 (nSyiD, nSyin, nSy^— as, nnti' ^toj/'z;?^, 5?Y«/«g, ''rii^ 
 
 my sitting, flprni^ /iope, "^"171^ birth-place, native-place. 
 
 To the above class belong ^K^^{ or n?i'K g. n^'x-_^np'X, ^J^Ef'X, 
 2?. n^E^'^?, or more usually DT?, .7. p. '^^-V^,' 'nf^-^W, truth, 
 (for n?P?;), is thus inflected ^np^;» "^^P^,, '"^^P^ &c. 
 
 In translating the following exercises, the student 
 must insert the words is, are, &c., where he finds 
 the asterisks* : as, — 
 
 All the days of the afflicted man are evil, and (but) 
 a cheerful heart is a continual feast . 
 
 ' T - ; -J- ; v;r ^-iT • •• t; ~ ;• 
 
 ' Hear 1?'| ^ Instruction. ^ Do not forsake. ^ Fear. * Be- 
 ginning, or chief. "Knowledge. 'Death. * Hand, power. ''Tongue. 
 
 J For the signification of the untranslated words, see the Index 
 of Words at the end of the work.
 
 TIIR HEBREW LANGUAGE. 83 
 
 "D5 : '«D^n *'=B'^'p'^ '^nnrtD /'Mij; '^nnp "'n'';^'J; "'jin 
 '^B^'^j S^na in^5 '^nji!! : d w '^yj^y "^O?"^ '"^'^'^• 
 
 10 Wealth. ^i The rich man* i- City. '•' Strength. ^-^ Dread, 
 destruction. '^ A poor man. ^'' Poverty. i" Likewise, even. 
 '^ Neighbour, friend. ^^ Is-hated. -** A poor man. -^ A lover, 
 friend. ^^ Many. ^■^ Hate-him.f -"' Is-separated. -■'' Do-not 
 forsake. ^ Do-not-come. "~ Calamity. ^^ A whip. '■^^ A bridle. 
 2*^ A rod. 31 Body, back, -^^^fooj, 33Agj.Q^n. -'"i Glory. •^■'Pa- 
 rents. '^^ Old age. •^" Righteousness. ^^ She-(it) will-be-found. 
 ^^ Sacrifice. '^^ yti^"^ a wicked man. ^^ Abomination. ^^ Prayer. 
 ^ 1^* a straight, upright man. '^■^ pV"J will, delight, favor. ^^ He- 
 that-offers. ^** ^^n wealtli, substance, goods. '*'' Is like one that 
 slays. '*^ Before-the-eyes-of, in-the-presence-of. ''•^ Cry, supplica- 
 tion. •''•' Sound. ''1 Song, prayer. "''^ Cleaves, penetrates. ^^ He- 
 that-builds. •''■* A stranger. ''^ Gathers. •'"'' A stone. ''*'' A frrave. 
 
 * The words in Italics are not expressed in Hebrew, 
 -j- Tiie words connected by Hyphens are expressed by one Hebrew 
 word.
 
 84 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 A virtuous woman [womaii'-of virtue'^] is a crown"* 
 to [of]-Iier husband,^ but- [and]- as- rottenness'^ in his 
 bones," is one- that- causes-shame.^ 
 
 House® and-wealth^ are the inheritance'^-of fathers", 
 but-[and] from-the-Lord is ^^ prudent^ Voman [woman 
 prudent]. 
 
 T/ie way'^-of a-(ooV* is right'^ in-his-o?i7/z-eyes ;'*' 
 hut-[aml] the-wise-man^'^ hearkens'® unto counsel.'^ 
 
 The light^°-of ^^e eyes rejoices^' the heart ;^^ and-a- 
 good-report^^ [^coid-report good'\ fattens^^ the bone. 
 
 In-^//e-light^'-of ^/ze king's countenance [face-ofthe^^ 
 kitig^'^] is life f^ and-his-favour^^ is rw-a-cloud^"-of the 
 latter-rain.^' 
 
 The wrath^^-of a king is as messengers^^-of death : 
 but [and] a wise man [a man wise^''] will-pacify-it^^ 
 [her]. 
 
 The grave^*^ and-destruction^^ are before^® the Lord, 
 how-much-more^"-^//L7/. the hearts-of the children'^-of 
 men ? [riian^^]. 
 
 vnK'K ■'h'^n 'JTiaj?^ 'hvj '-i^n •= Dvy. p, niDvy. ^ nK^'-ap - « Hi's '>f\n 
 '" njim "2s '■ rh^bD - '"^-\i '^ S-'is* '^i^; '"]% "anni ''VJ^)^ 
 •»ny3;;-"«nis)o -'mb] "nj? -'nnitD r\^mb •-" jtj'nri. - --^ nix '^'c^si 
 •'■-^hj^ ''D^'n ^»|W-i '"2)1 ^' c'p^o- - ^- non '"^^hf^ ^.a^ax^o ^^D3n K'^k
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 85 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 83. Adjectives are attributes expressive of the 
 properties of nouns, conjointly witli whicli they 
 form either the subject, or some other part of a 
 proposition : as — 
 
 I n^n y^l '^'l T^yiDj2 a soft answer tiirneth awai/ 
 
 wratJi. 
 : D^j; I!;?''"iri nniD ny^^^^ a good report maketk the 
 
 bone fat. 
 yipp y\1\ Dnii nx As a roaring lion, and a 
 
 greedy bear, so is 
 : S*|T DJ^ ^y j;;j^n b^itt A wicked ruler over a poor 
 
 jjeople. 
 
 84. As qualifying words, adjectives are placed 
 after their respective nouns : thus, !3iD &^ a man 
 good^ i. e. a good man ; but not ^'^^ 11 tD* 
 
 ^5. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender 
 and number :* thus — 
 
 * Adjectives, considered as mere attributes, cannot, strictly 
 speaking, admit of either gender or number ; but being in their 
 origin, nouns or 'participles, in which sense they are still frequently 
 used, the distinction of gender and number became necessary ; 
 and it was retained, even where they were used merely as qualifying 
 words. 
 
 g2
 
 SG 
 
 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 ^ib ^""X a Q'ood wan 
 
 ^^y]^ Q'^mi^ sood men 
 
 nniD ntrx a good ivoman riiiiD 
 
 3^t^i o'oo^/ women. 
 
 • T O 
 
 86. Further, when the noun is in a definite state, 
 that is, where the noun has the definite H, or any of 
 the pronominal affixes,* the adjective receives the 
 definite H ; otherwise, the attribute ceases to be the 
 qualifying word, and becomes the predicate of the 
 noun which it accompanies. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 1 - T ■ T 
 
 the good man 
 
 the good woman 
 
 the good men 
 
 the good women 
 
 my little son 
 
 thy little daughter 
 
 his little sons 
 
 your little daughters 
 
 
 riilb B''^|n the women are good 
 
 the man is good 
 the woman is good 
 the men are good 
 
 * Or with proper names, which are in their nature definite : thus 
 p^'n-'Sn pypK* the just Simeon or Simeon the just ; whereas PVP^ 
 p^"^V signifies Simeon is just.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 87 
 
 |bp *'35 ml) son is Utile 
 
 TM^"^^ 'TjriS thy daughter is little 
 
 D'^iir?!:) I'^JS ///i- .wy/* are little 
 
 ni3tDp B3''ni:i5 j/r>«r daughters are //^^/e. 
 
 Cuiiipariso}i of Adjectives. 
 
 87. The degrees of comparison are expressed by- 
 prefixing' to the noun, with which any thing is com- 
 pared, the letters '2 as, 12 from, (than), and ^2 in, amongst ; 
 the adjective not being subject to any change, except 
 to indicate the gender and number of the noun 
 compared. 
 
 2 indicates equality : as — 
 D*3 711^ great as the sea. 
 
 D or t^ indicates superiority : as — 
 D*riD 71^5 great from the sea, i. e. greater than the sea. 
 
 1 the superlative : as — 
 
 B^u^'JX^ 7ilHn the great ariiongst men, i. e. the greatest of men. 
 
 Additional Ei^amples. 
 
 iri^"i^| nSpti'^n HN*? ^D who (is) Uds thal-lookelk-forth 
 
 as-the-c?ff«'«, 
 n^nS nnS n^^l^D nS^ /«»• as-the-w?oo», pm-e as-the- 
 
 T-- TT IT." TT 
 
 sun. 
 D''*np ?|npn niD ^e//er (/.s) //^^ jhc/t^ than life. 
 
 Tl')l^<D ^^hX lib K7 -^«'« ««^ ^c'Wlt than my anccs- 
 -, ,.. . ^
 
 88 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 W^^ ''^^■I'Q ^^''Snh Vi^ D'^Pp Our pursuers ivere swifter than 
 
 • T T •• : . - T • |- 
 
 the eagles of heaven. 
 
 nti'^DS bl.n ^37{St n^n Behold my thousand (i. e. »wj/ 
 
 family^ [is] the poorest among 
 Manasseh ; 
 
 '^'2'^ n^53 'n'^y^n ^::bj<1 ««(? / [«?»] </^e least in my fa- 
 thers house. 
 
 There are several other methods of indicating the superlative, 
 for which the student is referred to the Syntax. 
 
 E.ve/'cise. 
 
 *^'?,9D ''^nj *^hj^f^ /h)!^^ i|Sgn /^Snj '^hjp 
 /B'^Sniin Q':hfp'n ,^'>^m *Q'^:?hm /B^^n^ &;hf2 ?Sn5 
 
 T : .'. T |tt-:i- : t ; - <? x |tt-;i;- t : < 
 
 ^/^n3j?S3 n'l^ /^ni»D 'n^: /^iid pins /•^D^nns ^'^ini) 
 
 • T - :|- T T V 
 
 ^ A king. " Great. * Insert the copula is or are according as 
 the noun is singular or plural. -'' "'"'V a city, p. C'lV* * pTn strong 
 ^ Sweet, ^f' Honey. 'Bitter. "Death. 9 Wormwood. ^^ Smooth. 
 1' Oil. J2 Strorigr*mighty.'^'i34Wisef*-^V 
 
 ^ nj^ * np^nD : ^ s'^j^y^ ^ nibi ' nixn * pino 
 
 )T" : •;t'i-t ; T I T 
 
 ' Light. = Good. ' py eye. '^ r\y^ sleep. ' A labourer. "" A rose. 
 ' Amongst. '^ nin a tliorn. " So. '« n^yp. a shepherdess.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 89 
 
 ''h'^VJj *\2p'!)yh *''t^^3i "S?3^'^ *"f»n3 t'Tt^^jn 
 : niy^3 m6 *"nnnriNV';^5n *£srb p':)n''"r"' I'^nSb^^ 
 
 T*^;- ; TT T • : - : T • ]•;):■• \ T T J ■ t ; ; 
 
 n!ii n^nnx aiD : ^ni^ pin» n^^ "' niS*D tv "^ 
 
 T ; T • h T^;x T ~ T T T •• ...... 
 
 T- TT-; -T- TT~ 
 
 '^ n? a daughter, f. T\\^- 12 Vinegar. i" jt?* a tooth. ^■^ Smoke. 
 ^^ Sluggard. ^^ To those that send him. 1* "^H the palate, gums, 
 ^^ End. ^9 Strong, bold. -°Love. -^ Hard. *'-' The grave. -^ Jealousy. 
 -•■ What. '^^ A lion. "^ Beginning. -" Wisdom. "'^ Strengtii. 
 -9 A dog. 30 ;^jan. ^^ A giant. 3' Was. -'a Fair, beautiful. 
 3* Comely, agreeable. ^^^.P /^^.r^. ^' / J .^. 
 
 Numerals. 
 
 88. Numerals are generally divided into — 
 
 Ist—Cardhmls; as,* ir>^ m, r\mf.,ouc,'\- n^ht^m. 
 ^h^f. three. 
 
 2nd.~0rdinals : as, fim^ m. TS^^^^^I, f. first 
 ^i^, m. T\'^y<^ second ; and. 
 
 3ix\.—Fractiunal : as, ^5?n /lalf, H'^'S^ « third part. 
 
 * In Ezek. xviii. and xxxiii. we find the words HN and "^G used 
 
 for "in^:- 
 
 t It is very remarkable that ("^7) which is generally the charac- 
 teristic of the feminine, becomes the sign of the masculine in the 
 numerals from three to ten ; the feminine being indicated by drop- 
 ping the ^—- The only rational explanation that can be given of tliis 
 peculiarity, is, liiat numerals, being in their nature abstract terms,
 
 90 THE ETYMOLO(iY OF 
 
 Cardinal Numbers. 
 
 89. Cardinal numbers, from one to twenty, admit 
 of gender : as, inx CJ'"'^^ one man ; nnx T\W^ one ivo- 
 man ; D^JS ^^^^ irii^ eleven sons, Tim H^lM nn« 
 eleven daughters ; but above twenty they are common 
 to both genders. 
 
 Further, from one to six inclusive, they assume fre- 
 quently a constructive form * (which does not how- 
 ever alter their signification) : as, *^T^^ one, "ib^J? '^^^> 
 eleven; D^J^ two, U^V. ^\W oi' °'1^- '^^ ^'^"^ witnesses; 
 ^h^ three, TTiPV., ^W thirteen, HiiSD \^h^ three 
 hundred. 
 
 have, like most other abstract nouns, originally received the same 
 termination : as, for instance, i^^?'^ ivisdom, ni-12| strength, 
 T\y\'2P} vnderstandinff. And however strange it may appear, that 
 the abstract should have preceded the concrete, yet, that this was 
 actually the process in the formation of language, may be proved 
 by more arguments than one. Be this as it may, certain it is that 
 the gender of numerals is an unnecessary incumbrance on language. 
 That it may be dispensed with, without occasioning the least am- 
 biguity, is evident from its extending only to numerals under twenty. 
 Still more evident is it from the English language, which, in this 
 respect, is tlie most rational of any language with which I am 
 acquainted. 
 
 * This/o/-m appears similar to the genitive form of nouns ; it does 
 not, however, express the same relation. Except the words "'ns: and 
 nnj?, which are sometimes used in the genitive ; as D"'inn *inx 
 one-of the mountains; T'ly W'^ one-of thy cities. But even 
 tliese cease to be genitives when followed by 12 ; as, 1*?2p Tnx one 
 of his sons ; "^^3''VP nnx one of thine eyes, of being expressed by 
 •Q, which literally means from, and not by the /«;•/« of the numeral.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE, 
 
 01 
 
 90. Cardinal numbers from one to ten. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 r 
 
 Const. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Absolute 
 
 One 
 
 nns* 
 
 nnx 
 
 Two^ 
 
 or' ^ 
 
 u\T\P 
 
 Three 
 
 ^hp 
 
 iyh\^ 
 
 Four 
 
 
 VT^^ 
 
 Five 
 
 2^'^n 
 
 \^ftn 
 
 Six 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 Seven 
 
 y^;^ 
 
 V^s^ 
 
 Eight 
 
 
 r]±'^ 
 
 Nine 
 
 yt^n 
 
 V^^ 
 
 Ten 
 
 
 ^^V 
 
 Mas. 
 
 n'.'ip 2 n 
 
 Const. Absolute. 
 
 n^^ri nsrbn 5 n 
 
 ny.^p^ nj;5tr 7 t 
 
 n^i.'D^ nptr 8 n 
 
 * The letters are used as numerals in the printed Hebrew 
 
 Bibles, to mark the Chapters and Verses : and by tlie Masoretical 
 
 and Rabbinical writers for various other purposes ; but they are 
 
 never used in the sacred text. The following are a few specimens 
 
 of this species of notation. Number of verses contained — 
 
 In Genesis ^1^ ^^^ = 1000 + 500 + 30 + 4 = 
 
 Exodus t^-iji = 1000 + 200+9 = 
 
 Leviticus fl^J = 50 + 9 + 800 = 
 
 Numbers nDlX = 1000 + 200 + 80 + 8 = 
 
 1534 
 
 1209 
 859 
 
 1288 
 
 -j- "inx and ^I^V. admit of the plural: as, 0^0^ units, nhb'i? 
 tens, decades. 
 
 X Many Grammarians consider the numerals having the termina- 
 tion (n) as nouns denoting a collection of units : as, for instance, 
 d"^^^ n^?l^ a triad of days, or a period of time consisting of 
 
 Deuteronomy y^D ^^ 5 + 50 + 900
 
 92 
 
 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Tf n to twenty. 
 
 Eleven 
 
 Twelve 
 
 Thirteen 
 
 Fourteen 
 
 Fifteen 
 
 Sixteen 
 
 Seventeen 
 
 Eighteen 
 
 Nineteen 
 
 Mas. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 nb'j; n^b^* n^i.^^;. n^iD^ 
 
 11 
 
 iS^ 
 
 1-2 
 
 n^ 
 
 13 
 
 y 
 
 14 
 
 1' 
 
 15 
 
 *ib 
 
 16 
 
 TtO 
 
 17 
 
 T^ 
 
 18 
 
 n^ 
 
 19 
 
 D^ 
 
 Tw^enty and upwards. 
 
 Twenty Dnb^JJ D 
 
 Twenty-one Onb'y'l^ IflNI ND 
 
 Twenty-two OnN-l ^W ^^ 
 
 Twenty-three Dn^JJ.^^ Hl^S^ J3 
 
 Thirty U'l^h^ h 
 
 Forty D^y?^^5 D 
 
 three days, D''^3>^ ^l^V; a decade of men. This distinction 
 appears to me merely imaginary, as I really can discover no dif- 
 ference of meaning between «l^^< 1"?'^ ^^^^ and ^1^^ "t'H '^Pf- 
 (Judg. XX. 25—44.) Or between CD^^^^' J~^i^% '^?i?.?^l and 
 n^V^^» nX'y^ ni^)}^)- (Lev. xxvii. 5—7.) 
 
 * Or "ib'J? "^^p'V, n-ip'y ^rip'j;-
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 93 
 
 Fifty D^?^'bn } 
 
 Sixty DT'^ D 
 
 Seventy ^'VW V 
 
 Eighty DW ^ 
 
 Ninety ^Wr\ ^ 
 
 Hundred riHfO cons. nXD p 
 
 Two Hundred ni«0 ^# or D^n^?» 7 
 
 Three Hundred niX^p ^hl^ ^ 
 
 Four Hundred n\\*» y^lNI H 
 
 Five Hundred ni.^^^ r^H "j 
 
 Six Hundred r\)^f2 W D 
 
 Seven Hundred n\^D y^ti' I 
 
 Eight Hundred niXD HJb^ ^ 
 
 Nine Hundred n\S^ yt^jyi f 
 
 AThousand ^iSs^ {i 
 
 Two Thousand D^sSn* 'W ' D'S^K i 
 
 Three Thousand D^£)S^f ng^'??^^ i 
 
 Ten Thousand D''|)S.S JTH.^^^i^ ♦ Ki!l"! ^ 
 
 Twenty Thousand D'nxiSn i 
 
 Thirty Thousand ^ii^'^ K'Sk^ 
 
 Hundred Thousand ^*7^ '^'^'0 
 
 Two Millions tjSx HiXp Dni^^JJ. 
 
 Ordhiat Nu))ibcrs. 
 
 01. The followiiiu' arc the Ordinal Numbers : —
 
 94 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 First ny\m^ ptJ'w^l 
 
 Second m^ 2^ 
 
 Third nvh^ 'PwP 
 
 Fourth ny^i T5n 
 
 Fifth n'^W 'Ei'W^ 
 
 Sixth nw W 
 
 Seventh HT?^ T5?^ 
 
 Eighth r\'yf2p '^W 
 
 Ninth n'T^'ri "V-V^ 
 
 Tenth n^y'i^v... 'yH 
 
 Obs. I. — The Ordinals are formed from their Cardinals, in the 
 same manner as Patronymics are formed from Proper Names*, 
 Thus, from 0^5^ ^m;o,_>3K', D^J^J' second. From K^?^' six,— '£^'^ 
 TT'K^K' sixth. The rest take an additional "• between the second and 
 third radical : as, from ^hf three, m. "^"h^ /• r\'€>'hf- Except 
 flB'S'!, derived from ti'NI the head, chief. 
 
 2. — Above ten, the cardinal numbers are used to express 
 the ordinals : but then the number always follows the noun, or the 
 noun is repeated : — Thus, d"' I'^'V ^''^'^ tivelve days, but CjV 
 -iby^ D^j^'n or dv -t']} Q^yfn QV the twelfth day, ^^^ ^'^'VD 
 fifty years; but a^rPD^ r\^f or ri:i^ D^^PDlI n3^ the fiftieth 
 year. 
 
 Even from one to ten, the cardinals are often used for the 
 ordinals : as, V?")^ ri5'^3 in the year four, V^K* 03^3 in the year 
 seven, i.e. in the fourth, seventh, year.i 
 
 * As from Dnvp,_nvp, and n^nyp- 
 
 t In such cases the numeral is always followed by ? : as, lVt;*y3 
 '^"ip7 in the tenth day of the month.
 
 THE IIRRREW LANGUAGE. 95 
 
 Fractional Numbers. 
 
 92. The Fractional numbers are, ''VH m., T\)SXyt2 f. 
 a half, gen. '^n m. mn^ or H^VO^/- The rest of tlie 
 fractional numbers are indicated by placing the femi- 
 nine ordinals before the noun : thus, H^^H r\^iy^bpthe 
 third (part) of a year ; whereas, H^'^v^ri n^D^ signi- 
 fies, the third-year. In some cases the noun is omitted : 
 as, * And ye shall give T\''p%'r\ a fifth unto Pharaoh.'' — 
 (Gen. xlvii. 24.) 
 
 The student may, by way of exercise, translate the fifth chapter 
 of Genesis, verses 3 — 39 ; or chapter xi. verses 19 — 26, which con- 
 tain most of the cardinal numbers. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 93. Pronouns are generally divided into Personal, 
 Demonstrative, Relative, and Interrogative. 
 
 94. Personal pronouns are declined in the same 
 manner as nouns ; namely, by means of prepositions 
 or their fragments, which are added to the termi- 
 nations of the pronouns : thus, the preposition, 7{< to, 
 and the termination '' (from ''J>f 7), form v^i^ ; or still 
 further abridged, v to or for mej and with 1J (from 
 ^ii< ive, )!? to us. Thus likewise \12from, and \ forms 
 '^^'O or '''^t^'O from me. (See the following Table.)
 
 •S3 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 r^. 
 
 r e 
 
 c 
 
 ^1-^ 
 
 -J^ 
 
 P O 
 
 G. 
 '« 
 
 CO 
 
 f: : C- ^: : 
 
 e § 
 
 13 
 
 § cS £ ^ 
 
 
 
 JJT- 
 
 ST- 
 
 
 X<'~r^>- % i3- n- ni- 
 
 ir. F- 
 
 -^, i}= JF- O 
 
 ^ U. r^ 
 
 I S o - 
 
 H fe ^ -< 
 
 rz-J^ % 13 n 
 
 ^ : L. *n : 
 
 
 s :s ^ 
 
 hl; r^ H 
 
 f=^ 
 
 n- Jr^^ 25 13- /Hf nn 
 in HI : i^*- 
 
 s ^ 
 
 o 3 P c 
 
 H = P^ o 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 ^ Q O 
 
 13 n n^ 
 — o 
 
 < 
 
 o 
 
 #-1 . o-D it:- : S 
 
 P fe O <1 
 
 Si'^r^h^ %: 13 n*^ n 
 r-:- n^- C"-- '^^ ^" C 
 
 a a o=- o a •^, 
 p 2 £j 
 
 %.^r-^ %> 13 nw n 
 1?:. n:- IZ-- iR:- ni=- 13 
 
 r- T n:- ^ T o:' 
 
 >-i hi ^^ P^ o -< 
 
 n.-J^>- %= 13= n*^ n 
 
 n n=- C" r:- JJi=- 13 
 
 c. o u;;::. o o -p.. 
 
 2 -4^0 ^ 2 o 
 
 ni-J^" %=• c?: -Ht- n- 
 '- IT: a tz n o 
 
 : T i^=- "^ T ■£=• 
 
 c 1 -c 
 
 D- ^ 
 
 ;3 
 
 ^ 
 
 n> 
 
 0- ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 rt 
 
 ^ 
 
 r^ 2 
 
 
 • ' 
 
 
 
 
 %. 
 
 
 
 
 in 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 a; 
 
 
 ai)^ 
 
 oT 
 
 1-' 
 
 
 
 ■*" 
 
 > 
 
 
 M 
 
 .0 
 
 
 
 r^ «^l r: -J^' 
 
 •^ £ § 
 
 rt o a 
 
 Cc o 
 
 a 2 ^ . 
 
 F S -^ ^ 
 
 - J « § 
 
 S ti a; c 
 
 fl o s — 
 
 " is CO pC 
 
 . ^ =^ -^ s 
 
 ^ O- P-'g 
 
 ■^ >* CJ S 
 
 ^ IJ .S D-. 
 
 S <D 
 
 ^■"^ 
 
 ni- 
 a 
 
 & ^ 
 
 n- 
 
 
 rr 
 
 S^ o "5 
 
 Ts ^ 2 =" 
 
 « « C ?2 
 
 "SJ - o S 
 
 ra CO O ^ 
 
 S 'T3 O 
 
 •fl '-H <U fl 
 
 '^ Q- 2 
 
 in IJ G 
 
 o? 
 
 to — 
 
 3 
 
 X-l ^4) 
 
 fl .-. i-L, 
 
 *= S <U 
 
 ^ rt CO 
 
 ^ ^. S 
 
 « s § 
 
 a a 
 
 n- 1^ 
 
 O 
 
 CO p O c„ 
 fl =- « rt 
 
 o aj _ 
 - =^.fl S 
 
 fe Efl -iS -Q 
 
 rt =" " 
 
 g p OJ ffi 
 
 c ^ 3 .c 
 '— • S ' ' aj 
 
 
 fl- 
 
 * C2 ra e 
 
 C fl ?5 rt 
 
 •J-.. ^ «> he K 
 
 a •£ it ^
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 97 
 
 95. Each of the preceding pronouns may be further varied : — 
 1st. — By the conjunctive 1 and: as, *^t{1 and I, &c. v) and tintn 
 
 me, i'l^??©-! and from her, '•rilXl. and me, ^Q^-l and on or amongst 
 
 them. 
 
 2nd. — By the interrogative l! : as, ^^^ nrisrj art-fhou mi/ 'son? 
 
 nm >\:hr\ if-for-us thou, i. e. art thou for us ? inr^3 n'ps? ^a^pn 
 
 if-from-me can be difficult any thing, i. e. is their any thing too dif- 
 ficult for me ? 
 
 3rd. — By ^ (from 'X'^) that, tvhich : as, ''^.^^ that I, DH^ that 
 they, V^ that which belongs to me, "V*^ that which belongs to thee. 
 
 Obs. — Y^j iP^, &c. are considered, by some Grammarians, as 
 possessive pronouns, corresponding with my, thy, ^c. or with mine, 
 thine, &c. They are, however, seldom used (except by Rabbinical 
 writers) in either of these senses, and are evidently compounded 
 of ^ and the dative pronouns, in the same manner as the Chaldaic 
 and Syriac ''c\ If"^., c<^a.9, <-L^J.9, are compounded of ''"^ which, 
 V to me, &c. 
 
 The manner in which the Hebrew expresses the relati\'e possessive 
 pronouns, my, thy, his, &c., is, by adding the pronominal affixes to 
 the substantive, as has already been explained in the preceding pages ; 
 whilst the absolute possessive, mine, thine, his, Sfc, are expressed 
 by the dative pronouns, V to me, y to thee, &c. : as, Tl^C ''•? V 
 ' Mine is the whole earth,' (Exod. xix. 5.) T^^f]) w ' To him it shall 
 be, i. e. HIS, (Levit. viii. 8—9.) pXri ^^ ciS D^m ip < Thine are 
 the heavens, thine also is the earth, (Psalm xcix. 11.) ''^?:?1 V ''l^'^ 
 r? ' My beloved is mine, and I am his, (Cant. ii. 16). 
 
 The pronouns ^^-li^, X'''?, DD, ID, are sometimes used as demon- 
 stratives. (See the following section). 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 9G. The following are the Demonstrative Pronouns: 
 
 ni, rarely, ^T, w. HXT, rarely HT,/. This 
 
 ni^ri, m. ^hr^f. T^n Com. That yonder 
 
 nW, rarely Sx- These or those
 
 98 TIIR ETYMOr-OCY OF 
 
 They are declined thus \r- , / 
 
 Thesl; npX This :.n«T This HT Norn. 
 
 To these... nW^ To this nXlS To this HH Dative, 
 
 V -T : 
 
 These ...n'|)NlTi^ This JlXm^ This nrfi^. Ob. 
 
 From these H^XD From this ...HX-T^ From this ....... nt^S"! 
 
 ;■•■ ■■ ■■ . ■ . ■■■ ■ > Ab. 
 
 With these npX2 With this ...nNT^ I" this nDj 
 
 As these ...n^X3 As this Hi^JTS As this n]3 Com. 
 
 97. {<-in and S^'H are frequently used for the demonstrative 
 pronoun, ihat ; and DD and \Vi for those ; but they cannot, like the 
 preceding, receive any of the prefixes (except H), The rest of the 
 prefixes, when required, are added to the noun : as, ^^-inn E^'\Sn 
 that man, ^<-inn ti'''Sn p from that man, ^-inn K^''X3 on or against 
 that man. 
 
 98. Demonstrative pronouns, like other definitives and ad- 
 jectives, follow the nouns to which they belong : as — 
 
 ntn ^^i^n this man i^)nT\ ^\Sn that man 
 
 ..■ - • T - • T 
 
 ni^n ng^'Xn this looman ^^'P^T[ H^'XH that woman 
 n^Xn B^'^iJ^n these men Dnn D'^^ii^n those men 
 
 T\V^T\ D^SJ'iin /Ae^e women \ \T\T\ D'^SJ'Sn iAo^e women. 
 
 But when the pronouns precede their substantives, the D is 
 omitted, and the verb, to he, is understood : as, 5J'"'Sri HT Z"///* is 
 </(e man. 1?'^^n i<-in 77?«^ is the thing. H^f'SH N'-H 77?fl/ is the 
 ivoman. ^^V}^^ ^)>^ These are the men. %'^^\ '^ ni»5f rh^\ 
 And-these are the-names-of the-sons-of Israel.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. i)'J 
 
 Relative Pro)wuus. 
 
 99. The relative pronoun ^It^'JSI (as a prefix V^), 
 who, iv/iic/i, tliat, what, is indeclinable ; the gender, 
 number and case being indicated by the variation of 
 the noun, or some other word in the sentence. 
 
 E.vamples. 
 
 ^^ ^5!l ^ti^J^.n^n) Tlie-lord WHO spake to me. 
 (Gen. xxiv. 17.) 
 
 ^12)^ ^??^^? ^^J^ ^ »'«« WHO HIS mother, i. c. 
 a man whose mother. 
 
 nv|f "l^X 1^'\S T\y_^r\ The damsel who I shall say to 
 
 HER i. e. the damsel to 
 who in / shall say. 
 
 Dtl'b nXV^ ItJ^'X r'^^s^ The-Und which thou-didst (JO- 
 
 T • T TT V -; I VT T ^ 
 
 out FROM there, i. e. the land 
 from Avhich or whence thou 
 earnest. (Gen. xxiv. 5.) 
 
 TrPV 2^b' nnX 1^^^ Vli^n The Und WHICH //;o?i liest 
 
 T V T •• T - V -: I V T T 
 
 UPON her, i. e. upon whicli 
 thou liest (Gen. xxviii. 13). 
 
 13 D^nSx n^^ It^'NI ti'\^ A-man who ihe-spirit'of God 
 
 iN-iiiM, i. e. in Afiiom the 
 spirit of God is. (Gen, xh". 
 38.) 
 
 In elliptical phrases, however, where the antecedent 
 is omitted, the relative admits of the prefixes f2, h,^,'2; 
 as, ^^^f5, '^^^f5• (See Syntax.)
 
 100 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 100. Before verbs, and especially before parti- 
 ciples, the definite H is frequently used instead of 
 the relative: as, 155^ which compasses (Gen.ii. 10), 
 '^T\ry which goeth (Gen.ii. 14), ^T^r\ ivho went (Gen. 
 xiii. 5), Lit. the compass^r, ike goer. 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns . 
 
 101. The interrogative pronouns are *tt who? H^ 
 n»* n^ ivhat ? how ? as, nm '^2 who art thou 1 
 nn ^\S*n ^D icho is this mani ^H? ^^ ^^ n'ho art 
 thou, mil daughter ? lOJ^ n^ ivhat shall I say ? TiP ^l^ 
 what is his name'^. nib H^ how good! J^nii HX? how 
 awful ! 
 
 Ohs. — ''P is applied to persons, nO to things : «in '•D signifies who 
 is he ? ^^^ ■'P u'ho is she ? But «"in np (u-hat he), KTl-np (ivhat 
 she), signify tvhat is it ? The same n^X ''P 2r/;o are these (persons)? 
 but n?5^ n^ what are these (things'). 
 
 ''P is thus declined : — ''P tcho, ''P^ /o ?t'72o??z or ivhose, ""PTl^ whom, 
 ''K>ip from tvhom, ''P? erzV/? or throncjli whom. 
 
 The manner in which the adjective pronouns, each, every, any, 
 one, none, all, such, &c., are expressed, will be explained in the 
 Syntax. • 
 
 * i^'? generally before words beginning with H or V (excepting in 
 seven places, according to the Masorah, where it is sometimes HO or 
 np) ; no before those which begin with ^, H, or "1, except before 
 S^-in and ^^T', where it is always n?>
 
 
 TIIK HEBREW LANGUA(iE. 101 
 
 llxervUe. 
 
 ''n>*n t*nm "D'''?^™ sn'^^k '^i^.^n ."^d";;'"! *Dn 
 
 •• : -K'"*^ ■ ~ '. I i-.—r''-: T ''t •• ; X , , :'~ ": 
 
 npx* * ^p7i i|7n n;^i r\m ""yi : jy.;:? f >s3 nn« 
 
 1 13' 2 First-born. ■'' n?; •* rii^ a brother. •'' Ye have sold. 
 6 Dnyp Egypt. 7 Say. « ninx a sister. ^ He said. 10 She said. 
 11 Seeking. ^^ Xell. i3 Pasturing, i-* And he said. ^^ ^.n.'? a spy, 
 16 And they said, i' No. '« fnx a lord. i-' ^3 all. 20 13 honest, 
 upright. -1 "I^V.' " Before thee. 23 Qj^g|- yg 24 Ye shall not send, 
 1. c. lay. ■^^^y 
 
 ^ Have ye deceived. 2 Saying. •'' piHT distant. "^ Very. •'^ "^y?. 
 midst. ^ 3tyr one that sits, dwells. 7 Behold. ^ Come. " And 
 I say. '" Th«-God-of. i' nns fathers. 12 He-has-sent-me. 
 
 II 2
 
 102 tup: etymology of 
 
 ■•■ ""■ '■•■•■•■ ■" ■ ?r/^" ■■■ <u^^ f--^ ^^'-^^^ 
 '^-^!3^^*a ^m:^ ''^^^-^\ ^i^D n-rn n^ai nr\'^ ^li^^5 ^■^*'' 
 
 n^;t:3 vnn dk D37 'Tn.si n^^n : ^nvs ''dx-^3 
 
 IT.;* • V T / n i^ ■ ' ' 
 
 : '^na ^'H'^iinx "i^x px i as-rn pi«s =ni5 
 
 V ; - T ':■ T -; V -; I ">•: - | v T T 
 
 "And-they-shall-say. '^ DP' a name. '^ Shall I say. i6£)i(i, n Deed. 
 J8 Ye have done. i9 Know. '■"'That. ^' 03 strength. "I-have-served. 
 *^ 2X'^yi'-^' He has deceived (deceit accompanied with derision). 
 25 1-will bring out. '« He did not withhold. 27 Any thing. =» But. 
 '» We will consent. =° Dwell, si jn>^,y,-- 
 
 './- Ll rt??2 tby-^-father, and-thou-^ art my-daiighter.f 
 
 She is my-mother, and-tliese are her-children. This 
 is my little son, and-this is my little daughter. lie 
 loved' her more-than-alP his-children. They are my 
 father's brothers, and she is my sister. Is this your 
 little brother who called^ me ? Is this the little girl 
 who said* that^ her father loved her more than all his 
 daughters ? This is not the city/ nor is this the 
 house," which I have built.'' Who art thou, my son ? 
 and what is thy name ? Wiio art thou, my-dauhtger ? 
 
 -)- The Hebrew of most of the phrases contained in this exercise 
 will be found, with very slight alterations, in the first part of this 
 work, pp. 87-89.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 103 
 
 and-what is- thy-name ? He is a wise man and a 
 great king. She is fairer^ than-her-sister, and the 
 most comely** amongst daughters. His little brother 
 will-be greater'-'-than-he. Whose art thou/" and 
 whither goest^'^-thou, and whose are these before"- 
 thee ? Whither is thy-^ beloved '^ gone [went'^], O 
 thou fairest of women! whither did thy beloved turn'^ 
 that-we-may-seek-him'^ with thee.^^ 
 'HD* 'niw ^^n:"- ""n^n "■n-js'? ''-"in "•n'^n 
 
 TT T : T _ -:• ' — ' V T : < - i 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 102. Verbs are either Primitive or Derivative, 
 (art. 18, |)age 20.) Perfect or Imperfect,* (art. 13 — 
 16.) Primitive verbs are either transitive, intransitive, 
 or neuter. Derivative verbs are either active, pas- 
 sive, or reflective. 
 
 Primitive transitive verbs admit of seven principal 
 forms, divisions, or branches^ , denominated — 
 
 7 hv.^T\r\- (Art. 18.) 
 
 * All verbs not included in the first conjugation, (Art. 13.) are 
 called impe)-fect. 
 
 t The want of a technical term to designate these variations 
 collectively, is particularly felt in treating of this part of Hebrew
 
 104 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Obs 1. — Intransitive verbs do not, of course, admit of all the 
 prcceding forms ; nor, indeed, do all transitive verbs, — some being 
 used in one form only, others in several, and few in all. 
 
 2. — The first of these forms, 7p_, is appropriated to primitive 
 verbs, the rest to the derivatives. 
 
 3. — 7p, 7V.3 and ^''V.pi^, are called active forms, because 
 ihey arc mostly used in an active sense. ^V.^^, ?S^?5 and ?J??n, 
 are denominated passive forms, and ^V.^riH, the reflective form. * 
 
 4. — These several forms or branches may be considered as 
 so many separate verbs, each of which admits of mood, tense, 
 person, &c, ; they are all derived from one and the same root, 
 which mostly consists of three letters, denominated radicals, f 
 (Art. 18.) 
 
 Character and Signification of the several Forms 
 or Branches. 
 
 103. 7^ or ^>:3 expresses simple action, (tran- 
 sitive or intransitive,) being or a state of being ; as, 
 
 Grammar. The name 0^3^33 hidldings, used by the ancient Gram- 
 marians, would sound rather awkwardly in English ; still more ob- 
 jectionable are the modern denominations, voices, conjugations, &c. 
 as they are apt to mislead the student. For want of a more suitable 
 term, we shall denominate them forms or branches. 
 
 * Some verbs admit of several other forms, denominated 7.?^?, 
 7S7B, bv^yj^, pysipn, &c, but as these occur very rarely, it was not 
 thought necessary to enumerate them. 
 
 •j- Letters added to the root for the purpose of modification 
 arc, by way of distinction, denominated serviles. (See Note p. 16.) 
 Those that are added to some part of the verb by way of euphony 
 or emphasis, are called Paragogic. They are ^, 1, "•, ^, 3, and, in a 
 few instances. X.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUACiE. lOo 
 
 *Tp3 to visit * np_3 he visited ; T\''T\ to be, T\\T[ he teas ; 
 n /PI to be sick, TOU he was sick. 
 
 T ' T T 
 
 104. /^_^) expresses the passive of the preceding 
 form. Its characteristic is the prejix (i): as, f|iDI)3 
 to be desirous ; ^p3i3 he was visited. This letter is, 
 however, dropped, and its omission indicated by 
 dagesh in the first letter of the root, whenever it is 
 preceded by another servile : as, IPSH (for HpS^H) to 
 be visited; "^^m (for 1??^;J5^) I shall be broken. 
 
 Ohs. 1. — When the first radical happens to be a guttural, the da- 
 gesh is compensated by placing a long vowel under the preceding 
 servile : as, ??!!jn to be eaten. 
 
 2. — Neuter verbs cannot, strictly speaking, admit of a pas- 
 sive ; there are, nevertheless, many verbs of this description found 
 in the passive form ; but then they generally indicate a transition 
 from one state into another: as from f~i^n he existed, '^''^} lie be- 
 came, was brought into existence, it happened. From n?n to he 
 sick, n/.n^ he became sick. 
 
 3. — Some verbs of this form have apparently a reflective 
 signification: as, i^^r}^^] and I hid mgself (Gen. in. 18.), "TiSH se- 
 parate thyself, (Gen. xii. ]0.)> ""•^P^H gather yourselves together, 
 
 * The primary signification of this verb ("Ip?) is to view anything 
 with the mental eye, to bear it in mhid, have a regard for it; and 
 hence its secondary meaning : — to visit, inspect, examine, review, 
 muster, number, to appoint a person as an inspector, to intrust a 
 person with any thing ; in which senses we find this verb used in its 
 several branches, in various parts of Scripture. For the sake of 
 convenience, however, we shall render it by to visit.
 
 10(J THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 (Gen. xlix. 1.); but even these indicate rather an abstaining from 
 action than reflex action, and may, in most cases, bo rendered in 
 the passive * : thus, ^^^nxi and I remained hidden^ (I hid myself, 
 would be i^^nnxi, as in Gen. iii. 8, i^^HJ^M and he hid himself) ; 
 "l"?.?'! he separated, i. e. do not follow me ; "iptl'n take heed, beware, 
 i. e. abstain from doiny (Gen. xxxi. 24) ; -ISp^D remain assembled. 
 
 4. — A few words of this form are apparently used in an ac- 
 tive sense: as, y?^'^ he swore, QD?? he fouyht, HJi^J he sighed; but 
 they do not entirely lose their passive signification ; for, he that 
 swears, is at the same time sworn, i. e. made to do so by some 
 authority : and he that fights, is at the same time fought. n3S3 
 means literally he became eased, the physical effect of sighing. 
 
 105. 7)/^3 has generally a transitive signification^, 
 and indicates mostly intense action and energy ; but 
 sometimes it has a frequentative or a causative mean- 
 ing. Its characteristic is dagesh in the second letter 
 of the root ; as — 
 
 * Ewald in his '' Krilische Grammatik der Hebraische Sprache," 
 Art. 103, maintains that the primary signification of this /or/n is 
 reflective. But in adopting this opinion, the learned author appears 
 to me to have made the exceptions the rule, and the rule the excep- 
 tion ; as, for every single instance where this form denotes reflex 
 action, there are hundreds where it cannot be rendered otherwise than 
 in a passive sense. Thus — Gen. ii. 4, DS"i3n3 ; ii. 23, ^'^y>^. ; 
 
 iii. 4, -inp??!; 7, nin^srii; iv. is, i^-ri; v. 2, Q^'ian -, 
 
 vi. 21, t'SN^; vii. 11, -lyp^J, -inri^J ; 22, -mm; viii. 2, nDD*!, 
 ^.?3n; 5, -IXl^ ; ix. ibid. r\-\2\ ^^l^^■^3t; x. 9, "10S'>, &c. 
 
 f In a few instances it is used intransitively, witjiout losing its 
 signification of intensity; as, l^p he hastened; HDV it sprouted, 
 grew ; H^V // p-eiv rapidly, abundantly.
 
 THE IIEBRKW LANGUAGE. 107 
 
 Kal. Fid. 
 
 ^ii^ to break. ^51^ to break in pieces, to shatter. 
 
 '^l^? to be lost, to perish. I'^i^ to destroy, to ruin. 
 
 PjTl to pursue. >rr\ to pursue continually, to pro- 
 
 secute. 
 
 ^n3 to jcrite. '2^]^ to icrite often, repeatedly.* 
 
 pTH he was strong. p-TH he made stro?ig, he strength- 
 
 ened, fortified. 
 
 1f27 to learn. 1u7 he made another learn, i. e. 
 
 he taught. 
 Thus likewise n3tj' lie forgot, HSp* ]ie caused io forget, brought into 
 
 oblivion ; "1^9 he ivas clean, pure, inp he made clean, 2nirified ; ^^P^t 
 
 he was unclean, ^t^P he made unclean, defiled. 
 
 lOG. 75/^3 is the passive of the preceding: its 
 characteristic is dagesh in the second radical, and (\) 
 under the first : as, ^Z^ /teivas shattered ; *T^7 he icas 
 taught. 
 
 * Hence it often denotes habitual action; thus, 3^13 one that 
 writes; but 2030 one that is accustomed to write, i.e. a writer by 
 profession : D^TI one that kills ; but n->*"l^ 07ie that has committed the 
 action repeatedly, an assassin. 
 
 t These two verbs, and a few others are, in some instances, used 
 ill a particular sense : as, ]\]'^^ ^"^H^l y^nc? the jyriest shall make him 
 clean, i.e. he shall pronoiince him clean (Levit. xiii. 28) ; iriix X^P"! 
 and he shall make him unclean, i. e. he shall pronotince him unclean 
 (Levit. xiii. 3). The same is the case with some verbs in Hipliil: 
 as, P^T^'iTI riX •Ip'^'iyn'! And they shall justify the righteous (Dent. xxv. 
 1), i.e. declare him just. In a few instances, we find verbs of this 
 form (Piel) have an opposite signification to what they have in ?p. : 
 as, 7pD (o stone, "?p.P to remove stones.
 
 JOS THE KTYiMOLOGY OF 
 
 Obs. — When the second radical happens to be one of the letters 
 1, V, n, n, X, the dac/esh is compensated by lengthening the pre- 
 2l ceding vowel : as, l^?? (for "l>?|) to explain ; 1N3 (for 1???) he ex- 
 
 plained; T13 (for T^S) he blessed ; ^13 (for'^'!!^) he was blessed.* 
 
 107. 7-j;^Sn has mostly a causative signification ; 
 its characteristic is the prefix H, the second radical 
 having (••) or (^— ) : as, ^D^lI or 'T'p^n to cause another 
 to visit ; Ap^i^n he caused a?iother to eat, i. e. he fed, or 
 provided him with food ; 'T'^/^H he caused another to 
 burn.'\ 
 
 108. ^ysn is the passive of the preceding: its 
 characteristic is the prefix H with short (t) or (s) : as, 
 npSn he ivas caused to visit ; ^5Sf^n hs was caused to lie 
 down. 
 
 * This compensation does not, however, always take place : as, 
 |'t<3 he vexed, 5nJ he led, "lilP he purified, ^03 he denied, ""V.? he 
 kindled. 
 
 ■\ There is, in some instances, a distinction between the use of the 
 verb in Piel and Hiphil : as, Kal, "^V^ to burn, to be on fire ; Piel, 
 "1^3 to maJce burn, to kindle, to set on fire, "i^V^C to cause to burn, 
 i. e. to cause something to burn another object (See Gen. iii. 2, 3. — 
 XXXV. 3, Jud. XV.) In many instances, however, the two forms have 
 the same sense. 
 
 Many verbs have a different signification in the different forms : 
 as, nnS) to open, 0^3 to open with force; hence to engrave: "=114*1 
 (Kal) signifies and he kneeled, from T^^ the knee; '^"l?*! (Hip.) 
 he caused to kneel (See Gen. xxiv. ' And he made the camels to 
 kneel') : but "=1").?'!! (Piel) signifies he blessed.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 109 
 
 109. ^>|^nn has mostly a reflective signification :* 
 its characteristic is the prefix T\'r\ added to the form 
 Piel : as, "Tjpsnri to visit or to inspect one s self ; /iSDnri 
 he threw himself (from 733 to fall) ; Hp^nn lie un- 
 covered himself. It often signifies mere pretension, 
 or a feigning to be what, in fact, one is not: as, 
 npDnr^ to pretend to be sick ; '^^'^X)'*^ he pretended to be 
 rich, acted the rich man, or boasted to be such. 
 
 Obs. — The derivative verbs are nevertheless frequently used in 
 other senses. (See the notes.) 
 
 Aloods and Toises. 
 
 110. The primitive as well as the derivative 
 verbs admit of three moods, namely, the Infinitive, 
 the Imperative'\ , and the Indicative. 
 
 * Some verbs of this form (Hiph.) have a neuter signification, 
 others denote intensity : as, ^y^'^T- ^^^^V shall become white ; ^^H*?! 
 they shall become red; "=]7P*i^ he threw down, cast aicaij, D^SPTI he 
 rose early, i. e. Avith eagerness, or before the usual time. 
 
 Several verbs of this form denote continuance or repetition, others 
 have nearly the same signification as in ?i2 : as, /^sni^ he prayed 
 earnestly, devoutly ; ''IPlT'D he walked continually, or he loalhed by 
 his own effort, unassisted; ^S^r^H he mourned greatly; ^'^^^'<^ he 
 was anyry. 
 
 -|- Except the derivative verbs, Pual, Hophal, and Hithpael, which 
 being passive verbs, admit not the imperative. Nipluil, though 
 likewise passive, admits this mood, but then it has either a reflective 
 meaning, or it must be taken in the sense of abstaining from action. 
 (Sec Obs. 3, p. 105.)
 
 110 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Each of the three active forms admits of two par- 
 ticiples* ; one active the other passive (varied by 
 gender and number) : the rest of the forms have 
 one participle only. 
 
 111. The form of the infinitives of primitive verbs 
 is mostly 1p3, called the absolute, or I'p^, denomi- 
 nated the constructive form. 
 
 112. From this infinitive, the infinitives of the 
 derivative verbs are formed, as has already been 
 explained in the preceding pages. (See Table X.) 
 
 113. Infinitives are, in their nature, abstract 
 nounsf, and as such, they admit of the prefixes, 3, 1, 
 to, 7 : as, nbfi or *lp3 to visit, *TpS3 in visiting, np33 
 as visiting, "IpS/ to visit, ox for the purpose of visiting, 
 1p^f2fro}?i visiting, IpSH^ in being visited, *TpSn2 as 
 being visited, &c. The infinitives of the rest of the 
 derivative verbs are inflected in the same manner. 
 (See Table X.) 
 
 114. The imperative mood admits only the se- 
 cond person masculine and feminine, singular and 
 plural. 
 
 * Except neuter verbs. (See Obs. 4, p. 117.) 
 •f For the same reason they admit the pronominal affixes. (See 
 Table III.)
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. Ill 
 
 The second persons m. of the imperatives are 
 formed from their respective infinitives, from which 
 they either do not differ at all, or in a very slight 
 degree. 
 
 The second person feminine receives *• in addition 
 to the masculine ; the second person m. p. ) ; the 
 second person/.;;. ri> Thus — 
 
 Infinitive (Kal) Infinitive (Nipiial.) 
 
 npi or np-D "ipsn 
 
 Imperative. Imperative. 
 
 np3 visit thou, m. ,?. ^p.^'!^ he visited, m. s. 
 
 "^^T))^ visit ye, 711. p. ^Ip^T] be i/e visited y ?n. p. 
 
 r]^ip$ f.p. '^V^\^%^ f.p. 
 
 (See Table X.) 
 
 115. The indicative mood admits only of two 
 tenses; the past and the future. 
 
 The third person ?;?. s. of the past is formed from 
 the infinitive, mostly by a slight change in the vowel 
 point : as — 
 
 Infiuitive. "drd person. 
 
 Kal 1p3 np3 
 
 Piel np3 ^p2 
 
 Pucii y^ ^p? 
 
 Hiphii npsn y\>^r\ 
 
 The third person of Ilop/ial iind HitlrpaH are formed 
 in the same manner. (See Table X.) In Niphal
 
 112 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 the n is rejected, and the characteristic 3 retained : 
 thus, from Ip^n (for "IpS^in) to be visited, ^'^^) he 
 was visited. 
 
 116. The rest of the persons are formed from the 
 third person ?«., by subjoining to it the letters ^^1 I ; 
 Jjl thou, m. ; ^ thou,f. ; T\-* she; ^i we; ^T\ you, m. ; 
 \T\you,f. ; 1 for both genders, they. (See Table X.) 
 
 117. The future tenses are formed by prefixing to 
 the imperative the following letters, H, 3, ■•, i*{ : thus — 
 imp. 1p$— future, *lp3^ / shall visit ; 1p^^ thou shalt 
 visit, npS^i thou shalt visit, f. ; ^1p^^ they shall visit, 
 m., &c. 
 
 118. In the same manner are the future tenses of 
 derivative verbs formed ; except the future of Niphal, 
 which rejects the H of the imperative. (See 
 Table X.) 
 
 * ('^t) The student need scarcely be reminded that this is the 
 feminine termination of nouns and 'participles ; and hence we may 
 infer that both the third person masculine, as well as the feminine, 
 were originally participles of the past tense: thus, ^i^| one that did 
 visit, iT]p3 a female that did visit. Professor Lee, in his elaborate 
 work on the Hebrew Language (Art. 152 and 195), supposes that 
 they were originally novns ; this is very probable, especially if we 
 admit that nouns were originally verbalia. (See Art. 6, p. 10.)
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 113 
 
 119. The fid lire tenses with the prefix ) and 
 dagesh in the following letter*, or \ (before ^{), are 
 often used to express the past ; as, ibSfl t/iou shalt 
 visit, "Ij^^^l and thou hast visited, 'Ipp^ I shall visit, 
 I'p^^) and I did visit ; "IDS^^ he shall sail, n^^*") and 
 he said ; 'y^} we shall go, '^Tl and he iccnt. 
 
 Ohs. 1. — This prefix (1 or 5) is denominated by Grammarians "I 
 convers/vef, because it changes the tense from future into past. 
 But 1 (with sh'va) before future tenses, is merely copulative : as, j 
 IpS?^"! and I shall visit ; "I^X'') and he shall say. i 
 
 2. — Words thus converted from the future into the past by i 
 the prefix "[,1 having any but a principal distinctive accent on the last 
 syllable, have their accent removed from the tdtimate to the j^enuUi- 
 mate, and the last long vowel changed into a short one, provided the 
 third radical is not ^, and the penultimate is a simple syllable, not 
 
 * Except where the prefix is '' with sh'va : as, ''i?], "1?T., &c., 
 ■when the dagesh is omitted : thus, ''Dp, "iSI!!, &c. Except, like- 
 wise, when the prefix is &^, as ""P^, "^7^, "'i^?^, where the dagesh is 
 compensated by the long vowel under the 1 : thus, "^P'^], "^/".^J, &c. 
 
 t I have, for the sake of distinction, retained this technical term, 
 though it is evident that the 1 never loses its copulative power even 
 when it is said to be conversive. The fact is, that this letter always 
 retains its primitive signification, namely, /«hc<«om ; but it not only 
 joins words and phrases, but likewise the time and other circum- 
 stances. That its influence is not confined to the past and future 
 only, but that it extends likewise to the present tense, and to the 
 several moods, might easily be proved by numerous examples, 
 were this the proper place to enter into such a disquisition. 
 
 I The prefix \ has no influence on the accent. (See the examples 
 in the first note.)
 
 114 
 
 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 followed by sh'va: thus, ^]?n\ 3^'.>, D-IP), 3iDJ, rt^?", — ^ttX»1, 
 ac;;15, CDp^ll, 30*1, |Q*V But if the preceding conditions be wanting, 
 the accent is not removed; hence we have "p^*!, ^''^*5, *1?T1, 
 N"lp*1, {^3*1, 3ns*"l, &-C. The accent is likewise retained in verbs of 
 
 jt'i •-' J- •"' J~ v;r.— ' 
 
 the fourth conjugation, having chirik instead of (••)!" ^^^^ future : 
 as, Y\?'% 1F'?1' 
 
 120. The past tense, with the prefix ) or "j, ex- 
 presses77/^z/re time when preceded by a verb in the 
 future, or by an imperative : as, ''i^lpS I have visited, 
 ''r\1p^) ami I shall visit ; ^^f2i^ thou hast said, H'n^Xl 
 
 r :J- T » T :y- T ? ^r : - t : 
 
 1 aiid thou shalt say* ; H^n he or it ivas, T]\T^) and he or 
 it shall be ; *1^J< he said, 1^^"! and he shall say. 
 
 Ohs. 1. — This 1 is likewise denominated conversive. But when 
 a past tense, having "1 prefixed, is preceded by another past tense, 
 the "I is in that case merely copulative, and the verb retains its past 
 ! signification : as, "l^^?! ^"^i? he called and said. 
 
 ' 2. — These rules, which will be more fully explained in the 
 
 Syntax, are equally applicable to the tenses of the derivative verbs. 
 
 121. The active participle of the primitive verb 
 (.7p), is formed mostly by inserting 1 (or its vowel 
 pointf ) between the first and second radical : as, 
 
 * In such cases the accent of the first and second person singular is 
 removed to the ultimate syllable. (See the above examples.) Ex- 
 cept verbs whose third radical is a quiescent letter : as, ''r''','?^'^!, 
 
 t Except verbs of the fifth, and some of the eighth conjugations.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 115 
 
 1p3 or Ip,^ one that visits, and the passive participle, 
 by inserting- ^ between the second and third radical : 
 
 as, nip3- ^' 
 
 122. The participles of the derivative verbs are 
 mostly formed by the prefixes ), 12, ^, P, Htt*, or by a 
 change in the vowel points. 
 
 Obs. — Participles being in their nature nouns, are varied like 
 them by gender and number (see the following Table), and by the 
 pronominal affixes. (Table HI.) They are inserted amongst the 
 verbs, because they supply the present tense, for which the Hebrew 
 has no particular /or»? : as, w?. ''i^S "'^>? — -/. JT^.pS '•pJ^I I am visiting , or 
 / visit. (See page 117.) 
 
 123. To conjugate a verb, is to express all the modifications of 
 which it is susceptible. As these modifications are chiefly indicated 
 by prefixes and affixes, and as these are common to all verbs, there 
 can, strictly speaking, be only one conjugation ; nevertheless, as the 
 vowel-points and some of the letters constituting the root are subject 
 to various changes, verbs have been distributed by most Grammarians 
 into eight classes or conjugations (Art. 12), the first of which com- 
 prehends perfect verbs (Art. 13), the rest comprehend imperfect 
 verbs (Art. 14—16). 
 
 The annexed table contains a model of a perfect verb. 
 
 These letters are probably fragments of the words ''P who, or 
 vhat. 
 
 
 / , 

 
 IIG THE ETYiMOLOGY OF 
 
 124. Remarks and Observations on the preceding Verb. 
 
 Obs. 1. — Tlic dagesh, in the first radical beginning a word or 
 syllable, as IpSi, ''Fl'li^S, <5Lc. "'iP.SJ?'!', <Src., is used only in roots 
 beginning with either of the letters n D 3 T J 2, but not in those 
 beginning with any other letter : as, ^b?, ''VTOj?, I^PCIH' 
 
 2. — The accent is on the second radical when the same has 
 a vowel, but when it has (:) the accent is placed on the next vowel ; 
 except the terminations DI^, 1^, which always take the accent, not- 
 withstanding the second radical has a vowel. Except likewise the 
 plural terminations of the participles. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 3. — "ipS — The forms of the infinitive of Kal are either 
 (VyS): as, "ipS to visit 3b^ to lie down; or (^V?): as, ^3 ; or 
 (^y|) : as, 35f * 
 
 The first is denominated the absolute form, and is chiefly used by 
 way of emphasis, before and after other verbs : as. ^5^^ '^PPI ^?P 
 visiiiny, he will visit you, i. e. he ivill siirely visit you. (Gen. 1. 24.) 
 
 The second and third are denominated the constructive forms, 
 and are chiefly used with the letters, tt, ^, D, 3) : as, 'Ip?? in visiting, 
 np?3, &:c. (See the preceding Table.) 3?P'3 in lying doivji, 2?^?, 
 
 Before ^Pb, (_1) is changed into short (t) : as, ^^'''^, cons. 7^P, 
 to rule, '\^^/^''0 to rule over tis. This rule is equally applicable 
 to all words terminating in {!_) : as X'Pi<, ?b^prij with ^Ip!?, 
 -S^ps*, 'h'CVn, &c. (See Part I. p. 79.) 
 
 * The following forms occur sometimes, 7?^3 to boil ; 714 ^^ he 
 great ; ^^"}!? io fear ; '~'3l]N? to love ; •"'^'li^? to ajoproach. But 
 the first two are probably adjectives, and the latter abstract nouns, 
 used instead of the regular infinitives. 
 
 t The constructive form is often used without the letters 12), ^, 3, 3- 
 (See Syntax.)
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 117 
 
 Obs. 4, — Participles, as has already been observed, supply the 
 present tense : as, n»i^ ^pi?, m. nnpi'? ^:.X, /. / learn ;* Ipiy nns*, 
 m. nnoiy ^i< /. thou standest ; ^K'V N"in he sits, n^.Kf'r i<>n she 
 sits ; D^D^n IJX m. nis^h •i:X we walk, Lc. i^lP *?N* / call, 
 N-IID ''3X. / am called, invited. 
 
 Verbs which imply neither action nor passion admit neither 
 active nor passive participles, the noun adjective being used like 
 other nouns in conjunction with the personal pronouns in the 
 present tense (the verb to be being understood). Thus, as we say 
 D-IK *iSf / am a man, ^)^ «-in he is a king , ^V}^_ -IJnjb^ we are 
 men, so likewise D3n ^3i< (not Q5in) / am wise, D3n t«-in he is 
 wise, Cl''p3n n»ri they are wise ; ^"^^ ''?.^ / am red ; >"n2 nriNI 
 thou art great, ^^"^^ npxV??n the work is great ; -l^niJ? D'-nj;."! u^e 
 are hungry. 
 
 Additional Examples. 
 
 DHN] nv "in My beloved is white and ruddy. (Cant. v. 10.) 
 mS31 "J^^ rrip^ /am iZacA-, fl«cZ {yet) comely. (Ibid. i. 5.) 
 
 •IJn;^^ □"'nv.'l "3 -lyT y/;e_j, hnow that we are hungry. (2 Kings 
 
 vii. 12.) 
 
 ^Py? ^.'".^y) 3J(*."^ ^J(rj T//e people ARE hungry, and-weary, and- 
 thirsty. (2 Sam. xvii. 29.) 
 
 0^5. 5. — *1p3 — This is by some grammarians called the root. It 
 has either (-) for the second vowel, as the word under consideration, 
 
 * Lit. I am a learner, or I am learning. In a few instances we 
 find the active participle takes Ct) instead (..) : as, T'Piri (Ps. 
 xvi. 5.) ^■'Pi'' (Isa. xxix. 14.) or (-) : as 'l?^* A few also are 
 found with n (Paragogic): as, n"iy_3 (Hos. vii. 4.) Or with * (Para- 
 gogic) : as, ''^i^ (Deut. iii. 3.) 
 
 I 2
 
 118 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 and then it is said to be of the form v'VS, which is chiefly appro- 
 priated for active verbs. Or it has (..) or (1) for the second vowel, 
 and then it is said to be of the form 7^.3, and 7^2 : as, T^Q /'« «'«« 
 ivillhuj, ]\?\he was old ; ?'3^ he teas able, Pi^ he was little.* 
 {2^ .,/./^-* Ohs. 6. — Verbs of the form ?ys express their different persons in 
 ^ _ the same manner as b? ppS) : thus, V^n, ''^^^'^, n)'pn, &c.t 
 V^ ^'^'^•(not 'Jjiysri). But those of the form VyS, retain (^) in all cases 
 J J7 jf-- where those of the form 7^3 have (-). Except in the second person 
 t> »-i / plural, where they change (1) into short (t) : thus, ?2^, ''^7?^' ^: 9t' 
 
 t^ ^-y shall be able, ^?-W, &c. 
 
 •- -: The three forms occur in the 35th verse of the 40th chapter of 
 
 Exodus :— 
 
 •• T 
 
 /47id Moses was not able i(o e?2/er f?;io the tent of the congregation, 
 because the cloud rested thereon, and the glory of the Lord filled the 
 Tabernacle. 
 
 * Vei-bs of this form have,/ of course,^ their infinitives, participles 
 m,, and third persons the same. 
 
 t In pause, (see Part T. p. 84.) )jn, H^^sn, n'an ; Vj^. H^b;, 
 •iVpj ; whereas those of the form ^VJ^ change (-) and (:) into long (t) 
 as -^ty^ he said, "lOX, HlOX, -IIDX- 
 
 \ This change is founded on the rule given in Part I. p. 79, 
 namelv, that unaccented long vowels cannot form a compound 
 syllable without an accent ; and, as in the instances before us, the 
 vowel (_l) cannot retain the accent, on account of the terminations 
 ^^, 1^ (see p. 116), it follows, that the vowel must be changed into 
 its corresponding (t): thus, 0^73^., iri?5'!* For the same reason is 
 (_) in ""J^P^J, J???!, changed into short (t) when they occur with 1 con- 
 versive : thus, 'P^?J1., i?^?JV
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 119 
 
 Ohs. 7. — ""^"iPf — Verbs, whose third radical is ri, drop this letter 
 before the affixes ''^1, Fl, Jjl, DFI, and ]T^ : as, ri'l3 to cut, ri^B he cut, 
 
 ^nna, rn.3, Jjina, orin:?, irn.? (not ^Firina, nrn.s). The same in the 
 
 derivative verbs ^J!n_33 (not 'iiini:?;), ^ri"lpn, &c. 
 
 8. — The verb |n3 /o (jive, |D3 /<e yru'c, follows the same rule 
 dropping the second 3: as, ''7\T\} I gave, J?ri3, rin3, Dnn^, |rin^ (not 
 *ri^ri3, &c,) ; 3 is likewise dropped before the affixes -13, n3: as, 
 •1303 (for -133^13) jfc gave ; nSKSH (for ^33T^?^) listen ye. 
 
 9. — rili^S — Sometimes with an additional H (Paragogic) : as, 
 nnfP.T (Josh.xiii. 11), nri^D: (2 Kings xiv. 10). 
 
 10. — J^li^S — The first (:) is changed into (-) when the third 
 radical is V : as, J^y^X'* 
 
 11. — iTJp.? — In a few instances with ri : as, ri?TS (Deut. 
 xxxii), riSPD3 (Psalm cxviii), and with ^^* : as, ^'k}'^\ (Ezek. xxxi). 
 
 12. — "Ip? — Some verbs (mostly intr^nsitives") take (-) instead 
 of iyL) for their second vowel in the imperative and future : as, ^li? 
 come near, approacJi, fut. ^IR^ ; 23^^ He doivn, fut. 33^'^ ; espe- 
 cially when the second radical is a guttural, or the third H orV: 
 as, ^X'f ask, ^'?^fw^, ^^i^^', fut. ^i^^'^ ; pVV cry, fut. PV.VN' ; n^i:f 
 5e«i, np^t^; y?Dt^ /;ear, VP^i*' Some take an additional H (Para- 
 gogic), with short (t) or (.) for their first vowel: as, i^"}^,^ for 
 -ib^, nnif? for 2-p, nn^P' for n^'if' ; r]V;p'd, and in pause, nj;D^ for 
 y^P'- Some few take short (t) in the second person: as, ^3?D 
 re/(7?i thou,f. — "^TT}, in pause ''3"]n he dry, /. — -l^in m.p. he ye dry, 
 desolate. 
 
 13. — n3"li5S — n is sometimes dropped, and the vowel placed 
 under the final i : as, |5<'!}P call ye, \VJPP hear ye, (instead '"'3X^p, 
 njyp"^'). So likewise the third person p.f. fut. V)}}7\ for nj\^riri they 
 shall be. 
 
 * In a few instances we find the third person plural m. with N ; 
 as, S-13?n they went (Josh, x.), KUX they ivere willing ; for •137n 
 
 ■nx-
 
 120 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Ohs. 14. — 1'P?{<1— Sometimes with an additional H ; as, fT^P^'? I 
 icill keep, '^^'^^ I will send; for '^'^'i'^, ^7^^«• So likewise with 
 some of the other persons: as, n^'''n^ let him hasten, for t^'HJ ; "^C?^^ 
 for rhf^- 
 
 15. —np?"., n pen — Sometimes with \ (Paragogic): as, l-IV^F^' 
 
 I-ij;^^: for -lypc'n, -lypp^v* 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 16.— Tnf. "ipsn— Or with (_) : as, Vosn- (Lev. vii. 18.) 
 When the ^ is preceded by the prefixes ?, 3, it is sometimes 
 omitted, and its vowel-point is placed under those letters : as, ^PiJ5 
 for flPJjn? (Lam. ii.) nijy^ for Dliyn^ (Ex. x). The same in Hiphil, 
 T^fh for VV'^'rh- 
 
 17. — Part, 'li^?? — With (t) to distinguish it from the third 
 person m. of the past, which has always (-) ; except in pause, when 
 the distinction is lost. But the feminine participle ^^i^?? is distin- 
 guished from the third person "T^i^f?? (in pause), by the position of 
 the accent. 
 
 Obs. — This participle indicates that the action is in progress, 
 but the passive participle of Kal indicates that the action is com- 
 pleted ; thus — 
 
 "iJipi IJ^^n the gate is shuttincj. 
 -|13D -lyi^'n the (jate is shut. 
 
 18. — "lp?3 — In a few instances with 1: as, "^isnj (Est. 
 ix. l.)^1»3 (Gen.xviii. 27.) 
 
 19. — Imp. "^i^sn — The accent is sometimes moved back to 
 the penultimate, which circumstance necessarily produces a change 
 in the vowel from lonff to short : as, "'X^'^j "^W^ °^ "^W^' (See 
 Part I. p. 81.) 
 
 20. — "'P.2X — See the preceding remark. The ^< has some- 
 
 * Seldom with the second person /. : as, ppS"!!!!, V^%}^ (Ruth) 
 
 for 'pain, vvn-
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 121 
 
 times (.) : as, ^3^'^ (Gon. xxi. 24.) t^pSN* ; and with an additional 
 n: as, n9W(Gcn.xix.20). 
 
 Ohs. 21. — '^\?.^\ — With convcrsive 1 sometimes with (-) : as, 
 ''P|*l (Gen. xxi. 8) ; and with (~) when the accent is on the 'penul- 
 timate : as, ^?,^.'!1 (Gen. xxv. 9). 
 
 22.— nj-lpsn—Sometimes with (-) : as, n^-rn- 
 
 Piel. 
 
 23. — Inf. "Ill's — In some instances with (_L) : as, NSl 
 (Exod. xxi ) 113! (Ps. cxviii). 
 
 24. — "li?.? — Sometimes with (-) : as, ^^^5 he destroyed, espe- 
 cially when the 3rd radical is H, or V, or "i : as, npD' ]ie sent away, 
 y^l he cut off, "l^?^' he broke in pieces ; and sometimes with (•.•) : as, 
 "ill'n or "13"^. he spoke. 
 
 PuciL 
 
 25. — "l|'55 — In a few instances with short (^) instead of (.,): 
 as, n-13 (Ezek. xiv. 4). 
 
 Hip I til. 
 
 26. — Inf. "I''i??n or 1i;i?i1 — and in a few instances with (-) 
 for the last vowel: as, IVpiI (1 Sam. xv). 
 
 27. — Part. Pas. ^i^?^ — or with short (t) instead of (■•.) : as, 
 
 nnti'Q, iTC^o- 
 
 28. — Fut. T"!??^ — instead of T'IP^l'^, the H being omitted, 
 and its vowel placed under the prefixes. In a few instances we find 
 the n retained: as, V^P'in^. (Ps. cxvi.) Md^. (Is. Hi.) instead VW, 
 
 29. — I"!??!::— Sometimes with (-) : as, nn:?!:, and sometimes 
 with (..) : as, H"!?;: ; especially with conversive 1 : as, ?1?*1* 
 
 HopliiU. 
 
 30. — Past "I|?Sn or "l^sri — with short (t) through the whole 
 branch, unless when followed by (t:) in which case the first {^) be- 
 comes long : as, 3nnn, n?3yn, ™yp, fut. "i»y>>*, &c.
 
 122 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Obs.Sl.—Part. IpQH or Ipsn— The same {Past) '^y.P^ or 
 '^']\^^r\, &c. (Fiit.) 1p.?N or np.?5<, &c. 
 
 32. — "Iparin*— or with (-) for the last vowel : as, pr.nrin 
 he strengtliened himself, appeared firm, or he took courage. This 
 derivative verb is formed by adding Hill to the derivative verb Pi'el, 
 the punctuation of which has already been explained : observe, 
 however, — -^ \j) 
 
 1st. When the first radical is ^ or D these letters exchangpe 
 place with H : thus, nari^H he praised or glorified himself, (for 
 n5L''j;in); -inripn he hid himself (for nripj^ii). 
 
 2nd. When the first radical is V, the T\ is changed into t3, and 
 transposed as before: thus, \>'^}^'^V' he justified himself (for p'^.V^H). 
 
 3rd. In a few instances we find the H omitted : as, "'H^'? (Lev. 
 xiv.) for inpj;ip ; i<m\ (Lev. xxi.) for i<1pW\- 
 
 Verbs whose Roots contaiii one of the Gutturals. 
 
 Verbs of this description differ in some respect 
 from the model *lp3, as will be explained presently. 
 
 I. First Radical, y, H, H, X* 
 
 125. When the first radical happens to be either 
 of these letters it receives -: or •••: (and in Hophal t.) in 
 every instance where ihejirst radical of "fp3, or of any 
 other perfect verb, would receive Sli*va (:) — 
 
 * The passive of this form is 7ysr>C (Hothpael) : as, •I'^psnC ^ 
 (Num. i. 47.) 'Theij were not caused to he mimhered,^ i. e. they 
 were not caused (ordered) to muster themselves. This form is, 
 however, very seldom used.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 123 
 
 Thus, ib^l to stand, P|bi< to gat/wr, have their Inf. 
 cons, and Imp. nb^, ^DS* (not nb^, tlDJ;}),— Hilb^^ 
 
 (not nraj;). 
 
 Obs. 1. — In such cases, the scrvilcs preceding these letters take 
 the corresponding short vowels for their vowel-points : as, ^0X3 /« 
 fjatherimj, fl'DS^, &c.— ibp /„ standing, itoy)., &c. (not ^ibif?, lbV3). 
 And hence their futures will be* — 
 
 njsbsn -ispsn fibxj &c. fibJ^.i fspxri cibxri ?ibxjst 
 mnby.p -npyri nbyj &c. nby.;. n.pjn ibyn nbyx 
 
 The same in Niphal: as, ^IPSJ /^g was gathered, i^????., "''^P?^., &c. — 
 
 nny:^, n-jrplj, -npf?., ^riw^.,, '^I'^E' &c. And in Hiphil— Inf. 
 '^'mi}-. Imp. n^pyn or i»y_n, Fut. n^PV^i^, i^py^p, 'TPJ^n, &c. Ho- 
 
 pluil — Inf. n»^n, past tense, 1»V:P' ^W.^^ '^WM^ &c. Fut. 1pJ?X, 
 
 noyn, nofn, njoyn, <s:c. 
 
 2, — Piel, Pucil, and Hithpael are conjugated regularly, like 
 the similar derivative verbs of "ipS* 
 
 3. — The dagesh, which these letters do not admit, is compen- 
 
 * In all instances marked thus *, the verb 1p3 would receive two 
 sh'vas : as, "'IPfri, ''"'Pt'^, •1"'i??^i'j &c., the second of which is initial. 
 Now, if the semi-vowels which are in their nature substitutes for sh'va 
 initial (Part I. p. 23) were to be retained, two initial sh'vas would 
 necessarily come together: as, ''PP^.J;! or ''PP^^ri, which is contrary 
 to the genius of the language ; the semi-vowel is therefore changed 
 into a short vowel. Sometimes, however, the semi-vowel is retained, 
 and the second sh'va changed into a vowel: as, -l^nsri ge shall 
 love. Some verbs retain simple sh'va notwithstanding the guttural : 
 as from ibn to desire, "ibn;:, ibgri; in[^3, &c., and from "ipn to 
 ivant, "IPD.), -Ilpri-" Especially the verbs ^^'^ to he, '"'''n to live : as, 
 
 n;;n^, n:nn,__n?nK, .Tnri, &c, 
 -j- Or, ^ppi<iri-
 
 124 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 sated by lengthening the vowel of the prefix. Thus, ^DX.O from 
 (lathering, instead of ^bXD (compare "'p^P). *lDXn to be gathered, 
 ^P^^ / shall he gathered, ^'?i}'!. he shall be gathered, &c. (compare 
 ipQri, ni;5Qs, &c). 
 
 The last rule is equally applicable to verbs whose first radical is 
 (1) : as, ^"IT to jmrsue, ^^"1^ from pursuing, ^"I"!^ / shall be 
 jyurstied. 
 
 II. Second Radical, y, il, H, ^{. 
 
 12G. When the second radical happens to be 
 either of these letters, then the infinitive follows the 
 general rule : as, ihS to choose, *^T\'2'^ m choosing, 
 in^?, <Scc. But the imperative and future take (-) 
 instead of (_) : as, ^H!! choose thou, m., Fut. ^Hl^,* 
 
 Further, the guttural takes (-:) whenever the second 
 radical (p) of 1p^ ^\•ould receive (:) ; as, ^I^^S choose 
 
 thou, ^ins, &c. Past H'ln^, nns- Fut. ''in^ri, 
 ^nn^ri, ^iny.-— Niphdi, n^n^i, n™. imp. '^inan, 
 
 noan- Fut. "^IDS^, ^in^i:!',' ^^01'- Thus likewise 
 pi^T to cry, to call aloud. Imp. pJ^T, ^p^T— nj;3 /ze Z'wrw^ 
 
 In P?'e/, Ptidl, and Hithpael, the dagesh (which these letters and 
 the letter "l will not admit), is mostly compensated by lengthening 
 the vowel of the first radical f : as, "1^3 to kindle, set on fire, (for 
 
 * A few verbs of this description retain (l_) : as, dVt??, DHJ^, 
 
 t There are, however, some verbs where the dagesh is not com- 
 pensated : as, |*W he vexed, Qn3 he comforted, he consoled, &c.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 125 
 
 1J?3). Thus, likewise, ^n3 to bless.— Fikl, Inf. ^13 (for ^15). 
 Part. act. n^P, n^nnp ri^nnp, &c. Part. pass. V?^, &c. Imp. 
 ^1?, '?")? &c. Put. -q"?.?*?, V.'^^, &c. Past tense, ^J;!?-!?, Ml?, &c. 
 PuAL, Inf. "qia (for "^'"13) to be blessed; Part. '^I'S, &'c. Past tense, 
 
 ^rip.3, n?i3, &c,, Fut. -^ibs;, -^ibj^, &c. IIitupael, "^l^nn, Part. 
 ^-isnp, &c. 
 
 III. r////Y/ Radical, n or y. 
 
 127. When the third radical happens to be one of 
 these letters, an additional (-) denominated r\^)^^ nHQ 
 Pathali Furtivum, is added to them whenever they 
 terminate a word, and are preceded by the vowels (1) 
 
 0), ("-), or(-): as, j;i^^ to /iear,VP^^ ifi hearing, 
 Vbp^, Sec. Part. act. VP^"", /• ^]l^^ ; Part. pass. 
 V3f2^- NiPHAL, VW'^ (abridged VW^) t(^ ^e heard; 
 Fut. y»^'^-t Hi PHIL, ^pp^n or VW^ ; Imp. V^^T}, 
 &c. njy^i^ri, &c. Part. V!'^^'^, &c. Past tense, y.W''^ 
 &c., t^VpP^ ; Put. T^P^, &c. myo^i?!, cS:c. 
 
 The (:) of the second person feminine, and (_1) of the imperative 
 and future, and (..) of the other parts of the verb, are changed into 
 (-) : as, ^VW (for 7}Vp^) ■ 'S^V.^p. (for 7}V^f^) ; V^f, njVP^ (for 
 VW, r^)Vpf) ; V»^'^ (for yb'^'i?). NiPHAL, Imp. y»^'n (for VPy'n). 
 Pi EL, W^' (for VW) &c. 
 
 * (t) is sometimes omitted : as, ViT^ for VS>y 
 f Or with (••) : as, y^y'^« / shcdl or w'?7/ swear, J??V*'^, &c. 
 :|: Or abridged y»L*'ri for V^pp'ri—no^l for n>p5! //c shall cause 
 to trust, inspire confidence.
 
 .C I 
 
 .1^ 
 
 
 ^y ^>^ /^^ //^. ^1^ : -^ 
 
 126 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 S'^tofi^o^ ^B'^pn DDnx ''fn»7 :npi n^^n '^m^? 
 
 /•^ , T : T J V •.• ^ T ,^ "V T V '^ •• • , _• . 
 
 i,ie^f^ 
 
 C-^ A.'.rrp 
 
 
 *>-i:3y. '^m ^m ''2^ : "IiT^ 'nsn Biis:^'? ^1^7 : ''7?n 
 niin linx i^Sd >^in : "S^'n^J^a nr^mm? ^'r\^ 
 
 r\nt:h^) "'^T^il * ¥^r! ^^^^ * ^^^^ ''^1^ '^^^^ 
 -;^^.. ^"T^^*^ ^*^ * J^^« "1^^ B3'^ni:i!i n^-i^^ : nx::Dn B3^i!i 
 ^5<^^!' y^^ :/Bn''n7N7 "JiK^y^ ^m "Brinj;n 7^5 
 Dnx y'^o^'^i Dj;n-n« ='7npn : nnt^ °di^-td':51 ''orn 
 
 1 lb^ to learn, Pi. n^V to teach. 2 ph. 3 Righteousness. ^ flt^^ 
 language. ■'' "Hl?.^^ The inhabitants of the world. ^ p^-^ j-g speak. 
 8 Hebrew. » Chaiaeans. i^ To do. 11 Straight, right. 12 Before. 
 ^^ Cause me to understand. We shall use this sign to indicate 
 that the letter over which it is placed is Paragogic ; in*flhat the 
 verb after which it is placed is to be understood in a converted 
 time. IJ niVP'-^ 1'* yt:*? to transgress. 1*' In order. 
 
 ^'' y^2 to transgress. 
 1^ They did. i^^'if to s^''5eak. 20 |Ti|- 
 22 
 
 1" nnyin- 
 
 21 This day, to-day. 
 
 Hi'p. to cause to come together, to assemble. 23 -p^ i^^x. 24 •rpQ. 
 to reign, in //«p. to cause to reign, to appoint any one as king, Hof. 
 to be appointed king. -•'' ?ti'D to rule, govern. 
 
 ^r-— r^^ ^Zz f^z^J.^/tZ'^ ^^i.-gr'^J C-^^^^*^ '^■^^.j^C^
 
 ./- 
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 127 
 
 2fi DN^ to despise. -'' P"IN a lord. -*^ Kingdom, realm. ^ 
 
 : B'^j^^tf'i ^nmj dtoh hi^ :np3 'n^::.^ ^m\ ^ipn^^^i^^ir^ 
 : BH^n^D '"npyr y2:tJ^n rmj; yc^'^ t^7 '*Tj^"n33 7ip .'^-V 
 
 ;«B3'>niiya rn : "n'?sy D'^ii^ '^t^^i ^'^ n^^D ^^y^t^ 
 ^^^^ " /:> '•• +^.,^- •^...^.-.^•- ^= •••• ^=-- .^ 
 
 yn_n ni2r>;.^ "n^^n^l b^k'i ''^I'^^iyn en'^nii^-n^^i 
 
 1 Justly, right. - To give. ■' Behold. ■* How. ■' Pharaoh. ^ ri".?- 
 ^ Ease, quietness. ^ A harp. ^ Again, anymore. ^^ A cry, lament- 
 ation. 1 ' Before, formerly. ^^ Jufjgmejit. ^-^ "lb^2 P«. to bx-ing joyful 
 tidings. ^^ Peace. ^'^ What is heard, a i-eport. '^ A messenger. 
 1" Pu. was sent. i^py gin. i» ibD to sell, IIP? he was sold, 
 -isnipn he sold himself, or offered himself for sale. 20 yjia a 
 transgression. -'But. -"^ Ahah. -•' "iby^ to pass, "i^^^n ho made 
 
 J^^' 
 
 A >« 

 
 ^ .- ^^^ .^ . ^,, -- ^^y 
 
 128 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 - nx ^' "nin^ =»^nw n'pi^ : ^'h Das* D'^n'i^ : '^m ^^^ ni^ 
 n^tjt-nx : ^N'lb^: ':i5'n« ^^^.^n ^^ nJD : inK* 'ri'in^ n-in 
 
 / 
 
 px| ^^^I'lanxsn^ : ^nii^ "^te ^nj;.^. Ti-niD : ^; c^^ ^ 
 ^^n^ianni : ^nli?^^ itnsnn ;=^p« '^fi'^N^ 'nnan'^ 
 
 2-1 D'yi) to be vexed, ID'-ypn'? Hij). to make him vexed. ^r. n>1S An 
 
 enemy. 2g n^y-;, 2; nnpt^- , ,^f_ And no purchaser. 29 Blessed {hal). 
 30 nbj? to stand . 31 T^' 'bless'.' 32 tJ^S- 33 At all times. 34 Thus. 35 Good 
 of eye, i. e. one that is kind, generous. '^^ Jael. 37 Xhe work of. 38fjg 
 that blesses himself. 39 Truth. ■!« 2^;^ /^^ Vl^ seed, offspring. 
 
 2nd CoxjuGATiox. 
 
 128. The second Conjugation comprehends all 
 verbs whose first radical is ^ : as, ^^^ to approach, 
 Inf. cons, m} or T^m- 
 
 The i is dropped in every situation where the first radical 
 onpS (or of any other perfect verb) receives (:)*, the defect 
 being indicated by clagesh in the 2nd radical, whenever it 
 
 * Except the persons which receive the affixes 1^1, DJ^I, and some in 
 
 />L^ ./J^^^ . i/V. oV-' -'2'^* ^7 1^'i ' 
 
 :i:'. t^.^Z^-^y-^'^^ ^-^>^;^ /v^-*,.-^^ .2^.^ /^ 
 
 •'*^*. /<.«-;
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 129 
 
 is preceded by a servile having- a vowel : as, ^'^ ibr t^*J^ 
 (compare npfi); Vt^ for m'M (compare IpS^). But in 
 every sitiiatioii where the first rachcal of "IpS has a vowel, 
 the J is retained, and the verb is inflected hke HpS : as, C'JJ, 
 '^P}\yyi (compare '^m.DS). 
 
 Hence we have ////. cons, {of Kal), H^JS* i>i approaching, 
 
 Lnp. m or D'l't, 'p:^t, ^trii, np;^. Future, m^, ti;m, 
 
 NipJutl. 
 Part. ^p_ (for m)^]. Past tense, '^mt'^ (for ""nt^^^J). 
 
 Hiphil. 
 Inf. and Imp. ^'^m,'^^n (for m':!^^, &c.) Part. act. ti'-'^iVJ. 
 Part. Pa.^. t'p. Past tense, mp^T}. Put. ^''^^, &c. 
 
 Hophdl. 
 Inf. mf} (for t^:iin ). Past tense, mmf}. Put. m^. Sec, 
 
 * Some verbs of this conjugation retain the 3 in the Inf. Con.'-:., 
 and in the Iwp. : as, V^J to fall, ^3??, Vd33 ^3?^, Vs^P- Imp. Vs^, 
 
 •i"??: ;_but F«/. hBr\, hhi^- 
 
 Some few retain 3 likewise in the future : as, "1^*5 ^o keep, "i^'^l or 
 >'ifV, especially when the second radical happens to be a guttural : as, 
 P^^\ he shall cry, ^jIV. he shall be pleasant, agreeable : and in 
 Hiphil ^^n^n he has eaused to inherit, ^T>'?n^n, &-c., fut. ^V^^, 
 
 -j- Hence with ^pO, '^^•. with paragogic H, nC'^- 
 I Or with (l) ^^^5, YC^i See.
 
 130 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 All the other parts of the verb are conjugated like *|h3 : — 
 thus, Past tense of Kal, '>P]m:^, my:i, &c. Part. act. m}. 
 
 Part. pas. tJ^^^J, &c //?/. Imp. and Fut. of Niphal, CJ^^BH, 
 
 K'J-)^, &c. And so likewise the whole of Piel, Pual, and 
 
 HiTHPAiL: as, K^5i, m), mm. 
 
 129. The verb jH^ to give, drops, in some instances, the 
 second, and in others the first i : — thus. Inf. cons, jfl^ or T\p\ 
 for niln. ]h33 or flH^ in giving, HHa &c. Imp. "^P), ''in, 
 &c. Fut. \m, inn, &c. (for [n:;^, &c. Past tense, mn^, 
 fin5 (for ^flDfli, &c.) Niphal," Inf. [njri or pn|n. Imp. 
 
 jnjn. r^/^. I'nj^. Part.]ny p«^^, jn?, "•nn?, &c. 
 
 130. The verb np7 to take, is conjugated in the same 
 manner : thus. Inf. cons, nnp to take, nHD^ in taking, 
 
 nriph. Sec. Imp. np_ or nph— '^np or ^npS, &c. Fut, np_^, 
 
 npri (for nph^). Past tense, '^i^inpS. Niphal, Hp^H. 
 Pa^i tense, '^nflj^^ or '^J^Hp^l, &c. 
 
 3rd Conjugation. 
 
 131. The third Conjugation comprehends all verbs 
 having 5^ for their first radical : as, bbiji to eat, tjDNI 
 to gathe7\ assemble. 
 
 This letter (^\ being a guttural, will of course, follow the 
 rules laid down in (Art. 125), that is, it will receive one of the 
 semivowels where the first radical of 1p3 receives (:), and the 
 dagesh, which it does not admit, will be compensated by 
 lengthening the vowel of the prefix.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 131 
 
 132. In the first }:)erson future of Kal, the ^K) is either re- 
 jected or retained. In the first case, the prefixes, J, T\, \ 5<, 
 receive (-) : as, h^^ (for SbN*^)* / icill or shall eat. h^i^P]f 
 w^^P\, 7^i^'^, 75^^5) ^'c. In the second case, the prefixes 
 i, n, \ 5»{, receive ( •■) : as, t|b5<^ T loill gather, t]bxf), 
 ''SpXfl t> f^b.J^;, ?)bS*|- (See Obs. 1.' Art. 125.) 
 
 Obs Tlie verbs ll^^} to be lost, to perish, TO.'i^ to he 
 
 willing, to consent, ^jy^ to say, T\h'^ to bake, form their 
 future hke SbiS*: thus, ink, nnX^Fi ; If^k, "iDwS*^ ; n^k, 
 n!l^^/^ ; nSk, r\^^P\, cSc. But the verbs nhX to love, This* 
 
 V ■ T T 
 
 to seize, to lay hold of, 1^5^ to treasure up, P|D^? to gather, 
 collect, S^'C, retain mostly the X and the (•.), though they some- 
 times reject it, and take ('jS) oi" (•••) : as, I^DX^ or JlSpk 
 (Micah vii.) SjiDX''. or irjDi^ (2 Sam. vi.) :irik or :nn^ 1 uill 
 love, nriiS*p, :nri5:?^ &c. ]m, rnxn or in^PS. Some take (..); 
 as, 7T!^ to go aicay, Fut. 7?^, 7Tip, &c. — ihi^ to tarry, Fut. 
 
 in^, nnri.— nh^ji to come, Fut. r\r\m, nnx.^. or ^n^^^ 
 
 In every othei' respect, these verbs are conjugated hke those 
 of the first conjugation. 
 
 * 
 
 The fr' is frequently rejected in the other persons : as, THID 
 (2 Sam. XX.) for rnxn : npri (o Sam. xix.) for msn ; X?in 
 (Prov. i.) for n^ND; and H^? (Job xxxii.) for m^?, ^n?NJ (Ezek. 
 xxvii.) "TlS^^V But these ought rather to be considered as 
 anomalies. 
 
 ■f In pause, sometimes with (..) — 75*^^^, ^"^^^j "lOX'n- 
 
 :j: See note p. 122. 
 
 K
 
 132 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 I'lvcrcise. 
 
 ,> - - :^--^" --■■ -j^ ^^■•- -.Ux,/.<f. 
 
 J 4 . . - - . - I ...... -. T •• _t_ t;- tI;-'- <tt t 
 
 - '^nj^? : "7rtni "pjdv ^^;i '"^nxi nn^i ^nx*? 
 ''':i!i ^'n^-ifD nSiSi 'h twin °n22&^^i :="pn2,.'^i|n3 
 
 =^Bj;<?5^ i^i^ni np>v^ =^n^D ^«D^D nsm "ooSmi 
 nti^N* n^'xn : ^h"^ '"y^"^ rm n^ni : n»^^2^n 
 
 ..- -; T • T T T T ■ T ; •* • : T ; T T - 
 
 < ^ 
 
 ^ t^'J3 to approacl;, to draw near, ^p^^ to kiss. ^^ And he called. 
 •^ David. ^ y.^S to meet, to slay. - '' A people. ' i^n^y a maid, 
 servant. ^^./.J a child, ^ Leah. ^•'Aftervi^ards. ^^ Joseph. ^^ Rachel. 
 !■' At the time.)/!-* Food, meal, i-'' Hither. ^''^bStoeat. ^7 gread. 
 li^ pbtp to dip. '^ riQ a morsel, crumb. -''Vinegar. -^ Gamejj^'enison.^/ 
 2-'lbX to bind. 23 Fetters, chains. 24 ^sj to f^n. 25 n$n to dream. 
 2« A ladder. 2; 2^3 to stand. 28 yjj jq to^ch, reach. 29,g^^jj^ 
 '""* |riJ to give. '^^ With me. '^2 ^ ixt^. ^^ Fruit. '^'^ A garden. 
 •^•' ^I.J? the middle. ^Vl})'
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 133 
 
 n^tos* n.sTH ntr^n n^xfii : n^^sn Sk °|n^i n^m 
 
 T : T - T • T - - * V I •. • - T 
 
 ' T ; T ; T - • T -; r ; •.•••: . v : t 
 
 jri| i\s: "inn : ^'piJ!!^ "inDi *"n^>!l '^^ l^nj 
 Dm'? "i^hi /SjS pr^^*'^ pnr'^i^y '"^3'? ; "D'^^d 
 
 «'>jy '^'S'^sn^ "Dn^p "'^Di^ : i'^^sd d*>^3« npsy 
 
 • 'r • " ; T : I - : T t t • • ^ - ; 't ; • 
 
 • T -; • - T I V T • • T - T 
 
 •■'' The persons. ^^ Wealth, goods. ^" npjJ to take. "^'^A calf. " Teiulcr. 
 •1'- To-day. ■*■'■ To-morrow. -^^ Vbi to plant. ■^■' Their fruit. ■'" Wives. 
 "*'" Wisdom. -^^"^ Knowledge. ""^ Riches. ''^ Honor. •'"' Straw. 
 ■'■'2 l^y a servant. ''■'^ Bricks. ^"* Make. ^•' HDJ to strike, smite, beat. 
 •'•'' Go. ''^ "'^y to serve, to labor. ''^ The number, quantity. '''■^ The 
 city. '■"' Babel. '^^ T)^V. V'^r to bend or stretch the bow. *'- nr'i^- 
 ''•* To cause to fall, to throw down. ''^ The poor. '"'' The needy. 
 66 Lot. «7 Jonah, ''s Slain. «« Sloth. "« Deep sleep, '"i "pS^J^n to 
 throw one's self down, '-^v night. 
 
 k2
 
 134 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 4tli Conjugation. 
 
 133. The fourth Conjugation comprehends all 
 verbs whose first radical is *■ : as, liy^ to sit, ^^ to go 
 down, pj) to sitc/c. 
 
 The "• is either retained without losing its consonantal sound, 
 as in the preceding examples; or it is quiescent, and the preced- 
 ing vowel lengthened : as, '2^^ I shall or will sit : or it is 
 entirely dropped : as, 2p sit, y*! know ; or it is changed into 1, 
 pronounced or quiescent : as, yTlH to be known, ^^^H to be 
 inhabited ; J^'^'liH he made known, I^^IH he caused to sit, he 
 made or caused to he inhabited. 
 
 Kill. 
 
 The Inf. ahs. is regular ; as, ^^^^ to sit, J^n** to know, 8$c. 
 The Inf. cons, drops ^, and receives T\ ; as, H^^; and with 
 
 the letters », h, 3, 1- m^?, nn^|, ni^^, r\'2m. 
 
 The Participles are regular: as, II^Y, ^5^i^ or T\'2^S\ 
 ^'^'im, ni^l^^V. Part. pas. n^^^, nf\^'\, &c. The Past 
 tense is likewise regular . as, ^^^ he did sit, n;3^\ ''iji5^\ &c. 
 
 * ny'n on account of the guttural, n is sometimes substituted 
 for n : as, nj?l^ (for Wlh) mno (for nnnp- Some few have 
 their Inf. Cons, without either n or n ; as, C'i3''3 in drying, from 
 ^11 ; niD^ from "lb; to laif the foundation. W'h from P\ to 
 sleep, ^v. from N"'J lo fear.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 135 
 
 The Imp. drops mostly the *: as, y^* sit, ''TtJ^ ; ^^p^, 
 
 T -.I" 
 
 The Future follows the Imperative. The letters X r^> \ ^^, 
 receive mostly the vowel (..) or (^—') : as, ^^'^ / ^//a// or icill 
 sit, :ip^fi, "^^^ri or pm I slmll suck, pTt^, ^pyri, p^^^f. 
 
 Niphcil. 
 
 Ill 7^3!), the ^ is changed into 1, which is either pronounced • _^^ 
 or quiescent . Thus, Inf. ^t^^H ("for iS^^H) /a he inhabited, %r-cc^^^ 
 :i^5ri^, nt^'^^nS, &c. The imp. is the same: thus, imT}, 
 
 "ns^^n, ^n^^n, nj!}t:'^n. The Future is n£^'^^, '2mp\, 
 
 • ; T • : T • T ; <•• T • •• T • •• T • 
 
 ''y^lt^^X &c. 
 
 The Participles are itj'ij, HJ^IJ or fin^^lJ, &c. The 
 Pa^i ^e^^e is "2^^, Hl^iJ, "^Dn^i^i^, &c. 
 
 Are regular : as, 1^\ he settled, placed, '2^\ 3;^'lfin§ ; and 
 from n7'' to bring forth, np**^ /ie assisted in bringing forth.\\ 
 
 * Sometimes with an additional ^ : as, H^^' ,s/7, ITl"! descend. 
 In a few instances we find the '' retained in the Imperative : as, p"^] 
 pour out, (Ezek. xxiv. 3.) 
 
 t Sometimes without "' : as, ^"I* for ^1''''. (Gen. xxii.) he 
 will inherit. 
 
 X From H")^ (0 throw, to shoot, we have iTl.*1 Exod. ix. (instead of 
 
 § Some few verbs have 1 instead of '' in Hithp. : as, Vlir^i? lie 
 made himself known. *^'^^X)'^ he confessed. 
 II Hence '^'l^.P a midwife.
 
 136 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Part, ^v^p, nS> he was born; "Ipl^n lie traced liis birth. 
 
 entered his name in the family register. 
 
 HipJiil. 
 In ^^J^Sn, ^ is mostly changed into i: thus, Inf. ^'^tJ^iH to 
 
 cause to sit, ii'^mm, y^mrh—imp. n^in, '^n'^^in— fw«. 
 
 n''^"i^, n'^tJ^in Part. act. :i'>m'0, nn^^iD — Part. pas. 
 
 n^^D, &c Past tense, ri'^mn, Hn'^sj^iH, "^m^in. 
 
 Some, however, retain ^ : as from ^313'' to be good. Hi phi l, 
 
 itp^n or n^'D'H to make good, to do well Imp. ^tQ'T}, "^'^P^D. 
 
 &c Put. TID'^ or n^'t?^^, n'^tp'fl, &c Part. ^''p'D, &c.— 
 
 P«5^ ^e;?^e n'^D'H, Hytp^H, ''i!15t5^n, &c. The same from pj^ 
 /o ^«cA',p''rn he caused to such, '^^'^1''^.— Part, ^"^m, Hp''^^. 
 
 Hophdl. 
 In Sysn, •• is changed into !) ; thus, Inf. im^ — Part. 
 
 n^^n — Past, tense, ^mn, m^mn Put. ^^.m^, &c. 
 
 Obs. — The following verbs supply the omission of ^ by 
 dagesh,t like verbs of the second conjugation: — 
 
 * Some of the modern Grammarians suppose that those which 
 have 1 in Hiphil, had originally 1 for their first radical, as in Arabic : 
 thus, 1^1 ^3« *1"I1 ^ya &c. There is, however, not a single exam- 
 ple in Hebrew of a verb beginning with 1" 
 
 t They are therefore denominated ""S ^"ipn deficient in '•
 
 THE HEBIIEW LANGUAGE. 137 
 
 JV;, Iliphil, J'-Vn he placed ; yV; tu spread out, Hipliil, 
 V'-Vn; P'^*; to pom- out, Fut. (Kal) pV^:^{ ; lV; /o /orm, Fut. >^'i<, 
 n-^: ; nv; to burn, set on fire, Nipha], nv? ; Iliphil n^-Vn*. 
 
 5th Conjugation. 
 
 134. The fifth Conjugation comprehends all verbs 
 whose second radical is 1 oi- *• : as, Dip or D^p to r'l.sc, 
 y\^ to relnru, pSf to unikrstatid, IH or 'y^\ to con- 
 tend, dispute. 
 
 These letters are generally (|Liiesceiit, but sonietimes they 
 are omitted.J 
 
 * To these, some Grammarians add 2^'J to place. Niphal, 3-^3 
 ri?-V> Hiphil, n^Vn fut. 3^->\S: nr Hiphil, n^an he left alone. 
 It is, however, very probable that these are derived from verbs 
 whose first radical is 3. 
 
 -}■ When 1 or "< retain their consonantal sound, as in 3''^^ to hate, 
 yi| to expire, they are conjugated like the perfect verb. Thus, 
 ')il?S^ / hated, 'm^ I expired. Fut. Vl?^, &c. 
 
 J Most of the early grammarians maintained that the second 
 radical of these and similar verbs is ^ ; that T-?? ^''"'5 ^''^. &c. 
 are infinitives of Iliphil, written without H, i. e. for V^y}, ^""ICj 
 &c.; and that ]'3N, ^30, nns, &c. are the futures of Hiphil. 
 But as these verbs have mostly the same signification as those of 
 ?i?, and as the '' is evidently a radical in some parts of the verb, 
 as, ^nira / hare understood, searched, O^^l i'^oji didst contend, 
 I think the moderns are sufficiently justified in considering 
 * as the second radical ; or, which is still more probable, that 
 these verbs were written with either '' or V
 
 138 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Kal. 
 
 The Infinitive absolute has mostly S, though sometimes ^, or 
 *•— for its vowel ; as in the preceding examples. 
 
 The Infinitive cons, has mostly ), more rarely 1 or \ for its 
 vowel : as, 2W^ in returning, y\m, ^iVti'^, l^tTD — HID to 
 die, niD3, ni»|, niD^-nn^ to contend. 
 
 The Imperative and the Passive participle are mostly like 
 the Inf. cons. : thus, D)p,* ''f^)^, ^D^p, n|Dp — Part. pas. 
 D^p,t np^p, ^'>Jp)p,t ni^^p. And from ]% Imp. \% '>;% 
 
 The Future follows the Imperative; and its prefixes 
 i n ^ N*, have long (r) : thus, D^p^ / will rise, n^p^, "^Dlpri, 
 
 &c. And from ]% pn^, t'lnri, '^^^^ri.n 
 
 The ?/iir(/ persons m. Past tense, have either (t) or (■•) or 1 
 for their vowels : thus — 
 
 Dp he rose, H^p/. ^^Pp- ^ind the other persons — 
 
 ■^riDp, riop. ri^p, ^J^p, sripp, ]jjxpp. 
 
 n^ /ie c??erf, nn^ f- ^n^ p. and the other persons — 
 
 '^m, no, fiD, ^^no, DfiD, tno. 
 
 * And with paragogic n : as, n^lp, ny2- But the noun H^? 
 undersfandinff, has the accent on the last syllable. 
 
 t Sometimes with (1.) : as from ^'13 to be ashamed ; Part, ti'ia 
 HK^ia .-i.e. ; and from Ilit: /o ie r/oo(/, niD, nniO, D^niD, &c. 
 
 + We have likewise D''pip- (2 Kings xvi. 7.) 
 
 11 According to the early grammarians, the future would be 
 |-12N, 1-nri, which is, however, not used. Past tense, ""^P,? or
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 139 
 
 tJ>i2 he icas ashamed, Tl^^f. )li^2 p. and the other persons 
 
 ''i^tra, nt^3, nr^3, ^Jt^s, Qm:n,* t^^3. 
 
 The Active Participle is the same as the third person m. : 
 thus, Dj^ one that rises, Hpf^f, S'^pj^, nii}j^ — HD o?ze that is 
 dead, HnO, D'^Ht?, nin» — •tJ'i!l o«e ^//a« feels ashamed, 
 
 n^i3, D-'t^^'is, nitrn. 
 ■'''"-''' 
 
 The Infinitive is dijTin, pSH, and with D, W^l, 13, Dlpn^, 
 
 Dipni, Dipn^, sipnD. 
 
 The Imperative is the same, DipH, ^JbipH, ^DipH, nj^ipn. 
 The Future is Dlp^, Dipi!^, ''ttipFl. 
 The Participles, Dipl &c., ]b|, ^inX B'^ii!l3, fiiiU-^. 
 The Past tense is Dipj, H^ipJ, ^DipJ ''fliD^pJ 
 
 niDipJ, &c. 
 
 Piel and Piidl. 
 
 7^.3 and 7j^S double the last radical. Thus, Inf. 
 D^ipj: ^0 n/i^c up, re-establisJi. — Imp. the same. — Fut. 
 
 * With short t? because 0^?) and \^ have the accent. (See Part I. 
 p. 79.) 
 
 -j- The participle feminine has the accent on the last syllable, 
 and is thus distinguished from the third person f. past, which has 
 always the accent on the penidtimate. 
 
 X Or like the perfect verb : thus, D*i? to establish, confirm, per- 
 Jorm, D*i7 he established, performed ; especially in Rabbinical 
 Hebrew, *np?i?, ri^-'P, &c.
 
 140 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 mp^-—Part. act. D»ip^, ikc.—Part. pas. D^iip^, 
 8ic. — Past tense, Qipip, HG^ip, ^mp — '^^jyip, 
 
 Pual is conjugated in the same manner, with this difference, 
 that it takes (-) where Piei has (..): thus, Inf. WOSp — Fut. 
 njyip^.—Past tense, UJ2)p, &c.* The other parts of Pudl 
 are hke Piel, and can only be distinguished by the context. 
 
 Hip/ill. 
 Inf. [2pT] or D^pH to raise, to cause to stand, establish, 
 
 D^pna, n'prih, scc— imp. npn, ''P^pO' ^-^^pO' ^PpJ^-— 
 
 Fut. b'^p^, D'^pF), ''^''p^t, &c Part. act. D'^pD, H^'^pD, 
 
 Sect— Part. pas. Dp^S, HOTD, kc.—Past tense D^'pH^, 
 
 Htt^'pn, 5)m':)n-''nio^pn, nwn, kc, or '^nopn, 
 mtjn, &c. 
 
 Hophcil. 
 
 Hophal takes 1 for the first radical : thus. Inf. Cp^H — Fut. 
 Upm, &c Part, ap^n, kc.—Past tense, Dp^H, n^p^H, 
 
 ^Dp^n-'^riDpjn, ri-ppjin, &c. 
 
 * Participle, D>?ip, H^^ip, D^D^Ip, niooip- 
 
 •f Or with (..): as, 1?i? / will frustrate, anmil, "l?^^; or with (-), 
 when the third radical is a guttural : as, Vl^ I will ill-treat, cause 
 evil. 
 
 + Or with (..) : as, 1??P ; and with (-) : as, Vl^- 
 
 § Or with (-) : as, i?n, yin-
 
 L 
 
 ^ ./ ^ THE HEBREW LA\GUAGE. 141 
 
 FlitJqmcl. ' ' ^ ' ' : » 
 
 Hithpael is formed by adding its characteristic letters to 
 Piel : thus, D^ipflH he aroused himself ^ opposed himself; 
 
 Imp. wpnn, 'mptyr\, &c. 
 
 E.rercise, ^./^.is, .^ 2S^.^ - 
 
 'S:d^^ k^ nj:x5i ; =';>d.s* — i^t^*^ ^jit 'it ^ j^u^. 
 Dy^ nin t-^jnvf ^3n« |bpn sj^n.s tJ^^Dj^ mn^?^-^- - 
 
 n^ : njD nriD nn D^ip : d^o^'DD hit ^^i^ : 
 in?. kS : "fj^y ni^ ^iDhx ; ':'??"n5 ' ^§jf Sy_ ^1^1 
 
 I 
 
 Vc) ^' : 
 
 1 To go down, to descend. - To purcliase food. ^ Root, /2J to be 
 able. * t^'N"l head, top. ^ HVi? the end, extremity. ^ '^^\ to sit. 
 7 Nut. 8 nj)-ixrf) the depth. '-' Dust. 'o Vnj to know. J' The 
 grave. ^- To return. '•' '\>\ to go. ^^ "l.?.^ a child. '^ T] tender, 
 young. ^"^ The living. -. 
 
 Si'*.^*- 
 
 ^- .:*^/<t77y^. -^.^w^y,^,,_.^, /.v .i^ ^. -..'"?^ 
 
 //^ 
 
 ^'- /^.V^ /. 4^/. .'^
 
 142 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 -::t; tt- '^-t'- 't '^•;t' " t«t 
 
 j;ni^ : ^lijis^ D^m "|n| *]\ni n^<T■S|■n^? ^rii^'^ 
 '^nxn^s : T\):^y^ w-rs'^ ^"^^^ "nh : *3i ''^^n:*iDj^ 
 
 "l^^?2^ '^(?^ "^P*?^ T^* '^{J • "^ll^l ''HD ^5*^5^? • '^''p^? 
 ^Diw^ :='°*i!ii^^ DSJ'i ni^^ "^n^i^Dn nsj'w^^ ; rS^ ^'>y':'n 
 
 T •• I XV T ; T • T V -;i- I • T • • T 
 
 ;^ ^ ^ ^ -^XD^n ^ri&n n,^n ; n^o/n <>j:2 ^^ej^-hn j nin^ Dy-n.^ 
 
 ^- X ; T X - XX "It 
 
 IT ni» to die. 18 Truly. ^9 Came. 2° To any one. 21 Mordecai. 
 22 Judgment. 23 Root, P^ to understand. 24 n3-inx truth. 25 jyiul- 
 titude. 26 ^ vision. 27 To stand. 28 Died. 29 J-1? to Jodge, remain 
 during night. ^° "i^l'^ to bury. ^^ The anointed. '^" Evil. ^^ The 
 wicked. ^* Harvest. ■''^ To-morrow. ^^ Parents. ^7 Old age. 
 38 n?^»0 kingdom. ^g PoQ,.^ indigent. "^o A prophet. ■*! New. 
 42 A rock. 43 "p^-i foot. 
 
 6th Conjugation. 
 r28. The sixth Conjugation comprehends all 
 
 ^ftr.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 143 
 
 verbs whose third radical is J< : as, N^^ tojiiid, Nhp 
 to call. 
 
 They are thus conjugated : — 
 
 KaL 
 
 Inf. ^^V9, ^<!^D* to find, NVm in finding, mi^h, &c.— 
 Imp. tS*^p, \SVp, ^XV^> n|S*m-t-F</^. J>i^p^, X^l2Pi, 
 *'{\*V^'^' ^c.—Part. act. N*^ia H.S^ViD or HN^i^, D\SViO, 
 
 Pf«/ tense, X^^DJ, ns*^», ^N*^tt- '^n>?^;t5, r\^)i^, n«^c^, &c. 
 
 Niphdl. 
 
 Inf. and Imp. «>^^^, &cc.—Fut. ^s*^^^, Scc.—Pari. N*^^|, 
 Sec—Fast tense, ^$pj, Hw^^pJ, &c., ''flN^^DI, ^i^^;l^^^, 
 
 * Sometimes with n : as, NlfJ ;o c«//, nxnp ; N^O ;« 6e fidl, OwS^p- 
 
 t n is sometimes omitted: as, I^VP" 
 
 X Some verbs (chiefly intransifives) have (..) instead of (t) for 
 the second radical: as. i<!?9 he ivas full, nx'po, -IX^O—^nxl??;, ris^a, 
 '^^^^x'^) &c. In such cases, the participle active of Kal has the same 
 form as the third person m. past. Thus, t^/!? — whence ^^/?9' 
 0^^?P, ^1^!?P' Thus likewise ^"Q^ he is unclean, or one that is 
 unclean, n«?pp, D''K^ip, nii^Jpp — SOy he is thirsty, or one that is 
 
 thirst?/, nspy, D^K»y, ni.sov-
 
 144 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Piel. 
 
 Inf. and Imp. ^^f2.—FuL N*^^|^, 8^c.—ParL act. i^%fpp, 
 Sec- Tart. pas. N^,>pp, kc.—Fast tense, N5^2p, &c. 
 
 Fadl. 
 Inf. ;i^^J:}.—Fut. i^)im, kc.—Part. mf2. Sec— Past tense 
 
 m^, scc-m^^f^, r\^^f2, n^^^D, &c. 
 
 Hiph'U. 
 
 Inf. ^''V^n.— /w7>. ^"ppn. S^c.—Fut.^'^^m, kc-Pan. 
 act. H'^'^W.—Pnrt. pas. X^*DD, kc.—Past tense, t^^^OH, 
 
 Hophcil. 
 
 ^<!^to^ or }i{'Jftoil in the same manner as ^rDSn or 'iDSh. 
 
 Hithpa'el, 
 
 N^Dnn, &c. likenjpann. 
 
 7th Conjugation. 
 13G. The Seventh Conjugation comprehends all
 
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 145 
 
 verbs whose third radical is H without, ?)iappi/i,* 
 (Part I. p. 21) ; as, n7| to reveal, Hb^ ^o wcy;;. 
 
 The letter is changed nito T\ or *•, or it is omitted. 
 
 Kat. 
 
 Inf. abs. rh^ to reveal.f—hif. cons. T\h^, nb^S, T\h)^, 
 
 rh^\,SiC.- Part act. nh% n^iil§, ^'>h%r\Sh)^-— Part. pas. 
 
 * Verbs liaving n (with mappik) for tlic third radical, are conju- 
 gated like perfect verbs: thus, ''^^'^i I was high, (not Tl''?|), "^^l* 
 Part, nin^, n^'^^njl• 7^?;;. n33^? (the n retaining the mappik in all 
 parts of the verb wherein it forms the last letter). 
 
 t In a few instances with i : as, l^i^ to purchase (2 Sam. xxiv. 24), 
 instead of nb^ ; Vl''^ lo do (Gen. xxxi. 38), for nibj?^- 
 
 ;| The prefixes |, ri, '' have mostly (-) or (...) when the first radical 
 is a guttural: as, n^l?p thou shalt ascend, H^.^!, H^W ; r\^J}^ ihou 
 shall encamp, '^)I}^ Ihou shalt see. The H is sometimes dropped : 
 a.s, ^y; he shall ascend (for T\)^^) ; b*!;; he shall do (for nby^) ; espe- 
 cially with conversive (1): as, 7J?!:^ '«??(? /?e ascended; ^'Vp. and he 
 did; ]p}). and tve turned. And when the second radical happens to 
 be either of the letters n, p, 3, 3, D, 1, 3, both receive ( : ) : as, Y?]\ 
 and he captured, 'il?.11 and he wept. 
 
 % Instead ^\}7\' — In some instances '' is substituted for the third 
 radical (n) : as, n*3i:i one that iveeps, /., so likewise in the past 
 tense, n;pn she trusted (for nnpn) ; -VDn they trusted (for -IDn). 
 And in the future, •ly^''. theij shall he tranquil ; especially with a 
 Paragogic letter : as, i^^'?-?!? ^ shall roar, he disquieted, (for i^P.j!!^) ? 
 
 
 n,^'7;ni
 
 146 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 ^^^5, n^'^h^, mh^, nS'^^h^.-Past tense, r^% nr\% ^%* 
 '>fi''*?-i, n'h^, n'h^, 4-c. 
 
 • • t' T " t' • t' 
 
 Niphcil. 
 
 Inf. ahs. rhT\.—cons. HiS-in, T\hT\'^, ^c.—imp. rhm, 
 
 • T • ' T • ' T ;V T • V T V ' V T • ' * T • 
 
 PieL 
 
 Inf. rh^ or n%, rih^'—imp. rhh ^c—ful n^^^t, 
 
 ^c.~Part. act. Pl^^D, ^c.—Part. pas. Tbi^p, ^c.—Past tense, 
 
 PmiL 
 Inf. n^5, rih^-—Fut. r-hm.—Part. r°h^.—Past tense, 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 inf r-h^f}, nh).n.—imp. rh:^nx, ^c.—Fut. nSm, 
 
 * -I?! with the accent on the last syllable: whereas verbs of the 
 fifth conjugation have their accent on the penultimate, as, -lOi^^ they 
 stood up. — -12,^ (from ^it^) signifies, they returned; but •1??' (from 
 n^t?*) signifies, i^ey captured, took prisoners. 
 
 t And without H; as, IV^. Ae s/<a// command (for "^^.V!), 
 
 ;{; The n is sometimes dropped: as, ^VJ\ bring up (for i^/Vjp).
 
 THE IIRBREW LANGUAGE. 147 
 
 nb^D, T]'^1*, Sec— Part. act. hS^ID Part. pas. nS-)^, &:c. 
 
 Past tense, rh:^n or nST\, r^rh^n, 'hy^ — ''K^'h^^^ ^c. 
 
 I lop It a I. 
 
 Takes (t) for the first vowel, and the radical H follows the 
 same rule as in the preceding branches: thus, ^ri^7.^n, flv^f^* 
 
 &c. rhm, rh^p\, ^c. 
 
 Hithpael. 
 
 137. The verbs MSt to he, H^H to live, belong to 
 this conjugation; but they deviate in some measure 
 from the preceding rules, as may be seen from the 
 following examples : — 
 
 Inf. abs. n^n to be. — Inf. cons. HVIl, nVHSI in being, nvri3, 
 
 Imp. m, be thou, m., ^^H or ''^n/., Vr\p. m., 'r\f^'r\J. 
 Put. T\'r\'^ or ^n|f 1 shall or will be ; r\'r\t^ or ^pl^ ; 
 
 ''^nn f. n^n'' or ^n'^ • v^^i^rs f. n^nj or ^nj • vr\p\, n^'^^nn/. 
 vn\ f. n^'Tip] or \'^'np]. 
 
 * And with conrers/'re "^—^y]: l^M and lie caused to turn; ^Tl 
 ('2 Kings ii.) (tnd he caused to sec, i. e. he shewed.
 
 148 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Part. m. m or HIH, /. HiH or H^h, p. B^H*, f. nilH*. 
 
 • • T ' T -T • T •' TT T ;IT '^ • T 
 
 In Niphal we find some of the persons of the past tense 
 only : thus, '^H'^^'n^ I have become, n'^^HJ, n'^^MJ, HTI^ ; and 
 by a;;a/oir?/, ^^'^'-HJ, m'^'.^l l^l'^l, ^^'^^. 
 
 Infinitive Absolute rT^H ^o /iz;e. 
 
 /mjt). n;n, •'.^n, ^^n, n|'^;n.-F«^. n^n^^, njnri, "^w, 
 ri.;n^': or ^n^, n^m, &c.— Par«. "n, n*n, s'^^n, nm—Past 
 tense, ■'fi'^^n, ^''''n, n-'^H, n^n, r\n'n, ^j'^^n, m'^^n, t^^'^'n, 
 
 •tt 't 't TT t;t -t V •-; • V •": 
 
 T 
 
 Niphal not used. 
 P/t'/. 
 /«/. n*n fo preserve, sustain life, TVv'T], Th^Ty?- — Imp. TV'H, 
 
 ''^n, m, n^'n — Fut. r\'m, n;nn, '^^nr^, n;n% n;nri, 
 n*m, ^*n<n, n|^^*nn, ^•'•ri^ ni'^.^rtri.— Par^. n;.rtD, &c. Past 
 tense, '^n'^^'R, fi'^^n, D'^'-n, n*n, ^T'n, m'^'n, |n^*n, ^*n. 
 
 Hiph'il. 
 f'lf' ^'OT^'O t^ cause to live, restore life, revive, JlVrifl/. — 
 
 imp.n'nn, kc.~Past tense, ^n'^^nn, n'^^nn, n'^^nn n^n»i, 
 
 -f ■.•-:!-' ' • •••.•.•|v' T "v:!-.- ' •••.•;!•.• 5 Tv:iv ' 
 
 nn^nn &c. 
 
 T ; ; V > 
 
 * Or D\''h-nvn-
 
 
 TiiK iii:bri:\v lan(;i:a(.e. 1-Kj 
 
 >4lip '^ip n^S niNhp ^^ri^5^ vh 'n^b'y^ njn -^D Kl 
 
 T T I I •• • T : t| : • T : T -; 
 
 D1X '-y^^ : rw^^ xip"^ as)^ : 'rs^T ninn xnpn 
 
 TT •• ; ~ T • "It- t V-;!- t ;i- t| ; ■ 
 
 t ^t t 
 
 ... ^ ..... , 
 
 nWj : ^'nnb^ n^^^zs ^ey^^ : '"Dyr ^.sS?:d ■^I'^nsb' 
 
 1 Before. - R. Nl> 3 r. nc»j; to do. "^ Not. •' R. nJ3 to turn, 
 Pi. to clear away. ^ Called, invited. ' /^p' to ask. '^ To come. 
 ^ nij^ to answer. ^^* A bird. ^' Honey. '- ''"^ sufficient, enough. 
 13 p;;. 14 xijpft. i:, Xo pay. "' lb^ to catch. i' b'bri to lay hold 
 of. i« nab lip. 1!' Anger. •■^'^ The right hand. -' A bribe. -- P.^?. 
 a horn. •-'•^ri.''3- -■* Spoil, plunder. -■' Goods, riches. -''To sin. 
 -' Stranire.
 
 150 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 . ^« .ff .. . ^. y ^ , j^ f ... ... 
 
 : ]rv ^"i^? '^^''i^^^ '"^T^'^ ^'''VV.D no ^^i^ "y.'^. 
 no ; '' an^jp^--D5 nb'];^ nin^. n.sh ]:s;i nyjp.ty jt« 
 
 T ; '^.-IV • T T V ~ T T — V T • ^T ' T " T 
 
 STm '"^'^ ''^im ''Hj^Tn^ b'tiS^-Sx ^xIiT.") ^''^^ 
 
 'T ■FT 
 
 2B n■^«-1 to see. 29 nb'j; to do. ^o x\'^ to go out. -^i Both. ■"■-' nvi? 
 advice. ''•'Iiya blind man. ^4 nby.D work, deed. so nb3 to cover. 
 "'^ Shame. •*' li?.f an old man. ^^ A sack, sack-cloth. ^9 oytp to 
 taste. -i^Any-thing. ^' nV"J to feed. ^- nh^' to drink. -inVith 
 force, vehemently. •*■* 3V^' to return. •^■'' Each. 
 
 8th COXJUGATION. 
 
 138. The Eighth Conjugation comprehends verbs 
 whose second and third radical are the same ; as, 
 mp to liieasior, 33p to .surroiDiiL
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 151 
 
 The second radical is mostly drop])cd, and its vowel transfonvd 
 to tlie first radical. The deficiency of the second is indicated bv 
 (I'.Kjvsh in the tliird radical, in all cases where it has a vowel. \\\ 
 many parts of the verb, however, the second radical is retained, 
 and conjugated like the perfect verb 1p3' 
 
 KaJ. 
 
 Inf. abs. '220 or ^D fo turn ahout, surround. — Inf. cons. 
 ±^%, ±2 ^h or ^H'oh, 2bl^—I>np. 2b, ^5b*, ^2b, 
 
 nT20^.—¥ut. imx, nbn, "^^ovs nb'> nbi^ nbJ ^^bn, 
 
 n.1''!lDn§, ^3b nj^!lDn.-Por/. act. 2D HSD D'^SD 
 niSD • or like the perfect verb, :3niD, T\22S^ or n^^iS, 
 
 D^nniD ninniD — /^«r^. pas. n^no nn^no, s'^ri^nD, 
 nin^nD— p^/^ife/?^e, nDii, nsD, ^^D-'^nisD; ninD, nsD, 
 ^J3p, DJjbp, iniDp. 
 
 * Sometimes with short (r) : as, \^1 si tit/ or exul! I hou, f. {Isa. 
 liv. 1.) -13^ m.pf. 
 
 t The long vowel (l_) is changed into (•..) because a long vowel 
 cannot form a compound syllable without the accent ; and as the 
 accent can never come on the unle-penuJtimatc, the long vowel must 
 necessarily be changed. (See Part I. p. 79.) 
 
 X The prefixes 3, n, % J', have long (t), except the second and 
 third persons/./)?. 
 
 § (l_) is changed into (••.) for the reason stated before. For the 
 same reason is (l_) changed into short (t), with conversive 1 : as, 
 3^^ lie shall siirroiuid, 2D*1 and lie surrounded, ^~j^], ^5?1" 
 
 II Or 330, like the perfect verb. In the same manner, D'^T Jic 
 hiiagiiicd, intended., ^Dpi, ''^IpOT-
 
 152 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Nip/lid. 
 
 Inf. mbn*, nbna, ikc.-jmp. nbn or nsn, ''3Dn, ^!jDn, 
 
 :3D1 n5D3, &''3D^, kc—Past tense, 2D2 or :iDJJ, HSDJ or 
 njD3, ^SDJ-Ti^DJ, nilDl &c. 
 
 Are conjugated either like perfect verbs, as, ^|lp to bring 
 about, to cause ;§ 7 yPl to praise 7Vp, to curse, /yH he praised, 
 ^■^/PO ^c. 77(1 /?e icas praised, '^n7?f\ I icas praised, 
 hk>rinn he praised himself, boasted.— Part. b^T\?^, h^^jf^, 
 
 h^rim Sec— Imp. hhn, "^S^n. ^^^Dii ^c. hhrinn, ''S^nnn, 
 
 &c., and Fi/^, ':>^n|^, S'^HI?, S^Hfi^, &c. Or they are con- 
 jugated hke verbs of the fifth conjugation (V'^)- Thus Jnf. 
 ^yiD to go about i encompass ; 77111 to make foolish, frantic, 
 to act icithout reason. — Imp. ^!l^D, ^^^ID, &c. — Fut. 
 :i5b^, Sec— Part. act. 2^\W, kc.— Part. pa's. ^y\m-— 
 
 * Or with (..) ; as, C!?2n fo he welted. 
 
 t Or Avith (1.) ahX / shall be finished, completed, QJ^Fl, DJT; ; or 
 with (-) : as, '^^l he shall he measured. In a few instances without 
 dagesh ; as, ?i2^ / shall he light, i. e. not esteemed, ^\>'d'' 
 
 X Sometimes with i: as. ?i33 he was rolled, -I^^J theij tvere rolled 
 together. 
 
 § Hence the Rabbinical, ^30 a cause. 
 
 II Hence Hallelujah, ~i'-1^?if i.e. Praise ge the Lord.
 
 
 ^, 
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 153 
 
 iVv^ lease, nniD, HlliD, ^DplD- -"finiiD. &c.— Pual, 
 ////. ^y\^.—l'uL ':i'im-—l'asi tense, 3110, ''^i^niD, &c.— 
 
 HiTiiPAEL, nninDH ; or from '^Si ^SiJlfin he rolled 
 
 liimsclf, 
 
 H'tpllil. 
 
 "yon.— Imp. non, '^sdh, Scc-fkl sd^, ;iDfi, ^'sori, 
 
 kc.—Part. act. '2W, T^^^P, kc— Fart. pas. ^D^^S, HpD^D, 
 kc.—Past tense, IDH*, HSDH, ^^DH-'^fi'llDn, naDH, &c. 
 
 Hophal. 
 
 Inf. "lusn.—Fut. nDm, np^n, '^ap^ri, &c.— p^r^ np^n, 
 
 n2D^n, Sec— Fast tense, ID^H, HSD^H, ^SD^H 'TlisD^n, 
 
 ^ Much, enough. ^ Seven times. •' Many. ** TI? to measure ; 
 in llitJi. to stretch one's self. ^ Jerusalem. 
 
 * Or v/ith (-) : as, ^?J] he catiscd to he licfht, "l^D he made hitter.
 
 154 THE ETYMOLOGY OE 
 
 : nicn nx-in n-^^n p : v\^Tr\ n^r^i n^^x nD3 
 
 T - T-- I- t;t T-; t;t t- 
 
 T,T- It •• •■-: -T T- - V -T 
 
 n':'^ ^b33 '^is'' ds*!i^ Sdi d^dcj^h ^3D3 °^^iiJi 
 : |vv '^?i^'^JS '''?;'? J Di*n-^3 ^j^'pn D''n':5X5 : ^ini^ 
 
 14*1^ ''cip.N? pty'p jhni ^^nD3 W| 'mW TwS* : ^J3"it 
 : tJT. ^"^^^ ''B'^'755 • ''n^b^ njn^ : ^pn^^ '^ii^'? 
 
 I • ; - T T ; - •• I • ; - ViVT I .• y •• T 
 
 <• P?! to roll, roll away, remove, in Hith. to roll one's self, to wal- 
 low. " ?33 to wither, waste. ^ The vine. '■* "ibp to number, 
 i** "Ipn to search. " DSO to desi^ise, ^- 7?!^ to ^jraise; in Hith. to 
 })raise one's self, to hoast. ^'^ A dead person. '■* Sense, under- 
 standing, i-' Soul. ^''' P") to shout, to sing. ^' ?''il to rejoice. 
 ^^ Awake. i-' |?b' one tliat dwells. -" Dust. -^ C'n^ to dress, to 
 clothe. --Salvation. -■'A pious man. -"' JP"^ to jump. -''The 
 lame. -'' Dun:b. -' ^3^3. a vineyard. ^ ,
 
 litm^^kmmimmmmmm^ltt 
 
 Ail
 
 TABLE XL 
 
 Exhibiting all the Itiftnitive and Imperative Moods of the Perfect and Imperfect Verbs, Primitive o 
 
 well as Derivative, at one vieiv. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOODS. 
 
 Eighth 
 Conjugation. 
 
 n-b 'TO 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 tvh 'TO 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 <'V 'TO 
 
 CoDjugation. 
 
 Fourth 
 Conjugation. 
 
 K'B 'TO 
 
 Tbini 
 Conjugation. 
 
 o"ipn 
 
 Conjugmion. 
 
 ConjugatJoo. 
 
 
 ab«f33D 
 S.C, 3ba 
 
 
 
 ic Oip3 
 
 
 «>c.i,3«a 
 
 n^3 e>j: 
 
 ibh ifal? 
 
 j-Kal. 
 
 3Bri , 3P.Ti 
 
 
 
 Dipa 
 «.o. Dipn? 
 
 3B*jn 
 
 ''3Nn 
 s.c.'?3xn3 
 
 
 "IB^a 
 
 ^Niph. 
 
 33b 
 
 ^^' 3303 
 
 
 stc. Nsoa 
 
 DBip 
 "'■ DBip3 
 
 3B': 
 
 Sto. 3tS'13 
 
 ^3« 
 
 &c.E»333 
 
 
 }-■ 
 
 a3b 
 
 s^c. 3303 
 
 
 Nsa 
 Sic. Nxija 
 
 BBip 
 
 Sio.DBipa 
 
 3B'; 
 3K*'a 
 
 
 Sit. B»jja 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 
 p. o'pn 
 
 
 
 
 tb"?!? 
 
 'j-Hiph. 
 
 3Din 
 »".3pirta 
 
 
 
 OpIFt 
 
 3P*W 
 Sit. 3P'in3 
 
 
 ic.pijna 
 
 
 ^Hopli. 
 
 33inpn 
 fcc-aainpna 
 
 
 
 DBipnri 
 &«• Daip;;iiig 
 
 3B"nFi 
 &c. 3E''.fina 
 
 ^3'Wn 
 
 
 -la'rnn 
 
 [•HiUi. 
 
 
 
 
 IMPER^ 
 
 ITIVE MOODS. 
 
 
 
 3b 
 
 •3b 
 
 nj'3P 
 
 
 
 Dip 
 Wp 
 
 njip^p 
 
 «3P> 
 
 ^3« 
 
 '^3« 
 
 l'73« 
 
 ns^as 
 
 t!»a 
 qCa 
 
 '"^^l Kal. 
 
 nai53^ J 
 
 3pn 
 
 'ap/T 
 
 wprt 
 
 nripn 
 
 nSan 
 
 is^ari 
 
 Dipn 
 
 'Bipri 
 
 mipn 
 
 njoipn 
 
 agj^n 
 'awf^ 
 lap'in 
 
 ''?3i<D 
 lbs?? 
 
 'p-aan 
 iB'aan 
 
 '■!Pi''T 
 
 i-ia^ri 
 na-iB^n 
 
 r Niph. 
 
 aaip 
 "asto 
 
 W3iP 
 
 naasio 
 
 
 'Nia 
 
 issa 
 
 njNxa 
 
 BBip 
 
 'i?8ip 
 TOBip 
 
 HMBip 
 
 SB-': 
 
 'as-''. 
 
 ia|3". 
 
 '■'13,8'! 
 
 ''?3« 
 
 «pi55 
 
 ^B'aa 
 
 nafJjaa 
 
 na'? 
 
 ■ Pid. 
 
 3pn 
 
 ■■apn 
 
 nj'spn 
 
 
 Nxan 
 
 'N'Xa!? 
 
 wxan 
 njNsan 
 
 'O'PJI 
 
 nJBpn 
 
 3E>in 
 ''3'B'iri 
 i3'p>in 
 
 '?3«ri 
 
 ts*an 
 'P-'an 
 
 n3t!*an 
 
 'TB^n 
 mnB^rr 
 
 1 
 ■ Hipli. 
 
 33inpn 
 
 •aainpn 
 
 ia3inpn 
 
 njasinpn 
 
 
 N^arin 
 
 'Nvann 
 
 |)«xann 
 
 n3xyann 
 
 DBipnn 
 
 'SBipnf' 
 
 laaipfi'' 
 
 maaipnn 
 
 a!3''nn 
 ■>3P'-:j;in 
 'i3(!'''nn 
 
 
 B*aa^ri 
 'P'aa'itn 
 ip^aann 
 
 'Ta'pan 
 ^la'jnri 
 
 - Hilb. 
 
 ■ As -ia'?a nbSa fbhh ibbii- n, , 
 
 I of tbf infinitives are varied in 
 
 ihuii, nB>a3 np-as r<mh nmii
 
 '.( Mr ' - ^T-y-^^-nm — \ — m ■ ^^"-"■lTTlf*1
 
 
 EMbltii 
 
 »■ tin- Fii 
 
 TABLE XII. 
 
 wre Tenses of all Ike Perfect and Impel feel, Verlis Primitive as well as 
 
 Derivative, at 
 
 le ufeH\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Eighth 
 Conjugation. 
 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 vy 'fia 
 
 Fifth 
 Conjugation. 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 N-S 'PIJ 
 
 Third 
 Coiyugation. 
 
 O'lPD 
 
 Second' 
 Conjugation. 
 
 D'a'jg' 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 -I'ns! 
 
 aiDK 
 
 
 rhM 
 
 NVPK 
 
 mp« 
 
 ^m 
 
 hi^ 
 
 ^m 
 
 Fem. na^K 
 
 I 
 
 «3i--. aton 
 aio; 
 
 '^r 
 
 
 'Ns- -. Nxpn 
 
 •pip-. Dipn 
 Dip; 
 
 'aE*-. ag-n 
 aE" 
 
 '^5N-. '?axn 
 ijaN' 
 
 'g'f-. E>jn 
 
 'IB"' ib'?'!! 
 ■ib'?; 
 
 Tliou 
 He 
 
 aion 
 aiw 
 
 
 
 
 mpn 
 
 D1p3 
 
 at^n 
 
 3!?>3 
 
 ijaNn 
 
 '73X3 
 
 E?jn 
 
 B»J3 
 
 ib|7n 
 
 She •; 
 We 
 
 n3»3D-. laion 
 
 ns'V - 
 
 "ihin 
 
 n|NS--. WSDR 
 
 njo; -. rapn 
 
 HiaB*-. lagfri 
 
 n|';iaN-.^S3Nn 
 
 nagjj-. ^B'jn ^Yp". ^-ohj^ 
 
 You 
 
 ■ • . laip; 
 
 • • 
 
 ^^r. 
 
 ■ • . WVI?» 
 
 ' ' . ^oip; 
 
 ' • . nfl'l • • . l'73N' 
 
 • • . iBij^j ■ ' . iia"?; 
 
 Tliey 
 
 m 
 
 •3". aon 
 
 2p' 
 
 h-. 
 
 n^J' 
 
 '«¥". twen 
 Nxa' 
 
 DipK , aBhK 
 
 'aip-. Dipn "s^r. amn 
 Dip' a?*^,' 
 
 
 B*33' 
 
 p™. ■ib'p^ 
 
 •10-- -la^n 
 
 loi?' 
 
 I 
 
 Thou 
 
 He 
 
 aon 
 aD3 
 
 
 n'pjn 
 
 Nxan 
 
 KVS3 
 
 Dipn ' aB>5n 
 Dipj 1 aB>y 
 
 S3N3 
 
 
 "ib'?'? 
 -ito'?? 
 
 She 1^ 
 We ^ 
 
 ns'i". won 
 
 • ' ■ «D? 
 
 ■13'!?-- 
 
 4 
 
 
 naai- -. raipn n33ti>-. ^amn na^pNi-, ^h^m 
 
 ■ • , ^E'M' 
 
 nana--. 'np'?n 
 
 You 
 Thev 
 
 35iD8 
 
 
 n'pJK 
 
 ^fi^l^K ' eaips ats-iK 
 
 ''3S8 
 
 tyys 
 
 Fem. luSsJl 1 
 
 '23- -. aaiDfi 
 aaiD^ 
 aaion 
 
 V- 
 
 
 'SV- - Nspn 
 
 'sp- -, Baipj;i 'ap;-' ag*:];! 
 Daip^ aB*:^ 
 oaipn aB-:/! 
 
 ''?|N--.bM;p 
 
 B>3in 
 
 is'?! 
 ■isbn 
 
 Thou 
 
 He 
 
 She t j 
 
 aa^D? 
 
 
 nVy 
 
 XX03 
 
 BBip3 at!":! 
 
 '^m 
 
 B'JU 
 
 1?'?? 
 
 We 
 
 fijaa--. «aiDn 
 
 nyhy. 
 
 ^"^jn 
 
 njNs--. iNson 
 
 map--, isaipn mag^-, wei'in 
 
 mhsti-Ahsm 
 
 n3g;a-. lE'aan 
 
 njis--. 'npSii 
 
 You ' 
 
 ' • . «aiD'^ 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 " • . 1SV0', 
 
 • ■ ■ waip'.i ' ' . laE!":'. 
 
 ' • , h^\x<. 
 
 • ' , mT, 
 
 • • , r\ih\ 
 
 They 
 
 aaiDS 
 
 
 n^jK 
 
 NffiS 
 
 BOipH 
 
 ae'-g 
 
 ■jINI? 
 
 v/m 
 
 Fem. nB'7K 
 
 I 
 
 'sa--. saiDp 
 aaiD' 
 
 '^-, 
 
 n'=>3n 
 
 
 'B!?--. Baipjp 
 Baip^ 
 
 'ag'- -. ag^'fl 
 
 3[j»'<i 
 
 •h3»r. '73«n 
 
 '73N' 
 
 'g'ar. E'jan 
 
 •■IB- -. ibSj? 
 ■ibS'^ 
 
 Thou 
 He 
 
 aaion 
 
 
 rhyn ' NXpn 
 
 Bpipn 
 
 ac'n 
 
 ■73x0 
 
 Biaan 
 
 ""5'?'? 
 
 aw- f 
 
 aaiDJ 
 
 
 n^:3 NX03 
 
 Baipj 
 
 a&;3 
 
 "73x3 
 
 8*43^ 
 
 •\i^\i^ 
 
 We 
 
 naa--. watofl 
 
 nj'"?-, 
 
 n'^jn nass--. w^cn 
 
 n3BQ--, laaipn 
 
 naar-. UE'jfl 
 
 nabij-.^bsjn 
 
 niEfa--' iB'JJR 
 
 fianp--. q-ip'^p 
 
 You 
 
 ' ' . waiD^ 
 
 • ' , 
 
 ^'i'J^ ' ' . ^N!f»' 
 
 • ■ . »!5ip'. 
 
 ' ' , iiar;. 
 
 ' ' . h:^\ 
 
 • - . m}^. 
 
 ' ' ■ ''■"?<"; 
 
 The, 
 
 aos* 
 
 
 nSjK N'XDK 
 
 D'pK a»B»iK , S'aNff 
 
 wm 
 
 Fem. Tb'jS 
 
 I 
 
 "3:-, apn 
 
 '^r. 
 
 nhiF\ 'N'---, N'xon 
 
 'B'p.-. D'pn »a',Bi-.3'B'in '^aN-, b'psn 
 
 '(j"a-. ty'afl 
 
 •TaV-. T'oSn 
 
 Thou 
 
 3.p:i 
 
 
 nSj' : N'sp' 
 
 D'p; ' 2-V>V 
 
 ^M 
 
 B"a' 
 
 to"?! 
 
 He 
 
 aw 
 
 
 
 N"Xpp 
 N'XPS 
 
 B'pn a'E'in 
 D'p3 a'B'ia 
 
 
 E/'an 
 B"a3 
 
 TB^n 
 
 She •= 
 
 
 nj^S--. 
 
 
 nsxx--. isripn 
 
 njpp;, wpn n35_ts'-. la'^Jin 
 
 nsSax.^'^'pxn 
 
 nagja-. ^Bi^an 
 • - . !)E')a! 
 
 m-iB--. n'B^n 
 
 Yon 
 They 
 
 aow 
 
 
 nhm 
 
 NXDK ' PpW agiW 
 
 ^W 
 
 B>aK 
 
 Fem. la^K 
 
 I 
 
 '3p-. apw 
 
 'S-. 
 
 rhm 
 
 'NX- -. Nson 'cp- ". Dpw 'at?- -. ag'^n 
 
 '•psx-, h^m 
 
 'g-a--. B>an 
 
 na'?-. ib'^pi 
 
 Tliou 
 
 api' 
 aow 
 aow 
 
 
 
 k^q; I Dp.T 
 Nxpn I ppw 
 
 NXO| ' Bp13 
 
 ag-^' 
 aghn 
 ag'w 
 
 •73x^1 
 "73x3 
 
 B'a; 
 E'af) 
 
 2*33 
 
 IB^I 
 
 He 
 
 She t 
 We " 
 
 n3'3-. «DW 
 
 nj'S-. 
 
 ?S:n 
 
 mss"-. iNxpn njpp; -. lapin 
 
 naagf-Mag-in 
 
 n3';>3x-,i'73xn 
 
 njE'a-. iB*an 
 
 aaip--. ^■TB'?n 
 
 You 
 
 • ■ . ^apv 
 
 
 iSf; 
 
 ' ' . 'iNvp; ' " . nopi' 
 
 • " .^ag-n' 
 
 • ' ,!|'73X', 
 
 ■ • . ^B^a; 
 
 ■ ■ . na'?; 
 
 They 
 
 aainps 
 
 
 Jnkns 
 
 NSOnN 
 
 BBipnK : yif-m 
 
 ''3xnR 
 
 E'.aajiR' F*™- la'priR 
 
 I 
 
 'aai- -■ aainpn 
 
 '^-, 
 
 n^ann 
 
 '(<s--. NSDnn 
 
 'sa* -. DBipnn j «3B'--.3ES''nn 
 
 'i)W~.'73xnn 
 
 'B'a--. E'aann, 'is--. naSnn 
 
 Thou 
 
 aainc 
 
 
 n'san' 
 
 Nson' 
 
 Bfiip"! ae-w 
 
 b^T\\ 
 
 EJaan; iB'pn'. 
 
 He _. 
 
 aainpn 
 
 
 piWnn 
 
 Nxonn 
 
 BBipnn aE-inn 
 
 '738nn 
 
 Efjann "is'?nn 
 
 She 9- 
 
 aawpj 
 
 
 n;"?™ 
 
 Nsans 
 
 DOi|'5n3 aty'ns 
 
 ''SSflJ 
 
 B>aan3 nB'?n3 
 
 We » 
 
 na3a--,i3ainpn 
 
 nj'^r -. 
 
 i"??™ nsNs- -. ^Nsnnn 
 
 niaa-.TOBipnn ri33B'-.UB'inn 
 
 n3'?3-, ^'73x00 
 
 naE'a-.^B'aann , nns'?"'"s'?W 
 
 You 
 
 • ' • i33inp'' 
 
 
 I'pjn^ ' • - . iNvao' 
 
 • • . ffiaipfi? ' ' ' . wg-iJp; 
 
 ' '.iSaxn; 
 
 ' • . nB-aan; ' " . iia'jii; 
 
 They 
 
 #
 
 Edhibitbig llie Participle 
 
 TABLE XIII. 
 
 of all the Perfeit and Imperfect Ve 
 Derivative, at one view. 
 
 ■hs. Primitive <rs well <i.i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 D*^1S5 
 
 n-'? 'ri3 
 
 S"? '05 
 
 vy 'nj 
 
 "S 'nj 
 
 X'B '113 
 
 D'ipd 
 
 D'aSt? -awa 
 
 Eighth 
 
 Conjugntion 
 
 Seventh 
 Conjugation 
 
 Conjugation 
 
 Conjugation 
 
 Cor^ogatiou 
 
 Conjugation 1 
 
 c'niui;;'.™ 
 
 First Pnrticijile. 
 Conjugation 
 
 r 3D 
 
 n^ia 
 
 ssia 
 
 °R 
 
 SB-'i' 
 
 bix 
 
 E'jij 
 
 laiS , 
 
 
 n3D 
 
 rhM 
 
 nfjvia 
 
 "OR 
 
 ri3^i' 
 
 n'?3i« 
 
 neiaiJ 
 
 maiS 
 
 
 Ac J 
 
 — 
 
 nssia 
 
 
 nsB'v 
 
 rhy^ 
 
 "B'aiJ 
 
 "lai'' 
 
 
 ! B'3P 
 
 B^ijij 
 
 D'N^iO 
 
 B'OR 
 
 B»3!yi' 
 
 B»'?3ix 
 
 D'ElaiJ 
 
 B'lpiS 
 
 
 '^ fliSD 
 
 ni'^ia 
 
 nisvto 
 
 niap 
 
 ni3^r 
 
 niSais 
 
 fliBfjij 
 
 ninaiS 
 
 -Kul. 
 
 '' 2WD 
 
 '^H 
 
 N^SB 
 
 Pip 
 
 a^B*; 
 
 '?^3N 
 
 B'lJJ 
 
 -Pioh 
 
 
 Pa,. ^?^=l? 
 
 mhi 
 
 nwxB 
 
 nmp 
 
 ny\0\ 
 
 nbwK 
 
 HBl^J? 
 
 n-iio'p 
 
 
 D'aiap 
 
 b'^Sj 
 
 D'WXl? 
 
 B'a^p 
 
 B'3i)B»; 
 
 B'^3« 
 
 B'B*^)? 
 
 B'-iiaS 
 
 
 I niaiae 
 
 ni'iSs 
 
 nisixB 
 
 nia^p 
 
 fli31B'' 
 
 nsh^y* 
 
 niB'^W 
 
 nii%^ - 
 
 
 p. api 
 
 "■j?? 
 
 NX03 
 
 Bipi 
 
 atfi3 
 
 ^m 
 
 0ii 
 
 in'73 
 
 
 nap? 
 
 ^'?M 
 
 nssB? 
 
 naipi 
 
 naE>i3 
 
 ^'?m 
 
 n&ii 
 
 n-iB^a 
 
 
 — 
 
 'T^W 
 
 nNxpj 
 
 naipi 
 
 nae'i: 
 
 "^^m 
 
 ^W 
 
 TIB^? 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 B«3p| 
 
 B'^« 
 
 D'NVBI 
 
 B'pip^ 
 
 D'aB-U 
 
 o'^m 
 
 B'E'aJ 
 
 Bna'73 
 
 
 niap^ 
 
 fli'^jj 
 
 nixsps 
 
 niaipj 
 
 niaB'is 
 
 'ii''3sa 
 
 fliB'ji 
 
 nina^a 
 
 
 r a3iDf? 
 
 nj'JB 
 
 »m 
 
 BBipf? 
 
 ats'^a 
 
 ^mp 
 
 mp 
 
 naSa 
 
 
 naaioa 
 
 ^k^'? 
 
 n^m 
 
 naalpB 
 
 na??:!? 
 
 rhm 
 
 n0m 
 
 fTiai?? 
 
 
 Art. -j naaiPB 
 
 — 
 
 nssBB 
 
 nsaipa 
 
 nar? 
 
 "bs!? 
 
 ngjjia 
 
 "la"?!? 
 
 
 
 B'>33iBi? 
 
 D''?aa 
 
 B'NSBB 
 
 B'aaipa 
 
 B'aE'lB 
 
 B'^^NB 
 
 B'B'|3B 
 
 BnpSa 
 
 
 
 . niajipa 
 
 nfeB 
 
 niNjjBa 
 
 niaaipB 
 
 niaB^iB 
 
 nibaxa 
 
 niE'33B 
 
 n™'?B 
 
 
 f 3aipi? 
 
 rh>9 
 
 Nsm 
 
 DBipB 
 
 3B"B 
 
 •jas^ 
 
 B*J38 
 
 ibSb 
 
 -Piel 
 
 
 nasiD^ 
 
 rhiQ 
 
 nNSM 
 
 nisBipa 
 
 njE-'B 
 
 nipssB 
 
 nE>J3B 
 
 n-ra'^B 
 
 
 Pas. 
 
 naaiPB 
 
 — 
 
 nttXBB 
 
 nsaipB 
 
 '^3E''B 
 
 n^3«a 
 
 pmp 
 
 fiia^a 
 
 
 
 B»35toi? 
 
 B'^B 
 
 B'NSBB 
 
 B'-aaipi? 
 
 B»aE'\8 
 
 B''?3t«B 
 
 B'B'MB 
 
 b'-ibSb 
 
 
 
 niasiDij 
 
 fli'slB 
 
 niNst;? 
 
 niBBipfj 
 
 nUB-'B 
 
 ni'?3N^ 
 
 niE/pa 
 
 niia'^B 
 
 J 
 
 33ip 
 
 nH 
 
 NSB 
 
 BB'lp 
 
 3r: 
 
 Sax 
 
 B-aa 
 
 ■v^h 
 
 -. 
 
 n33ip 
 
 nW 
 
 fINX!? 
 
 naalp 
 
 nas"'; 
 
 nhstt 
 
 npii 
 
 n-TB^ 
 
 .Pual. 
 
 B'33iD 
 
 B'W 
 
 B'NXp 
 
 B'saip 
 
 B'ae*; 
 
 chsti 
 
 B'B*a3 
 
 B'-ia'? 
 
 ni33iD 
 
 m'pj 
 
 fliNSB 
 
 niBBip 
 
 nuc*^ 
 
 j 'ii''|K 
 
 niBfaa 
 
 niia'j 
 
 
 '' 3Da 
 
 n^;a 
 
 N'VBB 
 
 B'pa 
 
 3»P'i8 
 
 "^'asiia 
 
 B''3a 
 
 Tb'?8-| 1 
 
 
 napB 
 
 n^ja 
 
 ns'sBS 
 
 na'pB 
 
 n3'B*18 
 
 "^"3X8 
 
 nEJ'aa 
 
 Fi'i'a'jB 
 
 
 Act. • 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 nNxaa 
 
 — 
 
 naK'iB 
 
 nVas?B 
 
 niyja 
 
 nna'i'B 
 
 
 
 B'apB 
 
 B»'73a 
 
 B-N'staa 
 
 B'B'pl? 
 
 B'a'E'iB 
 
 B'^'3N8 
 
 B»B"aB 
 
 B'TB'78 
 
 
 
 . niaps 
 
 niSjB 
 
 niN'xBB 
 
 nio'pa 
 
 nia'e>i8 
 
 niS'axa 
 
 niBi'aB 
 
 niTa'^a 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 •Hiphil. 
 
 
 3pna 
 
 n^w 
 
 NSpB 
 
 np^B 
 
 aB'18 
 
 ''?^,» 
 
 E'JB 
 
 lahr^ 
 
 
 
 napw 
 
 n^?a 
 
 nxx?a 
 
 naj^o 
 
 nag'ffi 
 
 "^?S,a 
 
 n0it3 
 
 n-iai^a 
 
 
 Pas, . 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 flNXPB 
 
 — 
 
 mma 
 
 "^9«s 
 
 'lEjJB 
 
 nna'jB 
 
 
 
 D»3Pia 
 
 B'^P^B 
 
 B'Nspa 
 
 B''8pra 
 
 D'3B'1B 
 
 B'Saxa 
 
 D'B'aB 
 
 Bna^B 
 
 
 
 nispiB 
 
 ni^^B 
 
 niNV'?'3 
 
 niapna 
 
 niams 
 
 ni'73N8 
 
 niB^as 
 
 nina'jB 
 
 
 3pW 
 
 '^Ho 
 
 xxan 
 
 ppin 
 
 3B'^n 
 
 ^?W 
 
 Biaa 
 
 in^n 
 
 
 Fiapin 1 
 
 H^JiJ 
 
 nxsm 
 
 napin 
 
 n^^n 
 
 i°''??*?,0 
 
 nB»an 
 
 nna^T 
 
 
 B'apin '• 
 
 B'SjIJ 
 
 B'Ksao 
 
 B'Bpin 
 
 D»3B'in 
 
 D'Saxn 
 
 B'tyan 
 
 Bna^n 
 
 . Hophal 
 
 niapin 
 
 nte 
 
 niNvan 
 
 niapiii 
 
 ni3E'in 
 
 ni'?aNn 
 
 i=iityart 
 
 niia^ri 
 
 
 33^flpa 
 
 n'jjnB 
 
 Nxo^a 
 
 Baipna 
 
 aE'^na 
 
 Saxna 
 
 E'aana 
 
 iB^nn '. 1 1 
 
 naginpa 
 
 n^jna 
 
 risj^ariB 
 
 napip/^B 
 
 natrna 
 
 nS|Nna 
 
 nE-aaoB 
 
 nna^;;ia 
 
 
 nas^npB 
 
 — 
 
 nNxoi;iB 
 
 flBBipna 
 
 nsE'^na 
 
 n^axna 
 
 n^ajna 
 
 n-iaSna 
 
 -Hithpael. 
 
 B'aainpa 
 
 B'''?3nB 
 
 B'KJfOJIlB 
 
 B'aaipna 
 
 B's^-na 
 
 B'SjNoa 
 
 B'B'^jna 
 
 Bne|?nB 
 
 
 fliaainpa 
 
 ni^jfiB 
 
 niNsana 
 
 niaaipna 
 
 ni3B".;;ia 
 
 niSasna 
 
 niB'aaoB 
 
 nne^na 

 
 Edhihiling the Past Ttnses of all the P 
 
 TABLE XIV. 
 
 Tfect and Imperfect, Verh 
 
 Primitive ax well as Derivative, at one i 
 
 D 
 
 Etghtli' 
 
 'mo 
 n. nag 
 
 3S 
 
 nap 
 
 43p 
 
 n'b 'PI? 
 
 CoDJugation. 
 
 n. Ma 
 nn'pa 
 
 \S3 
 
 '03M 
 
 n. flaw 
 
 api 
 
 naw 
 
 1330^ 
 
 ?• enapj 
 
 1303 
 
 n, fl;.'?:3 
 !• Bn»'7J3 
 
 l'?33 
 
 «'S 'm 
 
 Sixth 
 Conjugation. 
 
 13S,X0 
 
 V» 'W 
 
 
 '3X,PI 
 
 t . Dnsspi 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 n'jas 
 
 B'IPD 
 
 13t^M 
 
 t • Bflti'J? 
 
 IB*;? 
 
 .Drno?p3 
 
 Wlp3 i 
 
 »nan3 , 
 
 ^. flaB'i3 
 
 aE'i3 
 
 naB-ia 
 
 waE^ia 
 
 t . Bn3E'i3 
 
 iaB'i3 
 
 n. rhpvty 
 t.Bn'?aN3 
 
 'n?!j33 
 
 n . wi? 
 
 ^33 
 nB»33 
 
 «S;j3 
 t-BPipa 
 
 W53 
 
 f. n. moS 
 
 ''?1,p'?3 
 
 "ipf? 
 
 n-ip^3 
 
 i3np'?3 
 
 t . BmisSi 
 
 'np'73 
 
 'flaaiB 
 
 n. maip 
 
 aaip 
 
 naaip 
 
 waaip 
 
 t. BflaaiP 
 
 waip 
 
 waaiB 
 
 n. main 
 
 aaiP 
 
 naaiD 
 
 waaip 
 
 !■ BmaiP 
 
 «3iB 
 
 'napn 
 n. flapn 
 
 3PD 
 
 wapn 
 ;. Bfliapn 
 
 13DPI 
 
 n^3 
 
 nnSs 
 la'Jpa 
 
 t . BJT'W 
 l'^3 
 
 1. fl'^'jij 
 
 i3';'?3 
 
 Bn»'?3 
 
 4^1 
 
 ?. Bn'_^jn 
 
 fl. msp 
 ntjifP 
 
 t.BflNSD 
 
 'Wpip 
 
 p . n»ip 
 
 Dpip 
 
 nspip 
 
 MBaip 
 
 'HNSa i 
 
 HNsa 
 
 13NSI^ 
 
 snNxa 
 wxa 
 
 *fi3Bin 
 
 n, napin 
 
 ap^n 
 
 napin 
 
 Mapin 
 
 ?■ Bnspsin 
 
 taD^n 
 
 
 n. TOxan 
 
 N'xan 
 
 n^'xan 
 
 i3s<xBn 
 
 !• DflNxan 
 
 'flNsan 
 
 n. flNxan 
 
 sxaa 
 
 riNyan 
 
 13«5t2J^ 
 
 !.Bn«xppi 
 
 lapip 
 
 'fna'pn 
 
 n. ni8»po 
 
 D'pn 
 
 na'pa 
 
 "ia'pn 
 
 }. BniB'pn 
 
 la'pn 
 
 'naB"; 
 fl. n^g''; 
 
 3?"' 
 
 na?*; 
 
 uag"': 
 
 t- BflaB"' 
 
 UB"' 
 
 aB>; 
 
 naE'' 
 waB"" 
 
 t. Bfl3B'» 
 
 naB"'* 
 
 'naainpn 'fl'^inn j 
 ^. naaiflprt n. fl»'?3nn I 
 
 r\rhmri i 
 
 w«>3fln I 
 
 t.Dn''?3rin 
 
 aaiflpn 
 
 naainpn 
 
 isaaiflpn 
 
 • Dnaainpi=i 
 
 Hainofi 
 
 'flNsiaj;!?! 
 
 xyanri 
 
 nNSBm 
 
 MKstBflri 
 
 t • BflNxonn 
 
 iNsann 
 
 naaipfla 
 
 BflBBtenn 
 
 'naB''in 
 fl . flaE'in 
 
 na^BJin 
 
 ijag'in 
 
 1. Bnsgjin 
 
 la'^B'in 
 
 'nae'in 
 
 aB'^n 
 
 naBiin 
 
 «aB*in 
 
 t. Bflag/^n 
 
 lag'in 
 
 ''fl;3B'';rin 
 fl' naB'^fln 
 
 naB'^fin 
 
 waB'^rin 
 
 t.BflaB"!);!?! 
 
 laty'fln 
 
 t. Bn'?3tit 
 
 -ma 
 I. flBjaj 
 
 i3Bja3 
 , BflE'a? 
 
 fl. nbas 
 lbs 
 
 'flSasn 
 n. rh^m 
 
 n^'aNp 
 
 ?. Bfl^^^!p 
 I'^'asn 
 
 'flSa^jp 
 fl' fl^?SO 
 
 I'jasn 
 fl.nSaNfin 
 
 i3S3«;;in 
 j.Dn^axnfi 
 
 'fl{?33 
 
 B'aj 
 nE'^3 
 
 ^3B;33 
 
 ]■ BflB'33 
 
 '^Ip'? 
 
 I 
 
 maS 
 
 Tliou 
 
 la'? 
 
 He 
 
 nnaS 
 
 SIlB 
 
 MiaS 
 
 We 
 
 Dfl-ia'? 
 
 You 
 
 iia'? 
 
 They 
 
 f.fl. mo*? 
 
 wiaS 
 
 ■t-Bfl-ie'? 
 
 iia'j 
 
 'flBjan 
 
 B^an 
 
 ^laBjari 
 
 BflB'an 
 
 !iB"an 
 
 'flBjan 
 fl , fl^jn 
 
 laB^sn 
 
 BflB'sn 
 
 !tE'3n 
 
 'ma'^n 
 
 f- n . ma'pa 
 
 i»B^n 
 
 rti'B^Pi 
 
 f. I. Bma^n 
 
 ITa"?!! 
 
 'flip'?? 
 J?, nip^n 
 
 "IP;"? 
 13-|B'?n 
 
 t. sma^n 
 
 'ne;33i;in ! 'flis'^fln 
 
 fl.fl?^33na f.fl.fl-ia^riri 
 
 B'a3f;ipi I la'jnn 
 
 rifunn n-jaSna 
 
 i3Ej33nn i3-i^'5flrt 
 t.BflB>33nn 1 '. t.DflTs'pfin 
 
 tefmn na'^flrt
 
 Tin: HEBREW language. 155 
 
 :Dy^-n^{ D^nSsS* "nc^'i : ''niinD 'ri'^^^y '^sdh : BS^-njs* 
 
 :,■• - r- -J. . T T _. .. - . . 
 
 - I •• •• ; • • T -;iT : !• - T • ; - 
 
 '^•'' To understand, to contemplate. -"•' And Amasa. '^^' A way; 
 highway. ^^ On account of. •'-nnFips a sack. ■'•^ At first. 
 
 The accompanying Tables, containing paradigms 
 of the verbs of the several conjugations, are so con- 
 structed, that the student n^ay at one view see the 
 distinguishing characteristic of each conjugation and 
 its several branches. 
 
 Table XI. contains all the Infinitive and Impera- 
 tive Moods of the eight conjugations. 
 
 Table XII. contains all the Future Tenses. 
 
 Table XIII. contains all the Participles. 
 
 Table XIV. contains all the Past Tenses.
 
 15G THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Doubly Imperfect Veubs. 
 
 139. From the preceding exposition of the He- 
 brew verbs, it appears that the differences between 
 the perfect and imperfect verbs, arise from the latter 
 having either (i), or one of the qukfcents *•, 1, H, ^, as 
 a constituent part of their roots. But the root may 
 have both 3 and one of the quiescents, at the same time, 
 as radicals — as, for instance, ^CS^J to bear, to carrij, to 
 lift up; nbi to stretch out, bend, i/icli?ie ; — or it may 
 have two quiescents : as, HIK to be uiUing, to consent ; 
 ^'^l to issue, to go out; ^"^l to fear ; T\1l to throw, to 
 dart ; J^iiS to come. In such cases, the verbs are said 
 to be doubly imperfect ; and they will be subject, at 
 the same time, to the rules specified under the several 
 conjugations to which each letter has a reference. 
 
 Thus, for instance, the 3 of ^t^'J will be regulated by the rules 
 laid down under the second conjugation (p. 127), and we shall have 
 for the future ^^'^ (for i^^^'^^), and i< will be regulated by the rules laid 
 down under the sixth conjugation (p. 142) ; and hence ^^^, with (t) 
 under the second radical, instead of ^^^'^^ or ^^^'^• Thus, likewise, 
 the *^ of i^^?^ will follow the rules of the third conjugation, and we 
 shall, therefore, have in the future n5X / shall he unlling, H^NJ^, 
 &c. ; whilst the n will follow the rules of the seventh conjugation ; 
 and we shall have in the past tense, 'T^''?^, '0'''^^ in the same 
 manner as from n?^, ''ri"'7|, nvi, &c. This will appear still more 
 clear from the following examples, in which the leading words of the 
 several verbs are given, leaving it to the student to fill up the rest 
 by way of exercise.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 157 
 
 140. First radical i, and third ^{ : as, t^b'^ to carry. 
 
 Kal. 
 Inf. abs. ^m — Cons, m) or HXb, nXCr?, HXb'^, &c.— 
 Imp. ^^, ''Xb', Sec— FuL ^m, Sec— Part. act. N^'j, &c. 
 Part. pas. ^^'m — Past tense, \^m, &c. "^n^m. 
 
 •" T T t' • T t 
 
 Nij)hal. 
 
 Inf. Nbjn to he carried, Nb^JH?, &c Imp. Nb^JH, &c.— 
 
 Put. >it;m, kc.~Part. ^m, n^m, kc—Past tense, ^m, 
 
 "TV T • ' T T • T • ' 
 
 nijim, '^nmi &c. 
 
 PU'l. 
 Inf. m^ to exalt, i^m^, kc.— Imp. N^^, kc.—Fut. Xb'i^. 
 Part. act. i^^^p.—Part. pas. ^b^^?^.—Past tense, i^m 
 
 Piial. 
 Inf. ^m*-—Fnt. Xb^i§^.— P«;-^ NbO — Past tense, N^X 
 
 ''mm, &c. 
 
 H'lphtl. 
 Inf. ^^'^ri or Nbn to canse to bear.— Imp. ^^n.—Fut. 
 ^^\y^.—Part. act. ^'>'m. — Part. pas. Ht^?^—Past tense, 
 
 i^^'bn — '^fiNbn, riiSb'n, fis*trn, &c. 
 
 Hophdl. 
 
 Inf >^b^n.— Fut. m^.—Part. i<Wil.—Past tense, iVbH, 
 
 T ; \ '
 
 158 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Hithpa'el. 
 
 Inf. N^jfin to cxa/t one's self.— Imp. b^mnri.—Fnt. 
 
 ^mm.—Part. i<mm.- rast tense, ^mr\r[-'ni<'u^:m 
 
 141. First radical 2, and third H : as, Hbll (o uicluic, 
 to stretch out. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 7<.nb3-niDX nitoB.— //»/?. nbx f- "^t^^-Fut. n^.^ or 
 
 m.—Vart. act. HbiX /• nbil-7"«/-<. pai-. ''^bj, /. H^^^Dl— 
 Fast tejise, HtOX HflD:!— '^n'^Dl 
 
 T T T ; T 
 
 Nip} till. 
 
 Inf. nbiin — TmT\.—imp. nb^n.— f«^. nto^^.— Fan. 
 nm, ,/: T\)^'^.-Fasi tense, HLs^, nntsij-'^ri^tsj. 
 
 .... I T . -r . T ; • .... 
 
 Inf. ri'^y-Tmi*.—lmp. r~\\2i\--Fut. r^\^m.—Fart. act. 
 
 r\\2iyo.—Fart. pas. nt2:?D.— Prt.ff tense, H^x nnts;-'^fi''t3i 
 
 Piidl and Hit/ipacl 
 
 Need no further explanation, as the former is formed by substi- 
 tuting (.._) for the first short vowel of Piel ; and the latter, by pre- 
 fixing rii^ &c. before Piel, as before directed. 
 
 Hiplnl. 
 
 inf ntsn-nitsn, nitsna— /m^o. ntsn or bn, /. ''bn. 
 Fat. T\m or to^, Hbri or bJ!^, ''bri, nb! or b!, nb| or bJ, 
 
 * As n'iD5_niEi3^-
 
 THE IIKIUIEW LAXCaiAC;!-. 159 
 
 ^t^Pi, Sec— Part. act. mi2'Q.—Part. pas. TM^D. - Pa.^t tcn.^e, 
 
 T ; • T • • .. • ' 
 
 Hoplii'iL 
 
 Takes (,) instead of (-) and (.) : as, Fnt. T[\11t—Pa.<:t tense, 
 
 142. First radical «,and third n : as, HSK* to hake. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Inf. nbx-niss*, n.m'Tj.^—imp. r~\^% /. ^^kv—f/v^. 
 
 r\m, nS.S^n, /. "^^^PS.-Part. act. nSS*, /. r^h^.—Pan. pa.^. 
 
 '^'im, f. n^'^^^.—Past tense, h^^, nni^{-''n^3^^. 
 
 T'^ T-; TT t;t ••t 
 
 N'lphiil. 
 
 Inf. nss*n to he baked, nissiH, ni3sri3— /wj9. nss|^. 
 
 Part. nSS'3.— Po.?^ fc/?^e, n3S*J, &c. 
 
 143. First radical \ and third N* : as, K^i^^ to o-o 
 out, i^y to fear. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Inf. ^^*^»';-n^J>^ riiXv^ ; ^y-i^y^.—imp. kv, ,/: \siv. 
 
 iSn\ f. \SnV— iv//. N^?^, ^^^^n, ^{n^l^, i^^D.—Part. act. 
 
 t: "^ ... .... .... T • T • 
 
 iS*%^^ nN*V' ov ra^^' wSn; (like ^b^) r}ii:^\~Part. pas. 
 
 Nn\ ni^^y.—Past tense, K^^^. nxr-'TiN:;:^ ; iSn\ nx*i*- 
 
 T T ; TT T ; T • TT ••(' T ;t 
 
 Niphal. 
 Jnf ^5">^^ to he feared. —Imp. ^y\r{.—Fnt. ^y\^, ^y\P\. 
 
 •/ ..T • •' •• T • -T . ..T • 
 
 Part. t<"li3, nwS*'li3.— P«,s^f tense, N^iJ ^nN^i^.
 
 IGO THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 HipliiL 
 Inf. N^!^in to cause to come out, to bring out, J>^''^in^. — 
 Imp. N^^in, \sj^V^^-— ^"^- i^'^P^—Part. act. ^<'^V^^•— 
 Part. pas. ii'^m.—Past tense, N^'V^H ''fl^^l^iri. 
 
 Hophdl. 
 t^V^n.-F«L ^^^m'—Past tense, ^{^^^^ ^n^s*^^^^. 
 
 T T ' T ■ •• 
 
 144. First radical *•, and third T\ : as, 'Pr\\ to throw, 
 to slioot. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Inf. nh;-nns T\T\%-imp. ny, /. ^^y.—Put. nn;^. 
 
 rr\'P\, f ''yn—Part. act. ny, /. n^\—Fort. pas. ''^n^, 
 
 /. n'^^y.—Past tense, n^ , nny-'^n'^y. 
 
 -' T : TT T ;t • -T 
 
 Niphdl. 
 
 Inf. ni^n. nn^n.-/w/?. n^i^n or ni^n.— f//l nim or 
 
 rr^^^.— Part. act. H^li^,/. r\y\^.—Part. pas, H'^iJ-TiniJ. 
 
 Hiphil. 
 Inf. rriin ^o i/^ro?/;, 67jeu', instruct, T\yi\T\, r\T\yr,'^.—imp. 
 
 niin,/. n.in.— Fw^. nii^*.— p«r^. «cf. nnis.— p«/-^. p«5. 
 
 * And without H— "I'lN ")in, Szc. ; hence "il'l and he shot (2 Kings 
 xiii. 17). 
 
 j- Piel would, hy analogy, be HT, mi;', as we find from HT to 
 fhrou; riH^, •I'n*; and Ilith. i^lir^H similar to ni]irin he confessed.
 
 THE IIEBKEW EANdlAGE. IGl 
 
 145. Second radical 1, and third N : as, NIS lo come. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Inf. NiS iSn^.— /m/?. ^^'2, f. \NJ3 — F</^ Nh^, isnri. 
 
 Part. K3, n^,^.— Past tense, N*3, H^ln-'^n^^S, DX!:, fiX!!. 
 
 T ITT T 1 IT • IT T IT T 
 
 HipJiiL 
 Inf. ts^n or N'^^n to cause to come, i. e. to bring, ^s''5^^. 
 /w/>. Knn or H'':in.— Put. ^'>:iU.- Part. act. i^'>:it).— rart. 
 
 •• T • T • T • •• 
 
 pas. Xn^D — Past tcNse, ^^'^IH, HX'^an '^rixnn or 
 
 Hop hill. 
 
 Inf. ^^'^n.—Put. xn^^, ^5n^n, ^s^n^n.— p«^^ ^e«^e, 
 
 "^ T T T • ; 
 
 Irregular Verbs. 
 
 140. Irres^ular verbs are such as do not form their 
 several forms from the same root ; as, for instance, 
 "•ri^?!! I went, "^pin one that goes, are formed from the 
 root yk}' The same is the case with the whole of 
 Niphal, P[el, and Hithpael: as, ''i^^/r''?.- I paf^secl 
 away; "'^ppr' I have walked frequeutly ; ^7*?/^^^', <Scc. 
 But the Imperative and Future of Kal, and the whole 
 of IIiPiiiL are formed as if the root was *?|V : thus, 
 
 ^ m., ':hf. go, ^^ I will go, ^T\, \:?Sri, c^c. y^yr\ 
 
 lie made go, \. e. he led.— Tut. yb'l^, yh'^r\,Scc.—WYt. 
 yh\J2, !kc.
 
 1G2 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 The same remark will apply to several other verbs : as, ^1'i3 to be 
 good. — Part. 3113, r]2VCi, Sic.—Past tense, '^^'^^, ^i'\^ (like verbs of 
 the fifth conjugation), the root is therefore said to be Slti* But 
 the future is Ilt^'S*, np^-yi ; and Hipiiil, n^p^n, n^p^K (like verbs of 
 the fourth conjugation), the root is therefore said to be 3D^' 
 
 Thus, likewise, from the root "IJJ to fear, (fourth conjugation), we 
 have '7r\:\ I feared, Pllj:, &:c.; but Imp. '■^'ii'—Fut. 1-1JX, "l-lii?, &c. 
 from "l-1il (fifth conjugation). 
 
 From 73^ to be able, we have ''^V^l I tvas able ; hnt future, ??-1** 
 / sJiall be able, 73-in, &c. ; which is the future of Hophal, and means, 
 lit. / .sliall be made able, or / shall be enabled. 
 
 From nhK' to drink, we have ''n''n^ / drank, i^?^'^ / shall drink. 
 But Hiphil is formed from Hp^' : thus, ni^t^'n be caused to drink, 
 np.^"St / shall make drink (not ^^'^'k^, i^I?v'^*). 
 
 QuadrUitcral and Phirilltcral Verbs, 
 
 147. Verbs whose roots consist of four letters, are 
 denominated Qtiadriliterals ; those that consist of 
 more than four letters, are denominated Fluv'Uitcrals : 
 as, 7375'|- to support, maintain ; r'^n/Sj: to linger y 
 delay ; *)n")np to turn about, to flatter, palpitate. 
 
 lliese are, strictly speaking, derivative verbs, and are found 
 only in 7j^3, 7>^I3 and 7j^5nn. Tliey are inflected in the 
 
 * To the above may be added, what are by Grammarians called 
 mixed forms : as, for instance, ^"^T. (Psalm viii. 6) in which the first 
 and third vowel shews the Avord to be in Kal ; but the second 
 vowel and the dagesh are the signs of Piiir,. 
 
 t Derived from ^13 to contain, comprehend, sustain. 
 
 "j: Used only in H/th. : >!}'^'^^r^'?7 to sfa// (Exod. xiii.), probably 
 compounded of i^^ /chat : indicative of dcla>/, lingcrincj.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. lf>3 
 
 same manner as otlier verbs : thus, Inf. and Imp. h'i')'2- Fut. 
 ^^^m—Part. act. h^h^f^—Part. pas. hph:^^.-Past tense, 
 '^^7^7^' Pual, 7^72 to be supported, maintained, 7573^, 
 &c. ; and Hitlipael (by analogy) SsSsfin, &c. 
 
 In the same manner, we have from J^K^^^ to delight, take 
 pleasure. Hithpael, ''P^V.^V.^^i^ I have amused myself, took 
 delight in : and from IH^riD, I^DriDfin • 
 
 Ed'ercise. 
 
 °™x^lBnx| |\s*p nn^'^^ °n»N^l ^nitTj'^ Dm ° 151^.1 
 'dSh •n^ws; nibSn.n n^* s)pr 'ojdt^i : inx ^n'^sn 
 
 TV V • ; • I •• V •• -; V - V t ; • 
 
 1 Instead of n^n^.1,— I^oot nsn 2 Root Ib3, Hip. ^3n io re- 
 coqnize. — Hith. to make one's self appear a stranger, to feign or to 
 pretend not to know. ^ 1^^**1^ hard, roxigh. "* To jmrchase, cliiefly 
 food or corn ; hence "^^^ and "I3 corn. ^ Food, from ?2^* ** "i^T 
 to remember. ^ Wc dreamed, hence Dl^n a dream. ^?.?"1P a 
 spy, from ^)n to travel about' on foot, to explore, originally derived 
 hom^Xl the foot. ^ Root nx"). ^o The nakedness. "Root, 
 
 nW to send. ^- Root, np^- ^'^ Root, ibX to bind. '-• Root, j'na
 
 ,"^. ^/S .^ ^ jC^t>-f.c*j> j/^ '^ /kc^\- 
 
 164 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 mbx^^l \w^\ T\^^'p '"ntt^tt Sx Dnx '■'°5|b^.;.l :D?i:^5< 
 Bsi^tJ^n n^54i np>^?. nnt^ Byn.s* *Dn« ="D''53 D^5 :''xn; 
 
 . .... . _ • . . . _ _ ^ . ^ .. _. . T 
 
 p^^^1 ''"JEl ♦ n^-TD rrn^n ^ij^Sx nxs t3-Sj^_ ^^y^^^ 
 '"^KDnij Sn* nb.s^ CD^'^Ni. ^ri"n^^ N*^n ^b^^ dhk 
 
 ''"Tl^n&O'^J^-S ''"^B!! ♦tDnr^ 'T^^'^ '-^ '1'?''' *^-^^''^ 
 pyp^'n^j Dri^*D °n|'5n Dn^'pi^. °i|iTi dh^^^^ni ^-:3k;^i 
 
 :D^b °^:d'7^i en'^'ibn St S'ln^ n« ^•^^wsb^'^i : 'ti^'^^ 
 
 /o try, to fvove. ^^ Root ^DS, 16 ^ prison, from "i^y' 'o guard. 
 17 Root, nby. IS Root n^n. 19 Root, «> to fear. 20 |3 ricjht, honest. 
 21 Root, "q'^;- 22 Hunger. 23 And they shall be verified. 24 gut 
 verily. 25 Db'5< ^ 6e (juilty. 26 Root, nk> 2; nny anguish. 28 Root, 
 pn ; in Hith. to beseech, entreat. 29 Root, '^'^V^ to exclaim, answer. 
 30 Nton ^0 szrt. 31 t^itj ^Q require. ^2 ^^ interpreter. ^3 Root S"^?* 
 ^'* Root, nb2 io ?<'ee^. ^'' Root, ^^^ /o return. ^^ Root, niV fo 
 
 command. ^'^ Root, ^7.^ to Jill. '^'^W a sack. ^9 Root, fnJ — T\7\- 
 40 Provision, from "I-1V to hunt. "^^ Root, ^'^%
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 165 
 
 Objective Pronominal Affixes. 
 
 148. The objective pronouns lue T^i^, thee "^n&s, 
 •^m..., //minx, her'nm, &c. (see Table IX.),are very 
 frequently expressed by fragments subjoined to the 
 different parts of the Imperative Mood, Past and 
 Future tenses of verbs transitive : as, ^^'IPI' visit-me, 
 '^^y^'2 bless-mQ, for np$ visit, 'T)^ me; "^l? bless, 'm 
 me. — "^l^p? he-visited me, ^^p'lS he-blessed me, for nj^JD 
 ^e i;i5/^e^ ^nx me, \n«, I["i5-_^'^fi-|p5 I-have-visited- 
 thee, for 'finN* '^mpl)-— inp^J^ or ^n^pt)^ I-shall-visit- 
 him, for int< np|^- 
 
 The following are the terminations by which the 
 objective pronouns are indicated. — 
 
 '^'^ me, '^ thee, \n. '^tliee,^. ior^n///w?, 'i^oxT\her. 
 ^i w^, W^ youym. \'2 you, i. Uthem,m. \thet7i,f*. 
 
 149. The manner in which these are affixed to 
 verbs, and the changes to which the vowel-points of 
 the latter are subject in consequence of the augmen- 
 tation, are exhibited in the following Tables. 
 
 Obs. — The affixes of the Infinitives and Participles will be found 
 in Table III. p. 56. 
 
 * These terminations are denominated objective pronominal af- 
 fixes, to distinguish them from the similar affixes which are added 
 to nouns, participles, and infinitives, to denote the pronouns, ??;//, 
 thf/, his, <5'C. (see Table II. III.) ; and from the terminations ^^, ^, 
 ^, &c., which are used to indicate the personal j^ronouns, J, thou, ^-c.
 
 166 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 : i3mni< n»!i Dfintoxi /nin^ =nDK DDnN* "'innn^ 
 
 T ; - -; T - V ; ;|- T ; - t v ; v ";"''■ 
 
 T '•• ; T :1 - T • T ; - -; : •-••:]- T •• I : • 
 
 • - T v;!-.' T ^- ""It;- ; ; v tI;*- 
 
 nnririvx^i A':^^h nby^i /':'\^^k^ ':'i^< in °Nnn \''>'^'i< 
 
 •• T v;iv- T T ; ^—.r- t :• • t t ~ • • 
 
 nxibn n':>n5 ^3 /nk» nSn:i n^^:b^ n^DwS °nx:ib''i 
 
 T ; • - T ; • ; t ; t ; • I ; - t v t ; • - 
 
 "1: • : ■•.••; t •• -; t • •• ; t t ~ ; • ; 
 
 1 :inS /o Zoz'e. ' lbi< <o say. ^ Hqw * ^<J'^ to /?ffto. ^ To be rare, 
 esteemed. ^ Thou art honorable. ^ i^?? a daughter-in-law . 
 
 ^"1''^ to bring forth, to hear children. " My husband. ^^Is it not, 
 behold. 1^ The end, extremity of. '" They are many. ^^ Violence. 
 ^* To forsake. ^^ To keep, preserve. ^^ 1^5 ^^ guard, watch. ^^ "133 
 to honor. ^^p2D to embrace. ^9 np^ Hip. to TJiaA'e drink. '-^0 n3» 
 V , ^ , to reprove. 
 
 r^Ti '' n ^u^ 
 
 r
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 1G7 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 Particles. 
 
 150. Under this term, the ancient grammarians 
 comprehended all such words as are used for the 
 purpose of defining, explaining, or modifying either 
 the principal parts, or the whole of a sentence, and 
 of showing the relation and connection between its 
 several members ; and hence they justly extended 
 this denomination even to the Article and the Pro- 
 nouns. Modern grammarians, however, have limited 
 this term to Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunc- 
 tions, and Interjections ; and in this restricted 
 sense we shall henceforth use it. 
 
 151. Particles are divided into Inseparable and 
 Separable — 
 
 The Inseparable are parts of words attached to 
 others, with which they are incorporated : such are 
 the n and D in n>ns* towards-^//e-A///^/, )*»V^ from- 
 the-land; — the ^ and^ in |*"JN7') Q.nd-to-t/tc-laficL (See 
 Prefixes, pp. 37 — 39.) 
 
 152. The Separable consist of entire words: as, 
 r\r\V. now, Di*n to-day, D^V during the day, D'^3^ for- 
 merly, ^2lfi7 before, 0$p because, 7j^ upon, [S so, ^X not, 
 ^t?^n welly Tmo, "iriD soon, quickly, V.^'l^ icherefore^ 
 p behold, T\'l'r\ come ! go to !
 
 168 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 153. Many particles admit of the pronominal 
 affixes (page 58). These must be rendered either 
 by the Personal, Possessive, or Objective Pronouns, 
 according as the idiom of the English language may 
 require it: thus — 
 
 P^«l wo«, ^|5''NI notl, or /am not,'^^^ not thov, or tJioii-art-not; 
 
 ty"*_ there-exists, '^P'' Tiiou-existest, or thou-art ; liSJ'^ he- 
 exists, or he is. 
 
 n*J<,"'X where, in u-hat place? S^^where-is-nv.} '^^^where-'aLxe- 
 they? 
 
 77^5 on account, for the sake, ^y7^'2for-MY-sa7ce; 1|77^5/. 
 for-THY-sak€,^'277^'2for-YOVR-sake. (See Art. 28.) 
 
 Tw)] besides, except, '^Ty?)} besides-ME; ^H/^T besides, or ex- 
 
 Cept-THEE. 
 
 ''^Sh before, '^^^h before-ME, '^'^)^^h before-r hee ; 1''J|^ 6e- 
 f or e-HiM. 
 
 154. Most of the particles are either nouns in their absolute or 
 constructive state, adjectives, pronouns, or verbs*, used for the pur- 
 pose of modification. Many of them are compounded of several 
 
 * I do not wish to be understood as if I meant to intimate that 
 particles might not, in their turn, have given birth to other vi'ords : 
 on the contrary, I think it highly probable that several adjectives, 
 nouns, and even rerhs owe their origin to them. Thus, ^?^ to be 
 full, ^5?^ full, are probably compounded of HD what, ^ not, i. e. 
 what will not contain more ; 1^9 to refuse, from i"!^ and P^ not ; 
 nin calamit//, from ''in alas ! wo ! J-IS to be distracted, to be in a 
 wavering, uncertain state of mind, from I^ perhaps (itself derived 
 from ni)S to turn). See Aben Ezra in ^inv, and Kimchi in CD"'K'"C' 
 on the word n3-1DJ<- (Psalm Ixxxviii. 15.)
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 1G9 
 
 words ; others are abbreviated or elliptical expressions, or exclama- 
 tions, used for the purpose of soliciting attention : thus — 
 
 i^^V. is evidently derived from riy time, and means present time; 
 and hence, vow. 
 
 ^''^f? is evidently the noun D^^3 (iJie face, countenance, front), 
 in its absolute state, with the prefix ^; and means, literally, to-the- 
 face, and hence, formerly, forwards. 
 
 \J?? is the same noun, in its constructive state, with the prefix 7 ; 
 and means, literally, to-the-face-of, and hence before. 
 
 ^A?P is the same noun, with the prefix ^, and means, literally, 
 from-the-face-of, or from that which is before, in front ; and as every 
 cause necessarily ])recedes the effect, this word came to signify cause 
 or because. From the same source are derived, \^??P (compounded 
 of ''^.? /^"iP) awaij from, from-fhe-presence-of ; \^?"7j? upon-the- 
 surface-of, ^^c. 
 
 DT'D to-day, is the noun Ql'' with the definite H; Wi. this day; 
 and *D9V by day, during the day, is evidently derived from the 
 same noun. 
 
 ^y upon, is derived from ""IPJ^-j- to ascend. From the same root 
 are derived i^pV.p upwards, ^VJ^^ from-above, &c. 
 
 )3 so, is derived from the verb J-IS the primary signification of 
 which is, to adapt, to adjust ; and hence, to 'prepare, to establish, to 
 fashion. From I? are formed i?^ it is so, truly, behold, i?7 therefore, 
 1?"?^ upon this, lienceX. 
 
 * Several other adverbs have this termination : as, CI?"'! ivith- 
 empty-hands (from P''?. emptiness, vacuity). — D3n gratuitously, with- 
 out cause (from ID grace, favour). — This termination, is, however, 
 not peculiar to adverbs, as several nouns have the same : thus, OpD 
 a ladder, o7\]} eternity. 
 
 t Kimchi derives this particle from the noun ^JJ the upper part, 
 which, however, is itself derived from i^^J(* 
 
 :{: For further explanation of this particle, see Vindiciac Hcbraica;, 
 page 52.
 
 170 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 r*? is the constructive form of 1!!!?, which signifies non-existence, 
 not extant. Its antithesis is ^*\, which means, actual existence, real 
 leing ; and hence, ^\* there-is- in-heing, extant, there exists. 
 
 2P*n loell, is the infinitive (Hiph.) of the verb '^'^\ to he good, 
 and means, literally, io-make-good. 
 
 "ir"? soon, quickly, is the infinitive or imperative of "intt to hasten. 
 
 '"'?'7 ^0 to! is a derivative from ^HJ to give, yield. 
 
 n2''X ichere, is compounded of ''*?, a particle of interrogation, and 
 ns here ; and nb''X, T\y^ how, of ''^, and n3 thus. 
 
 y-no is compounded of HD what, and J^•'^^^ (or, according to 
 Kimchi, from 'IJD and V"!) literally, w^a< /*• known ? what is the 
 motive or impelling cause ? From ^D comes likewise '^^i'' literally, 
 <o tvhat, i.e. for ivhat purpose? and iT33 /^oit; many? how long? 
 literally, as-ivhat, i. e. as what number ? as what time ? 
 
 HTS here, H-TO hence, are compounded of the demonstrative HT i^/s, 
 and the separable particles 2 and O, lit. j« this, frum-tliis : the word 
 place being understood. 
 
 155. There are, indeed, many particles — as, for 
 instance, N7 not, p, T[^T\ behold I '*np when, CDX zy, 
 •provided, &c. — whose etymology is less obvious ; for 
 which reason, it may be supposed, they have been 
 considered by some grammarians 2.% ■primitives . It is, 
 however, very probable, that even these are deriva- 
 tives. Thus, ^j7 is probably derived from HX/ to be 
 ivtary, to be exhausted, to labour in vain; and hence 
 
 * In Chaldaic ri'*S, Syriac Ki.\, Arabic / J^jy In these languages 
 it is used negatively riv, ny (compounded of ^ and ri"'X) there is 
 not. In Hebrew, however, we find it only once (Psalm cxxxv.) used 
 in combination with the negative particle T?^ (Psalm cxxxv. 17) ; 
 and then it is a pleonasm, as P?? already expresses the notion of 
 non-existence.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 171 
 
 nxpn beyond, far off, out of reach. \T\, T\'^T}^ xn are 
 probably mere exclamations for the purpose of soli- 
 citing attention ; '•HO icJicn, at icJiat ti/nc? appears to 
 be a compound of Htt w/iat, and H^. ti)tie; and CX if (if 
 needs we must have a triiiteral (or a root) is, perhaps, 
 derived from Ub'i< to be attached, ?'elated, connected*. 
 
 ]5C). The great influence which these words have 
 in discourse, as well as their frequent occurrence, 
 renders it highly desirable that the student should 
 become familiar v/ith their general signification. For 
 this purpose the following list, containing most of the 
 particles not already noticed is here subjoined : — 
 
 * The primary signification of the primitive from which this and 
 several other words are derived, appears to be correlativeness, or 
 the reciprocal relations between distinct objects, neither of which 
 could exist in a perfect state, or, in some instances, even be con- 
 ceived without the other : as, for example, D^ the female j^arent, 
 the mother ; ^^^ the truth, i. e. the exact conformity of human 
 conceptions with the real nature of things, and between our 
 thoughts and words or actions. And hence the secondary meaning 
 of union, attachment, accompaniment, integrity, completeness, per- 
 fection, &c., as found in the following words, I^IX, DlXy, r[12ii a 
 nation, kingdom, DJJ a people ; JT'PJ^ an associate neighbour ; r^JSy 
 corresponding ; n^V? towards, opposite ; Di<n to entwine, D^pS^ 
 twins, iP5< a foster-father, 1^?.'?'^ a foster-mother, DP) innocent, com- 
 plete, upright, CPJ^I perfect ; 1^^, i^JI'^^ fnith, confidence, adherence. 
 Hence, likewise, the particle ^V with (accompaniment), and D^5 if 
 (attach, or add, as a condition). Thus, '^i7^\ ''^V ^^^^l D^5 if tlwu 
 wilt go with me, then toil' I go, i.e. attach as a condition of my going, 
 that thou go with me ; or the condition on which my going depends, 
 is thy accompanying me.
 
 172 
 
 THE ETYMOLOGY OF 
 
 Ltac* J hut, yet, neverthe- 
 T -: (. less, indeed. 
 
 *in> n^ii^. ^i^^ \ ah / M;oe / alas ! 
 
 nn, nriiV} J 
 
 iX-iX, iiS* or, or— either 
 
 ^ /-li*} perhaps, suppose. 
 Uy\'i^ surely, verily. 
 
 T 
 
 ^TK? T^^ /Ae^z, at that time. 
 
 nin5< 
 
 ^ hack, backward, he- 
 
 S hind. 
 T\'^'TT\'^^ backwards. 
 
 y^'^)^after, behind, be- 
 
 bis*?, t05^ sloivly, softly. 
 nS''^5 i"^*^' "*^ where, ivhere 7iow ? 
 
 nb\s% n^N* ^ 
 
 V /?o?<', 2?j ivhat man- 
 '^'^.r\:^y^ ner? 
 
 N^, h^^ pN* ) 
 
 ^^^''^i noiv, then. 
 p J' =J^^ o?27_y, scarcely, but. 
 
 'h^ if. 
 
 77v? woe to me ! 
 ?s/ U5s if not, unless. 
 
 T ; T ^ 
 
 m^ last niyht. 
 
 '°'^^' (^ ivhither. 
 
 ■^ "^ ■^ ( entreaty. 
 
 D5, l^i*{ '^^so, even, likewise. 
 
 ( Aoit' »n<c7/ more, 
 ■? ^v: ) /^oM* much less. 
 
 DSw^ except, only. 
 
 7^}< ?iear, c7ose 6?/. 
 
 
 yesterday. 
 
 sign of the objective 
 
 ^riK? nt^ ei'iV/i, z^/^/i me. 
 
 ^h>^l 
 
 on account of, for 
 ( the sake. 
 
 p!3 between. 
 
 ^73 «o^, without. 
 
 ^J^/S unless, without, not. 
 
 ^*tl?73 SfU'e, besides. 
 
 ^"^ enouyh. 
 
 T\^T\ aha ! exultation. 
 
 T V 
 
 Di/H hither, here. 
 
 1*!)|7 besides, without. 
 dtO "''^ ^Z^'"' before. 
 Vin^ nri* toyether, tinited. 
 
 1^^^ when, if, for, that, 
 '• ( because, but.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 173 
 
 S* 
 
 T " 
 
 tt;| t t t 
 
 T — ; • 
 
 as, (hereabouts. 
 
 alone, only, besides. 
 
 ) would ! I wish, 
 ) perhaps. 
 
 ivere it not. 
 
 in order. 
 
 very. 
 
 sinee. 
 
 whence. 
 
 within. 
 
 n'ilhont, externally. 
 
 S over, against, to- 
 ^ ivards. 
 
 to-morrotv. 
 
 heloWf doivnwards. 
 
 beneath. 
 
 a little, few. 
 
 very little, 
 
 before, opposite. 
 
 round about. 
 
 ^IV.] "^'l lentil, till. 
 
 my ayain. 
 
 nin "Tj^ until now. 
 
 Jpy. because. 
 
 TV " unanimously. 
 
 Dyj once. 
 
 ^'!^V.p. twice. 
 
 n)i^T)Q suddenly. 
 
 DDn. emptily. 
 
 : • ( terday. 
 
 T\W ti^ there, thither. 
 
 T T T ' 
 
 nrirl beneath, instead. 
 
 T'pn constantly, always.
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Introductory Observations. 
 
 157. Syntax is that part of Grammar which treats 
 of the significance of the inflections of words com- 
 bined with their relative positions. 
 
 By the method adopted in the preceding part of this work, many 
 of the syntactical rules have necessarily been anticipated. These 
 we shall here collect, and add such as have not already been 
 noticed. But before we proceed, we think it advisable to make 
 some general remarks on the nature of propositions and their con- 
 stituent parts. 
 
 158. A proposition is an assemblage of words or 
 oral signs, representing- a judgment of the mind. 
 
 159. As every judgment necessarily includes two 
 conceptions, one of which is affirmed or denied of the 
 other, it follows that every proposition must have two 
 terms, one answering to that conception which is 
 the primary object of the mind's contemplation, and
 
 SYNTAX OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 175 
 
 which is denominated the subject*, the other cor- 
 responding with that which the mind judges to be 
 or not to be congruous with the subject. The second 
 term is denominated the prkdicate or attribute. 
 Further, as in every judgment there necessarily must 
 be an act of the mind which decides whether the 
 two conceptions are or are not congruous, every 
 proposition ought to have a word or sign to indicate 
 this mental decision. This word or sign is deno- 
 minated the COPULA. 
 
 Ohs. 1. — But though every proposition necessarily consists of 
 these three parts, yet it is not alike needful that each part should 
 be expressed by a separate word ; for as we shall presently see, 
 when the predicate is a verb, the copula is in all languages included 
 in it, and when the subject happens to be a pronoun and the predi- 
 cate a verb, the three parts may, in Hebrew, be expressed in a 
 single word. 
 
 Obs. 2. — The grammatical term for the subject is the Nominative. 
 When the predicate implies action, the subject or nominative is like- 
 wise called the acjent. 
 
 IGO. In the following propositions — ' God is om- 
 nipotent.' 'Water is a fluid.' ' This water is hot.' 
 * This water is not cold.'— -The words God, ivater, are 
 the subjects ; omnipotent, fluid, hot, cold, are the pre- 
 dicates ; and is, the copula. 
 
 • The subject is denominated in Hebrew, ^'^'"^^ the carrier or 
 bearer, because it supports, as it were, the other parts of the pro- 
 position ; the predicate is denominated fc^-ltJ'J that which is carried 
 or borne.
 
 176 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 161, Obs. 1. — The 1st and 2)}d propositions in the preceding 
 examples are denominated Absolute propositions, because the pro- 
 perties expressed by the predicates are essential to their respective 
 subjects, and belong to them under every possible condition. Such 
 propositions can have no reference to time; their copulas are there- 
 fore merely assertory. But the 3rd and 4th examples are denomi- 
 nated Contingent propositions, because the qualities denoted by the 
 predicates are not essential to the subjects, and may exist conjointly 
 with them at particular times, and not at others ; and hence in all 
 such propositions the copula must express the time, as, — The water 
 is hot, was hot, will be cold, &c. 
 
 162. 0^5. 2. — In English, as well as in most languages, the 
 copula is generally represented by some part of the verb ' to be*. 
 This is likewise mostly the case in Hebrew, in propositions which 
 refer to past or future time : as, "K^t^ ''T^'^\y} (^) I was a hing, ''^''.J}^ 
 7n5 (B) I shall be great. But in all absolute propositions, or in 
 contingent propositions which refer to present time, the copula is 
 omitted, and inferred from the juxtaposition of the words : as, 
 p^-^V D'n$X (c) God (isf) i«<s<.— Vn| D'\sn (d) The man (is) great. 
 \iy)1\) nm (E) Thou {art) holy .—or the pronouns r^^\}, S*^^, ^5•■|^, 
 nsn, are used to represent the copula : as, ^''n^^? ^^-IH '"'JH^. (j) 
 The Lord is God,—'ry^^r\ N^n r()n>_^ nsi;. (^) The fear of the Lord 
 is wisdom. 
 
 Words employed to express the Subject. 
 
 163. The subject may be a Noun (as in Prop. c. 
 D. F.); or a Pronoun, the substitute of a noun (as 
 
 * This verb is often used to express simple existence : as, God is, 
 in which case it is itself the predicate. 
 
 •f The words within crotchets are not expressed in Hebrew.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 177 
 
 in Prop. E.); or an Adjective, or an Lijinitive. (See 
 Prop. H. and i. Art. 1G4.) 
 
 164. As every conception implies an existence, real or imaginary, 
 it would follow that the subject and the predicate, each of which 
 represent an existence (Art. 159.), ought to be nouns or names of 
 existences ; nevertheless, as each being may be distinguished from 
 every other by some quality, property or circumstance,, it is often 
 sufficient to express the quality, property, S:c.^ without mentioning 
 the noun to which they belong ; and hence an adjective may often 
 be used as the subject or as the predicate : thus, V^P "IDI. ^*X ^J"? 
 (") A wise {man)feareth, and departeth from evil, lit. A wise (man is) 
 a fearer and departer from evil. Further, as the mind is able, by the 
 faculty of abstraction, to view a quality, &c., without reference to the 
 particular object to which it may belong, an Abstract noun or an 
 Injiniiive (name of an action) may be used as the subject, or as the 
 predicate*: thus, nj^3 yiO IIDI H^pH i<^n n\n] r^i^y_ The fear of 
 the Lord is wisdom ; and to depart from evil (is) understanding. 
 
 Wo?Yh used for the Predicate. 
 
 1G5. The Predicate may be a Noun (as in Prop. 
 A. Art. 162.): — an Adjective (as in Prop. b. Art. 162.) : 
 or a Verb, in which last case the copula is, even in Eng'- 
 lish, included in the predicate : thus, 1!?J^ CDrTn!l{:> 
 Abraham stood, "^1^5^ I stood ; which expressions are 
 equivalent to 1'd\'^ rT^H Dn*]^i< Abraham was standings 
 "l^iy '•n*'''.!! / was standing. 
 
 * Hence we see the reason why, in such instances, the Hebrew 
 adjectives must be varied by gender and number : thus, '""??^> 
 D-Mq- (See adjectives, Art. 85.)
 
 178 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 Thus likewise 'I walk,' 'He writes,' 'She writes,' 
 may be resolved into ' I am walking,' ' He is writ- 
 ing,' &c. 
 
 166. Ohs. 1. — As the Hebrew verb has no form to express time 
 present, the participle ( a noun) must be nsed as the predicate, in 
 all such instances : Thus nnnis N^H, nnb i^-IH, ^VlH >35<, Lit. 
 I am a walker. He is a writer, &c. (See Art. 17, 124.) 
 
 167. Obs. 2. The past and future tenses of the Hebrew verb 
 being so constructed as to include the personal pronouns, (see 
 verbs) all propositions in which the subject is a pronoun, and the 
 predicate a verb, may be expressed by a single word ; as, 3^*^ He 
 dtvelt, ^^^ I shall dwell. But the unavoidable consequence of 
 this construction of the verb is, that when the subject is a noun, 
 or a distinct pronoun, and the predicate a verb, there will, appa- 
 rently, be two subjects, one represented by the noun or the distinct 
 pronoun, and the other by the pronoun inherent in the form of the 
 verb : thus, ^^\ Dnni^X Abraham he dwelt.— 'T\2}^\ ^3i< / I-dwelt.* 
 "^ipnV '"ll^ Sarah she-laucjhed. However, as the two subjects refer 
 to the same thing, they must be considered as in Apposition ; and 
 in translating such phrases into English, the pronoun must be 
 omitted : thus, ^''ij^^. ""^^'"l And God said, (not, and he said God, 
 nor, and he God said.) 
 
 168. Obs. 3. — The verbal form can, in English, be used only 
 where the predicate implies action, passion, or their contraries, 
 want of action or passion, or a state of being, dependent in some 
 measure on the will or inherent power of the subject : as, / walk, 
 run, suffer, sit, &c. ; but when the predicate expresses quality or 
 
 * Sometimes, however, the distinct pronouns are purposely intro- 
 duced for the sake of emphasis.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 179 
 
 quantity (coming under the predicaments how, and how muc/i), the 
 predicate can only be formed by an adjectice accompanied by the 
 copula : as, / am, ivas, shall be wise, little, great, &c. In Hebrew, 
 however, the predicate may assume a verbal form, although it ex- 
 presses the notions of quality or quantity : as, TlyC I was sick, 
 ^?n.! he shall be wise, ^IV. he shall be great. Or it may, as in 
 English, be formed by an adjective and the copula : thus, HPin ''T\'^\y\ 
 I was side, I33n i^'!J}\ lie shall be unse. 
 
 169. Obs.A. — When the predicate is a verb, the proposition may, 
 for the sake of distinction, be denominated verbal; but when the 
 predicate is a noun or an adjective, the proposition may be termed 
 novtinal. Such propositions occur very frequently in Hebrew: as, 
 "1??^ npn |^*n ]*7 Wine (is a) vmcher, strong drink {is a) blusterer 
 (Prov.xx. 1) ; i^73^? ri"l.t?y. ?."*n T\^^ a virtuous icoman (is a) crown of 
 [to] her husband (Prov. xii. 4). 
 
 Concord between the Subject and its Predicate. 
 
 170. The predicate must agree with the subject 
 ill gender and number, and (if a verb) in person. 
 There are, however, several exceptions to this rule, 
 which will be noticed hereafter. 
 
 06s.— When the predicate is a noun (Art. 105), it must, even in 
 English, agree, in some instances in gender, and always in number ; 
 as, he is a prince, she is a frincess, they arc princes, &c. But when 
 the predicate is an adjective, the agreement is entirely neglected : 
 as, he is wise, she is wise, Sec. In Hebrew, however, the predicate 
 must always agree with its subject; and it would be as improper to 
 say Vna nL**Sri or "^i"!! D''L''3Xri as it would be to say "^^9 '"'v'*'^'? <ii' 
 •ri^D D^C':^?^• (Sec Art. 85) 
 
 N
 
 180 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 Of the several k'uids of Propositions. 
 
 171. Propositions may be distributed into General, 
 Indefinite, Particular, Simple, Compound, Tncomple.v, 
 and Complex. 
 
 172. A General proposition is that which has a 
 general term, representing a whole class of beings 
 for its subject : as, "l/V Sp^/ Dli^ man is born unto 
 trouble. 
 
 173. An Indefinite proposition is that which has 
 an indefinite noun for its subject : as, D*!?^ t^!3 a man 
 came, ^^?S D'*t^^5*{ men came. 
 
 Ohs. — As the Hebrew has no indefinite article, the context alone 
 can decide whether a proposition is general or only indefinite (see 
 Art. 35). In some instances, however, the word ''HN m. T\'r\^ f. one, 
 is used for the indefinite article: as, li?T in!;^ 5<'*23 an old prophet 
 (2 Kings xiii. 11) ; Onx Hi^'X one woman (2 Kings iv. 1) ; lit. one old 
 prophet, one woman.* 
 
 174. A Particular proposition is that in which the 
 subject is a term relating to a particular individual, 
 or to particular individuals. Such terms are the 
 personal and demonstrative pronouns, proper names, 
 and common nouns whose general signification is 
 restricted by some definite term. 
 
 * Hence the origin of the indefinite article, a, an; German, ein, 
 cine ; French, nn, tine.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 181 
 
 175, A Simple proposition is that which has only 
 one subject and one predicate. (See the preceding- 
 examples.) 
 
 176. A Cumpouml pro])osition is that which has 
 several subjects or several predicates, or both : as, 
 
 D^Jpl rr\}^\ Dri^nx* Abraham ami Sarah {were) old 
 (Gen. xviii) ; ^nhl Ph nn^H pXH") and the earth 
 was formless and void (Gen. i. 2); His*?! Sh'I ]^P\\ 
 n^l^xni and Rachel and Leah answered and said 
 (Gen.xxvi. 14); ^) ^^11 DH^DIDI h^ ^h\ D>v{ D^.p^l 
 TVr\ and the Egyptians {are) men, and not God ; and 
 their horses (are)Jlesh, and not spirit (Isa. xxxi. 3). 
 
 177. Obs. — In compound propositions there is generally an 
 ellipsis either of one of the subjects or of one of the predicates: thus, 
 the first example is equivalent to 'Abraham was old,' and ' Sarah 
 was old ; ' and the second, to ' The earth was formless,' and ' The 
 earth was void.' The same is the case with the other examples. 
 
 178. An Inco7nplex proposition is that in which 
 the subject and the predicate are each expressed by 
 a single word, as *^/D NIH lie {is a) king ; DpH "^/?3n 
 the king {is) luise. 
 
 179. A Complex proposition is that in which 
 either the subject or the predicate, or both, are ex- 
 pressed by several words, some of which serve to 
 explain, define, or qualify the leading words : as — 
 
 n2
 
 182 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 N3 )ir\'^ '^)^T} ''ii<(')/ tliy-father-in-laiv Jethro (am) 
 "^ • ' '■' " ■ cominc). 
 
 IjS^n l^"^ Mjf<") This i^is) David the-hing. 
 
 ^^jSjb an Si:?"^^^^ ^P/'^^*'^ C^'/^'^) Inngs-oJ Ismel are kiiuja of 
 ■■■■- ■■ -■■• ^^^- vm-cy* 
 
 C^X 'ly^ {^^^ *|^ pyy") A^«a?«f/H, captain-of {the) host-of 
 '^"- ' ■■■ ' i • ^ ■ . "" C^^'^) kiiig-of Syria, was a great 
 
 7)1^ l^''i^ n^tl ^iian. 
 
 J^^^^Lt N*^^? 'IK'X ^^^T] C) ne /Hf/» «■« ivhose-hand the cup 
 T ^ . ^. ' . . '•. ^ ivas found, he shall be a slave. 
 
 nny T\'rv ^s*^^ it*!! -^ 
 
 180. Obs. 1. — The several words forming a complex term may 
 "be either so many names for the same object, which is thus, as it 
 were, presented, for the sake of distinction, imder difFereut points of 
 view: such, for instance, are the several words, /, thy -father-in-law, 
 Jethro, (the subject of Prop, a.) and the words David the king, (the 
 predicate of Prop, e.) : or the several words may be names o^ dif- 
 ferent objects, between which there may subsist one of those nume- 
 rous relations denoted in many languages by the genitive case, and 
 by the possessive case,f or the preposition of in English ; such, for 
 instance, are the words which represent the subject and predicate of 
 Prop. c. Now, when the first happens to take place, the several 
 words are said to be in apposition, and must agree in case, that is, 
 they must be in the same case in which the leading word happens to 
 be. But when the second happens to take place, one of the words 
 is said to govern the other in the genitive ; and in Hebrew, the word 
 which is defined must be in a state of construction (Art. 52), to dis- 
 tinguish it from the defining word or words: thus, "'??'? (not 0*??^). 
 
 * i. e. Merciful kings. 
 
 ■f It is almost needless to observe that possession is but one of 
 tlie numerous relations denoted by this case.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 183 
 
 The student will likewise observe that this mode of construction is 
 often used, where, in English, we should use an adjective (epithet) 
 as the qualifying word : thus, "IpH '^y^'O kincjs of ntercij, instead of 
 merciful kings. 
 
 181. Ohs. 2, — In Prop. d. the words representing the subject 
 are of a mixed nature, and one of those representing the predicate 
 is an adjective (epithet). 
 
 182. Obs. 3. — In Prop. e. the leading word ^''^H is defined by 
 a proposition. In such cases tbe leading word must be followed by 
 the relative "'P'^, or by its equivalents D, ^ (Art. 95, 100). 
 
 183. Obs. 4." — In all complex propositions, a distinction may be 
 made between the grammatical and the logical subject. Thus, the 
 grammatical subject, or the Nominative of the last example (Prop. 
 E.) is, tlte man. But the logical subject is, the man in whose hand 
 the cup teas found. The remark is equally applicable to the pre- 
 dicate. 
 
 184. From the preceding observations, it appears 
 that when two or more words come together, they 
 may form either an entire proposition, or only a part 
 of one. Now, as the copula is frequently omitted, the 
 student may often be at a loss to distinguish between 
 the one and tlie other. The following considerations 
 will, however, remove every difficulty. 
 
 The several words are either all indijinilc ; or they 
 are all dcjinite ; or some are indc/i/nte, and others 
 dejiuite. 
 
 Rule I. — When the words arc all indeji/iile, or all 
 definite (without the copula), they form only a part of 
 the proposition : thus —
 
 184 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 All Indefinite. 
 
 njopx n^'S A woman a widow, i. e. a ividow woman. 
 2S'J ^^ii A man (jood, i. c. a (jood man. 
 n3n"1-1 ni'lD yi^ A land (jood and extensive, i. e. a (jood and ex- 
 tensive land. 
 
 All Definite. 
 
 njtopxn n^'Kn The ivoman the ividow, i. e. the widow ivoman.* 
 
 31t3n Ii'''^5^ The man the good, i.e. the good man. 
 
 nnn'in'l niltsn ynxn The land the good and the extensive, i. e. the 
 good and the extensive land. 
 
 rf^Jpn nbV Solomon the king. 
 
 n;Tn Ei^'Xn The man the this, i.e. this man. 
 
 nyiil\ D''C*3Nn The men the these, i. e. tliese men. 
 
 ■^pinn ti"'Kn The man the goer, i. e. the man that goes. 
 
 Rule II. — But when one of the words is definitey 
 and the other indefinite, then the dehnite term, whether 
 simple or complex, is the subject, and the indefinite 
 term is the predicate ; thus — 
 
 * niWi? ^^^5^ The woman {is a) widow. 
 
 C''SnmL5or21t2ti'^i>n TJie man (is) good, or good is the man. 
 
 nirn-'l nrntO Y'}^^} The land (is) good and extensive. 
 
 t^''Sn rrr. This {is) the man\. 
 
 n^i^ONH rh^ These {are) the men. 
 
 ■^pin C"S<n The man goes. 
 
 * See the several examples — Art. 86, 98, 101, and the exercises 
 which accompany them. 
 
 '\ When the subject is a pronoun, the predicate may be either de- 
 finite or indefinite : as, t^""^ HflN thou {art a) man, t^'^NH nriS tJiou 
 (art) the man, t^•"'^<^ ''D icko {is) the man, t^lJ^ HD ivhat {is) man ?
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 185 
 
 Rule III. — In case two definite terms are to form 
 a proposition, the copula must be inserted : thus, — 
 K? ^?^f ^5^^ Ur\] ami Ham was the father of Canaan* 
 
 (Gen. ix. 18); nn^^ni^ H^^n Qw.s* nb^^D nrhr\\ 
 
 Nin D\'lSx* nn5^ and the tables were {the) work of 
 God, and the writing was {the) ivriting of God'\ (Ex. 
 xxxii. 16). 
 
 185. Propositions are likewise divided into Af- 
 Jirmative and Negative. 
 
 An Affirmative proposition is that in which the 
 copula, whether expressed or understood, is not af- 
 fected by a negative particle];, as in most of the 
 preceding examples. 
 
 * Compare the phrase l^J? ''?^ QH Ham the father of Canaan, 
 ill verse 22, where it forms only a part of a sentence. 
 
 "|- The copula is, however, even in such cases, omitted, when no 
 ambiguity can arise from the omission: as, ^pV.- ?1p ^IpLl ///e voice 
 is {the) voice of Jacob ; ''?3? niJBn tlie daughters (are) my daughters. 
 It is likewise frequently omitted in the poetical books of Scripture, 
 where the style is intentionally concise and elliptical. 
 
 X A proposition may contain one or more negal/ces, and yet be 
 affirmative, provided the negative does not affect the copula. Thus, 
 Blessed (is) the man that walketh not in the counsel of the ungodig, 
 nor standeth in the tvag of sinners, &c. &c. (Ps. i. 1, 2), is an af- 
 firmative proposition ; being equivalent to, The man loho walketh not 
 in the counsel of, &c,, &c., is blessed.
 
 186 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 186. A Negative proposition is that in which the 
 copula is affected by one of the negative particles, 
 
 px, wsS, S«, ^3, ^n'p-i- 
 
 187. Ohs. — These particles are not synonymous, though they 
 all express negation. 
 
 r^ indicates the non-existence of the subject, and is therefore 
 chiefly used before nouns and participles, and in combination with 
 the personal pronouns: thus, 11311 Pipv pj? Joseph was not in the 
 jnt (Gen. xxxvii. 29), lit. Joseph existed not, &c. ; ■133''X n?*n the 
 child is not (Gen. xxx.), lit. the child, he exists not, or is not here ; 
 |?P1 £357 ini ''2I3"'X / loill not give you straiv (Ex. v. 10), lit. / am not 
 a giver of straw to you. 
 
 ^ indicates the non-existence of the predicate, and is therefore 
 chiefly used before verbs in the past and future : as, l^J X? he gave 
 not, ]'^\ N7 he shall not give ; thus, 7^ N7l. DnS HFIK signifies, thou 
 art a man, and not a god ; whereas ??? T^l would signify, and there 
 is no god. 
 
 ?? has the same signification as ^^, but is chiefiy used in poetry. 
 
 ^^ is chiefly used for exhorting, entreating, and wishing ; and is 
 therefore only used before verbs in the future. 
 
 ''^?3 is chiefly used before infinitives. 
 
 Subordinate Members of a Proposition. 
 
 188. The words explained in the preceding pages, 
 belong either to the subject or to the predicate, of which 
 they form a constituent part. But a proposition may 
 contain several other words, which, though they form 
 neither a part of the one, nor of the otlier, are yet
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 187 
 
 necessary to complete the sense* : such, for instance, 
 are the words VnX"73"nx, and ^^HS, in the follow- 
 ing sentence, nnriS Vnis*"':'3-nx :inn*l and he slew ail 
 his brethren with the sword. Such likewise are the 
 words ^nSTlN*— nn D^\N{'7— ntTw^jS in the following 
 verse— ncr'^S^ n|n 0'iih W^ ^rl!l■^^^ / gave my 
 daughter to this man for a wife. These are generally 
 denominated the complements or the subordinate parts 
 of a proposition; and, like the principal parts, they 
 may either be definite or indejinite, complej: or in- 
 compleT. 
 
 189. Ohs. I. — The subordinate members are, in some languages, 
 distinguished from the more essential parts by particular termina- 
 tions (cases). In Hebrew, they are indicated by the prefixes 0^33 
 and by the particle H^ (Art. 40, 41). Or, as in English, by pre- 
 positions. 
 
 190. Ohs. 2. — The subordinate parts are chiefly reyidated by the 
 nature of the predicate and its signification. For when the predicate 
 is an active transitive verb, it must be accompanied by a word or 
 words on which the action falls (the objective nx) ; and when it de- 
 notes causative action (Hiphil), it often requires two objective cases. 
 If it signify (jiving, delivering, restoring, 8j'C., it will require both an 
 objective and a dative case (? or ^^?). If it imply motion, the place 
 where the motion begins, or from which it originates (IP or ^) and 
 where it terminates (7 or ?^ or ^J^) must often be expressed. 
 
 * This will generally be the case when the judgment or affirma- 
 tion of the mind respects an event, incident, or contingent act ; or 
 briefly, in narrative sentences.
 
 188 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 191. Ohs. 3. — Sometimes we wish to express the instrument Avith 
 which (3)) the purpose for which (7)5 or the place and time in which 
 (3) the action is performed, or the intention and remission of the 
 action or attribute (adverbs), and so on with regard to a variety of 
 other circumstances, all of which must he considered as so many- 
 subordinate parts of a proposition. 
 
 192. Obs. 4. — Amongst these, may likewise be reckoned all words 
 and phrases which are apparently superfluous (pleonasms), but 
 which are introduced either for the purpose of additional explana- 
 tion, emphasis, or amplification : as, ^?*.'!!l"^^ ■li^^'!'!'! and-she-saw 
 him, the child, i.e. and she saw it, namely, the child, (Ex. ii. 6) . 
 Q?PD^P ^-in ''?J^ ''?2^ /, / am your comforter, i. e. /, even I, am, 
 &c. (Isa. li. 12) ; nnp^ K7 niDy_ '•3'] sing, barren ! ii'ho never bore 
 (Isa. liv. 1); nn^ ^'^l Jlj;-}^ an^J?^ ^ry ^W^i^'l and-I-tv ill-set 
 mine eye against them for evil, and not for good (Amos ix. 4). 
 
 193. Obs. 5. — The reverse of this grammatical figure is ellipsis, 
 by which some word or phrase is omitted, which must, however, be 
 supplied by the reader, in order to complete the regular or full 
 construction*. Of the omission of the copula we have already given 
 numerous examples. The following are examples of the omission 
 of other words ; Dlpan ^EJ'^N ^jnn*^ |Q— ^npS' -\l^i6 NT he feared 
 to-say — my-sister — lest-the-men-of the-place should-kill-me (Gen. 
 xxvi. 7), where the words N''^' she-is, and 1^^ ''? for-he-said, must 
 be supplied : ^''31'' — '^\^'')|. thine eyes (are) — doves, supply the word 
 
 * This species of ellipsis must not be confounded with the ellipsis 
 of parallelism, and which may, by way of distinction, be called met- 
 rical ellipsis. The latter is entirely artificial, and consists in omitting 
 in every alternate line a corresponding word or phrase used in the 
 first line. We have a perfect specimen of this species of poetical 
 composition in the hundred and fourteenth Psalm : but this is not 
 the place to enlarge on such a subject.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 189 
 
 ''?:'V. eycs-of (Cant. i. 15); ST\^^^ — tT'^SI iJQJ-t^"X -I^DX eat-ye each — 
 his- vine, and-each — his Jig-tree, ^-c, supply the word ""IQ the fruit 
 of (2 Kings xviii.31); n>b'j;— riwST np u-hat (is) this (that) Ihou- 
 hast-done, sup])ly 1"^'5^ (Gen. iii. 13) ; T?^ n'? ^}^% '''^P (Gen. 
 xxviii.), supply (n) "'?3 in the house of; ^91^'''. '1^ ^^^1 (Gen. 
 xliv. 25), supply (n) nxpi r/Hc/ from ; 'riX")^ >B vjssi (Ps. Ixvi. 17), 
 supply (3) 'SS li'ith my mouth ; D^D D3>« (Ps. cxiv. 8), supply (7) 
 C3^>^? f«/o « pooJ-of 
 
 The student will do Avell to impress the preceding remarks on his 
 mind, as many apparent obscurities and anomalies are entirely owing 
 to the omission of some word or inflection*, which may, however, be 
 easily supplied by the context. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Syntax of the Noun. 
 
 194. The definite H (p. 35), is used like them Eng- 
 lish, to direct the attention to a particular individual, 
 or to particular individuals, known either by their 
 universality, or pre-eminence, as having been pre- 
 viously mentioned, or as described by some circum- 
 stance : as, D'*p£?'n the Jieaven, 'y\^T\ the light (Gen. i.) ; 
 tJ^-liP^n the sauctiiary (Lev. xii. 4) ; "nV' ^^M D»*C ^^^^ 
 man whom he had formed (Gen. ii. 8). 
 
 195. The article is omitted: — 1st, before proper 
 nouns : — 2nd, before nouns in a state of construc- 
 
 * Sec Kimchi's IMkiiloi,, pp. 57, 58.
 
 190 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 tion* (See Art. 55) : — 3rd, before nouns having any 
 of the possessive pronominal affixesf (p. 42) ; be- 
 cause, as in all these cases the noun is already known 
 to refer to particular individuals, the article would be 
 superfluous. 
 
 196. Obs. 1. — Some proper names of countries, cities, &c., 
 do, however, sometimes take the article : as, "'J??^'!! the Gilead'l, 
 
 * There are apparently some exceptions to this rule ; as, for in- 
 stance, n"lb> npn'sn into the tent of Sarah (Gen. xxiv. 67) ; 7^?^ 
 Sn n^? the God of Beth~el (Gen. xxxi. 13) ; nn^n |n{<n the 
 ark of the covenant (Jos. iii. 14) : — but these are elliptical expres- 
 sions, in which the real noun in construction is omitted : thus, 
 mb SnX ri^nb^n into the tent, namely, {the) tent of Sarah, Sxri 
 % n^2 ■?« the God, namely, (the) God of Bethel. 
 
 t ^^nsn ^in? (Jos. vii. 21), r^^T))!^ (2 Kings xv. 16), and a few 
 others are exceptions. 
 
 I Most of the proper names were originally historical, or com- 
 memorative : as, "ly?? Galeed, i.e. heap of witness, from ?l a 
 heap, a mound, and IV « witness; "^SVP Mizpeh, i.e. a ivatchiny- 
 place, from i^'^"^ to look out, to ivatch (See Gen. xxxi. 47, 48, 49) ; 
 yt?^ GiLGAL, from 7?| to roll away, remove (Jos. v. 9) : or they 
 were epithetical, i. e. expressive of some distinguishing quality : as, 
 pj^p the white mountain ; >^^7 the hiyh city or place. In either 
 case they include a common name ; and hence w^e see the reason 
 why they are sometimes used with, and sometimes without the 
 article, according as they refer to the place alone, or in combination 
 Avith the circumstance from which the name is derived. In most 
 cases, however, the common name is omitted : thus, "lyp^Ll for 
 "^V?^ 1*").^ or IVpIlI Y'^^i in the same manner as we say ' The 
 Tliames,' for ' The Hirer Thames.'
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 101 
 
 hi^^^ the Gilxjul, P?/'n the Lebanon, 11"]-'^ the Jordan*'. (See 
 the Notes.) 
 
 107. Ohs. 2. — The article is used, tlioiigh omitted in Englisli, 
 when the noun stands for the whole species or kind: as, 0"|';?v' 
 ^^.^y.P '^^T. man looks to the ei/esf (1 Sam. xvi. 7), Hebrew, the man. 
 
 198. It is likewise used occasionally before nouns in the roea- 
 tive : as, C.^^'l) •1J''t^p (I'lve ear, O ye heacens ! lit. give ye ear, the 
 heavens ! 
 
 199. It is placed before adjeetives and demonstratwe pronouns, to 
 distinguish the epithet and definite from the predicate (see Art. 86, 98, 
 184) ; and before participles not having any of the possessive pro- 
 nominal affixes, instead of the relative pronoun (Art. 100). 
 
 200. When, therefore, a participle has the definite lI and a pro- 
 nominal affix, the latter must be rendered in English by the corres- 
 ponding objective pronoun: thus, ^?J^1'D who caused thee to go up 
 (Deut. XX. 1) ; Q-?y[?L' ivho caused them to go up ? (Is. Ixiii. 11). 
 
 Repetition of the Article. 
 
 201. The article must be repeated before every 
 noun| belonging to the same part of a proposition : 
 
 thus, nhinni a^tpa^^'^ni D\'pnri m^^ these are 
 
 * This word (HT-) is generally derived from "^"^X to descend ; but 
 it is probably a compound of ""*! river, and H Dan, the name of a 
 place near its source. 
 
 ■\ i. e. On the outward appearance. 
 
 I Except where the noun is already defined (Art. 193). See the 
 Avords nL*'mn "h^) and niH'' IT-n 1V1X in the next page.
 
 192 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 the statuks and judgments and Unvs (Levit. xxvi. 4G), 
 Hebrew, the judgments and the laws*. 
 
 (Josh. vi. 24.) : nin^ n^!i 
 
 T - ; • ; ~ : T ; I V ''■• T ••• -; ; - 
 
 (Deut. vii. 19.) : n;^D3n yhtni. Hj'^Tnn 
 
 202. This rule is equally applicable to the prefxes and affixes ; 
 and it matters not whether some of the nouns are in construction or 
 in apposition : thus — 
 
 1303 r-\yy>'q, ^3 t\§.\ in'-n ^yh\ Ss nxi 13? ^x^.ti^lTi?? Qn-inx ni>)i 
 
 ^«(i Abraham took Ishmael his son, and all that ivere born in Jiis 
 house, and all that were bought with his money, <^c. (Gen. xvii. 23). 
 
 Obs. — When the first of several terms in apposition is a proper 
 name, the prefix, Szc, is placed before the first, and omitted before 
 the rest, as in the preceding example, i^? ^^^^v'! J^^' But when the 
 proper name stands after the other terms, then the prefix, &c., must 
 be repeated before each of the terms: thus, 7'^^.'?^"."'^^ i^^Tl^ his son, 
 namely, Ishmael ; I^V? "'31X? to iny lord, to Esati (Gen. xxxii. 5) ; 
 
 pn>*:"ri^ — Tl'n^-nS "^33-nN ^rni"? (Gen. xxii. 2). 
 Additional Examples. 
 
 (Gen. xii. 1.) : Y^vS* M^SD*) •r|m^aQ1 '^^'-\^t^ "^'^ 
 
 (Gen. xiii. 2.) : ^noi p]D|| nj^^i nj<^ n^l wyy^) 
 '-m\ tvp"npTif pp^i^-n^l 'hn^'-m ^^mry-m 
 
 * The untranslated verses are inserted by way of exercise. 
 
 t The particle HK is, however, sometimes omitted : especially
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 193 
 
 (Ex. XXXV. 11.) : v:in^5■nm vi^rn^ vnn^-n^ vt^np 
 
 T T-; V ! T-..-'-: V T •; v t ti; 
 
 Din*^ "i-J^l '^jyh Vm) D^l (Ex. viii. 1-7.) : •Tj^yDi) 
 (Deut. xxiv. 2.) : n^^'r'x^i 
 
 T T ; - T ; 
 
 Case. 
 
 203. The Nominative may be known, as in 
 other languages, by its being the subject of the 
 proposition. 
 
 Ohs. 1. — When the predicate is a passive verb, the ohjeclive is 
 sometimes used instead of the nonnnatice : as, ""^^^ J^^ 2'^'-1*!! 
 and Moses teas hromjht hack (Ex. x.8); H^C "? 1^-. l(^t '/"'•'^ 
 land be given (Num. xxxii. 5) ; because, though the words ^L^'D 
 and Y'^'^y} are the subjects, they are nevertheless the objects of the 
 several actions. 
 
 204. Obs. 2. — The nominative is often found as if it v/cre de- 
 tached from the rest of the sentence ; in which case it is called the 
 Nominative Absolute : as, t'l^C "''' ^'"'"'^ ^''^ '^"^ "'^'* ^f power, to 
 him belongs the earth (Job xxii. 8}, i. e. as to the micjlity man, his is 
 the earth ; DJ^"!^*? ""l^^? ^)^'\ V-i^ cs to summer and winter, thou 
 hast made them (Ps. Ixxiv. 17). 
 
 205. The Genitive is indicated by placing the 
 
 where no ambiguity can arise from the omission. Compare the 
 above-cited passage with vnnn Vt^'lp VDip, S:c. (Ex. xxxix. S3). 
 Compare, likewise. Lev. xi. 13, with Dent. xiv. 12.
 
 194 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 noun which is defined* in a state of construction 
 (Art. 51, 61). 
 
 The (kfmed word may be denominated the antece- 
 de7it'\, and the defining term the constqucnt. 
 
 Thus, in the following examples, '=1?^ ri3 (^a) daughter of (o) 
 himj, "^^^n 13 {the) son of the king, '^^O no^X {the) terror of 
 (ff) kingX) C'^J^ "'?r^ kings of nations, ^HT "IT a horder-of gold. 
 
 * We have already observed (Art. 36, 53) that the vague signifi- 
 cation of common nouns is often defined by adding to them another 
 word (or words) expressive of the material of which they are formed : 
 as, HP? ^"^P- («) dish of silver, i. e. a silver dish ; ?n? V? vessels 
 of iron, i. e. iron vessels — or the use for which they are intended ; 
 as, '"lOnpp v3 instruments of ivar, n?En TT'B a house of prayer ; — 
 or by mentioning the person to whom they belong ; as, "'I^^l' J"'''? 
 (the) house of the king, '^'pV^. PH^^ (the) tent of Jacob ; — or the object 
 of which they form a part : as, "li^i^ ^^"^ the top of the mountain ; 
 "iX^n ""S the mouth of the icel ; and, in short, by adding a word 
 expressive of any of those numerous relations which subsist between 
 objects — as cause and effect, agent and patient, the whole and its 
 parts, &c., &c., and vice versa. Now, in all such cases, the word 
 which is defined must be placed before that which is to define it. 
 
 t The Antecedent is denominated by Hebrew Grammarians, 
 "=19?? 01* "=1'"'^?? i' e. that which is supported; the Consequent is 
 termed "^PID the supporter. 
 
 I This mode of expression is, in most languages, liable to ambi- 
 guity ; for the terror of the king, may either mean the terror with 
 which he is affected, or the terror with which he inspires others. It 
 is the same with respect to the possessive affixes: C]?^?pJ2 your fear 
 (Gen. ix. 2), signifies the fear which others will have for you, and 
 is therefore properly rendered in the Established Version, the fear 
 of you : but the same word in Isaiah viii. 13, signifies the Being
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 195 
 
 i. c. a golden border, — the words ri3, |3, nO'-N, ^3???, and "i.t, are 
 the antecedents, and "^?^, '=1?'?'I', D"'*?J^, and SHT are the consequents. 
 
 206. The antecedent must be an indefinite'^ term ; 
 and therefore it cannot be a pronoun, nor a proper 
 name, nor a noun having the definite T\ (Art. 
 194) or a pronominal affix. When therefore a 
 pronominal affix is required, it must be added to 
 the consequent : thus, '^^^ [3 (the) son-of thy-son, 
 ^'T]^ n.nj; {the) servants-of thij-master, i^lipH^D h^ 
 {the) instruments -of his tear (for, his instrumetits of 
 war), *^1P *in {the) mountain-of my-hoUness (for, 
 my holy rnountain-\). 
 
 201 . The antecedent may be an adjective, the sub- 
 stantive being understood (Art. 164): as ^XH nS"| m. 
 IxnnS"*./. beautiful of form, i. e. one of beautiful form. 
 nxip n^it^ good of appearance , i.e. of good appearance. 
 
 whom you ought to fear. Thus Hkcwise ''^1}'^ my fear may signify 
 the fear with which I am affected ; but ''5<"V"2 in Malachi i. 6, signifies 
 the fear {reverence) due to me. The context will, however, gene- 
 rally show in what sense the words are to be understood. 
 
 * Because if it were definite it would require no further definition. 
 
 t It is in this manner that the Hebrew often uses nouns instead 
 of adjectives. When, however, a real adjective is used, the pronomi- 
 nal affix must be added to the noun, as n3t?|?n '^T3, my -daughter the- 
 liltle, i. e. nil/ little daughter. 
 
 o
 
 196 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 nJD 7*T^ great of strength, i. e. of great strength : or 
 a participle, as 1/ '•'ll^^ (the) hroken-of -heart, i. e. 
 the broken-hearted; ^^H '^'2^*' (the) sitters of darkness, 
 i.e. tJiose that sit (dwell) in darkness ; pl^ '^Syi (the) pur- 
 suers (^followers) of righteousness, i. e. those that follow 
 righteousness y flinVtJ'pl^ (the) seekers of the Lord, i. e. 
 those that seek the Lo?yI* : or it may be an infinitive : 
 as, D3^D nib^J^^ to-do justice, i.e. (the) doing of justice ; 
 D"*nj!s r\^^ (the) sitting of brothers, i. e. when brothers 
 sit; T\)^Ty Hi^V? in-(the)- going out-of the year, i.e. 
 at the end of the year. 
 
 208. The consequent may consist of any word 
 capable of defining the antecedent ; it may therefore 
 be a demonstrative pronoun ; as npJSITlb^J^ (the) doer 
 of these (things) i. e. whoever does so. (Ps. xv. 5) : — or 
 it may be a relative pronoun (Art. 182) expressed or 
 understood ; as Db^ "1^D« t)pV ^m DipX? (the) place 
 where Joseph was bound (Gen. xl. 3) ; N? ["^^^J ^^^ 
 ''^V.^r ^ language (which) I know not (Ps. Ixxxi. 5). 
 
 209. The consequent is sometimes preceded by a preposition : 
 as, '^'}/J. ?y *5?ii"' (the) walkers-of upon the way, i. e. those that ivalk 
 on the way ; "'''Vi^? rinpK^3 as joy-of in harvest, i. e. as the joy of 
 
 * From the numerous examples given above, it is evident that the 
 state of construction cannot always be expressed in English by the 
 possessive case, or by the preposition of. Tn translating such phrases, 
 recourse must therefore be had to such turns of expression as are 
 agreeable to the idiom of the language.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 197 
 
 (men) in harvest. But such phrases are either elliptical, as in the 
 last example ; or they are idiomatic expressions, in which the state of 
 construction is used for the absolute state, merely to facilitate the 
 pronunciation of the complex terms. Of the same character are the 
 following words, n"J?> "IH^ the river (of) Euphrates; ^iDH 1^,3 as wine 
 that is good (Cant, viii), i. e. as good wine ; C'J^y.^. *J?.t?^ 'pleasant 
 plants (Isa. xvii. 10). 
 
 210. The absolute state is sometimes used instead of the con- 
 structive : as, 155? Q''"!'lt3 (Exod.xxviii. 17) for |3K *"):1t3 rows of 
 stone*; n»^? Dn9^? (Prov. xx. 21) for nttX n^N words of truth. 
 
 211. Several words in construction may follow each other: as, 
 pKH DJ? ^ly^l lb (the) heart-of (the) chiefs-of (the) people-of the 
 land, C'''N"lb?-'?3 nn the spirit-of (the) whole-of {the) flesh-of man 
 (Job xii), i. e. the spirit of every living being. In such cases, each of 
 the intermediate terms is consequent and antecedent at the same 
 time; consequent to the preceding word, and antecedent to that which 
 comes after it : thus, in the first example, the word ''??'>^T is the con- 
 sequent of y>, and the antecedent of DJ? ; and DV is the consequent 
 of V^l and the antecedent of Vl^O' — ^T^^^ ''I^^^ '^\ '"'kl 
 (Gen. XXV. 6); Q^n'^Xn-r-1^3 muy^ ^i^.^P "^^n nU5 (l Chron. 
 ix. 13). V 
 
 * Some grammarians think that words of this description are in 
 apposition, similar to nouns denoting weight, measure, time, tic, 
 as, flpl on?? two talents (of) silver ; Q'W HQ^X an ephah (of) 
 barley /—others are of opinion that they are elliptical, the real 
 consequent being omitted ; thus, nDS """IJOS D''")OX words, namely, 
 words of truth. Sec, in the same manner as we find that the 
 antecedent is sometimes omitted : thus, nnx nnOH (Dan. ix) for 
 
 nn??n ^''^' 
 
 o2
 
 198 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 212. A noun in a state of construction, followed by the same 
 noun in the plural, is often used to express the superlative degree : 
 thus, Q''??P ^^^ King of kings, i. e. the greatest of kings ; CI^V; '^^V. 
 a slave of slaves, i.e. the most abject of slaves ; C^^ipLl ^IP (Exod. 
 xxvii.34) ; n)J2fn ^r^f (1 Kings viii. 28). 
 
 Dative. 
 
 213. The dative case is indicated by the prefix 
 7 or by the preposition bi^ (Art. 40. p. 37). 
 
 214. The sign of the dative is often used instead of the genitive 
 to express the relation of property or possession : as, ''^y )? 'n''J<T 
 (1 Sam. xvi. 18) / have seen a son {belonging) to Jesse, i. e. Jesse's 
 son ; in? "ll^IP a Psalm to David, i. e. of David. The 7 is fre- 
 quently preceded by ^^^5 : as, r\>-l\h X'^? IN-^iH Oj; r7N3 hr\-\^ 
 (Gen. xxix. 9) ; ajid Rachel came with the sheep tvhich (belonged) 
 to her father, i. e. ivith her father's sheep ; V^'h^^ r-|^2n nnS 
 (2 Kings V. 9); h'\^f) l^t< D^:j'-in 1^3K (1 Sam.xxi.8). 
 
 Objective Case. 
 
 215. The objective is indicated by the particle HNI 
 
 . or "HNI (Art. 41) : but it is used only when the nonn 
 
 is in a definite state* ; and even then it is frequently 
 
 omitted. When this takes place, or when the noun is 
 
 used indefinitely, the objective may be known by its 
 
 * By the definite state is meant, when the noun has the definite 
 n, or one of the possessive pronominal affixes ; or when it is in a state 
 of construction, or when it is a proper name.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 199 
 
 position after the verb*, which is either expressed or 
 understood ; as Yp^ n^JJ.l iwS* l^y^ [5 (Mai. i. 6.). 
 
 Ablative and Vocative Case. 
 
 216. The Ablative case is indicated by the pre- 
 fixes, 3 i?i, ivith, &c. ttor \^ from (Art. 40). 
 
 217. The Hebrew has no particular form for the 
 Vocative ; but it may easily be known by the general 
 
 sense of the sentence : — 
 
 Compare Db*1 nXT D*n Ps. civ. 3. with v. 5. of the same chapter, 
 
 T * T- '; 
 
 Number. 
 
 218. Generic terms of the singular number are 
 often used to express the entire species ; as : — 
 
 * In the inverted style, where both the nominative and objective 
 are often placed before or after the verb, they may be distinguished 
 from each other by the agreement of the verb with the former. 
 Thus, in the following example, "l^n^! D^P?D "li23 (Prov. iii.35), 
 though both the objective and nominative precede the verb, yet it 
 is evident that CP^n lolse (men), which is in the plural, must be 
 the nominative, because the verb -I^CT- ^^'^i/ inherit, agrees with it ; 
 and 'liSS must be the objective ; for were it the nominative, the verb 
 must have been in the singular, ^^T; So likewise in the following 
 verse, nyi yt^'n nniori (Ps. xxxiv.) though both the nominative and 
 objective follow the verb, yet it is evident that HJ^T evil, f. must be 
 the nominative, because the verb nrnDJjl she slays, which is likewise 
 feminine, agrees with it ; whereas V^"! being masculine, would require 
 the verb r\r\)D\-
 
 200 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 •in3;p^ tliynp (Gen. vi. 20) of the fowl after his Jcind, i. e. of 
 fowls after their kind ; and I have rtn?^| nnyi jX^ nioqi litJ' an 
 ox, and an ass, and sheep, and a man servant, and a female servant 
 (Gen. xxxii. 5), i. e. oxen, asses, &c. 
 
 This is especially the case with patronymics ; as, ^IP.^P the 
 Amorite, ''^y.P-?Ll the Canaanite, i.e. the Amorites, the Canaanites ; 
 7i^'T?\ X~l*1 and Israel saw, i. e. and the Israelites saw. 
 
 219. Nouns which occur only in the plural or dual form (Art. 
 47) : as, D^35i, D''*ri, D^tt*, drop the in the genitive, and take the 
 plural pronominal affixes (p. 42), even when they are used in the 
 sense of the singular : thus, D\32 the conntenance, face, or faces, 
 (jen. D''3-1"i3n \3$ the faces of the cherubim; ^-t"!?!!! '•33 the face of the 
 cherub ; '•J? (not '•3S) my face, T'JS thy face, ^^c, Cl''*n life, g. \*n 
 the life of, ^*n (not ^*n) my life, V»n his life, Sfc.\ 
 
 220. The plural of nouns expressing dignity and 
 majesty is generally used instead of the singular ; 
 thus : — 
 
 X\'^^, rp. D^ns;^ Lord; \r\% p. *?.nh; Lord-of; *J'"J« my lord (to 
 
 * The genitive of D!''? ivater or waters, is ""^ or '''^^P ; but the 
 second JD must be retained when the word is used with pronominal 
 affixes : thus, '^'^ I^^^O V?3^D- 
 
 f Words of this description have their adjectives, pronouns, and 
 verbs mostly in the plural : as, Cti'np D^O holy water ; CPPt? C2''33 
 an anyry cotintenance ; D*3"L D\0 •IXV.'!!! (Num. xx. 11); '^^''IP '''Q '1'?n 
 (Num. XX. 13) The agreement in such instances is merely formal. 
 Sometimes, however, they have their adjectives, verbs, Sec, in 
 the singular number, (See Num. xix. 13; 1 Sam. iv. 16; Isa. 
 XXX. 20). 
 
 J This is denominated pluralis excellentice, because it does not 
 actually indicate plurality, but great dignity : so, likewise, "T'N"\3
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 201 
 
 distinguish it from ''3"l^? Lord, applied only to the Divine Being) ; 
 ''^'1^ my Lords. The rest of the plural affixes are used for the 
 singular: as, Tp^_ thy Lord (not ^?"I^) ; '1''J'"1^5 his Lord (not 
 131^), •13''J"t^?, &c. ; ?J^3 a master, superior, possessor, 1yJ^| his master ; 
 C' v^? /;er master*. 
 
 The words a>rh^, ^^% ^>n% -irnSs, &c., though they have 
 plural terminations, are often used with verbs, pronouns, &c., of 
 the singular number, and must be rendered in the singular, when 
 applied to the Divine Beimj : as, ^""^W. ^1^ God created, '^'^>P^_ ^•1'^ 
 he is thy God\. But when these words are applied to heathen 
 deities, they may be rendered either in the singular or plural number, 
 according as they refer to one of those false gods, or to more than 
 one : thus, ^^H'^X tJ'ID? (Judg. xi. 24) Chemosh thy God ; '^^•^1?^? 
 (Gen. xxxi. 32) thy Gods. In the latter case, the adjectives, verbs, 
 &c., are always expressed in the plural : as, D''"!D^ '^''0''.^ strange 
 Gods ; •13^.''. Tf ^? a^n%— ^xnb^ ^i^n^j;? n^X (Exod. xxxii. i. 4). 
 
 Repetition of Nouns. 
 
 22\. The same noun is sometimes repeated : — 
 
 \st. — To indicate emphasis and effect: as, ^"I"]? p^.V P'lV (Deut. 
 xvi. 20) justice, justice thou shalt follow, i. e. let it be thy 
 
 thy Creator ; '^]^V thy Maker ; these are, however, very seldom used 
 in this form. 
 
 * But vVB my husband, master; •^'^V:-? her husband, are used in 
 the singular. 
 
 t There are indeed examples where D\"l^S occurs with plural verbs 
 and plural adjectives, &c., but even then it is generally accompanied 
 by some word indicating unity: thus, in Gen. i. 26. xi. 7., the verbs 
 '^'i'V.?- '^1"1?. are plural, yet the verbs "I'^N"! 11*1 are in the singular. 
 In Josh. xxiv. 19. though the adjective D''^"'i? is in the plural, the 
 accompanying pronoun ^^-in is in the singular.
 
 202 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 constant aim ; *?? '3? Dl7f'?SI (2 Sam. xviii. 33) Absalom, 
 my son, my son! — fy^ p.'? f)^ (Jer. xxii. 29) earth, earth, 
 earth, hear the word of the Lord ! 
 
 2nd.— To indicate multitude: lOn T\r\^^, nnX| Dn>n pOJ?1 
 (Gen. xiv. 10). and the vale of Siddira (was) pits, pits, slime, i. e. 
 full of slime pits ; ^''''.^C! ^inDn (Exod. viii. 10) heaps, heaps, \.e. a 
 great many heaps. 
 
 Zrd.—To denote distribution: as "V-^^. 1p>3 (Exod. xxxii. 3) 
 in the morning, in the morning, i. e. every morning ; 01'' 01'' day, 
 day, i. e. every day, or daily. 
 
 4th. — To denote diversity ; in which case, the second noun takes 
 (1) ; as (Deut. xxv. 13) thou shall not have in thy hag ]'^^)]'^^ 
 a stone and a stone, i. e, divers weights ; •1"'?1''. ^?\ 37^ (Isa. xii. 
 3) with heart and heart they speak, i. e. they speak with duplicity. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 222. Adjectives are used either as qualifying 
 words (Art. 83, 84), or as predicates (Art. 86). 
 
 In either case, they generally agree with their 
 substantives in gender and number (Art. 86). 
 
 223. Adjectives are frequently used without their substantives : 
 
 as, O^T ^ wise, (man) CP^H wise (men), rilD^n wise (women), 
 n3"! a tender (woman), &c. 
 
 224. In such cases, the adjective assumes the character of a 
 noun, and is often susceptible of the same variations : D^liin ^?D3n
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 203 
 
 the wise-{meii) of nations, l*^?^ '"^ wise-{men), ^''^^D thy wise-{men)) 
 "l^^l^. his great-{men), *)''<P\ her great (men). 
 
 Degrees of Comparison. 
 
 225. Having already described (Art. 87 ) how the 
 several degrees of comparison are expressed, we have 
 only to add the following observations : — 
 
 Is^ — that reciprocal comparison is denoted by the repetition of 
 the 3, before the compared words : thus in'33 Dy^n signifies, the 
 people are like the priest, but li^S? D3^3 signifies, the people jire like 
 the priest, and the priest is like the people. 
 
 2nd. — That the superlative is often indicated — ( a ) by repeating 
 the adjective : as pbj? pbV deep, deep, i. e. very deep ; 1^^^'^ Vl Vl 
 i^.^PlI (Prov.xx. 14) bad, had, says the buyer, i. e. the buyer says 
 (before the purchase is made) it is very bad : — (b) by adding the word 
 I'xp might, strength, very, or I^^P "li^P very, very, i. e. exceed- 
 ingly good : — (c) By adding one of the names of God — ^^'"ns. "I^y 
 DTIPN? a city great to God, i. e. a very great city ; ^'^ "'lin moun- 
 tains of God* ; ''^ \n^ cedars of God, i. e. the highest mountains, 
 the loftiest cedars f ; — (d) by the repetition of the noun (See Art. 
 212)J; D^S'PP •^'?0 Kingof kings, r:i'l^V..'\^ slave of slaves. 
 
 Numerals. 
 2*26. "inx and nnx are always placed after the 
 
 * Intensity is often denoted in the same manner: as H^'n^n/*^ 
 aflame of God, i. c. a vehement flame ; "^vCXI? a darkness of God, 
 i. e. very great darkness. 
 
 f The positive, in a state of construction, or with the article, is 
 sometimes used for the superlative : as, V33 Jltip the least of his 
 children, It^i^H t*-in ^)'\1 and David was the smallest. 
 
 I Id. such cases the noun must be in the plural.
 
 204 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 name of the thing numbered, and take the definite n 
 when the noun is used definitely : as, "fHX l^'^p^ one 
 board, "TDJ^n t^'^JpH the one hoards HHiji H^Hp one 
 camp, nnxn ni^npn the one camp. 
 
 227. The rest of the cardinal numbers mostly 
 precede their nouns, and never take the definite n, 
 except as explained hereafter : thus D'•ti^^^? *'^P or 
 D^SJ^;« D^3^ two men, U'm^T^ '^P or n'mi^r\ D^:^ tJ2e 
 two men ; U'P'^'p^ Dnb'JJ. twenty boards, D'^'^j'^n tD^.b^. 
 the twenty boards. (See Exod. xl. 12, 18 ; xli. 4, 7, 
 20, 24, 26, 27.) 
 
 Ohs. 1. — The numerals are placed generally after the nouns when 
 several things are specified and enumerated : as, (Gen. xxxii. 13 — 
 15) and he took of that which came to his hand '^0^'? ^ present, &c. 
 (consisting of) D^.ri^^ '^''W she-goats, two hundred, ^'''WV ^''^\'!)'\ 
 and he-goats, tiventy ; Q^DND W^^VT] ewes, two hundred, D y^\ 
 D^T^'V. and rams, twenty, &c. &c. (see likewise Num. vii. 13 — 88 ; 
 xxvii. xxix. xxxi. 21 — 43)*: or when the numeral is the predicate : 
 as, On'^V. DC"?."1^?1 £3nipv. OnniDy (Exod.xxxviii. 10) their pillars 
 (^were) twenty, and their sockets {were) tiventy. 
 
 2. — The numerals receive the definite article when they refer 
 to a number previously mentioned, or otherwise known, especially 
 when the noun is omittedf: as, C'VS'lxn the forty, D*lbV.'7> 
 ^i^'^.ii (Gen. xviii. 29, 32), n^onn-nx D^3^p nj?3-)t? (Gen. xiv.9), 
 nnsn (Gen.xix. 9; xlii. 27). 
 
 * In such cases, the article is sometimes repeated before each of 
 the numerals : as, D-nj^JSn) D^V^P^H) HL^'^^'n (Num. iii. 46). 
 
 -f- In the composite numbers from 1 1 to 20, we find the definite 
 sometimes before the decimal or before the noun : thus, D\^^ ?^ 
 
 t^>N -lKi>J;^-D''n^?^ nnby. D'-riK' n^ (Josh. iv. 4. 20),
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 205 
 
 Obs. 3. — The cardinal numbers from 2 to 10 require plural nouns 
 with which the numerals must agree in gender: as, *^.t^ or D^ili' 
 D^J3 two sons; ''W or ni33 D^rit^ two daughters; D^IJJJ nyap' 
 seven hoys, n'nj?^ V^^ seven girls, Cli''PJ !nn*^J? ^g^j ^^a^/^j Q-iJ^: I'^'j; 
 iera women*. 
 
 4. — Above ten the name of the thing numbered may be either 
 in the singular or plural : as, Di^ ">*^3^ THN eleven day, i. c. days 
 (Deut. i. 2); 0^313 nbj?^ nns eleven stars (Gen.xxxvii. 8)f ; 
 D^li^ '"""'^'^ ^^^ thirteen cities, n3^ nnE^V. nns eleven years ; 
 nny^ nx;j?. ^hf or "l^J? n^tfV. tJ'^^f^ thirteen cities; D^'^j; 
 DV'^P? or tynj?. Dn.£?f3; ^m;^^^^ Joardf* ; nnx HNO or niDX nsn a 
 
 hundred cubits ; ^''^ ^?^? a thousand men ; CK'^B Pl?N a thousand 
 horsemen. 
 
 5. — From eleven to twenty, the less number must precede the 
 greater, without an intervening (1). (See Cardinal Numbers, p. 91). 
 But from twenty and above, it is immaterial which comes first, but 
 the ) must be added: thus, Dn'^V.I inx or nnx] on'^JJ one- 
 and-twenty. 
 
 6.— nsto a hundred (cons. HXp, p. nixp, dual, D^nSD 
 two hundred), though of the common gender, requires, on account 
 of its feminine termination, the units which precede its plural (nixp), 
 to be of the cons. fern. : thus, nixp JJ>7^ three hundred (not 
 
 * The agreement in gender takes place equally from ten to 
 twenty : as, D^^? -%% ^^>^n fifteen sons ; niJ3 nx/j;. d'oq 
 fifteen daughters. But the numerals from twenty and above are 
 common to both genders ; the units, however, which are joined to 
 them follow the genders of the noun : thus, ^'^ C3!5f -1 CVS'^i*, 
 
 -f- In this respect we must be guided by scriptural usage : for though 
 we find DV ib'y^ ins, l^'''ii Fl?^?, yet it would not be correct to say 
 
 nsis nby '^m, or i^ Pi^t?.
 
 206 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 ^f nor n^^P' nor n"IX» n^^t') ; ^^* nixn W six hundred 
 thousand (not HC'C'). 
 
 Obs.7. — '^2^ a thousand (plural, CD''S?X. thousands); dual, 
 D^SPX <M>o thousands (cons. *??^) ; though it is common to both 
 genders, yet being considered as of the masculine gender, requires 
 the plural termination DV, and the cons. m. units, from 3000 to 
 10,000 both inclusive: as, Ci''?i^>?. wh^ three thousands\ ; nn^^y. 
 C??^. ten thousands ; but above that number, ^?^ is used instead 
 of D^D^X^ : thus, 1^^ "i^V, ')!^ or ^^ '"^^IT^'^'^ twelve thousand ; 
 fl^S -bV^ nc|'ti^ sixteen thousand; ^^. D^'^VV D^Jt?^ or D^"lt?>3; 
 ^?? D.''5^'1 twenty-two thousand. 
 
 8. — The word ^?^ is sometimes repeated : as, HIKO ^^ 
 □••0^5:? n^^nqi fl^i< n''S?3C'1 fl^St s/x hundred and seventy-five 
 thousand. This is likewise the case with the word n:^: as, 
 CJC' y2^*l nj^ D''")'^V.'l. '"13^ nt5p one hundred year, and twenty year, 
 and seven years, i. e. one hundred and twenty-seven years. 
 
 9. — Some of the cardinal numbers take the pronominal 
 affixes : as, ■IJ''?!^ P? (Gen. xxxi. 37) betwixt us two (both) ; 
 n^p-ny.^ nr\^ip -von (Gen.ii.23) and they were both naked; 
 D3^^'^^ (Num. xii. 4) ye three ; '^TW 1'?^^3 ^•1^'?' ^?!^ 
 1''ni2!^"l3 (1 Sam. xviii. 3) Saul hath slain his thousands, and 
 David his ten thousands. 
 
 * Particular attention must be paid to the insertion or the omis- 
 sion of 1 : thus, for instance, in the above number, if a ) were added 
 to '^h^, thus Pl^^\ niXt? ^^ the number would stand for 600 + 
 1000=: 1600. It would amount to the same were we to reverse the 
 order and insert 1, thus ni«» fti'l ^bii ; but, ^hi< nisr;? llh^ without 
 1, stands for 600 x 1000=600,000. Thus likewise ^^^ D^nxO is 
 two htmdred thousand; but 1?J^5 Cl!inSO or a^nxO-l f\7^ is one 
 thousand two hundred. 
 
 t There are a few exceptions to these I'ules, especially in the later 
 Hebrew.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 207 
 
 0^5. 10 — Several of the numerals (besides D^JK' and 2^.I!!y'), 
 have a dual form, to express the addition of the same quantity : as, 
 D^riVanX. /o„/-/o/(Z, n\nV2^ sevenfold. 
 
 11. — When the cardinal numbers are used distributively, 
 they are repeated without the conjunctive 1 : as, D*3?J' D^JK' two two, 
 i. e. two and two, or by twos ; HJ??^ ^V^'^ seven seven, i. c. by 
 sevens. 
 
 12. — The cardinal numbers are sometimes used to express 
 the adverbs DV.S once, ^\'QVf. twice, 8ic. : as, C.J?^ N'?! n^l^< N^ 
 (2 Kings vi. 10) not once, nor twice* ; ^V^^] ^"V.^^ (Gen. iv. 24) 
 seven and seventy fold, or times. 
 
 228. The ordinal numbers extend only to ten. 
 Above this number, the cardinals are used to express 
 them. (Art. 91. p. 93). 
 
 229. Like other adjectives, they follow their nouns, 
 with which they agTee in genderj", and they take the 
 definite n when the noun is used definitely : thus, 
 '')& |5 a second son ; '^^^k\ ^J^'lhll the second month ; 
 
 * These adverbs are, however, more generally expressed by the 
 word DJ^3 once, Q\Oy.S twice, D^PVQ ^h^ or D^^n ^h'C' three 
 times, D''tty3 f\7^ a thousand times, D-Dj;?) V?*^ D'-JC' J??'^ seven 
 years seven times, i.e. forty-nine years: or by C^^ (from i^^^ to 
 number) D''?'^ ^W'?^: ^^^ times. 
 
 •f- The ordinals jit^X"), njtJ'S"), agree likewise in number : as, 
 D^jb^snn D^p»n the first days, nijirxnn nn'Sn the first (former) 
 troubles; nixnun _ ni3b'x-in nhsn ya:^ m the first seven fat 
 kine.
 
 208 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 *^^^2fn K''in5 in the third month*; n'^'h^TJ nrf 5 
 in the third year. 'f 
 
 230. The cardinals inx, nn^ are frequently used for the ordi- 
 nals fl^^l, i^?'^*^!, and the noun is sometimes omitted : as, ^^5$? 
 ^"n"'^/ (Gen. viii. 5) oti the first {day) of the month, lit. in one {day) 
 
 to the month; ^'iph inx^ fic^x-}3 n^f T\'\^)2"^p) nm^ >n;i 
 
 (Gen. viii. 13) and it came to pass in the six hundredth and first year, 
 in the first (month), the first (day) of the month: so likewise ''T'^V^ 
 (ibid. V. 5) in the tenth {month). 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 231. The distinct pronouns, as well as the pro- 
 nominal affixes, are often introduced for the sake of 
 emphasis, explanation, &c., (Art. 192) together with 
 the nouns for which they stand : as, HS/b T\ip\ H^n 
 D^:?5 t^^n D^. (Gen. xxii. 20) behold Milcha, she has 
 
 also born children; ^i^Sp h^m ^S VI) ^^t^ Mn^l ^.6^ 
 (Gen. ii. 17) and of the tree of knowledge of good and 
 
 o o 
 
 evil, thou shalt not eat of it ; Hin* H^^IM HX HJ^^^* 
 (Exod. xxxv. 5) lit. he shall bring her (it) the offering 
 
 * 7\y^r\ T\'^^^^^, signifies the third part of a year (Art. 92). 
 
 -f- Some of the ordinals are used iu the plural, the noun being 
 omitted: as, D*?^ (for a^'.^tf second {stories); Q'p'h^ (for 
 n^^p^hf) third (stories). (See Gen. vi. 15.)
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 209 
 
 of the Lord, i. e. he shall bring it, namely, the offering 
 of the Lord. 
 
 232. For the same purpose, or by way of 
 antithesis, arc the distinct pronouns introduced, 
 together with the verbs in which they are in- 
 cluded : as, (Gen. xxi. 24) and Abraham said ^iJNt 
 ^!l^k I-ioill-sicear, lit. /, I-will-swear ; in^n HilX 
 *JNt ^7\ (Job xxxiv, 33), lit. thou, thou-shalt choose 
 but not I; ^bW T\m\ n5^^^ T\m (Ps. cii. 27), lit. 
 they, they-shall-perish, but thou, thou shall eiulure, 
 
 Obs. — The distinct pronoun thus repeated, must be in the nomi- 
 native, in whatever case the other pronouns may happen to be : as, 
 \2-lh\ N-in D5 n^Y^ (Gen. iv. 26) and to Seih, to him also (Heb 
 he — not "O) there was born a son ; *?^? ''?5J D| ''^?"}3 (Gen. xxvii, 
 38) bless me, even me {Weh. even I, not ""T}^) my father! — n"l-in''_ 
 
 o . o 
 
 ^■•nK "n-nV r\m (Gen.xlix. 8) lit. Judah, thou, they-shall praise 
 thee, thy brethren, i. c. but thou, O Judah ! thy brethren shall praise 
 thee, this being the antithesis of Cursed be their anger, in the pre- 
 ceding verse. 
 
 233. When a pronoun is the subject of a sentence, and the pre- 
 dicate is either a noun, adjective, or participle (not a verb), it in- 
 cludes the copula : as, T\)rXl >JS J (^am) the Lord ; nriX DlT'y thou 
 art naked. (See Art. 162.) 
 
 234. The nominative pronouns of the third person are often used 
 as demonstrative pronouns (Art. 97, 98). Thoy are likewise used 
 for the word saine : as, S^SH ^^•1^ (Gen. ii. 13) the same that com- 
 passeth; Jn^'t^n h«''n (Gen. xxiv. 44) the same is the woman; HDH 
 Cnuan (Gcn.vi.4).
 
 210 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 235. The objective pronominal affixes can, strictly 
 speaking, be only joined to transitive verbs; never- 
 theless we find some instances in which they are 
 found with intransitive verbs : as, V*1 '^*l^'*. iO evil 
 cannot dwell {with) thee (Ps. v. 4); "^^pjjr.l and-they- 
 cr'ied {to) thee (Neh. ix. 28); ^3Pin^ thou hast given 
 (to) me (Josh. xv. 19); "'^l^^^'! thei/ are gone (from) me 
 (Jer. X. 20). 
 
 236. The relative pronoun 1^{< is not susceptible 
 of any variation (Art. 99). It admits, however, of 
 the prefixes f2, 7, i, i namely, when the antecedent 
 is omitted ; as in the following examples : — 
 
 (Gcn.xxi. 17.) Dg' Nin '^m'-i nyin h)p m mhi< v^^ ^5 
 
 For God has heard the voice of the lad in which he is there, i. e, in 
 the place in which, &c. 
 
 (Gen.xsvii.4.) ^nin.Nt ^m:2 c^^5;tptt ^h n^j;. 
 
 Make unto me savoury meat as which / love, i. e. such {savoury 
 meat) as that, c^-c. 
 
 (Gen. xUii. 16.) «in>| Sj? "l^xS ^/^K*! 
 
 /4nd he said to-ioho was {appointed) over his house, i. e. to the 
 man who was appointed, or to tlie ruler who, ^c. 
 
 (Ruth ii. 9.) onjjan ])^m\ ^mjp, n^nm ■ 
 
 And thou shalt drink from which, i. e. from (the water u'hich) the 
 young men ivill draw. 
 
 237. The relative is sometimes omitted : as, 
 Urh ^h pX5 (Gen. xv. 13) in a /r/y?f/ which {belongs) 
 not to them. (See Art. 103.)
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 211 
 
 238. The adjective pronouns, eacJi, every, either, 
 any, one, none, one another, luhoever, 8^c. 8^c., for which 
 the Hebrew has no distinct words, are chiefly ex- 
 pressed by the repetition of the noun (Art. 221), or 
 by periphrastic expressions, consisting of the words 
 tJ'^K man, /2 all, "12"^ a thing, in combination with 
 some word or phrase (see the following examples). 
 
 (Gen. XV. 10.) ^Ti^^^ HX^HpS nn? \^'^ [H*! 
 And he placed each piece* one against anotherf . 
 
 (Gen.xxxiv.2.5.) \'2'-\n &'^ ^inp-^l 
 
 And they took each his sword. 
 
 (Exod.xvi.29.) S'd'pm &^ wW h^ vrinn &^ i^^ 
 
 Abide ye every man in his place, let no man | go out of his place. 
 
 (Exod.xxxiv.3.) x"3\ ^K K'^^f d:^ 1|5j^ rhf.^ ^'^\ 
 
 And no man shall come up ivith thee, neither let any man be seen. 
 
 (Gen.xlv.l.) ^S^D ^^^^"^3 ^N'^ill 
 Cause every one to go out from me. 
 
 (Gen.xxiii.6.) rhy ^ ^l^^^ &^ 
 
 None of us shall withhold § . 
 
 (Exod. XXX. 33.) :)nb3 npn^ nti'^ k^^^ 
 
 T )- :• V -: 
 Whosoever \\ compoundeth any like it. 
 
 (Exod. X. 24.) vnnnD tJ^\y )J2p xSi vn.^-nx ly'^ ixn t<S 
 
 They saw not one another^, neither rose any one from his place. 
 
 * lit. His piece. j- lit. His neighbour. X ^'t- ^^^ "o*- ^"Y "^'^" 
 go out. § lit. A man of us shall not. j] lit. Any man who shall, &c. 
 
 ^ lit. They saw not a man his brother. Eeminine ^^l^^^? 7^ H^'N 
 (Gen. XX vi. 3). 
 
 p
 
 '^^'^ THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 (Gcn.iv.15.) ]^p:inh-S3 
 "Whosoever days Cain, 
 
 (Excel. XX. 10.) nr)^:'?D* S3 nb^yn ^h 
 
 T T ; T V '^-;|- 
 
 T/tou shalt not do any worh, 
 1!!'^ /3 ere?7y ////«(/ ; 1131 §^7 noflnug ; 7JD TK nothing whatever. 
 
 239. The reflex pronouns, myself, thyself, S^x., wee 
 mostly expressed by the form Hithpael. Sometimes, 
 however, they are indicated by the word t^^}, soul, 
 b^^ hone, substance, or by some other w^ord indicative 
 of a part of the human body: as, itJ'S^ i^^^{ he that 
 loves himself; D^S3 7^. ^D^p they had decreed for 
 themselves ; niH Di*n C^J^5 in the selfsame day ; 
 nS'lpI n^^^ puV^l and Sarah laughed within herself. 
 
 Ohs. — In a few instances we find the objective pronouns used in- 
 stead of the reflex : thus, Dri'l^ l^'y'in -IJ?")^! and the shepherds fed 
 themselves (Ezek. xxxiv. 5) ; ^^3 DHX b\?rb\ ^p3 npb' -li^n^l (Exod. 
 V. 19). 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 The verb TVT\ is used : — 
 
 \st. — To express absolute existence : as, TV'T} niM^ 
 •^^ri"!! i^p tlie Lord loas, is, and shall he. 
 
 * But n3X^r|in-'?3 ri'^Vp ^^ would signify thou shalt not do the 
 ichole oftJic ivork, and would imply that part of it might be done.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 213 
 
 2W. — To represent tlie copula in propositions 
 relating to past nndftitid-e time (Art. 162, 168). 
 
 3/y/. — To denote past or future* possession ; in 
 which case it is accompanied by the dative pronouns, 
 or by the sign of the dative 7, and is then equivalent 
 to the English verb to have: as, iS VT\ 0^31. D^JS 
 ??}a/ii/ sotis were to hbn, i. e. lie had many children; 
 ^7 ^"n^ D"'nT olive trees shall he to thee, i. e. thou 
 shall or wilt have; T\b?t^/ n^H Wl^ Solomon had a 
 vineyard j". 
 
 4th. — To mark transition from one state or condi- 
 tion into another • as, pn? ^'^''. it shall become a ser- 
 pcht ; P^n? '•n'*! and it became a serpent (Exod. vii. 9, 
 10) ; D^7 "^0*0 ^^'^ f^^'^ become tributary^ (Lam. i. 1); 
 
 n:^wNf,: nnp n^S]^ nm n^>* : D^iip^ m ^^p:^ 
 
 (Isa. i). 
 
 240. Obs. 1. — With participles, it is mostly used to indicate 
 past or future continued action : as, i^J?"' ^^n PipV (Gen. xxxvii. 2) 
 
 * Present possession is commonly indicated by the dative pro- 
 nouns, the copula being omitted : as, ri'"l33 ""rit^ v ^«3"^3^l behold 
 now, I have two daiicjhters ; ^? "1^*^?. ?3 tvhatsoever thou hast (Gen. 
 xix. S, 12) : or by ^I'^l there h ; as, ^T 'h'^^l (Gen. xxxiii.) / have 
 enough ; \\>X 3X -13^-^;. : HN IS nx D3^ &r^_ (Gen. xliv). See the 
 various examples in Part I. p. 94. 
 
 t Sometimes, however, the verb is omitted : as, n"''l>*p ^^S?t^' n?1 
 and she had an Egyptian handmaid (Gen. xvi. 1). 
 
 X The h is omitted when the noun has the prefix 3 : as, 
 n3?D7Nt? T^T\T} (Lam. i. 1) she is become as a widow; ^l,^*^ IH 
 •13!$p nnS3 n^"^ (Gen. iii. 22). 
 
 p 2
 
 214 TFIE SYNTAX OF 
 
 Joseph ivas feeding the Jloch,SiC. ; HJ^' D^ySIX -127m D^S?'"I -Vn? D5\3?-1 
 (Num. xiv. 22) a/;cZ ?/o?/r children shall he feeding (wandering} 
 in the wilderness forty years ; I~iti'"}n VH "i|"33n (Job i. 14) the 
 oxen were ploughing*: i^rih 1")^^. |X\* nx; njj'l n^^H n^'O-l (Exod. 
 iii. I) : D'Pt'^"^ "Ti.T"? ^'^ ^■"'^?' ''^■l (1 Sam. xviii. 29). 
 
 241. Obs. 2. — Before infinitives having the prefix ?, it has the 
 same force as the adverb about, indicating any approaching event : 
 as, ^^12? ^'P^'lI ''i}\\ (Gen. xv. 12) and the sun ivas about to go 
 doicn, i. e. and it was about the time ivhen the sun was going dov)n ; 
 "ljp7 lyyn '•n^l (Josh. ii. 5) and it was about the shutting of the gatey 
 or ivhen the gate was to be shutf. 
 
 242. Obs. 3. — Lastly, it is often used impersonally, at the in- 
 troduction of a narrative, or in the middle of a discourse ; and must 
 then be rendered by it happened, it shall happen, it came to pass, 
 ^•c. : as, CD^PJ Vi?.'? ""OP (Gen. iv. 3) and it came to pass after 
 some days that, ^-c. : anvrsn -^m -ISi;. >3 n\r\] (Gen. xii. 12) 
 and it shall come to ^jffss, ivhen the Egyptians shall see thee, that, 
 
 ^•c. : Dinx N23 '•n":! (Gen. v. 14) : n\Vx nJDX "i^'N nnys.n n^ni 
 
 (Gen. xxiv. 14). 
 
 * The verb n^J is, however, frequently omitted : as, D'''!'^^ D-lll. 
 J^^niP (Gen. i. 1) and the spirit of God •"'^Iv' was moving (brood- 
 ing): Snxn-nns 2^'' i<>\r\\ (Gen. xviii. 1) for :^^' 7^;n ts-ini: 
 nvj^kf mb\ (Ibid. 10) for T\]idi:} nn^n mbi : apy.Tnj^ nnnx ni-jn-ii 
 
 (Gen. XXV. 28). 
 
 j Various idiomatic expressions, which cannot be rendered lite- 
 rally into English, are formed by this verb and the infinitive : as, 
 (Deut, xxxi. 7) and I will hide my face from them /3^!? '^\'^'^- and 
 they shall be devoured, lit. and he shall be to eat, i. e. he shall be an 
 object of prey to any one.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. *^15 
 
 Tenses. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 243. Hebrew verbs have no form whereby prc^ew^ 
 time can be indicated. The progress of an action 
 at the time of speaking can, therefore, only be in- 
 ferred from the juxtaposition of the participles (verbal 
 nouns* or names of the agents and patients), with 
 their respective subjects, in the same manner as is 
 done in nominal propositions (Art. 169) relating to 
 present time: thus, IHX ''iNI I (am) loving, or I love, 
 n^nx nriNI tlwu {art) loved ; 1|Sin Urm^ Abraham {is) 
 walking. (See Art. 124. Obs. 4). 
 
 244. Obs. — In the same manner as nominal propositions may 
 be expressed in the past and in the future by the aid of the verb 
 ^^■^ to he. (Art. 162) ; so likewise may verbal propositions : as, 
 nyi n\n Flp'V (Gen. xxvii. 2) Joseph was feeding; "IPV H^n :^"'^5 
 vV? (Ez. xliii. 6) a man was standing near me ; V^'^ ^''./}\ ^\<^\ 
 (Jud. xi. 14) the Lord shall be hearing (See Art. 240). 
 
 * Hence it is that these words are varied by gender, even when 
 they are used to express the first person of the present tense : as, 
 ^n^ ""P^ m., n5ni< ''^^/. / lore: whereas no snch distinction is 
 made in ihepast and future tenses, ^'!11P?, "^Pp^, ''^?l'^, ^'^^^i being 
 common to both genders. Hence, likewise, the reason why, in the 
 present tense, the subjeet and jvedicate must be expressed in separate 
 words ; whereas in the ^jn-.s^ and future tenses, they are expressed 
 in one word, when the subject happens to be a pronouu.
 
 216 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 245. But the verb to he is often omitted*, especially when the 
 time may be known from the context, or from some word which 
 marks the time: as, (Gen. i. 2) and the earth nn'-n was without 
 form and void ; and darkness (ivas) upon the face of the deep; and 
 the spirit of God '"'Snit? (was) brooding upon, &c. ; 2?r'1'' *^-"ini 
 (Gen. xviii. 1) and he (was) sitting ; "I^V ^ini. (Ibid.) and he (tvas) 
 standing ; ^'V^ '"'^^^ "IH^ (Exod. xvii. 9) to-morroto I shall be 
 standing ; n?1X nnO N^Stt >J?n (Exod. x. 5). 
 
 Past and Future Tenses. 
 
 246. T\ie past andfutia^e tenses are indicated by 
 the form of the verb. The past by the aJJ^.ves, the 
 future by prefi.ves (Art. 116—1 17) : as, W^^S, nb^5<- 
 
 But either of these tenses having the prefix 1 and, 
 which shows that they are connected with a preced- 
 ing verb, must be construed in the same time (and 
 frequently in the same mood) in which the preceding 
 verb happens to be : thus, *^^Nt he said, *^t^^) ^^'^p he 
 called and said ; but, preceded by di future, it must be 
 rendered in the future ; as in Gen. xlvi. 33, and it 
 shall come to pass n^X^ np^ D^'Sn* ^^\)\ '^ ivhen 
 Pharaoh shall call t/ou, and shall sAvf; thus 
 
 * Many grammarians, not attending to this circumstance, have 
 been led into the erroneous opinion that participles are capable of 
 representing all the tenses. Nothing is, howeverj more common in 
 Hebrew than the ellipsis of the verb to be. 
 
 ■\ The principle upon which this and the following rules are 
 founded, appears to be this — that the conjunction 1 joiiis the same 
 moods and tenses ; nor will this appear so strange, when it is
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 217 
 
 likewise, fl1^J< thou didst sau ; ni^XI T\'^'2n thou 
 
 'T:-T v/' t:-t:t;-- 
 
 hast spoken and said; but ril^iS^I '' ^5"^* speak, 
 and saij ; J^IOXI ^5"!^ thou shall speak, ajid shall 
 say. 
 
 247. Ohs. 1. — The 1 receives in both cases (:), (.), or shnrek for 
 its vowel-pointf. It is the same with the future tense : thus, •1"lP^<^ 
 signifies the// shall or tvill say; ^'^'l^i^''] (Dewt. xxxn. 7) «s^. . and 
 they will say, but •1ipN''1"-1K3 (Exod. v. 1) signifies, iliey came and 
 SAID ; "1»N1 (Ezek. iii. 15) and I shall say, but "^m] '^''^P.^ (Ex. 
 iii. 16, 17) signifies, / have visited and /have said ; "Tp^^^ he shall 
 say, ION*! and he saidJ. (See Art. 119.) 
 
 248. Obs. '2, — When a future is tluis used to express past time, 
 the prefix ) has always the vowel point (-) with dagesh in the fol- 
 lowing letter, or (t) when the following letter does not admit dagesh 
 
 considered that the 1 often supplies the place of subjects, predicates, 
 and even necjative particles, when either of them have been mentioned 
 in a preceding member of a sentence. 
 
 * In such cases, the accent of the first and second person singu- 
 lar is removed to the ultimate syllable: as, ''^'13'1-^^"!?'11. ; except 
 verbs whose third radical is a quiescent letter : as, nsy^l, T'^'SI.V 
 
 t Except when the accent happens to come iuunediately after 1 : 
 ?ni which may be rendered, and he shall live, or he did live (see 
 Num. xxi. 8, 9). 
 
 :j: The accent is, in such cases, removed to the penultimate, pro- 
 vided neither dayesh kazak, nor sh'va final succeeds such vowel, and 
 the word is not in pause; otherwise the accent retains its place: as, 
 '±)P% ^h% 1pN*V It is owing to the removal of the accent that 
 the final long vowel of verbs is sometimes changed into a short 
 vowel : thus, D-lpJ, 3K^^, 3ipJ_D^^1, l^^l, 3DJ1 : and for the same 
 reason the radical n of verbs of the Sixth Conjugation is dropped : 
 thus, n??'.— l?;.l : nx?.- ^V--
 
 218 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 (see the preceding examples) ; whereas the conjunctive 1 has always 
 (•)> (•)> or shureJc for its vowel point (see note, p. 38). 
 
 249. Obs. 3. — This tense is often found at the beginning of 
 chapters and books (as in Gen. ii. vi. vii. Levit. i. &c.), where, of 
 ourse, no other verb can precede it ; but this occurs only in his- 
 torical narratives, which necessarily refer to past time, and where 
 no mistake can possibly arise. Besides, the vowel of the 1 fully 
 indicates, in all such instances, that the verb must be construed 
 in the past. 
 
 250. Obs. 4. — These converted tenses are never used unless 
 preceded by the prefix 1 ; in every other instance, the simple past 
 and the simple future are used. 
 
 231. Obs. 5. — Hence it is that in the converted tenses the verbs 
 must precede their subjects: as, D^O''^. "1^N*5 (Gen.i. 3) and he 
 said God, i.e. and God said; HVlQ "l^^^. (Exod. xiv. 3) and 
 he shall say, Pharaoh, i.e. and Pharaoh shall say; inbn "l^ij"! ; 
 HB^t^n mjpsi (Num. V.) : but the simple tenses may have their 
 subjects before or after them: thus, CH^^? X'^3 (Gen.i. 1) he 
 created, namely, God, i.e. God created; '^^''.0 Tl-'^T! (Ibid. 2) 
 and the earth was; '^\^S^ ''^^?^0 ^h (Exod. xxxiii. 23) or 
 '?]\3Q7 T]?^. '•3X70 (Exod. xxxii. 34) mine angel shall go before 
 thee. 
 
 252. Obs. 6. — There is no difference whatever in point of sig- 
 nification between the simple and converted tenses. Those that 
 represent the past are used for the Imperfect, Perfect, and Plu- 
 pierfect. "^"Q^ may, therefore, be rendered — he said, he has said, 
 he HAD said : so likewise I^X*!!* may be rendered — and he said, 
 
 * The predominant sense of this converted tense is that of the 
 Imperfect. It is mostly used in narratives, for which reason it is 
 denominated by some grammjuians, the historical tense.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 219 
 
 and he has said, and he had said. The context alone can deter- 
 mine in which of these three senses either of the verbs are used. It 
 is the same with the future tenses : as, "l^N^ he shall say, ">^??1 
 and he shall say ; ^''>}\ they shall he, ^^y}\ and they shall he. (See 
 Art. 255). 
 
 253. Obn. 7. — When the same verb occurs twice in the same 
 sentence*, and the clauses are in opposition, the first takes com- 
 monly the converted form, and the second the simple form : as, 
 ^'^ t^l? W"^^^- °'^* '^'"'^^ C3'n% t^")?*.! (Gen. i. 5, 8, 10) ; 
 nm^? nny n°ri \>py |k'v nj?h ^nn >h\ (Gen. iv. 2) ; see v. 3—4, 
 
 4 — 5, of the same chapter, and xi. 3, xxxv. 19, &c. Future, 
 
 •i^^N'n D5''ni32 ibo-i d5''?.3 "li^'s ari^fsi (Lev. xxvi. 29) ; 
 
 n^-jn -Vn^. D^^iyi n^O^ °?V15!? rin^ni (ibid. 33. — See likewise 
 V. 42, and Num. v. 17. — Deut. xxviii. 12, 13). 
 
 254. The following passages in which the same verbs are con- 
 strued differently, according as they are preceded by a past or by a 
 future tense, are inserted here for the purpose of still further eluci- 
 dating the preceding remarks respecting the tenses. 
 
 Examples of verbs of the past with the prefix ^ Examples of verbs assuming a future significa- 
 
 retaining their past signification, in consequence lion inconsequence of being preceded by a simple 
 of their being preceded by a simple past tense. future or by an imperative. 
 
 (Gen. xvii..'!.) 
 
 past. past. 
 
 (Job i. 1.) 
 
 "^ 
 
 c.fnt. 
 
 (Gen. vi. 21.) 
 
 , imp. 
 
 * Or even in two consecutive verses, as in Gen. iv. 4, 5.
 
 220 
 
 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 . 1 j)ast. , past. 
 
 .. .. - T : I ~ : • v; T T 
 
 past. past. 
 
 c^nnni. y^^ npyn 
 
 (Gen. xxxiv.5.) 
 
 (Gen. xl. 10.) 
 J subjunc. I I subjunc. 
 
 • •.•:iv : ' - T : • • t • : 
 
 (Num. XXX. •'5, 4.) 
 
 Examples of future verbs assuming a past 
 signification, in consequence of being preceded 
 by a simple past tense. 
 
 c. past. c. past. past. 
 
 (judg. xii. 2 — 4.) 
 1 c.past. c.past. past. 
 
 T — * • T • V T 
 
 (Neh. i. 4—5.) 
 c.past. c.past. c. past, c.past. post. 
 
 (Exod. X. 14, 15.) 
 
 Examples of verbs in the future having the 
 prefix 1, and yet retaining their future significa- 
 tion, on account of being preceded by a simple 
 future or an imperative. 
 
 fut. fut. 
 
 V : V ; T T ; •• 
 
 (Gen. xviii. 21.) 
 
 fut. ,fut. imp. 
 
 (Judg. xi! 37.) 
 
 ,fut. v fut. imp. 
 
 Use and Application of the Tenses. 
 
 255. The predominant use of the Tenses is the 
 same in Hebrew as in other languages, viz. — 
 
 * It has already been observed that the participle with the verb 
 to he expresses continued or repeated action. 
 
 t For 7??rip ""'"^^J" as nothing is more common in Hebrew than 
 the ellipsis of the verb ^^n*
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 221 
 
 The p RES EXT indicates the conjoined existence 
 of the subject and predicate at tlie time of speaking, 
 and, of course, that the action is in a progressive 
 
 state* : as, j^^'^D Dj;S nb^V nnx* ^m n-in nn'in n? 
 
 ^^in^ "1^^' nriN* (Exod. xviil. 14) What (is) this thing- 
 thai tliou doest (art doing) to the people? Why sittest 
 thou (art thou sitting) alone?— n'h^. DnS^H ^3 ynV '^^^* 
 (Gen. xxiii. 13) Mj/ lord knoweth that the children 
 are tender (i/oung) ;— Dn^N* D^in^l Tl^^:^ t^^ T'"^ I^^ 
 D^^b '^n^V.., ni.ril^ ^l^VJ^h (Exod. v. 16). 
 
 The Past Tenses are used to represent the conjoint 
 existence of the subject and predicate at a time prior 
 to that of speaking, without expressing whether the 
 time is completely past, and the action is completely 
 finished or not, nor whether it has any reference to 
 another point of time specified in the sentence ; these 
 must be inferred from the context^ : as, 1p3 Hin^l 
 
 1^1 ncTiS^s nnb^S nin^ b^y^i nss ^m^ ni^'m 
 
 ... .... - TT : T : ^ T T V -; - tt 
 
 (Gen. xxi. 1) And the Lord visited Sarah as he had 
 said, and the Lord did unto Sarah as he had spoken ; 
 
 * This appears to be the characteristic of the active participles, 
 and therefore all the tenses which are compounded of them, whether 
 the verb to be is expressed or understood, indicate the action in a 
 state of progress. 
 
 t The want of distinct forms for the suhdivisions of the p«s/, occa- 
 sions no difficulty whatever; for the same circumstances which, in 
 other languages, induce a writer or speaker to make use of either of 
 the subdivisions, easily show in what sense the Hebrew pasf is to 
 be understood.
 
 222 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 nirHiS niwSnv nin; npS (Zech. x. 3) The Lord of 
 //05^^ bath visited his flock ; '2 l^JiD nnb^? T\'^1^p ^5 
 i»j;"ns* nin^ np5 (Ruth i. G) i^or ^//c had heard in the 
 fl eld {country) of Moah, that the Lord had visited his 
 people. 
 
 The Future is used to indicate the conjoint 
 existence of the subject and predicate in a time subse- 
 quent to that of speaking* : as, '^J^'lT n^H* "15 (Gen.xv. 
 13) thy seed will be a stranger; yr\'2,^'h^ Ni2n r\m] 
 nnitO nn^b? nni-vin Di^^5 (Gen. xv. 15) «/;r/ ^/zo« Shalt 
 come to thy fathers in peace, thou shalt be buried in 
 
 a good old age; ^)i'm n)r\] ipp'_ n)p D^y;i^ ypn m] 
 
 (Isa. xxiii. 17) and it shall come to pass after the end 
 of seventy years, that the Lord will visit Tijre ; 1^5^ 
 
 'TTs pn>N5 ■^t^^|5; io^Sxpn hhp ^m ^'b^ f]^"nx n>s 
 
 ^^^ iD^"'*liri ^/^e enemy said, L ivill pursue, I will over- 
 take, L luill divide the spoil : my desire shall be satisfied 
 upon them-f ; L will draiv my sword, my hand shall 
 destroy themX (Exod. xv. 9). 
 
 * Some grammarians consider this tense as an aorist, others as a 
 loresent tense : but though this form of the verb is used in some in- 
 stances to express present time, yet there can be no doubt that its 
 predominant use is to express future time. It has, therefore, very 
 justly been considered by the ancient grammarians, as well as by 
 Gesenius, as a future tense, 
 
 t Literally, my soul shall be full of them : i. e. my sotil shall be 
 satiated ivith vengeance. 
 
 X We have here a beautiful specimen of the fyure which rhetori 
 cians call asyndeton. The inspired poet, by omitting the conjunctive
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 223 
 
 25G. The Hebrews use tlieir present tense where 
 in English we commonly use the imperfect : 
 
 l.v/. — In imagery, or in the recital of dreams and visions, when 
 the narrator represents a past occurrence, in the same manner as he, 
 or the person of whom he speaks, originally saw it, and as if it were 
 still present to him. Such recitals are generally introduced by the 
 word n3ri1 and behold, being an invitation to the hearer to place 
 himself in the same situation : as, nyiS a-yo DpD njni. □Pn.*! 
 
 13 DnTi D^^y D'n'^sss ^px^p nini nip^tt'^^'n j?°|ip icwi (Gen. 
 
 xxviii. 12) lit. And he dreamed, and behold, a ladder placed vpon 
 the earth, and its top reaching towards heaven; and behold, angels of 
 God ascending and descending upon it. (See also Gen. xl. xli.) 
 
 n^V^p ")3^'p-i d'-):} pn|p prni. nyn^ n-ni iny nin^ ri^,r}\ 
 : Ti)p) L*'y-in n"? t^v?. nnn insi. nin^ n-na ^ : nirr; •'32^ 
 : i-\p^_ n'?'?'^ Sip t'xn -insi njn? l*\s3 n*? t^s t'ynn -inxi 
 (1 Kings xix. 11—13.) : im^x2 v^s dV*i -in^^x ybtj'3 ^n>i 
 
 lit. And behold, tlie Lord passing by, and a great and strong wind 
 disjoining mountains, and shivering rocks before the Lord; not in 
 the ivind (is) the J^ord ; and after the ivind an earthquake ; not in the 
 earthquake (is) tlie Lord: and after the earthquake afire; not in the 
 fire (is) the Lord ; and after the fire a still soft voice*. And when 
 Elijah heard it, he wrapped his face in his mantle, 8^c. 
 
 1 before each verb, marks not only the vehemence of the passion 
 with which the Egyptians were animated, but likewise the ease and 
 the rapidity with which they imagined they could satisfy their thirst 
 of vengeance. (Compare Cnesar's veni, vidi, vici.) Nor is the next 
 passage less beautiful : DJ "ItDDS '^HII^ ??^'^ « breath of air from 
 tlie Lord was sujficient to blast all these towering hopes, and to anni- 
 hilate the proud boasters. 
 
 * It was the voice of Mercy, — the gentle voice of Truth which 
 is never heard amidst destroying elements. Well might the holy
 
 2'24 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 257. 2nd. — When a whole phrase is used as explanatory of 
 a preceding verb, or as its objective case, and the phrase indi- 
 cates an action or event, or circumstance which existed at a 
 tune contemporary with that which is denoted by the preceding 
 verb : as, (Gen. iii. 7) 'iVl'). and they knew (not -Vn a^pny^ >3 
 that they were 7iaked), but ^[} Q''p-1"lJ?. ''3 that they are naked*, 
 because that which they knew was not their ^jasi condition, but 
 their condition at the time when they attained this knowledgef ; 
 nD^^ N^n nV^XJ;ip ^3 t<nni (Ruth i. 18) lit. And she saw that 
 she is persisting to go; DP^VP? I?^!"^-- '? =IP3^:- ^T- (Oen. xlii. 1) 
 lit. and Jacob saw that there is corn, ^c. So likewise, "^3111. t<"}*1 
 vhv D^n-V? O'^^^ n^^p(Gen. xviii. 1) And he saw, and behold, 
 three rncn are standing by him (not stood), because the two circum- 
 stances happened at the same time. 
 
 258. The Present Tense is used in Hebrew, in 
 some cases where we use in English the future : viz. 
 
 prophet, contrasting his own burning zeal with the soothing voice 
 of Divine Mercy, '^hide his face in a mantle.'' The sublimity of this 
 passage, and the moral truths to be drawn from it, need scarcely be 
 pointed out to the student. 
 
 * Accustomed as we are in modern language to relate all past 
 events in the historical tense, such phraseology appears very strange: 
 it is nevertheless very correct in a logical point of view. 
 
 •fWhen the attained knowlege is of any thing -past or future, 
 then these respective tenses are used : as, D^Pn •1?i? ''? HJ J^TI (Gen. 
 
 viii. 11) ; ltpi"?n i:| Sh nf'y -\f^ m ynn (Gen. ix. 24) ; n^ ^3 jJix vti 
 
 ^l}^\ '"h (Gen.xxxviii.9). 
 
 X The word ^"l. is never employed in the past, yet, for the reason 
 before stated, the authors of the Established Version have rendered 
 it by the imperfect ivas. In the next verse, however, '^). '? 'i^V??^ 
 ClliyP? "^5^ which they justly considered as a quotation, they have 
 preserved its original meaning : thus, / have heard that there is, &c.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 225 
 
 when the future event is fast approaching, and is 
 certain to occur ; or where the future time is marked 
 by some other word or phrase : thus, ^i^3^^ D'^H'Tlp'^ ""S 
 (Gen. xix. 13) For we luill ckstroij, Heb. far we are 
 destroijing — are about to destroy ; rty^^l^ *Tiy Q^Dv ^3 
 l^p^O '?^S* (Gen. vii. 4) For yet seven days, and I will 
 cause It to rain, Heb. / cause it to rain, the time 
 being already specified by n>;:nt^ niy DW ^2' 
 
 2.'59. Ohs. — We sometimes make use of the present tense in 
 ^English not exactly to denote the present moment, but as a general 
 expression: as when we say, / love my coiintnj, he loves his children, 
 &c. In such cases, the Hebrew uses mostly the past tense, though 
 sometimes the future or present : thus, (Exod. xxi. 5) Should the 
 servant sai/, I love my master, 8fc. Heb. ''^^ns / have loved ; (Gen. 
 xxxi. G) and ye knoiv that with all my power, ^'c. Heb. l^l^.y. ye 
 have known ; (Gen. xxvii. 2) behold now, I am old, I know not, Sfc. 
 Heb. ''Ji'^i^T — ''^yi^^ N? ; (1 Kings iii. 7) / know not how to go out, or 
 to come in, Heb. Vl^ ^''' fut. 
 
 260. Events that occur frequently, and habitual 
 actions, are generally expressed in Hebrew by the 
 future tense, though in English we use in such cases 
 the past : thus. (Gen. ii. 6) But a mist ivent tip, Heb. 
 •^^J^.t "^""^l (Hid a mist shall go up, i.e. « inist continued 
 to ascend repeatedly, often; (Num. ix. 16) So it ivas 
 always, the cloud covered it, 8^c. Heb. ri^H''. |3 so it 
 used to be, I^D^**. \)'^T\ the cloud used to cover it. In 
 the same sense ought all the verbs that occur in 
 Num. ix. 16—23 (such as I^D!, ^y?D^ &c) to be
 
 2'26 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 understood. So likewise (Job i. 5) thus did Job, Heb. 
 "^^^T. he cont'umed to do, did no rcpcatedlij. 
 
 261. The future is likewise sometimes used for the past, or the 
 present, after the words TN then, D").^ not yet : as, "l^^^'J TX (Exod. xv.) 
 then sang Moses, c^-c. ; i^??^ Cl"|.0 (Gen xxiv.) before I had finished ; 
 pxi;ri pnp (Exod. ix. 33) ye do not fear*. 
 
 262. Absolute propositions and general truths, 
 which are in most languages expressed in the present 
 tense, may in Hebrew be announced in any of the 
 tenses ; it being well understood that such proposi- 
 tions not being subject to time, the verbs which they 
 contain can only be assertory ; and therefore what- 
 QYevform the verbs contained in such sentences may 
 happen to have, they must, when translated into 
 English, be expressed in the present tense : thus, 
 
 rn'dj nSiy^ p«ri^ k£ ^r\\ "^^h nil (Ecc. i. 4) 
 
 A generation passeth away, and a generation cometh ; 
 hut the earth abideth/br ever. 
 
 In this sentence the predicates being all expressed by participles, 
 must of course be rendered in English in the present tense. But the 
 predicates of the two following propositions : ^ipfD ^<?-1 ti'0|^n ITiri. 
 {v. 5) though the verbs are in the past, must nevertheless be rendered 
 in the present ; viz. the sun riseth, and the sun setteth — because the 
 propositions express a natural phenomenon which occurs repeatedly 
 
 * Sometimes after Htt tvhat, !!'<'? ivhence : as, ^^^^ n^ What 
 seeJcest thou ? i<nri j^NO Whence comest thou ?
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 227 
 
 and constantly. In the same sense must the propositions con- 
 tained in the eighth verse be understood, altliough the verbs ^/'r^, 
 
 yav'n, S?v are future forms: thus, SnVN'? a^i??;^ CDnn'nn-'?3 
 
 J?b-^'P ITX t>?|?r3ri-X^1 nx-l^ p.y. Vl^'r^-^h 121'? ::'^S All things are 
 labouring^, man cannot utter itf; the eye is never satisjiedl ivith 
 seeing t nor the ear Jilled\ with hearing. 
 
 By way of further illustration, we refer the student to the first 
 Psalm, where he will find four verbs in the past, '^\T}-, 2^J, "^'^^i 
 
 Vyi ; eight in the future, i3Nn, -irD-ip^, n>H'!, ^^V^., '?■"l3^ \7\\, n|ri: ; 
 
 one active and one j^assive participle, VIV, >iril?', all which must, for 
 the reasons, before stated, be rendered in the present. 
 
 Moods. 
 
 Injinitive Mood. 
 
 263. Infinitives considered as nouns (Art. 113.) 
 may be used : — 
 
 1st. As the subjects of a proposition (Art. 163). 
 
 Thus, nn^ nnxn nrn nit: n"? (Gen. ii. 18) lit. the being of the 
 man alone {is) not good, i. e. to he alone ivithout the intended aid is a 
 condition not fit for man ; r\2p niH^^ nn:?J 12D^'P-1 ni^ny ^^t 
 (Prov. xxi. 3). 
 
 2nd. As the complement of other verbs by which 
 they are governed, or as their objective cases : — 
 
 Thus, "t^l Jl'c^l'?- "^^IJ^ n"? (Gen. xix. 22) / am not able to do 
 ang thing; '^^^V ^"^.? avV? \^^ (Num. xxii. 14) Balaam refused 
 
 * i. e. In a state of activity. f /'. e. He cannot describe it. 
 
 X i,e. Not satiated. § /. e. It becomes not weary.
 
 228 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 to go until us* ; t^i^J riS^ VIK n"? (1 Kings iii. 7) / knotv not to go 
 out and to come in, i. e. the going otit nor the coming in; ''^P) ^^^K^ "^J^P 
 (Ps. Ixxvii. 3) my soul refused to be comforted. 
 
 3rcl . As the antecedent or consequent of a noun : — 
 
 Thus, '7NX>': >:2b "T]^?? ^^P ^3^'? (Gen. xxxvi. 31) lit. before 
 the reigning of a king to (over) the children of Israel ; I^^P ^f?^ ^"' r 
 (Gen. ii. 16) in the day of thy eating thereof; il5^n "5*^? (Lev. 
 XXV. 50) from the year of his being sold- 
 
 264. Like substantives, they admit of the pro- 
 nominal affixes, and may be the objects of com- 
 parison : — 
 
 Thus, ''P-tpl ''R^K^ riVII n^^ (Ps. cxxxix. 2) thou hnowest my 
 sitting and my rising; ')^ ^in^in nX^ >P\VX '^'^P^ ^^l^Vl '^'^7t\ 
 
 (Tsa. xxxvii. 28); ^DN \:;'vh nnis ^rinp '^ nnix ^nn y\n (Gen. 
 
 xxix. 19) lit. better (is) my giving her unto thee than my giving 
 her unto another man; 121»? •IJriQp an.vp-nt< nhj?^ ^h niD 
 (Exod. xiv. 11). 
 
 265. They likewise admit the prefixes D, 7, "2, !3, 
 and other prepositions to mark several relations : — 
 
 7 to complete the sense of a preceding verb : as, ^"ip ^^^C '^'^^ *? 
 (Gen. vi. 1) when men began to multiply ; "1?!/' i^?3 (Gen.xxiv. 14) 
 he finished to speak, i. e. he had finished, or he had done speaking ; 
 
 * In such cases the infinitive constructive, with or without 7, is 
 mostly used, though sometimes the infinitive absolute: as, (Isa. 
 xlii. 24) wH VD'lia -intj N?V A finite verb is sometimes used 
 instead of the infinitive : as, ^n''^!'! ^?''^ '^??''^ (Esth. viii.) for
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 229 
 
 nin^7 n?2 he had done drinking ; — or to mark the purpose of a 
 preceding verb: as, '"'?.?/ •'"<y.*5 (Gen. xii. 5) and they went forth 
 to ffo, i. e. tvith the intention of going into the land, S^e. ; v'''Vl'? T?.^\ 
 (Exod. iii. 8) and I came down to deliver him. 
 
 266. With 3 or 3 they are used to indicate the coincidence of 
 two actions or events in point of time ; that is, that one action or 
 event did or ioill occur at or about the same time Avhen another 
 did or will take place: thus, Snn "hv^ nriD p-SP ^^3? (Gen. 
 xlviii. 7) in my coming from Padan, Rachel died by me, ^-c, i. e. 
 Rachel died at the time of my coming {or when I came) from Padan ; 
 D3"nnQ Na3 Jj;?^ (Prov. i. 26) / zvill mock in the coming of your 
 fear, i. e. whenever that shall happen ; T-13 23 N3 yt^T Nn? (Ibid. 
 
 xviii. 3) in the coming of the wicked, cometh also contempt, i. e. ivhen 
 the wicked cometh, there cometh liketvise contempt ; ^^JP'SH *<2? -1^1 
 ^x'V^ •1"'?? (2 Kings vi. 32) look, at the coming of the messenger, 
 shut the door, i. e. as soon as he shall arrive. So likewise (2 Kings 
 
 X. 2) DJnnbn nn^Ki-i d?'!?^? wn isDn iii^-, but, ^«3? ^n*l 
 
 •inp*! DHv^ "i^iBlI (Ibid. 7) and it came to pass on the coming 
 
 of the letter to them, and they took, i. e. tvhen the letter came, then 
 they took, c^-c. ; "lON-n ny-inn ons DS^V'in? ^np. (Gen. xix. 17); 
 ■I31?1 D^n% nn^3 \-|«1 (ibid. 29). 
 
 267. With o, they are used like nouns in the ablative*: as, 
 )^"lXn "l-inp -12^*1 (Num. xiii. 25) and they returned from searching of 
 the land; ^3 ^^nnno-l pS3 t2-1K^"p (Job i. 7) /row going to and 
 fro on the earth, and from ivalking vp and down in it. 
 
 268. Sometimes, however, the D is used in a negative sense 
 thus, (Gen. xxvii. 1) and his eyes were dim rnN">.'? from seeing, 
 
 * Or as a sign of the comparative, Avhich has already been 
 explained. 
 
 q2
 
 230 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 i. e. so that he could not see; ^<i3P rT-n-Ss "13!? (Isa. xxiv. 10) 
 every house is shut up from enter hicj, i.e. so that none can enter; 
 
 y-i ny.\ ait^p apy; dv i3^.p '^) iD^=n (Gen. xxxi. 29)*. 
 
 269. The infinitive absolute (Art. 1 1 1) is used be- 
 fore or ixfter Jifiite verbs, to indicate energy, intensity, 
 or emphasis, and must frequently be rendered in 
 English by the adverbs, surely, certainly^ eontiniially, 
 greatly, indeed, S^c. 
 
 270. Thus, niDri niO (Gen. ii. 17) dying, thou shalt die, i. e. 
 thou shalt surely die; '~'?1'!? '^^"1'^ (Ibid. iii. 16) I ivill greatly 
 enerease ; '^)}}^. '"'"'0 (Ibid, xviii. 18) he ivill assuredly he; V^H 
 ■'•^''.TS^ '=j''P^ (Ibid, xxxvii. 8) shalt thou indeed reign over us ? 
 IIK'I XIV^ J^V*! (Ibid, viii, 8) and he went out going and returning,!, e. 
 repeatedly going to and fro, S,'c. ; J??P3? ^D?? ''3 Fl^^T "^i^n nriyi. 
 (Ibid. xxxi. 30). 
 
 271. The infinitive absolute is sometimes used for finite verbs, 
 especially for the imperative : as, "IISp] CDPl^V ''3 (Zech. vii. 5) 
 whe7i ye fasted and mourned ; Dinffl ^iri?! (Jer. xxxii. 44) and they 
 shall write, and they shall seal ; rnSE^H dV n^< liDT (Exod. xx. 8) 
 remember the Sabbath day ; D^^^^{ ^3 yJDK^ (Deut. i. 16) ^^J^ 13)0 IS 
 (Ibid. xiv. 21)f. 
 
 272. The infinitive absolute is sometimes used as a noun : as, 
 
 •l^ns 2i3J1 nV-l\ K'n?! rib^ (Hos. iv. 2) lit. to swear, and to 
 
 * In all the above cases, the infinitive constructive is mostly used. 
 
 t It is highly probable that in most of these cases there is 
 an ellipsis of the finite verb : thus, ^^l^P "I'lSpl. ; "»i3|ri .I'lDT ; 
 -ibpn -ii3», &c.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 231 
 
 lie, and to murder, and to steal, ^-c, break out in abundance : i.e. 
 Imprecation, and murder, and iJicJ't, and adultery, overspread the 
 land. 
 
 273. Intiuitives arc sometimes used as adverbs: 
 as, (Exod. XXX. 36) and thou shall beat {pound) 
 some of it plH very snuiU : (Deut. xiii. 14) Thou 
 shall enquire, and make search, and ask ^t?\n ivell, 
 diligently. 
 
 274. This is likewise the case with finite verbs, followed by an 
 infinitive, or by a finite verb : as, (Gen. xxvii. 20) how is it that 
 N^l?7 J^liiP thou hast found so quickly, lit. thou hast hastened to 
 find; (EKod. ii. 18) how is it that D1*n N3 IJ^II.n?? ye are come 
 so soon to day, lit. ye have hastened to come : ^?.^^<y? •~'^?')''' 
 (] Sam. i. 12) she encreased to pray, i. e. she prayed much, con- 
 tinued to pray : •1"I21^ -lin.ri /S (1 Sam. ii. 3) do not encrease, do 
 not speak, i.e. do not speak continually. 
 
 275. This is especially the case with the verbs ^0\ to add, to 
 encrease, y^^ to return : as, ^12/ ^P^l (Gen. iv. 2) and she brought 
 forth again, lit. and she encreased to bring forth : ^-T^i' ^^P\ ^^\ 
 
 (Gen, viii. 12) and she did not again return : 120*1 P^yt 3'^'*1 
 (Ibid. xxvi. 18) and Isaac dug again, lit. and he returned and he 
 
 dug: y^^ rh'^*\ 3tr*i. (2Kings i.2): ri^'x np*i CDrrn^ ^IP*! (Gen 
 
 XXV. 1). 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 276. The Imperative is used in Hebrew, as in 
 other lanouaoes, for commanding-, entreating, &c.
 
 232 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 It admits only of the second person singular and 
 plural, m. and/.* and is used only affirmatively. 
 
 Prohibitions and admonitions are expressed by the 
 future, accompanied by the negative particles N7, 
 h^: as, h'2^T\ xS (Gen. ii. 17) thou shall not eat ; 
 "l^^ri h^ ^y^ vhrn Sn % mt thlue hand upon the 
 lad; r\tmr^'h b^J^ri h'i^\ (Gen. xxii. 12). 
 
 277. Ohs. 1. — ?^? is mostly used when a wish is expressed, in 
 which case it is generally followed by ^^j" : as, '^'^Vp N3 ?X (Gen. 
 xviii. 3) do not pass, I pray : — or in expression of encouragement, 
 admonition, and advice: as, ^I^K i^y'Fi ?X (Gen. xv. 1) feaj- not 
 Abraham ; -^.J!) Sx (Prov. i. 15) ; ^^T^T) W (Ibid). 
 
 278. Obs. 2. — A future preceded by an imperative is often used 
 as an imperative: as, ^y^P^I. "=l!? (Exod. iii. 16). 
 
 279. Obs. 3. — The imperative is sometimes used for the future : 
 as, Gen. xx. 7. and he shaU pray for thee, ^'!^). and live, i. e. 
 
 * When an imperative sense for the first and third persons is 
 required, the future is used : as, P"IN or nvnK (with paragogic H) 
 let me run (2 Sam. xviii. 22, 23) ; ''H^. there shall be, or let there 
 he; •137''. Jet them go, or they shall go. But these and similar 
 expressions are often merely declarative, intimating neither a com- 
 mand nor even a wish: as, D?iV? i^f '^V>\ (Ps. Ixxii. 17) his 
 name will be for ever ; Hin^Tli:? t^'i?.5? ■13?.'! (Hos. v. 6) they loill 
 go to seek the Lord. In this sense ought the several verbs in 
 the thirty-fifth Psalm, verses 4, 5, 6, and in several other places, to 
 be understood. 
 
 f This particle is likewise used for the same purpose in affirmative 
 phrases: as, C!?? 13J?.P X3 nj^"; (Gen. xviii. 4) Jet a little water be 
 taken ; ^5? niD (Ibid..xix. 2).
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 233 
 
 and thou shalt lice; Vni •ib'j;?^ nXT (Ibid. xlii. 18) ; «lDSni...mD-1 
 (Deut. xxxii. 50). 
 
 Subjunctive and Potential Aluod^. 
 
 280. The several Moods denominated by Gram- 
 marians, Subjunctive, Potential, Optative, &c., are 
 indicated in Hebrew by the particles jG, nD5<, ^3, 
 h^^, ^W, h, 'hh, or ^by>, or by the phrase \T\\ V*, 
 expressive of contingency, conditionality, possibility, 
 wish, &c., the verb retaining the same form which it 
 has in the indicative : — 
 
 Thus, t? lest; (Gen.iii.22) b^V^^i^i'l '''\' %'' If ^est he put 
 forth his hand and take. ..and eat, ^-c. ; l-inr^ri ^ (Ibid. 3). 
 
 D^5 if, provided; (Gen. xviii. 26) ^nsbjl • • • • ahp2 ^typt< DX 
 if I find in Sodom .... then will 1 spare, 8^c. (Gen. xxxii. 9) ; 
 
 T^\y\\ -inani ^X IK'V. Xn*^ DX if Esau come to and smite 
 
 it, then, ^-c. (See Exod. xxi.) 
 
 ^3 if, that; (Exod. xxi. 7) 'iPl? nj^l &\^ isr?^. >'2\ and if a man 
 sell his daughter, &c. ; (Gen. xxxviii. 16) ivhat toilt thou give vie, 
 "^X Xari '•3 that thou mayest come, &c. ; (Exod. iii. 11) ivho am I, 
 ■?I^X *3 that I should go... X''ViX '•31 and that I shotdd bring forth, &c. 
 
 (Judg. ix. 28) -lanfy.: ^3----^^mN; *d- 
 
 V-1X peradventure, perhaps ; (Gen. xviii. 24) D'^LJ'pq ^'\ V""^ 
 *T'^n Tjina D"'i!3'''1.V peradventure there be fifty righteous within the 
 city ; (Lam. iii. 29) njpn t^=;. "h^H- 
 
 * Likewise by ">^i? that (Gen. xi. 7) ; ]V'Q^ in order that (Gen. 
 xxvii. 25); "l-UI?? </<«^ (Gen. xxvii. 4). The Optative is frequently 
 indicated by the particle X3 : as, n^ytJn J?T X3"i05;. (Ps. vii. 10) 
 that the wickedness of the ivicked might come to an end ! These moods 
 must, however, often be inferred from the context.
 
 234 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 •1^ though, if; (Ecc. vi. 6) a^OyS D^^t^' n^8< r-\\n -I^Xl and 
 though he live twice a thousand years, &;c. ; (Esth. vii. 4) •t?'<1. 
 
 *^c;nnn -laisp? ninsK^^i Dnny^.- 
 
 •1^ O that, would; (Gen. xvii. 18) T?.?!? ^^0'. ^^'J/.P"^"^ -^^ O that 
 Ishmael might live before thee ! (Gen. xxx. 34) T'l?'!? '^^\ -I? loould 
 it might he according to thy words. 
 
 'h'h or ^*>1? ivere it not, excej^t ; (Gen. xxxi. 42) '•npx, "Or? 
 
 ^jrinW D|'5n nrij; '3 ^^ n^n ^nx except that the God of my 
 
 father .... had been with we, thou hadst sent me away now empty ; 
 
 (Judg. xiv. 18) ""riTn Drii^yp i6 Ti^^j^a ^^^ID x.'?-i'?- 
 
 jr)* ""P u'ho loould give, grant, would, that: as, • • • -l^n-ID \r\] ""D 
 nnVP ri^? (Exod. xvi. 3) ivould (to God) we had died .... in the 
 land of Egypt; D'N^n? 71):]] CDVjhz ]r\] ^D (Num. xi. 29) would 
 (to God) that all the Lord's people were prophets ; ''P "ipN'n "1^35 
 
 -ipa ;n^ ^p -ipxn nnya-i any in^. (Deut. xxviii. 67). 
 
 Participles. 
 
 281. Participles are used in Hebrew as nouns 
 (Art. 122, 207), as Adjectives (Art. 83), and as verbs 
 (Art. 245) ; and follow, according to the sense in 
 which they are employed, the rules of these respective 
 parts of speech. 
 
 282. They are often used in a very unlimited 
 sense ; in which case, the pronouns, whoso, ivhoever, 
 he that, Sec, though not expressed, must be supplied : 
 
 as — 
 
 T\])yi nnx itD)i2 !in:s (p^-ov. xh. i.) 
 
 Whoso loveth instruction, loveth knowledge ; hut he that hateth 
 reproof (is) a brute ; lit. a lover of zvisdom {is) a lover of know- 
 ledge ; and,'^'c.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE, 235 
 
 nrh y5^! 'inQnN* n^y (Prov. xii.n.) 
 
 He that tilleth his land .shall be satisjied tvith bread. 
 
 \sbhi D^*n x^^ \s*^^b ^5 'h vt2a anx* '^m 
 
 (Ibid. viii. 34— 3G.) )l^^^ ^f^H 
 
 Blessed (is the) man who hearkeneth unto me, S^-c For whoso 
 
 findeth me, Jindeth life, ^-e But he that niisseth me, wromjelh 
 
 his soul. 
 
 '\'2'\vi Q'^^pn ^{^tr ^^nn Dn.^t?^p (Jonah w. 9.) 
 
 Tlieij that observe lying vanities, forsake their own mercy. 
 
 283. This is likewise often the case even when 
 the particle has the prefix H, especially when it is 
 preceded by 73, or by the same Jinite verb* : as, 
 J^tot^'n 73 (Gen. xxi. 7) whoever shall hear it ; (2 Sam. 
 xvii. 9) J^t^b^n y^^l, lit. and he shall hear the hearer, 
 c^T., i. e. ivhosoever shall hear; 7$ijn 7b\ ""2 (Dent. 
 xxii.8). 
 
 284. Participles are sometimes used as the ob- 
 jects of preceding verbs : as, np^} D'^Sn* ^ri^^^ 
 (Gen. XXX vii. 17) I have heard them say. Let us go, 
 ike. ; (Gen. xxvii. 6) and Rebeh-ah spake unto Jacob 
 her son nbxSf saijing, ^T^ ^'^^'T<^ '"^^P^ H-in 
 
 * Or when followed by the same finite verb: as, (Ezek. iii. 27) 
 
 •j- The word 1'^^^!? (inf. cons, of ""^5?) so often used in Scripture, 
 is generally introduced before a quotation. In the instance before 
 us it is used twice. By the first, the sacred writer indicates that
 
 23G THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 n^V 'h ni<^:3ri : ib^h ^'m ibj; Sni /jc/ioid i heard 
 
 thy father speak unto Esau thy brother, saying, Bring 
 me venisun, Ike. 
 
 Concord of the Verb witJi the Nominative. 
 
 285. The verb generally agrees with its nomi- 
 native or subject in number, gender, and person : 
 except — 
 
 Is^. — The pluralis excellentice, which mostly, but not always, 
 takes a verb in the singular: as, (Gen. i, 1)) D"'nP^. ^^7? ; (Exod. 
 xxi. 4) i^-iriM^n>« DX ; (Ibid. 29) HW V^j;? DJ1* ; (Gen. xx. 13) 
 DSn^t? ^ns •iyj;in- (See Art. 220.) 
 
 2)id. — When the verb precedes its subject, in which case the verb 
 may or may not agree with itf: as^ (Gen. i. 14) m'S^ '•ni, where 
 
 the words following it are the very words spoken by Rebekah, in- 
 cluding the second "ibS?, by which she introduces the words of Isaac, 
 or at least their general sense, namely, ^\'i y n^^'^nn- 
 
 * In these instances, the agreement is logical, i. e. according to 
 the signification ; but in the last example, the agreement is merely 
 for7nal. 
 
 t Verbs, considered as mere attributes, cannot, strictly speaking, 
 admit either of number, gender, or person ; these can only belong 
 to the pronoims, which are included in the form of the verb. Now, 
 we can easily suppose that the mind of the speaker niay, in some 
 instances, be chiefly directed to the attribute, without immediately 
 thinking of the particular subject or subjects to which the attribute 
 may happen to belong (as is the case when verbs are used imper- 
 sonally) ; the subject being introduced, as it were, by a sort of after- 
 thought, and of course, as merely explanatory ; and hence the reason 
 why in such instances the concord is disregarded.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 237 
 
 the verb is singular masculine, and the noun plural foniininc ; (Num. 
 ix. 6) D*t^'3^? ^np, here the verb is in the singular, and the noun is 
 in the plural ; (Gen. ix. 23) nc^l D;:' n|'^*1, here we have two nouns 
 connected by a copulative, yet the verb is in the singular ; (Job xlii. 
 
 15) nis; W'm Nyj?3 n^v 
 
 Qrd. — When the subject is com])lex (Art. 180), and one of the 
 terms (the consequent) happens to be plural, then the verb is some- 
 times put in the plural, although the leading word (the antecedent) 
 is in the singular : as, (Gen. iv. 10) D^pyv ^^nx >m_ Vlp ; (1 Sam.ii. 
 
 4) D^nn Dnila nt^'iv (job xxxviii.2l) d^Ii ^opspp-v 
 
 Ath. — When a plural noun is used distributively : as, npV' • • 'nv/np 
 
 (Ex. xxxi. 14) lit. her prof aners he shall die, i. e. ever;/ one that 
 
 profanes it {the Sabbath), shall die; (Gen. xlix. 22) nnyv ni33 ; 
 (Prov.iii. 18) T^'XP C'??'^"!" 
 
 5th. — Sometimes when the apparent subject is a nominative 
 absolute (Art. 204) : as, N3T D^pin^^ niyh?-1 (Job xxii. 9) and (as to 
 the arms) of the orphans, it is broken ; (Hab. i. 16) nx;")3 i?3Xj3V 
 
 Q>th. — When the verb iT'n is used as a connecting verb, it may 
 agree either with the subject or the predicate: as, (Gen. i. 11) 
 
 •inhi -in'ri nn\n H'Jv'l; (Gen. xxxi. 8) ^n3|;> n^.n^ nn.i'^ji- The 
 
 concord is, however, often entirely disregarded* : as, (Gen. xli. 
 
 53) r\\r\ -iK't^ n^nn »3^ ync'; (Levit. xxiv. 5) ?-ij.D! nwy >3^ 
 
 nnsn rhnr\- 
 
 * This is likewise often the case when a pronoun is used as the 
 copula: as, (Lev. XXV.) anint^ ^<^^ a*lS"^ 'IV 'J^? '3; (Josh. xiii. 
 
 14) in^n: s-in — r\\^] >e?>' ; (jer. x. 3) J^-in S?n c^pyn nipn >3. 
 
 The reason of this is evident, as the copula cannot, strictly speaking, 
 be effected by gender or number. Several apparent anomalies may 
 be attributed to the omission of some word: as, (I Sam. xxv. 27) 
 
 r\r^ripp S'-nn nj^J^ nt?rn nDn^n, where the word iy;. is probably 
 
 omitted. There are, however, many discordances that cannot be 
 thus explained.
 
 238 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 286. When several subjects of different genders*, 
 having- the same predicate or verb, are connected, 
 and the predicate is in the plural, then the mascu- 
 line plural is used ; as, (Gen xviii. 1 1) H^b'^ Dn^.^X"! 
 D^^pl ; (Jud. xiii. 19) DW iW^l nto (not nixh). 
 
 But the verb or predicate may be in the singular, in which case 
 either the masculine or the feminine may be used: as, (Gen. xxiv.55) 
 
 n»x) n^nx ipN^i; (Num. xii.) pnt?] nnp lanjiii; (Exod. xxi. 4) 
 n\r^,^ n'-nn nnV'-i n^'xri; (Prov.xxvii. 9) 2!? n^b'^. rrpp^ \gf; (i 
 
 Kings xvii. 15) X-ini X>n 'pDNTlV 
 
 287. When the subject is a Noun of the common 
 gender, the verb may be in either gender : as, (Levit. 
 
 iv. 2) ™i;V••■^<b^In ^3 ^S.;; (is. xxxiii. 9) S3« 
 
 288. When the subject is a collective noun, the 
 verb may be either in the singular or plural : as, 
 (Exod. i. 20) ^tt^y-n Dj;n :37V 
 
 289. When the subject is indefinite, as when w^e 
 say some one did so and so, the Hebrew makes use 
 of the verb of the third person : as, iDp' N'lD [3 7^. 
 733 (Gen. xi. 9) therefore was the )iame of the city 
 
 * When the several subjects consist of pronouns of different 
 persons, the verbs must then agree with that which is, in the lan- 
 guage of grammarians, the most noble ; that is, the 1st person has 
 the preference over the other two, and the 2nd over the 3rd : as, 
 (Gen. xxxi. 44) nriXI ^Ji:? nn? nnnp? r-\^) -, (2 Sam. xix. 30) 
 nnbn-nx -ip^nri sn''V'! nm-
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 239 
 
 called Baljel, Heb. the?rfore he called, i. e. some one*; 
 t)pvS n^.\**l (Gen. xlviii. 1) and one told Joseph; 
 ^pr.? '^•^■-^- (Ibid. 2) : or by the passive verb : as, 
 nryr^^h W (Gen. xxii. 20) and it teas told Abraham, 
 i. e. some one told him. 
 
 Ohs. 1 . — The third person of the verb is likewise used when the 
 subject or cause is unknown, and where, in English, the neuter 
 pronoun is used : as, i?""!^!.*! (Gen. xxxii. 8) ojid it grieved him ; 
 *< "IV it grieves me ; Q^'IlI ^i^*! lit. and he was the rain, i. e. // 
 rained ; D^i?")?'1 rii?1|*5 ^"^*1 and there was thunder and lightning, i.e. 
 it thundered and lightened. 
 
 Ohs. 2. — The third person is sometimes used instead of the second 
 or first, and nouns instead of pronouns, in addressing a superior : thus, 
 Vnny^ hv. flVP, riyn? (Gen. xli. lO) Pharaoh was wroth ivith his 
 
 servants, for "T*"!.?!! W ri^Vi^, nns ;— "ynj"! \JTS3 in-^ Tiiy. Nj'ian^. 
 (Gen. xliv. 18) for "^^3^X3 in^^ xrm^-LJi! ;_rn3y:ns W ^3^^? for 
 
 wn'N nW r\m (See likewise Gen. xix. 19 ; xxxiii. 13, 14)t. 
 
 Government of Verbs. 
 
 290. Active transitive verbsj govern the objective 
 case: as, S)DV DN* 1r\^ h^'im (Gen. xxxvii. 3) 
 and Israel loved Joseph ; ^W^.\ Tl-^l"^^ '^W (Ps- 
 c xix. 168) / have kept ihy precepts and thy testimonies. 
 
 * This corresponds with the German man, and the French on. 
 
 \ Thus we see that the language of politeness, or rather of abject 
 humility, was early in vogue amongst mankind. 
 
 \ Many verbs are used both intransitively and transitively : as, 
 •^Sn ^^T"! ^''^\ (Judg. XX. 41) and the men of Israel turned; 
 iSj; Njpi? D3^ "Tian (Ps. cv. 25) he turned their hearts to hate his 
 people; Q"J^ DH^P^P ns ^SH (Ibid. 29).
 
 240 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 291. Some verbs govern two objective cases: as, 
 rrnin D^;)r!3ri"nK ^<r7X?^ (Hag. ii. ll) ask the priests 
 (concerning) the law ; Y;i^.1 ^W^ ^^J^^^ (Ps- li' '5) 
 I will teach transgressors thy way. 
 
 292. This is especially the case with verbs in 
 
 Hiphil: as, H.^n-n^ ^^^n-n« ^'"y^^b (2 Sam. xix. 
 1 6) to make the king pass over the Jordan ; '^''^)'l!3J?n"| 
 Y5'*.^5"nNI (Jer. xvii. 4) and I will cause thee to serve 
 thine enemies*. 
 
 293. The student will recollect that when we speak of cases in 
 Hebrew, nothing is meant but the signs f (prefixes or prepositions) 
 which are added to the subordinate member of a sentence (Art. 
 188), in order to distinguish them from the more essential parts. 
 Now, what particular prefix or preposition these subordinate mem- 
 bers or complements require, must depend, as has already been 
 observed (Art. 190), on the signification of the verb, and on the 
 intention of the speaker ; and this intention can often only be known 
 from the particular prefix or preposition which accompanies the 
 complement, and by which the signification of the verb is frequently 
 varied. Thus the verb 13J? construed with nx signifies to labour, 
 to cultivate, to serve ; but with 5 it signifies, to impose labour : 
 nV^ construed with ?^ signifies to attend to, to regard ; but with 
 
 * Generally verbs, &c., which are transitive in ?|5, become doubly 
 transitive in ?V.? : as, 10? (Is. xxvi. 10) he learned; T?^ (Ecc. 
 xii. 9) he caused to learn, or he taught. 
 
 t But these signs are sometimes omitted (Art. 215), in which case 
 the connection is said to be immediate. The complement of a verb 
 may be the name of the action (Art. 263), and then it is said, in the 
 language of grammarians, to be governed in the infinitive mood.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 24 
 
 ^ or }P it signifies to turn awai/, disregard : '^'^. 7^^ is to ask, 
 ^■■hm to consult, Oy.^ or IP yx^J* to request, h-V^^ to inquire. 
 
 Miscellaneous Remarks. 
 
 294. The words Dip to rise, Nb'i to lift up, to raise, 
 nJ3 to turn, and a few others, are often used pleonas- 
 tically before other verbs : as, y'J), Dp*l and he rose 
 and went ; N*7A V^^^. N*b":l and he lifted up his eyes 
 and saiv J ^V.\ t?*l and he turned and ivent out j 
 
 I .. ... T : - V T • - 
 
 295. Nouns derived from the same root with the 
 verb are often added to it pleonastically : as, Tl*! 
 *T1!3. '2b])^_ and Jacob voiced a vote ; 7n| ""^^ 'l^^ tlieij 
 wept a gTcat weeping* ; ""JTI^/n DPH (Gen. xli. 15); 
 
 rhi^ nn^n pm nnn;:! (Gen. xxvii. 33). 
 
 ClIArXER VI. 
 
 Particles. 
 
 Adverbs. 
 
 296. The modifications of attributes, which in 
 many languages are expressed by adverbs, are indi- 
 cated in Hebrew in various ways : — 
 
 * Some grammarians suppose that this mode of expression denotes 
 emphasis, but it appears to mark the ahiiost child-like simplicity of 
 the early ages, rather than any thing else.
 
 24-2 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 \st. By the repetition of the ?ioi(n or adjective (Art. 
 221, 225).—2}icl. By the injinitive absolute (Art. 269, 
 270). — 3;y/. By •d.Jlnite verb, in conjunction with an 
 injhntive constructive or with another/?7z/Ye verb. (Art. 
 273,275). — 4M. ^^ abstract nouns or other words* 
 used adverbially: as, (Exod. xii. 11) and ye shall 
 eat it ]iT3n5 with hastiness, i.e. in haste, or hastily ; 
 (Ibid. xiv. 25) and they drove than (the chariots) 
 ni^^!! with heaviness, i. e. heavily; (Judg. viii. 1) and 
 they contended with him Hj^IH^ with vehemence, or 
 vehemently. 
 
 297. Ohs. — Some of these words are never used in an adverbial 
 sense without some of the prefixes D, 7, 3, 3, as in the preceding 
 examples: others are always used without prefixes: as, (Josh. ii. 1) 
 t^'Tin secretly (from t^'lD deaf) ; D^H gratuitoiisly ; (Lam. i. 9) 
 CNpS wonders, i. e. wonderfully. Some, again, are used indiscri- 
 minately with or without prefixes: as, Ht^S (Deut. xii. 10) ; ^03^ 
 (Lev. XXV. 19) ; in safety^ securely; while others are used in 
 different senses, according as they have or have not any of the pre- 
 fixes : as, T?? alone, only, separately, but "l^p^t besides, except; 
 ^JnD ivhen^ but ''nOp for lohen, for what period of time ; Tj!? cons. 
 P^? non-existence, nothing, T^?? into nothing, T^?? as nothing ; but, 
 V^Ki signifies whence, and \'^'Q ivithout, or rather from want of 
 existence, or because there existed not; (See Is. v. 9 ; 1.2); and 
 
 * See Art. 154. 
 
 t As pL*'Xin ay-in ^2^p (Gen. xxvi. 1) besides the first famine. 
 But the to is often prefixed before the noun : as, ^'i^'Q ^^h (Exod. 
 xii. 37) besides children ; which is the same as ^I^H 12?^>
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 243 
 
 V^^ without, i. c. where there exists not, or in the non-existence (see 
 Prov. V. 23, xi. 14), i6 not, N^? without*. 
 
 298. N^n is it not ? is mostly used in indirect assertions, when 
 the inquirer knows that the answer must be in the affirmative. It 
 is therefore often equivalent to a positive assertion^, and may be 
 rendered by behold: as, a?V'2 CD']}-\ ^>nst N'bn (Gen. xxxvii. 13) 
 Do not thy brethren pasture in Shechem ? i.e. they do pasture, Sfc. ; 
 
 * The distinction between P.^? and T^?, and between these and N?, 
 &c., has already been pointed out in Art. 154, 187. Nevertheless, 
 as it is important for the student to have a clear view of the subject, 
 we shall repeat our former remarks, and elucidate them by examples. 
 
 P.i? is a noun, and signifies non-existence, nothing. It is o})poscd 
 to ^'!'., which signifies real being. T.^ is used in the absolute state, 
 but P^? when in construction with other words. Thus, absolute state, 
 PN DJ< •'132-!i?3 nSn\ K'l.q (Exod. xvii.7) Is the Lord amongst us or not? 
 lit. Is the Lord in existence ? 8fc. or Is he not in existence amongst 
 us? Cons, np D^ px "IK'S? n:? pS (Exod.xii.30) there was not a 
 house where there was not one dead, lit. there was no house in existence 
 where there was not a dead person in existence. Both P.X and Pfr? 
 indicate the non-existence of the subject, whereas iO indicates the 
 non-existence of the predicate or attribute (see the examples in Art. 
 187). The affirmative answer to the question tJ'^K HS CJ^n (Jud. 
 iv. 20) is there any man here? or HNin ni;3 t^.^.n (1 Sam. ix. 11) 
 is the seer here ? is ^^. there exists. The negative answer is PJJ there 
 exists not. But the affirmative answer to nriK HNin seest thou ? 
 or ri'''^m ^'«s« thou seen ? is j? so, yes, or ''7^^ n^h-"'n''S<T ; and the 
 negative answer is ^^/' ?3 P^? signifies nothing ivhatever, excluding 
 the whole as well as the parts : but 73 N? signifies not all, excluding 
 the whole but not all the parts, 
 
 t A negative is often implied in affirmative interrogations : as, 
 (Ezek.xviii. 23) P^n HtD pEDS )*bnn do I then desire the death of the 
 wicked ? which is equivalent to / do not desire, 8^'c. 
 
 R
 
 244 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 n.Tn "15^-3 ^^^- ^"^n (Deut. xi.30) //re they not o« the other side 
 Jordan ? i. e. Behold they are, 8fC. 
 
 299. Two neo^atives are not, in Hebrew, equivalent to an affirma- 
 
 c t o 
 
 tive, but only strengthen the negation: as, D^VP? D''1?p 1'^ V?Pn 
 (Exod. xiv. 11). 
 
 300. Negatives are sometimes added to nouns, adjectives, &c., 
 to denote privation : as, "ispp'pt? innumerahle , PS^T^ unprepared ; 
 D''JiS")''N powerless, impotent ; nb"K7 strengthless ; D^n'N? unwise ; 
 D''3Il £<? childless ; riny N? "Ip3 a cloudless morning ; ^^y^'X? useless, 
 profitless; ^^'^^ not-a-God, i.e. an idol ; 0^"'^''? not a nation, i.e. a 
 laivless horde* ; CD??^" y? without a name, i. e. infamous ; "T^p "^^{^ 
 irremovable^ ; riJOvt? immortality\.. 
 
 301. The negatives are sometimes omitted, and must be supplied 
 by the reader: as, (1 Sam. ii. 3) NV^-nnha r\r(2\ nini;! ^2r\^_ h% 
 
 D3^Qp pny, supply ^« ; (Ps. ix. 19) riipn I'r^N n'2f\ n^h ^h ^3 
 nj?^ nnN'J^-D^ijy, supply nV 
 
 This is especially the case when two negative propositions are 
 joined together by "i, when both the negative as well as the predicate 
 of the second proposition are often omitted: as, (Ps. i. 5) "^<? t3"7J? 
 ^'P^'^'i nnya-D'-X^ni nSK'p? DT^I -IDi-)^^, supply •ICi'J N^, or render 
 the 1 by nor. 
 
 The repetition of adverbs denotes intensity : as, (Deut. xxviii. 43) 
 the stranger that is amongst thee shall get up above thee, >y^.P '^T^P 
 upwards upwards, i.e. very high ; and thou shalt come doivn HtSD ntSD 
 low loiv, i. e. very low. 
 
 * Thus, (Deut. xxii.21) Drx^? nm?^ ^^^1 V^*^? '^IJ^^P QH- 
 
 t (Is. xiv. 6) n-jp ^F\% n?p- 
 
 : (Prov. xii.28) ni.^-'ps rin^fij iini,'! D'^^n ni^ny niV*?-
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 245 
 
 General Remarks on the Particles. 
 
 302. Particles (originally nouns or verbs, Art. 
 154) are used in Hebrew, as in other languages, not 
 only in various senses, but for various purposes. 
 The same word being often employed as an adverb, 
 preposition, or conjunction* : thus, 737 upon, over, for, 
 because, S^c. ; T\T\T\ below, beneath, under, instead, 
 because; ^Tp'^ (probably from TOIl to waste awaij) 
 not, without, e.vcept, unless, (^r. 
 
 303. Obs. 1. — The student must, however, not suppose that 
 these words have really so many different significations; for on strict 
 examination it will be found, that however variously the Hebrew 
 particles may be applied, they never lose their primary signification. 
 But in translating them into modern languages, their force cannot 
 always be given by one and the same word. This is owing to various 
 causes, but chiefly to this — That most of the Hebrew particles are 
 the signs of general relations as well as of their various grades, or, 
 if I may be allowed the expression, of their subordinate relations. 
 Now, the Sacred Writers often use a particle expressive of a general 
 relation, leaving the subordinate to be inferred from the context ; but 
 in modern languages, these subordinate relations must be expressed 
 by distinct words. Thus, for instance, 7^, ? (probably from ^7^ 
 to tend, extend) denotes tendency in general ; but whether this ten- 
 dency is to produce a union of contact, or merely an approximation, 
 or whether it imports the final result of an action, is not expressed 
 
 * There are, however, many particles which are never used but as 
 adverbs : as, HS here, ^^ there : or as prepositions ; as, Tl between : 
 or as conjunctions only ; as, "=1^ but, ] and. 
 
 K L'
 
 246 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 by tlie parficic, but must be inforred from the context. Hence the 
 reason wliy it cannot always be rendered by to, but occasionally by 
 at, near, hi/, for, that, ^-c. 
 
 It is the same with the inseparable particle 1 (from 11 a hook) ; 
 it indicates the general relation of connection, but whether this con- 
 nection is copulative, adversative, concessive, Sj^c, must often be 
 inferred from the context*. Nor is this so difficult as it may at 
 first appear. No attentive reader can for a moment doubt that the 
 1 in r").^i? 'I^l (Gen.i. 1) means and, showing that the verb 
 t*^')? refers to n^C" as well as to D^^trn ; nor that the 1 in 
 '^I^' r.l?-1 (Gen. iv.2) or in VP. ^^\ (Ibid. 5) ought to be rendered 
 hut, because the propositions to which these words belong, stand in 
 disjunctive opposition to those which immediately precede them ; 
 nor that the 1 in ?nj''P"'N'! and in HpiXD^'XI. (Gen. xiii. 9) must be 
 rendered by tlien, because these propositions are the respondents or 
 consequents to their respective antecedents — 7fr<?0^n QX if thou wilt 
 take the left ; T'r't'^ ^'l^l and if thou vrilt take the right : nor that 
 1 in -ly^n vb\ (Gen. iii. 3) must be rendered by neither, because it 
 is preceded by the negative proposition -l^^i^ri N? ye shall not eat, 
 and is not in opposition to it. Equally evident is it that the 1 in 
 ilSS'! (Exod. xxi. 17) must be rendered by or, as it cannot be sup- 
 posed that the culprit should go unpunished unless he commit the 
 offence against both parents ; in this instance the 1 shews that ??i?P-1 
 refers to 1'^'? as well as to 1''2X- These examples, I hope, will tend 
 to remove the erroneous opinion, that the Hebrew particles have such 
 a multiplicity of meanings, and that the single 1 has seventy -four 
 different significations I 
 
 804. Ohs. 2. — Many particles appear to be synonymous, but 
 there is generally some shade of difference in their meaning ; nor can 
 
 * That the frequent use of this particle instead of those which ex- 
 press its subordinate relations does not arise from a want of adequate 
 terms, is fully shown in Vindicia; Hebraicae, p. 137 — 163.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 247 
 
 they always ])e indiscriminately used : thus, both ^i^ and ?, are 
 the signs of the dative. But ? is frequently used before the infini- 
 tive mood, to show the purpose : as ?2^??"3P'*1 and he sat down to 
 eat : and before nouns, to indicate the ultimate object : as, ■l^'JI. 
 mns? aiid tltetj shall he for s'ujns. In neither of these cases could 
 ?^ be used ; ''?^?"''?"^. signifies he spoke tinto me, but V "'5'^. (the 
 verb not being accompanied by an objective case) signifies either he 
 spoke concerning me, or, as it is often properly rendered in the Es- 
 tablished Version, he promised me; D?? '1?'^. (Deut. i. 11) he has 
 promised you; ''^^ ^^ n?t^ signifies he sent to my wives; but, 
 *B^J^ rv>^ signifies, he sent roR my wives ; (see 1 Kings xx. 7) 
 
 305. Thus, likewise, 7??3 (lit. in rolling) from ?P^ to roll, 
 "^■''^y.^ (lit. in passing) from "^^J^ to pass, refer to the principal 
 person for whose sake any thing is done, to distinguish him from 
 the person who receives the benefit, &c., not for his own merit, but 
 for that of another. But ^?33 ig used only before notuis, whilst 
 "^■131^3 is used before nouns as well as before verbs, and is some- 
 times equivalent to jV.^? (lit. to ansicer) that, so that, indicative 
 of the final cause. Thus (Gen. xxxix. 5) the Lord blessed the 
 Egyptians house ^P'l'' ???? for Joseph's sake; (Gen. xxx.27) tlie 
 Lord has blessed me ^^f^? for thy sake; (Gen. viii. 21) "i-l^ya 
 Dnxn for mans sake; (Gen. xxvii. 4) V^l '^?T!?^ "'"'^i?:?- that wy 
 soul may bless thee. (See Exod. ix. IG). 
 
 306. Obs. 3. — The remarks contained in Art. 297, may be ap- 
 plied to particles in general : — 
 
 Thus, b^ is never used with a prefix, nor with a preposition pre- 
 ceding it, though it may be used with a preposition following it : as, 
 *in|Sf^K to behind me, T? b^ to between*, "^iO Sx to the midst of. 
 
 * These apparent double prepositions cannot always be translated 
 literally. Expressions like these, to behind mc, to between me,
 
 248 THH SYNTAX OF 
 
 into ; wliereas riHIX concerning, on account of, is never used with- 
 out the particle ^V. preceding it : as, 1^3 ri'n'X 7y concerning, or 
 because of his son ; It??'!' n'n'S Vy concerning, or ffw account of 
 the well (Gen. xxi). 
 
 ^V. (from npj^ to ascend) upon, above ; ^V)P. from above, or above 
 (the force of ^ being lost in the translation); but ^V!^. above (lit. 
 what is above), though derived from the same root, never occurs 
 without the prefix ^ ; thus, /jy?P from above, or above ; and 
 '^^y.P with local n, though likewise derived from the same root, 
 is used without the prefix ?^ ; as "^^y??? upwards. — Sometimes with 
 \ n^VD^ and with » and ^ '\^J?»f'P- 
 
 Thus likewise /?J.3, "l-13y3, ''fl??, never occur without 3, though 
 this letter is, in the two first words, servile. Further, T^i^^ admits 
 neither a prefix nor a preceding nor following particle. "l-"13y3 is 
 sometimes used with ? to mark the final end or purpose ; whereas 
 Tl?3 admits both prefixes as well as particles : thus, lb!^ ""^f^? 
 (for) not to keep, ^7'^] ''^/^^ from defect of power, from inability, 
 DN-'-riJ'? unless, except, E^Oi?' ''0^2 nj; until the defect of the 
 heavens, or until the heavens be no more. A knowledge of these 
 distinctions can only be acquired by practice. 
 
 sound very awkwardly to our ears, and so they would to an oriental 
 ear, if these terms were considered exclusively as prepositions — 
 but this usage is perfectly correct in the Hebrew; because most 
 of the prepositions being, in their origin, nouns, are often used as 
 such : thus, "IDK the hinder part, the space behind ; "^i^^ the middle 
 of; (from '^)7\ the middle), T? the intermediate space, plu. nirS 
 the intermediate spaces. Hence the propriety of such expressions, 
 
 But we could not say ''i!???, nor *.JS? /^? because the 7 in *.^S7 
 already expresses the relation denoted by the dative, and means 
 literally, toivards the place where the face is.
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 249 
 
 307. Several particles, when in construction, re- 
 quire the sign of the dative after them : as, * n^5P 
 nj'^Sp ivitliin the vail, lit. from wit /i in to the vail. 
 i. e. with reference to it ; y^^ ]*^nD ivithout the citij ; 
 t3^Vy.? ^J^^O upon the ivood, lit. frojn above, with re- 
 ference to the luood; HST^Sl ]j^pfh ^"'^D round about 
 the tabernacle and the altar ; DH/ ""iS^ woe unto them ! 
 V v/^^ woe unto me ! lit. lamentation to me! v riT7n 
 far be it from me! God forbid I lit. a frofanation be it 
 to me, unbecoming. 
 
 308. Ohs. — When the particle TJ? between, relates to several 
 objects included in a noun plural, it is placed in immediate con- 
 struction with that noun : as, D^IT^.^I T? between the pieces, T^ 
 "T'?.''V. between thine eyes-\. But when it relates to two distinct 
 nouns, whether the same or dilFerent, then the particle must either 
 be repeated before each of the nouns : as, '=l^nn j^Q-l "lIXH \^'2, 
 (Gen. \. 4) between the light and between the darkness; "•'Ci'^)^T\ |"'3 
 D"'.Kin 1^3-1 (Ibid. 7) : or 1^5 is placed before the first noun, and the 
 second receives the prefix h ; as, ^'^\ DV? T? (Ibid.G); lis* ^3 
 "^t^n? (see Levit. xi. 47 ; Deut. xvii. 8). 
 
 Arrangement of Words. 
 
 309. As the most essential parts of speech have 
 in Hebrew their peculiar forms, and most of the 
 
 * Derived from HI? a house, itself probably derived from S^"I3 to 
 come in, to enter, 
 
 ■\ When r? refers to several objects included in the same noun, 
 it is often rendered by amonc/ ; as, DTIX T? (Prov. vi. \9) amui>f/ 
 brethren.
 
 250 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 modifications are indicated by irifkctions, there can be 
 little difficulty in distinguishing the subject from the 
 predicate, and the principal members from the subor- 
 dinate parts, whatever situation they may happen to 
 occupy in a sentence. The words may therefore be 
 disposed in almost any order, without occasioning the 
 least confusion or ambiguity. 
 
 Thus, even the mere tyro may know by barely looking at the form 
 of the two following words DH? ??^ that the first is a finite verb 
 including the pronoun he, and that the second is a noun. Further, 
 as ?5^? includes the subject as well as the predicate, ^D^ must be 
 the objective, whether it is placed after the verb — thus DH^ 73K ; or 
 before it — thus ^?N* DD^- 
 
 Thus likewise the words of the following simple sentence, ■'^?"j'?^! 
 ^pl''"^^ ^D^ {Israel loved Joseph) may receive any arrangement of 
 which they are susceptible without altering the sense : — 
 
 II. hir\\^\ nnx tjpVTiK 
 
 IV. nnx ^ipv-nx ^xnb^^ 
 V. Sn*"!^: ^iDV-nK nnx 
 III. im hi^n^] ^DV"nN: | vi. t)pv"n.s h^'ip] ir\^ 
 
 or VII. C)Dr-n{SI hir0\ :l^^^^;l with l conversive. 
 
 The reason of this is obvious. The verb being known by its /or»j, 
 and the objective by the particle "DN, there remains only the word 
 '•NTf . which must be the nominative ; and as the words are thus 
 distinctly marked, it matters not what place they occupy. 
 
 310. But though, owing to the reason just stated, 
 great latitude is allowed in the arrangement of 
 words, it must not be supposed that they are placed
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 251 
 
 at random ; on the contrary, their proper disposition 
 appears to depend on one principle, viz., that the 
 speaker will naturally express thaty/;\s^ which strikes 
 his mind most forcibly, and to which he wishes most 
 to draw the attention of his Jiearers. — The more im- 
 portant words will therefore take precedence of those 
 that are less important*. 
 
 311. Hence it is that in Hebrew the qualifying word must 
 follow the words qualified, and the defining words must be placed 
 after those which are defined : thus, Q3n [3 (not I? O^O) a ivise 
 son; 'r^ DV (not Di^ '^^) second day; ^^^ M (not n? "^^tt) a 
 king's daughter; niri {{'''Nn (not K'^Sn n-TH) this man. See Art. 
 54, 84, 91, 98, 184. 
 
 312. Hence it is, likewise, that in common discourse the words 
 follow mostly the natural train of thoughts, that is to say, the subject 
 
 * The order of words in the first verse of the Book of Genesis, 
 may perhaps appear an exception to the general rule, as it begins 
 with a word apparently the least impressive : thus, ^<"J? '"'''^'^^.^ 
 psn nNI n^D'f n nx a^nSx- But it is highly probable that the 
 Inspired Penman, by adopting this arrangement in preference to the 
 many which he might have chosen, intended to impress on our minds 
 first — that this world had a beginning, in contradiction to those who 
 maintained its eternity : secondly — that it was not the production of 
 chance, but a creation, a calling into existence by the Divine Will ; 
 and having thus taught us these important truths, he introduces the 
 Divine Agent, D'''!I^S the Almighty Being, the Author of all the powers 
 — and last of all, the objective cases — pXH-nXI D^)Oi;'n-nS'-
 
 252 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 or nominative is placed Jirat, then the verb or predicate, then the 
 objective, or any other subordinate member* : as in tlie arrangement 
 marked I. 
 
 313. But in historic narratives where actions and 
 events are of greater importance than the agents^ the 
 verb is mostly placed firstf , then the nominative, then 
 the subordinate members, and last of all, the minor 
 circumstances : as in the arrangement marked VI. 
 VII. The intermediate arrangements marked II. 
 III. IV. V. are used ad libitum, according as the 
 speaker attaches more or less importance to either of 
 the words; the most emphatic being generally placed 
 first in order. 
 
 314. By way of illustration, let us compare the two following 
 sentences : — 
 
 * All words and phrases which are introduced to define or to 
 explain the nominative or any of the subordinate numbers, are 
 placed immediately after the word which they are to explain : as, 
 
 XWV^ I ^^ I ^^^? i '^''^ — ''"t^V ™n? "iP't? — '"Itf'Sri (Gen. iii. 
 
 12) ; '•niVio n^'^"'' ''?? ^''5'? ''?'^i?^ ""^'^l c.^'f n "•n'^^i! — f^\n^_ 
 — Ti^^r} p.xn-n{< \m '^vyh "ibs"? h'VW) "V^). ""^"i?! "I'^'^i 
 
 tTj^^S^ I bN^D I rhf\ I K-in*(Gen.xxiv.7);"n''3 "IJ^^Tl^ j n33 I N-in 
 : \v)vr\ r\\r\\ (2 Kings xv. 35). 
 
 When the nominative is thus separated from the verb by ex- 
 planatory circumstances, the personal pronoun corresponding with 
 the nominative is introduced to recall, as it were, the subject; as in 
 the preceding examples. See likewise Deut. i. 30, 36, 38, 39. 
 
 t Except when the clauses stand in opposition. ,
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 253 
 
 I.—TiiTH^l I >nnQp' I ^nm ( ^DiX- (Gen. xvi. 5.) 
 / have given my maid into thy bosom. 
 
 II._ntj'«|? ] n;tn ^^ith | ^rina | ^ni n^- (Deut. xxii. 16.) 
 
 Lit. 31 y daughter I gave unto this man for a wife. 
 
 In the first example, tlie nominative "'P^'J is placed emphatically 
 (as it is already included in the finite verb "'^DJ) first; then comes 
 the verb, then the objective, &c. In the second example, the order 
 is reversed. The objective case is placed first, then the verb includ- 
 ing the nominative, then the subordinate members. And why ? 
 Because in the first, we have the venerable mistress aware of her 
 importance, which she finds abated by circumstances arising from 
 her own condescension, to which she particularly wishes to draw hor 
 husband's attention. She, therefore, begins with the Ego ''?Ji^ ; < It 
 was /, the mistress of the house, who have condescendingly placed 
 this ungrateful bondwoman in thy bosom.' But in the second 
 example, we have the tender /a//<(?r, indignant at the offered insult, 
 pleading the cause of his child. He therefore omits the ''3^^, as if 
 he scarcely thought of himself, and begins his address to the judges 
 with ^Jyi? nx my daughter, as the object nearest his heart. 
 
 315. In the following verse, "^^Vp Sm] s«n;ri "^^n^x nin;-nfc>* 
 
 y^tJ'n 1W2-1 (Deut. vi. 13), we have all the complimentary words 
 placed before their respective verbs and nominatives, because the 
 emphasis rests upon them. Reverse the order, and arrange the words 
 as they are in the translation — nnvn insi yrhvi, Hin^ HN XITI nnt<, 
 &c., or— inx "ibyi. yrh^ nin^ nx ^?-|^, &c., and the energy is 
 entirely lost. 
 
 316. It is the same with adverbs and other words expressive 
 of mere circumstances, such as £^5^, DINl^Q, nrij^, EZ^i^^"], &c. In 
 ordinary discourse they mostly follow the verb : as, DSH i^^VJI. (Ex. 
 
 xxi. 11); Dp;?. -lanWr^ N^ (Deut. XV. 13) ; n"iNri3 nin; -iox*i 
 
 (Num. xii. 4). But when any particular stress is to be laid upon 
 them, they precede the verb: as, ''>7\rfv^* Di^n nny*''? (Gcn.xxxi.
 
 254 THE SYNTAX OF 
 
 42) ; n\N: Xi; DiXJ;iQ |3-^y. (Prov. vi. 15). Nay, they arc often 
 placed with great propriety at the very beginning of a sentence : as, 
 733 ""ipsa DlSnS (Jer. li. 8). Because the prophet wished to draw 
 attention to the suddenness of the destruction of Babylon, so unex- 
 pected at the time when she was still flourishing and great. 
 
 So likewise, Cti'i??'? D^N* "V^. P?^n "l'??''n"'?^ *<i2; ^^^^ (Mai. 
 iii. 1) ; DJ51?^3 Djn (Is. lii. 3) ; nin^ n^ nVN' i<i; D3nn (Job i. 9). 
 In all these instances, the adverbs stand first, because they are the 
 most emphatic. Place them in any other part of the sentence, and 
 the effect is lost, as it is indeed in every translation which cannot 
 adopt the same arrangement. 
 
 317. But though numerous additional examples might be pro- 
 duced from every part of Scripture, to show that the Sacred Writers 
 paid great attention to the disposition of their words, yet we must 
 not carry this principle too far, by requiring, in every instance, a 
 reason for the particular arrangement which they thought proper to 
 use. This would be as absurd, as to demand why an author does 
 not always use the same identical words to express the same sen- 
 timent. On this subject, I cannot do better than recommend to 
 the student's attention the judicious observations of the greatest 
 Hebrew scholar that ever lived, Aben Ezra. His words are : — 
 
 ong^ ^m lyhm '^mh pwin d5\^i ^W^j^- '^'V^:^ 
 : Dtty.^3 D^.^ 
 
 ' Know that ivords are like bodies, and the senses* (meaninr/s) are 
 like souls ; and that the body is a mere instrument (organ) to the soul. 
 
 * It is very remarkable that a man so learned as John Buxtorf, 
 should have misinterpreted both these passages. Nor is it less re- 
 markable, that of the numerous authors who have profited by his
 
 THE HEBREW LANGUAGE, 255 
 
 //(■lire ///e prdclicc of all wise men, in ever// languacjc, to take care of 
 tlic sense, hut they are not solicitous about tlie change of words, as long 
 as they express the same meaning.' He then cites numerous exam- 
 ples, to show that the Sacred Writer often uses various expressions 
 to convey the same thought ; and adds, that no sensible man will 
 require a reason why an autlior uses sometimes a pleonastic expres- 
 sion, and at other times an elliptical phrase, or why he writes at one 
 time a word ^'^ full {i. e. expressing the quiescent letters '' 1 i^), and 
 at other times "ipH deficient ; as for instance, why the word D^iy is 
 sometimes written with the 1, and at other times DpV witliout it, 
 when, in point of fact, there is no impro])riety in either. 
 
 Further, in his comment on the word "iJ^i^p (Dcut. v. 5) which 
 appears out of its proper position, and speaking of the variations in 
 some of the expressions of the Decalogue, as recited in Exodus and 
 in Deuteronomy, he says — 
 
 on * Q'D>;t2ri\ n)^):^ on ^3 n'hrpri h^ nS n'tn Sx* 
 
 T V 
 
 * Do not he too anxious about the words, for they are like bodies, and 
 the senses (^meanings) are like sjiirits : and he tJiat cuts with either of 
 two instruments, each of which is calculated to j}roduce the same effect, 
 
 labours, none should have noticed the mistake. Speaking of the 
 importance of the Hebrew accents (in his Thes. Gram. Ling. Sanctae, 
 p. 599), he cites the preceding quotations from Aben Ezra's work, 
 and renders the first thus — ' Scito dictiones esse quasi corpora, ^ 
 ACCESTVS (\) quasi animas,' ^-c. The second he renders thus — 'Ne 
 apponas aniinum ad dictiones : ilia; enim sunt instar corporum, ^' 
 ACCENTUS (!) sicut spiritus sive animce, c^-c. What probably misled 
 the learned author is, that the word CPJ^.p is frequently used by Rab- 
 binical writers for accents. But that Aben Ezra does not use the 
 word in this sense, is clear enough.
 
 256 SYNTAX OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 doeth, in fact, the same work.' In short, he strongly recommends to 
 those who study the sacred volume, to look to the spirit, rather than 
 to the mere letter. 
 
 318, The negative particles, being considered as 
 mere exponents or indices, are placed immediately* 
 before their respective verbs : as, /Di^J tJ/, ^T\ 7{^, 
 
 019. For the same reason most of the conjunctions, especially 
 those which indicate the modes of thought, are placed at the beginning 
 of their respective phrases or sentences : as, H^V ''^i! '^.^PJ? *? (Ex. 
 xxi.2) ; n^S ''\y\T}\ rj'nx CDK (Ibid.) ; N*? 1^1 O'l^V ii* Di'' DX "^^ 
 Wn isp? >3 Di5.:(Ibid.) See the examples in Art. 280. 
 
 320. For a similar reason, are all words which have the sign of 
 interrogation (H), as well as interrogative pronouns and adverbs, 
 placed at the beginning of interrogative phrases and sentences : as, 
 
 ^pi)^ ^nx npti'q (Gen. iv. 9) ; -1^3 ^^r?7\ ^b'o ns -la^^j; -^m ^'^nn 
 (Gen. xxxviii. 8) ; N^H ^nn>« ™s< nab (Gen. xii. 19) ; ■h-]r\p\ no 
 
 (Gen. XV. 2) ; '^T^f^ TTp n-^K (Gen. xviii.) ; !~l|^n t^'^SH ^p 
 (Gen. xxiv). 
 
 321. In a few instances we find the nouns placed, by way of 
 
 o 
 
 emphasis, before the interrogative : as, CX'IlSni. DH n*t«t QS'TinK 
 VT)\ oyiypn (Zech. i. 5) ; your fathers where are they ? and the 
 prophets will they live for ever? 
 
 * Sometimes, however, the particle is separated from the verb by 
 an intervening word : as, '^>} *3^ N^ (2 Kings v. 26) ; ^3X3 Sk 
 
 *n?>!^ ^non? W) ''PD''3in (Ps. vi..5).
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 EXTRACTS 
 
 FROM 
 
 SCARCE HEBREW ROOKS.
 
 I. 
 
 Folly of Idolatry. 
 
 From the 13th Chapter of Wisdom of Solomon, v. 1 — 10. 
 
 T I •• V -; T T •• : T V V - ' - ' •• T : T 
 
 1^? D''3D3n Jin 1^^ "i;;d i^5 nn 'i^? trs n^s "^^ y^tin^ 
 urh hvr^f^ '\^^ D"i HD Iran ^^'7 T^5 /on D^n"^i«
 
 260 APPENDIX. 
 
 -'^D^ D'^n'^i^ DL^3 li^-ip "):^^^ D^3 D^n3 r^b^^ : n-JiSn 
 
 „ l.y .. V ; T ; TV ' V V T t t t t ■• ; " " 1 " 
 
 II. 
 
 Origin of Idolatry. 
 
 Chap. xiv. V. 15—31. 
 
 ^b:i Dii^na r\D "ijt'Ni. i:i3 '71;. nvr.r^p njj 
 riQ Di{^ vn^i^^ ji^i/^i in^33n n^^ nii^;; ini; 
 
 pin'? Doten inii^ ^D^m njn i;nn mfpn pmnn 
 p.ijn 1^3 "iti^s D"^ti^J??n ""S : D^i^^psn n^^ in?'? iiv^i 
 ^Ds lit^^n n^;2n \3?)-niSt -133'? i'?3; ^^t np^lnn. 
 
 - ; V ■>".•• T T V — ;i- - : 't • ; ' t •• 
 
 n/25JD ^-b^^ : n«Tn mi3;;n n^^ ii3u'? D^'?^isn 
 
 - - : - - T -'-.IT V -^3- • • v; T
 
 APPENDIX. 261 
 
 n)ti^vh yfl^t^r^'!} ^ten *rj;3 in sivp"? nn^n ti^inn 
 iii}^ Di/n n'71 nn"?! : 1^^^n^ d^j^ n'^^nnn -ixn 
 n!is 1^^^ ni^N^ ^in ^:r\l n::^bf^n ^jpvp nri^: 
 
 ... .1 ^ X • ; - • T : - •• 
 
 I..T • ;- ; T V T "'t' • t -;it ; • •• t 
 
 • •• T - •• ; ; - TT ;'t t ; - • ; v v t 
 
 nn iiDiyn in;/i n-vi^ nr l^5 m^r^'D iD^t: unh 
 urn mn V31 : it^'D^ a^i^^n'? iriDi; n:^^.^ n^ n^^r 
 nzDi.iD 11D1 nnra n^iDi ^12 nvn di dd'^is^ 
 
 T : V V T ; T T : • V V - ■•• : t t : - • : 
 
 ^J!7i n^.v ^3 m3T D5 irjix::. D5 npjn:^ d^^3i nnp^ 
 -'75 n^'73nT n^^i^i 'Oi'b^h'^r\ niiar. "^3 : Dn^;);n 
 iiin D^jni: niD D\^n3nQ DnDn:^^ OiTjnn ; i;i 
 i:i^.^ u-h-h^ii ^l''r2^^ iinvn ^2 : ipti^^ D^rnjr^i x/i 
 
 ,. -. . . .,:|r • -:|- -:i- • • •.• t - • t ; • ; T 
 
 \'\'p.wh 05 DU^qtj'nn i;ip m:^ ^b o^in mi onn ]\s^ 
 Drnt^M '7in ^^ "7;; i;i ui^r\ h]2 pivn i::)Dti^^ p^ri::' bv^ 
 iti^i^ n.^s nbn )kb : tJ^ip"'?? nir::?.!^ i)^.:i^^ n^yj^ 
 LDSti^p Di^n n;2p]_n»n piv r\r2\>} ^75.^ on u':?ti^^. 
 
 : ni<Tn^;;.riD*i;^ip 
 
 s 2
 
 262 APPENDIX. 
 
 III. 
 
 Wisdom. 
 
 The 24th Chapter of Ecclesiasticus*. 
 
 J issinn D\n^i^ dv 3-ip3T r]u;^2 bhnr\ nn^nn 
 
 T - ; • - ' : T • - : • •• - -.1- 
 
 hnr) r^^lD^D2^ D^^n^DJ n"i3^x;^3 t^3i^ uti/ ni^inn 
 
 t; •■••• t; •;tt t - t; •;"'•' 
 
 I'iv >hv^ ip_^ rjj ; ^nrnjp nipp nD\s h^'kt ^Ji^j^n 
 
 : ^!i\hpr2?2 Ti' D^^ti'n^i ^rim ^niniS: nnins nnp : ^r^pp_ 
 
 VX/DT "'nv'?-; U'Tinn nns : inn; ppi;^ n3;i^"itr3 ^75 
 "ibpi ^pj^3 ti'N"! D^p^ni ]i):)5p3 : ^ni-ns d^o ^Jv|S bv. 
 \m2,^l)i^ D^S"^^^^ nn'^m n:l3^D : ^nn ^nn: "ih^ 
 : ip^i nn2> ^d^i; 'D3i;i ''ti^nti' ^isn ^v'^?^ : "^n^i aic^n 
 
 'T • - V •• ; ~ ~ T -;- -TT • T-T ... - 
 
 - .. . T T ; " : • ~ T ; • T ; T • V V ~ : ~ ; 
 
 * Translated by Ben-Zeeb.
 
 APPENDIX. 263 
 
 ^n'ph fji-VD pino ^3 : ij:ii;nn nic^n ^nsQi nnt!;rj 
 
 ^M ^i:);nn -in^DT pji>^j^3 n^^n nij'?^ : 3pj;/.i n'pnp 
 ; TVpn >D^3 iTioi n-)i:i ir\:3 h^'^ n^^^D : 3^3^5^ 
 TiDJ iib ; n^^^nn ^Z2^3 ]ln^53i iiiS^3 nph ni;^nQ 
 
 tt;- t •- • ~:|-t; t:t- • :'- 
 
 -t; tt;- tt;- ••t •••; tt- ~ ^-l 
 
 n^^ "Tin ^:np n\s* lii; : d^^ -ini'3'i "in:'? bn2f2^ 
 
 -T-; .. .1- .y "^ y. TT* tt; • 
 
 ^^ ^\^^22^ "Tiy ; D^DDi^ '73 bv ^r^vb "^ip irv^n nnti'3 
 
 t; - ; • • T -; T - • '; • " - t- - t - 
 
 : ilnns: nln'? d^p^ ^np'?! ^n^p f]^LD?< 
 
 IV. 
 
 Copy OF THE FIRST Letter which the Roman 
 Senate sent to the Jews, 
 
 Maccab*. Chap. viii. v. 22 — 07. 
 
 mtf'n] n'inh hv. i3n3 -|ci'^^ li^Dn n^0D nj<n 
 
 * Translated into Hebrew by Dr. S. I. Friinkel. The whole 
 of the Apocrypha has been translated by this learned man into 
 pure Hebrew, and may be had at Messrs. Taylor and Walton's, 
 Upper Gower Street.
 
 2G4 APPENDIX, 
 
 T ; ^- : T "^ ; T T I • V T : - : 
 
 T - T ; - : ;i~ V V : t t ~ ; T - - 
 
 • V V T ; T ; T T ; • •.■';• • t 
 
 nv;l^^3-i<'7^ ^ipp'^^^ ptj^^a-^"?) htv?"^^^ ^9'i"^ 
 
 T • : • T T 
 
 «^:n ""ii^ix li^ii'' D^^^^'^ p^s nion^D mpn oi 
 
 It; t t - '-; • " : * T ; ••• ••;,iv T t; v: 
 
 nv;i«-^^Sl ^D?"^*? p^r^^T '?Di<-^'7 Dnin^n ""n^iiS*? 
 
 p]^pln'? Dn^3^ d'?-'?;;. n^;;^^_'^Di^ : D^T^^n ]^3i t^Dl"i 
 
 : Dip; i;;"}j^ it^ 
 -1305 D'^T'"''.''!'^^ P^It'^i?^^ DinD^OT niil^^-^i;i 
 i:^ni? DHi D^-Tin^|i '7'?ifipn-''3 ^Vhd : -ibs^ i^ 
 ^j3 ^^^i? pif^^ 1:^^^^ 111:^^-^3 n\"n : irnna ^tt^:i^'i 
 
 • V T I ; • •■ •• T • TT ; •• • : ■* : - J
 
 APPENDIX. 265 
 
 V. 
 
 Copy of a Letter which Jonathan the High- 
 Priest WROTE TO THE SpARTANS. 
 
 1 Maccab. chap. xii. t). — 24. 
 
 -^ni^v) injv nb^i} i^^^ -iddh n;ti^p r^m 
 
 T ; - ; — 
 
 'op_'b:$) n^mn\^ Di;n >2p\^ bli|n ]n'^r\ ;niv 
 
 ■r J. ... ,- ••;- V"-: • ;- 
 
 • T ; - T ■•■;;" V T ; - : • - . t v •• • 
 
 ijn^i^ D^^^^ d^::^:^ ''3 -itoisb '7n-)n ps v3ln"'7K 
 nD^ v:lnT : nnn.p n^i;^^ iddh njron ain^s 
 nnn^^ninnsn hdd n^5 np_n nW iti^i^ T-vn rij^np'? 
 
 v-;t; - : TT :-T TIT • ■»■": ■•■* 
 
 V V T - : • : - T T • : ~ : •• t . 
 
 mnxm nin^n nnn nx Ptn^T t^^'nn'? n-'X 13^dx'7D 
 
 T-:|- t; t -.1- T • ; •••'•■-: ■• - ; •-• •• •• t ; 
 
 li'^ni^i/-^]; DriJ^'D^ Dr^nsr^i D^n'i'iS^ ]n-i.p^ onn nnpi 
 
 •"3 W : ^33^ n;:2i2^^T ^7^ D^^333^ D^l'^j^^n ^3 : D^nxn 
 -^3 Di/ i^DnSi "^3 lit^^Dr'?;; 'n3x; nii;-n. nl3i nin^^
 
 266 APPENDIX. 
 
 "l ; T T • v: t; • V - T T ; • - T t • ▼: " 
 
 t^^155^^ ^"^^^ '? c^Pl'l ''"l?!^ 21^? 'i^*'^^? 
 * DH^it:^^ 3^^ DH-^ni^T nan o^n^^ a^^2^ Dmn\n'i 
 Di'^ti^n '\2b ^2r\:D^ r<ri'7^xin n^^r i:un^-^3 nr^;;i 
 !i:i-'d'7 n\T' in^ ^ni5 : dd^ nnDJ 1:ni^^ djt dd^ 
 
 T \ ; V ; • TV r v t ; • : — ; - ; v t 
 
 i^h vn» DD^r:pi DD^ipi^T u^h vn^ i^^^ipi '\2^2pD
 
 APPENDIX. 2G7 
 
 VI. 
 
 Tales from the Talmud. 
 
 ''niiD^e ">jsi ni'7S ni-)Vl*s isd^^ 'ni3^5 /-i'?;:^."! Dni^^ 
 
 • :,~ T • -;|- T ; : T - -; ' V V - t 
 
 ,np) n^i^n wViS:'':^! /n2 nb^i]; i^sii' nv^ '0"^^'^ 
 ^nl2iS ,nit:'D2 ^n::^^-) ^:si /nnn nos i^qcd ^n'in^^ 
 
 - -; T ; • ; - T • -;!- ^ t ; • v v : t - -: 
 
 dSix;'? invf^ •'niDJ^ '^fi:^D3^ ^n£3DJ^ ^3^^^ o^^ns*^ iddj^ 
 
 (See Hebrew Tales, No. xviii. p. 53). 
 
 'i'? 1DK , iDin'? pnv^ ^3") IP ::'pn lorij, '-n'] 
 
 T T ; T : • - ' •• T T TV T T ^ T ) ; ; V 
 
 '73^<''^ : vmn n^iv d^q n3-|3i / hd; i-j^;! tiiSp -r;; 
 iin -itrsjs / i->vn 3S^'''^ dd^^h \d oro nt^^'^i 1^-3;:: 
 
 i_ ^ „ -.|- . . .. .. _ ^ .. .- 1 . , _ . . ..« : • • 
 
 t^'PHpinpn^no^^ ? r|p-j3><ijip3 ^-yv -yv 'ipNi^ni^
 
 268 APPENDIX. 
 
 n:in D^;DnD-i3n DH^,il lijn .id^ to d^^i /'n^ i^in 
 ii^P?. ""^*^ °')^W ^W ''^^P-'^^. '"'!•? "^^"^ '^) ^''"^ 
 
 (See Hebrew Tales, No. xxxiii. p. 93). 
 
 VII. 
 
 Fables*. 
 
 : niE'^.n^ cs^a'inD nttjian^ / nc?n\ D2n i2?^"?na b^i« 
 HBh tDnh h'i^^h ']h'^ ,r2r\^hv ^^i^ n3;;n 'inai 1^ 
 
 TT V T : • 1..."- V ••'^-: • .r* T ; 
 
 I. ; .. ^ ^ ,. . ^ . ....•'_.. I .. T T : 
 
 . — . • ;■ • ;- T V -; T •• T T -; t v ' •• 
 
 * These Fables are extracted from a work entitled O'hv^'i^ "b^P. 
 It contains 107 Fables, all written in the same style. Name of the 
 author — R. Berachia Hannahdan. (See Wolf. Bib. Heb. No. 435).
 
 APPENDIX. 269 
 
 n^fn Dini nt^ n:j? ni/^ ]^y\ ^55 ddh 
 
 nvp b^D'D nvi;. ]Z2i ^^'?^^ '7^2 '7^^^? ait^n 
 : n;;,:^ nni ]13^ ^ii^i n^s Dinn iv^. Di^i. 
 
 ^\i;2D^ Dili; ^sj^d 
 
 T : • : •• T T 
 
 : bsi^i nwn2 ^ns /bwitt? h^b^ ^nia ns? 
 
 V T • •• ~ - T T - - •• V V - - T I - T 
 
 1^ ,2b ii'ti^' Di< nj2^;;n pi ,^teT n^x y/^Ji^i /^'^x/d 
 ;iTn''\s ^3 n:^i^ Hsd /iTn^^*;:: n!^'«-i i-iDy /pi'n 
 
 T • • • • .... T • T ; ' .(.... I .. . _ 
 
 VIII. 
 
 Anecdotes, &c. 
 
 '22 'ibif2^ /Dnn"^ hbid mnn ns-i in.^ piidi'?"^^ 
 
 . . _ ^ • T ; V ; ~ T T T TV' 
 
 TV • ~; T .. ; T XT ' v; -; •• t • 
 
 ins^-iSin D^ : ^vp ini^i ns-in ^f::m ]iif2b
 
 270 APPENDIX. 
 
 * D^»n ^-l1^< ib^^ '?^nnD ^n^\n nnr 
 '7DD vrun 'DDn 
 
 T T T " ; T T 
 
 '^'^i^.? *?i^ n^n^?np^ nDl:^ nn>n nnt;^ njnpD 
 nnn "^jnpn i^ imn invj npv): nt^'Di ^/'iDnvn'^inn 
 
 - - ... It • V T V T 't -;it t ; - - ; v - 
 
 ti^p3D nnt^ -i£:^i^ t:^\^fn is-i^^t ^^r■^'7 /V^^<^;^t<m 
 
 iv - ; T - V -; • T t' V : - : t ••.• t •• v - 
 
 1-irsi n)Db D^3n;p D^nn 
 : i3aD nn^)^ ih^ ix33i 
 
 ?Dn^:i^;;n ^^^ D^DDnnD^nwnn Dn^;^ D^^'7 1^^^t^^ 
 
 • • -:iT 'r-:\- • -: |- •• • tt : -;it 
 
 .. ; . ; . T -;)- T T '•• • ; T • T -:|- '^- 
 
 T ; - T V -; Y : • ; ▼ ; ~ t •.• - - ..
 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 271 
 
 
 IX. 
 
 
 
 Moral Maxims*. 
 
 
 : 
 
 ™^^m ^75^ -ipiD 
 
 
 n^^Ni "^53 
 
 '7Nn ^^n^ 
 
 •• T t: 
 
 - T -; 
 
 r T : • : 
 
 
 nbnry 
 
 ICl^^^: 
 
 ■'75 hv ]^] 
 
 nb^n 
 
 T0^^? 
 
 -h Dv ^75^ 
 
 -]-in^ 
 
 ■^3 D^SJi^n'? 
 
 T^Jt^: 
 
 : "inlDH 
 
 1- t'^ : 
 
 1^ nnin^ 
 
 n^np 
 
 
 "T'P^ •"i\'i 
 
 • ^)l^\ 
 
 TC^^^ 
 
 
 nnini 
 
 
 npn iio:if 
 
 : nnnv 
 
 W^^ \'i]i 
 
 on ^3 ril 
 
 D^b^^^i 
 
 Dj; ^^^Vh^ 
 
 ■3 i/nnni 
 
 : D^^^p? 
 
 '7X tD]l ^t^l. 
 
 on? pni 
 
 
 ^s ^^^ ^^ 
 
 : T T • ; 
 
 • T ; 
 
 DHO PliDi^. 
 
 T 1Vi!.l 
 
 1T^\ 
 
 "inn^ '753 
 
 D3 s:pi 
 
 : n^q 
 
 -5 i^2pn 
 
 b^ ^p^DB 
 
 * From >'2pn '^^SD, a didatic poem, by the celebrated R. Hat, 
 who flourished about the begfinning of the eleventh century.
 
 272 
 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 D^nb'i; 
 
 n;:i^ ^o^^. 
 
 ns n'pDB 
 
 : D^nni 
 
 ■p nnijs 
 
 h^pr\ %} 
 
 lim 
 
 tp^HT 
 
 n)D "inn 
 
 : ll^W 
 
 ■p ti^i?.?^ 
 
 ii?^ ^^^l 
 
 h^'^u/h 
 
 '7^^1ti^ n\-i 
 
 "n n;:D^'i 
 
 I" T T : 
 
 * ^^ T^ 
 
 Vsn t^Sn 
 
 hi^D hm 
 
 X. 
 
 The 8th Psalm Paraphrased*. 
 
 pijn-"'73 ^i;_ ^pti^ f<nii n^3 
 ps pen linn "fhifi ""s 
 
 T : - • ' " T •• T • • 
 
 I V T •• I .. - • . ., • : ~ 
 
 * From nn'lSN riDHS, a poetical paraphrase of the whole of the 
 Psalms, by R. Abraham Ben Shahthi Hacohen. This work, written 
 in almost every kind of metre, evinces uncommon skill and a won- 
 derful command of language, and is therefore deservedly esteemed.
 
 APPENDIX. 273 
 
 /lat T^"'37n2w nt2?2?n y'aw nw-i« ^d_3. 
 
 riisn D^'^nn ri^o;^ ^{»c ^3 
 
 ■•■;-■ • T T I V T 
 
 T ; - . X - "T ; • 
 
 '131 i^-iDtn ^D ir?i2S niD_4. 
 '1D1 n>nb«i3 nrr^ innDnni— 5. 
 
 12V^ invn'? to;;^^ i'? npnni 
 : inr nn: vh^ im ir\3 
 
 T - T T •• T T V V 
 
 '131 T"'^ ^wv^n inb>tt7i2n_G. 
 
 T— TTT T;— — — 
 
 nI^i^ nsnn '^nt^ "1133'? Vsn
 
 ^74 APPENDIX. 
 
 n"23 ni-i^ ni^ 'iri^n"'?^ D5 
 
 nin? Dic"}^, I'DDi ron i^d^ 
 
 : iij;::): v>2id m^i bn^ 
 
 T ; • T T • ' V V T - - 
 
 '1D1 D"»n >2i*) n^tta? -112!^— 8. 
 
 nii^D nM:^^ ^^j:^ -)^'^^5 n;^^ 
 
 T 't T " - : • • V T T - 
 
 XI. 
 
 Truth*. 
 
 * From ID-ID "pip, by /?. Simson Cohen Modun, The work con- 
 tains 50 Odes and Sonnets, all composed in the same elegant style.
 
 APPENDIX. 275 
 
 TT ; T * T ; T 
 
 'i^'PI'- '"'^C- ^^?l^ """^^^P 
 
 T : • : T T V v; ■• : ■ 
 
 T - • : •• •• -:iT • 
 
 T T -T : • 
 
 , M^Ts m^n i3n: Dnp^ji> -"j^p 
 
 XIT. 
 
 Hope and Fear*. 
 
 *^.^^^^ ^^n ''0^^ P'tnp ^^<t 
 
 ; T ' T ' : T ; ' - 
 
 See the preceding Note.
 
 27G APPENDIX. 
 
 : ; - : • : t t •• ; t ■ 
 
 : ^s'?^] v"7Dn /pin h^'ii nvrs)^ 
 
 ... T T -; ' •• '• : V : •• 
 
 /nnDt:^^ D"^D^;;23 ,^DDriip 
 : ^Sn3? I.ST ^DU:^ l?ij 
 
 T : : • T ; T : '^" -: i ~ • 
 
 XIII. 
 
 The Contented Shepherd. 
 
 : ni$3 nniLD lp'7n ni;^^ I'^x 
 
 * nnp Dn'7n ^•^'71 
 • ^q^ D''1P,P cnsi nt^v3 D^3i 
 
 * From n^nJ? C^C^^^ bv Moses Chaim Lnzzato.
 
 APPENDIX. 277 
 
 T ; ... ... - l^-r _ 
 
 - •• T •• ; T 
 
 It;- t - T T ; - 
 
 TV • : T T 
 
 • li^n'?^ is'? ^b" -I133T HKJp 
 
 I ... ..- ..... T ; 
 
 nD3^ ^br\ , h^^n 
 : ^7:^^ n^^ in / in'? Tibj;;.: nn 
 * ii/T «'? i/n /Dh'? Tinp r^t 
 n^T >'7^nti'n D^n^t:^'? tdd 
 
 •T .. . ; . T T : •.. : • T 
 
 / yj")-'?^ ni/-^n Dp'7n rbnz hv 
 : lin^ pi'7j^ nnin D^^ln^'? 
 
 T 2
 
 278 APPENDIX. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Rules of Life*. 
 
 ")2p "t;; Di'?::' inii; u/^t^n nr "'Q 
 
 1. - . -r T T - V V . T 
 
 ,-in;i^ 'pi; nnn ^^7 pn /ss^^j^^r) ]in '7;; 
 /-inr^j ris^p^ n^Jir^^ cj;_iin 
 
 /D;;Tn con S^ Y^:i ^pt^/ -it Di^i 
 : nph ^.s: 1^^ nsn^ "i^^n nn^ii; 
 
 * From D''1iy3n ""S^ >>?.^., by Ephraini Luzzato. This work 
 is very scarce, and is deservedly esteemed for its elegant diction 
 and poetic beauties.
 
 APPENDIX. 279 
 
 XV. 
 
 The Metamorphosed Physician*. 
 
 .nnp^ liiD Siil-i nn^3 n^2 
 
 — I-T T •• T •• T T 
 
 : nn:i n3Z2;3 pni nM3 j^n 
 /n3-V3 i^v^ ris-TH h^ii^n ni;; 
 
 /nnnbji^ nitons '133^3 n-vrii 
 : nnsn "T|in b^_ ^^^^ D5 is"?: / 3nij 
 
 V V - T T V T : ■ I - T ; • 
 
 ?n3tr^ N^3nD ]\s\"i /]n.sn •'s 
 
 '- - - T ; T • ; " ■•■ : - • : • 
 
 * See the pioceding note.
 
 280 APPENDIX, 
 
 XVI. 
 
 Philanthropy*. 
 
 /^I'lD^pni .sin D\'l% i^n^ Di? 
 
 T ; • V -; V •.• T • T V 
 
 ^r\m\ u^Lm -i^^pi ihm 
 
 TT • T T • - V V - 
 
 ipr^ b])D Dm:o 'On^^-^s p 
 
 ' T • T ■■ T T T T ' ■• 
 
 ^ T • - t;- 
 
 D^-i;3 DHKH iSnn: ti^NiD dn* 
 
 V V - T T T T ; • 
 
 ?^n-it5i; HT ">D /"rl3D '7n:i ^zdd 
 
 * From J"l1>^?n •'Tt;?, by //ar^w;/*/ Wessley.
 
 APPENDIX. 281 
 
 :" pin nDi:i^Dn D5 nico m-^n noDn ^d 
 ; n^^i pDQ D3n t^^s np^ hq 
 
 V T T I •• ; • T T • 'TT - 
 
 • n^^ 0.13 i\^ t:^'^Dv'n n1^f D^^ 
 
 ,n|7^^5 nni / n;;i ps hii^^ 
 ? ini3Dpi b^ a.ilK 113 1^^ ^h 
 
 ; ^NV^ int^ 3^5^ Dv'3 D^ai? 
 
 T T TV T •• T \ • - 
 
 : n3iS i^^ Dr)i3^^ niijDrcnx 
 
 in^p 3iiii^ I «!! vni3»s mDi3 
 '131-: r\di^ pi^^ ,^« ^x 3^:i^^ D^i;in
 
 '2&2 APPENDIX. 
 
 xvn. 
 
 SEVERINII BOETII 
 DE CONSOLATIONE PHILOSOPIIL^. 
 
 CARMEN QUINTUM LIBRI QUINTI. 
 
 Quam variis terras aninialia permeant figuris ! 
 Namque alia extento sunt corpore, pulveremque verrunt, 
 Continuumque trahunt vi pectoris ineitata sulcum, 
 Sunt quibus alarum levitas vaga, verberetque ventos, 
 Et liquido longi spacia setheris enatet volatu. 
 
 Haec pressisse solo vestigia gre?sibus gaudent, 
 Vel virides eampos transmittere, vel subire silvas. 
 Quae variis videas licet omnia discrepare formis, 
 Prona tamen facies hebetes valet ingravare sensus. 
 
 Unica gens hominum celsum levat altius cacumen, 
 Atque levis recto stat corpore, despicitque terras, 
 Haec nisi terrenus male desipis admonet figura. 
 
 Qui recto coelum vultu petis, exerisque frontem, 
 
 In sublime feras animum quoque ; ne gravata pessum 
 
 Inferior sidat mens corpore seltius levato.
 
 APPENDIX. 283 
 
 XVII. 
 
 ; • T T •■ ' T - .. 
 
 •• 't t t t -:|t 
 
 ; • T • T : - T 
 
 V V T ' ' T T T .. T • - 
 
 : nD^ti^D nxi v"i:ii 'd'?^ n?;;. T^^
 
 284 APPENDIX. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 GOD SAVE THE KING. 
 
 God save our noble King 
 William ! Long live the King, 
 
 God save the King ! 
 Send him victorious, 
 Happy and glorious, 
 Long to reign over us, 
 
 God save the King ! 
 
 O Lord our God arise. 
 Scatter his enemies, 
 
 And make them fall ! 
 Confound their politics, 
 Frustrate their knavish tricks, 
 On him our hearts are fix'd, 
 
 O save us all ! 
 
 Thy choicest gifts in store 
 On him be pleased to pour. 
 
 Long may he reign !
 
 APPENDIX. 285 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 ♦ ^2^bD d;.'?^i ib^ bi^ 
 .. . _ . . ^ »- . 
 
 * in]:]n Di'?;:^ n^j^ 
 : innt^;; mm rrn 
 
 •• : T T : : 
 
 • in'?''ji^pn mb 
 
 T • • ••: T T 
 
 T T -; T V - 
 
 T T ' • T ; 
 
 ! -lite"", i;;'?
 
 2S6 APPENDIX. 
 
 May he defend our laws, 
 And ever give us cause 
 To sing vf'ith. heart and voice, 
 God save the King ! 
 
 O, grant him long to see 
 Friendship and unity 
 
 Always increase ! 
 May he his sceptre sway, 
 All loyal souls obey, 
 Join heart and voice, huzza ! 
 
 God save the King ! 
 
 XIX. 
 
 LA TOURTERELLE ET LE PASSANT. 
 
 LE PASSANT. 
 
 Que fais tu dans ce bois, plaintive tourterelle ? 
 
 LA TOURTERELLE. 
 
 Je gemis: j'ai perdu ma compagne fidele. 
 
 LE PASSANT. 
 
 Ne crains tu point que I'oiseleur 
 Ne te fasse mourir comme elle ? 
 
 LA TOURTERELLE. 
 
 Si ce n'est lui, ce fera ma douleur.
 
 APPENDIX. 287 
 
 nrrnn V3^i; Hi; 
 
 T V v;!-.- T •• 
 
 , T V : • T : - : 
 
 T -;iT ' : ^ • 
 
 H. 
 
 XIX. 
 
 T • ; • V •' 
 
 T • •• T • : • " . 
 
 1)1% iDn;^ np_7 nti^s i^;vn riNi. 
 
 -nnn
 
 288 APPENDIX. 
 
 XX. 
 
 5D?orgengcban!cn. 
 
 3?cv SJlonb ccrbirgt fein Cidjt, bet Slcbcl grauer ©d}leier 
 25etEt 2uft unb (gvbe nic^t raet)r ju ^ 
 
 ®cc ©ternc ©(anj erblcid)t/ bee ©onne regeg geuec 
 ©tort atle 2Be[en aug ber JRuf). 
 
 Sec ^immel fSrbet fid) mit '■puvpur unb (Sapt)iren^ 
 
 2)ic frut)e ?Olor3enr6ti)e (adE)t, 
 Unb oor ber SRofen ©lanj/ bie it)re ©time jtcrenr 
 
 entfliet)t bag blaffe ^eet ber s«ad^t. 
 
 3)urd)'g rott)c fERorgenttior ber Ijeitern ©ternent)uf)ne 
 s«at)t i)a% cerfldrte 2id)t ber mit j 
 
 Sie falben SSolfen gluf)n oon bli|enbcm 3iu6ine, 
 Unb brennenb @oIb bebecft ba^ gelb. 
 
 ®ie ERofen offnen fid) unb fpiegctn an ber ©onne 
 
 S5e§ !uf)len ^Olorgeng ^ertentf)au j 
 2)er fiiljen ^tmbrabampf belebt ju unfcec fJBonne 
 
 ®er jarten asidtter ^CttaSgrau. 
 
 ®er ttjad)e Sanbmann eilt mit ©ingen in bie ^ilhet, 
 Unb treibt oergnugt ben fdiweren ^flug 5 
 
 2)er aSoget rege ©d)aar erfuUet Suft unb SBalbec 
 SCRit it)rer ©timm' unb frut)em glug.
 
 APPENDIX. 289 
 
 XX. 
 
 ' - T •• •• V - : - V T-;|- 
 
 T ; T ; T T • : • • - T •• : 
 
 : \n^ ^y£J'^"'73 "i"iiv ^D^ i^vioi 
 D^P5 /D^n nni$ -)|:53 ^npb-i 
 
 - I T T T \ •• V V - 
 
 D7« p")33 D'p^i.:?P D^pn^ '2V 
 
 V T - •■ ; ••• T • T T T - : 
 
 inni3];.^ ini^h nn^n t:/'^ ^^p^i 
 * ^nD^^c inrai nriop in^: "''^ '^"^P? 
 
 . . _• • T : ' T ' T
 
 290 APPENDIX. 
 
 D iSd)6pfev 1 tt?a6 id) \ei)', finb teiner 3(Umacf)t 2Ber!e/ 
 
 S)u bijt bie Seelc beu S^atur j 
 2>ec ©tcrqe Cauf unb 2td}t, bev ©onnc ©tauj unb ©tarfc/ 
 
 ©inb beincr >^anb @efd)6pf' unb Spur. 
 
 35u ftcctft bie gacfcl an/ bie in bem ?Oionb' unS leudjtet, 
 
 35u gicbft ben SBinben gluget ju/ 
 ®u Uet)fl bei- 9tad)t ben St)au, womit fte un§ befeud^tet/ 
 
 25u ti)eilfl bcr ©terne Sauf unb 9?ui;. 
 
 ®u tjaft ber Serge ©toff auS S()on unb ©taub 9ebret)et^ 
 Ser ©d)ad)ten (grj ou§ ®anb gefdimetjt i 
 
 2)u t)Q|l bag girmament an feinem £)rt eri)6t)et/ 
 ®er SBSolfen .Rleib bavum geivaljt. 
 
 35em gifd)/ ber ©trome bid)"! unb mit bem ©d^wanje fturmet/ 
 
 >:^afl bu bie 3(bern au§9et)6t)lt j 
 S)u t)afl ben (glcpt)ant auf ©rbcn aufgetfjficmet/ 
 
 Unb feincn ^nod^cnberg be[eclt. 
 
 S)e6 ireiten .^immcigraumS fapt)irene ©ewolber 
 
 ©egrunbet auf ben leeren Ort/ 
 ^ag ungemefne 2(11/ begrenjt nur burd) fid) felbcr, 
 
 ^ob aug bem iRid^tg bein einjig SQSoct.
 
 APPENDIX. 21)1 
 
 V •■ T T • T ' ; ~ ; • "-■; r - 
 
 • T - T - T • T I - T : ~ T 
 
 ,/lri;i u/Dii; Tin /Dni'^DDi d^ddid '-i\s* 
 
 \ : V V T • : • T 
 
 v; •• I VT ; • -: ~ 
 
 nn*? dv^;d inisn ^^^^ nr\ii 
 
 TT ;-: x-'- — 
 
 /D"Tj?. ^p^p D^i;; nu'ii riip;' 
 * 3^3D Dn^DiD mih^ Dvnt^ ^lij 
 
 • T T • • ; - ■ T : •• T 
 
 T - I'- !..;•' t;-T t- 
 
 : ^^^,1^ iniini rsN*^ u^n ^d "^Dici^ 
 
 t;- t tt" t:-t •- 
 
 T - V V T ; - 1 .. . _ 
 
 / r\D ^h2 '?;; dhdid ^DVi-in D^'7inn 
 
 V V ; T r V ; • ' ~ - ' v t t
 
 292 APPENDIX. 
 
 25od) breimal grofev ®ott! c6 finb ev[d(}affne ©celcn 
 
 guv bcine St)atcn ciel ju £lcin 5 
 ©ie ftnb unenbUd) gvolJ, unb wer fie wilt cv3at)ten/ 
 
 9}Ju^/ glcid} wie tu/ uncnbUd) )ci)n. 
 
 C Unbegreiflid)cv/ id) bteib' in mcinen ©d)ranEen/ 
 35u ©onne blenbjl mein fd)wad)e6 Sid)t5 
 
 Hub wan bci* v^immcl felbft fcin 2Se[en t)at ju banfen/ 
 S3raud)t eine6 Sffiurmeg Cobfprud) nid)t. 
 
 XXI. 
 
 LA PARTENZA. 
 
 (CANZONETTA DI METASTASIO.) 
 
 Ecco quel fievo istante; 
 Nice, mia Nice, addio: 
 Come vivro, ben mio 
 Cosi lontan da te ? 
 
 lo vivro sempre in pane, 
 lo non avro piu bene ; 
 E tu, chi sa se mai 
 Ti sovverrai di me ? 
 
 SofFri che in traccia almeno 
 Di mia perduta pace 
 Venga il pansier seguaca 
 Su I'orme del tiio pie 
 
 ^ a n c r.
 
 APPENDIX. 293 
 
 I V -. I - • T : • - T ; T 
 
 : cnin ni^p"^"! ix'.n^ j^p. ^^73 \n is: 
 ^nn^n:'? -)\sn ^"^DS^p ^ti'P:^ ■)^^^ 
 
 T •• T T ' V - V ' V • 
 
 XXI. 
 
 o^np'? "Till;:: r^s n^n 
 
 • •• T ; ' T T 
 
 ; i;i3^ iJ^^ij ni;;n pi 
 
 i^vpn ^Dti^n xr^iS ns 
 u 2
 
 294 APPENDIX. 
 
 Sempre nel tuo cammino, 
 Sempre m'avrai vicino; 
 E tu, chi sa se mai 
 Ti sovverrai di me ? 
 
 lo fra remote sponde 
 
 Mesto volgendo i passi, 
 Andro chiedendo ai sassi: 
 La ninfa mia dov' e ? 
 
 Dall'una all'altra aurora 
 Te andro chiamando ognora; 
 E tu, chi sa se mai 
 Ti sovverrai di me ? 
 
 lo rivedr6 sovente 
 
 Le amene piagge, o Nice, 
 Dove vivea felice, 
 Quando vivea con te. 
 
 A me saran tormento 
 Cento memorie e cento; 
 E tu, chi sa se mai 
 Ti sovverrai di me ?
 
 APPENDIX. 295 
 
 ' • T •• ' T T V : • 
 
 • ; • T • 
 
 T •• •• •• T • T 
 
 n^si^'S -)^iS3 "]{<npiVj 
 
 T T - T T •• • 
 
 - .. - . I .. ^ . 
 
 T V : • T 't ; V T 
 
 "bin nialtD inpr '?;;
 
 296 APPENDIX. 
 
 Ecco, diro, quel fonte, 
 
 Dove avvampd di sdegiio, 
 JVla poi di pace in pegno 
 La bella man mi die. 
 
 Qui si vivea di speme, 
 ♦ La si languiva insieme ; 
 
 E tu, chi sa se mai 
 Ti sovverrai di me ? 
 
 Quanti vedrai giungendo 
 
 Al nuovo tuo soggiorno, 
 Quanti venirti intorno 
 A oiFrirti amore e fe ! 
 
 Oh Dio ! chi sa fra tanti 
 Teneri omaggi e pianti, 
 Oh Dio ! chi sa se mai 
 Ti sovverrai di me ? 
 
 Pensa qual dolce strale, 
 Cara, mi lasci in seno, 
 Pensa che amo Fileno 
 Senza sperar merce:
 
 APPENDIX. 297 
 
 n_ 
 
 ,nD^u; ins D3^s\n 
 
 T T T - - T ; •., - 
 
 T - T T T - 
 
 T T ' •• T ; • V - ; - T 
 
 . T ; • T - It 
 
 ■^nl^ nsT"' 31^'' D*^ 
 "•-ibn ;n^^ yHsr nor
 
 298 APPENDIX. 
 
 Peusa, iiiia vita, a questo 
 Barbaro addio funesto; 
 
 Pensa Ah ! chi sa se inai 
 
 Ti sovverrai di me ? 
 
 XXII. 
 
 SONETTO DEL MARINI. 
 
 Apre ruomo iufeliee allor che nasce, 
 In questa vita di miserie plena, 
 Pria ch'al sol, gli occhi al pianto, e nato appena 
 Va prigionier fra le tenaci fasee. 
 
 Fanciullo poi, che non piu latte 11 pasee, 
 Sotto rigida sferza 1 glornl mena. 
 ludi, in eta piu ferma e piu serena, 
 Ti'a Fortuna ed Amor, more e rlnasee. 
 
 Quante poscia sostien, tristo e mendico, 
 Fatlche e morti, infin che curvo e lasso 
 Appoggla a debil legno il fianco antico ! 
 
 Chlude alfin le sue spoglie angusto sasso, 
 Ratto cosi, che sosplrando io dico; 
 Dallrt culla alia tomba e un breve passo.
 
 APPENDIX. 299 
 
 • T T T • T T 
 
 n^272 "11D3 
 
 XXII. 
 
 nihn DV3 ^:^^3^5 ti'ij^ nnr^^ 
 
 • T -•; t;' ': T" 
 
 • D^2i:n x^D WD2 bDV ^1^1 
 
 ,ip^T v-ins nsDi n^3 
 
 It;- t-:i- T-: T- 
 
 ! 1^D5 pnn^ ninti' DS"ii; 
 I -ih^ nh^m , hip n-in;^ ri^i^ 
 
 I.. .. T : '- T •• : - : • 
 
 * ^?r}'^, tojyp nn^p Dvi ni'?. 
 
 iTcs^'ib TIT bsina;
 
 300 APPENDIX. 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 Non ebur, neque cnireum S,-c. 
 
 Hor. 0(1. 18. L. 2. 
 
 oDJi^ ^nljim Dote ni'^JDi 
 
 - Di^^ 31-11 / ^b D^p^i;:^ 
 j^l? "'"'.i;^.?^^ '■u}^}_ nni ynriij: 
 
 • nv: ]i^"isi ni33 HTco
 
 APPENDIX. 301 
 
 /p.1-1 nns"? nian '-h^^ 
 ? t^;ori lon^ ^:ld2 ! i?^D3 
 
 T • T T - : V 'V - 
 
 / ran hin nntn nps:^ 
 
 T - V V T T - ' V V 
 
 .. — ; V T • T ' 
 
 . , V T ~ II....
 
 REGISTER OF WORDS. 
 
 EXPLAINKD IN THIS WORK. 
 
 (I) Refers to the First Part, 3rd F.ditioii, the fl<<urcs refer to the Pa_c;c. 
 The figures witliout any mark before tliem, refer to the I'^tymology and Syntax, 
 3rd Edition. 
 
 
 
 t< 
 
 
 
 50 HK'K 
 
 T * 
 
 172 -lins 
 
 T 
 
 83 ^MN 
 
 52 "IJX 
 
 T. 31 2X 
 
 I.4G n^'-s 
 
 .. n-'nnx 
 
 172 ^^.•I.S 
 
 49 n-).55< 
 
 106 nix 
 
 T 
 
 1.67 ]1^''^ 
 
 nnx 
 
 T 
 
 65 5)njK 
 
 " 13N* 
 
 172 ■;]« 
 
 >• ""in^ 
 
 ^« lli? 
 
 83 -T-X 
 
 84 fnnK 
 
 20 VsK 
 
 65 nnns 
 
 67 jDIK 
 
 26 jnx 
 
 131 nhx 
 
 ,. ^?X 
 
 172 DN 
 
 171 DiN 
 
 201 -tyis 
 
 '• n^s 
 
 " ^?N 
 
 1.26 '.^{ 
 
 66 -)^-ix 
 
 65 TtjX 
 
 172 ^i3K 
 
 78 n^''3N 
 
 172 n\S!/''X 
 
 ss n-iis /-lis* 
 
 33 nnx 
 
 65 |V?X 
 
 169 J3X 
 
 " n3''X ' ^""K 
 
 48 nix 
 
 5 ninx 
 
 T 
 
 I. .36 ^nx 
 
 63 -I3X 
 
 137 n>« 
 
 T 
 
 172 nx /Tx 
 
 81 r\-}/\]^ 
 
 45 2''3X 
 
 172 ^S 
 
 57 2:s 
 
 131 Vtx 
 
 131 nnx 
 
 172 ^3N 
 
 4^K 
 
 1.46 nTN 
 
 03 nnm 
 
 .. nns 
 
 ■"O |?i< 
 
 37 V^ 
 
 70 ^^K 
 
 26 lis 
 
 15 nan*? 
 
 1.33 t33nx 
 
 79 nW 
 
 T T 
 
 I. 46 ^JK 
 
 48 ns 
 
 T 
 
 172 nnx 
 
 49 pax 
 
 1.37 nW 
 
 170 j^s* , psi 
 
 .. ninx 
 
 71 hr\ii 
 
 34 Dn-j3X 
 
 ^^ nVs 
 
 37 HQ^X 
 
 91 nnx 
 
 T V 
 
 172 ix 
 
 141 TiJX 
 
 99 D''n^s^ 
 
 172 nb'-si 
 
 '■ nnx 
 
 247 ninis 
 
 1-37 n-^jx 
 
 172 .1^ 
 
 .. ND''X 
 
 131 Tns 
 
 172 1"|X 
 
 66 D3X 
 
 .. ^^^K 
 
 33 t^J-K 
 
 ., -ins 
 
 
 1-37 ;5S
 
 304 
 
 REGISTER OF WORDS. 
 
 * lin-jis* 
 
 65 n'-)3x 
 
 2!' -limx -ijx 
 
 40 no^ 
 
 73 D^N 
 
 2G }n.^ 
 
 172 ^VK 
 
 .. nts' nriN 
 
 C8 |."1DK 
 
 18-1 r\yq% 
 
 4 t^K 
 
 1.67 y^VX 
 
 ■• 1^^ Dn>? 
 
 13 "ibK 
 
 '^^ ^!??< 
 
 46 -)!ltJ>X 
 
 73 mis 
 
 57 T-pX 
 
 >' 1^'^ 
 
 46 nx 
 
 164 CD^a 
 
 T 
 
 91 ys-jx 
 
 132 lbs* 
 
 172 ajps 
 
 171 DX 
 
 99 -IB^K 
 
 92 D''J/2-lK 
 
 131 tjbs' 
 
 '• t^»x 
 
 53 HDK 
 
 T T 
 
 172 riK 
 
 72 nns / nx 
 
 75 P|X 
 
 82 nnripx 
 
 171 n»s 
 
 .. h\Kim 
 
 50 nhx 
 
 172 ta -fix 
 
 172 njN |N 
 
 T T ' T 
 
 142 nj-io^. 
 
 48 pnx 
 
 1-33 |0|-|S 
 
 D?*? 
 
 T T 
 
 >7i Ji??. 
 
 ■31 nhN 
 
 71 Tins 
 
 131 nbx 
 
 1.73 tj'iis 
 
 47 IPX 
 
 172 iris / '•nis< 
 
 33 D"1X 
 
 
 29 ^six >;s* 
 
 40 nip's 
 
 26 •!|!n3 
 
 172 i.i2r!3 
 
 78 m-iaz 
 
 T 
 
 138 C'i3 
 
 49 -1X5 
 
 107 7|-|2 
 
 107 nj;2 
 
 101 -|i32 
 
 163 pn2 
 
 107 -|X3 
 
 •' "^11 
 
 " "iV.? 
 
 .72 ^2 
 
 124 nna 
 
 " 1^3 
 
 63 nana 
 
 1.33 p.i2p2 
 
 " ^^^ 
 
 241 nt33 
 
 133 ^52 
 
 107 ^-12 
 
 I. 55 -l|-52 
 
 ■' n.y.^? 
 
 1.78 |t32 
 
 7° 12.3 
 
 57 nn? 
 
 53 -||-?2 
 
 '• ^fl^3 
 
 16^2 
 
 172 '?^^2 
 
 1. 33 ^n? 
 
 I. 60 ti>|'?2 
 
 16 j;"^2 
 
 172 p2 
 
 181 .-inin 
 
 116 ^£>?2 
 
 *• T 
 
 163 "12 
 
 " hvM 
 
 78 n3''2 
 
 T * 
 
 03 n^n2 
 
 I. 45 QJ»^3 
 
 75 12 
 
 27 1? 
 
 72 n^a 
 
 81 nttn2 
 
 127 -|E^2 
 
 87 ma 
 
 •'•'0 n? 
 
 145 nb2 
 
 03 nnn2 
 
 C9 ib>3 
 
 T T 
 
 1.47 a-Q 
 
 84 Sy? 
 
 76 nnin 
 
 161 xi3 
 
 49 n^-inf 
 
 48 n-i2 
 
 83 nj.is 
 
 •• n»33 
 
 1.31 -112 
 
 05 -)-i35 
 
 80 rin?5 
 
 64 Tna 
 
 1. 72 -125 
 
 T 
 
 " ^^?. 
 
 .. ^.na 
 
 37 m-i2Ji 
 
 T ; 
 
 81 m^na 
 
 T • ; 
 
 •' " 13|. 
 
 145 naa 
 
 A palace.
 
 REGISTER OF WORDS. 
 
 305 
 
 78 nnya^ 
 
 173 oa 
 
 154 'pia 
 
 S3 13 1 
 
 47 hS-^i 
 
 16-13 
 
 47 ^oa 
 
 74 ^3 
 
 43 -.'la 
 
 ^'h^ 
 
 1. 3G -ini 
 
 21 |a 
 
 100 ^i^i 
 
 133 ^-113 
 
 ii*;'?n3 
 
 1. 33 |na 
 
 •• \H 
 
 145 n^5 
 
 65, 16 ^.13 
 
 7s n"?n3 
 
 •• " ^?r^ 
 
 07 333 
 
 60 r-\)hi 
 
 137 3;*'|3 
 
 72 nn 
 
 I. 3r, D^^ 
 
 149 n333 
 
 T " : 
 
 100 ny^3 
 
 70 hu 
 
 121 yi3 
 
 128 r\m 
 
 [. 72 j;|3 
 
 154 ^"^3 
 
 T 
 
 1 
 
 1. 27 s>a 
 
 70 nna 
 
 *^ "^Tf. 
 
 154 3$>n 
 
 127 PI 
 
 ^* ^.n. 
 
 47 a^ 
 
 164 ^y^l 
 
 T 
 
 "*' n|?'n 
 
 49 in 
 
 1.31 nn 
 
 13 -)h"i 
 
 -T 
 
 66 D-n 
 
 T 
 
 172 1"n 
 
 65 nn 
 
 T T 
 
 1. 35 st^^. 
 
 S2 ny.'n 
 
 74'p'n 
 
 132 nn 
 
 66 t^Jn•^ 
 
 1. 41 j2-i>n 
 
 1. 27 n]n 
 
 1-27 nnni 
 
 n 
 
 1.37 |>"n 
 
 67 3"! 
 
 152 RH.I^^n 
 
 171 ns^n 
 
 170 nsn 
 
 172 >-in 
 
 31 ssn 
 
 39 nn 
 
 1. 64 -q|?n 
 
 147 n'^n 
 
 167 jn 
 
 172 nsn 
 
 172 nann 
 
 Uil,I6 >T|-^n 
 
 52 pn 
 
 29 s>4.in 
 
 167 nnn 
 
 1. no jnn 
 
 1.V2 h^n 
 
 169 Di»n 
 
 .. ^**^ 
 
 66 Din 
 
 63 '(vyi 
 
 '. ^.Vin 
 
 170 a'.p'.n 
 
 " nisn 
 
 37 nin 
 
 102 ^nn 
 
 231 Pin 
 
 172 Dibq 
 
 ., nan 
 
 T •• 
 
 168 n\n 
 
 30 niT 
 
 TT 
 
 06 |0T 
 
 17 ibT 
 
 T 
 
 45 nnr 
 
 T T 
 
 T. 32 3XT 
 
 64 nj 
 
 124 pyj 
 
 '• Pit 
 
 168 >rh>\) 
 
 83 npT 
 
 37 Vll 
 
 127 ni53;T. 
 
 1.69 T-CiT 
 
 * T 
 
 1. 30 pn 
 
 97 -IT n.T 
 
 "^ ]p\ 
 
 63 -IT 
 
 151 Dm 
 
 72 nn 
 
 >- nxT
 
 300* 
 
 REGISTER OF WORDS. 
 
 80 ni.n 
 
 '" ^ID 
 
 79 nn-jn 
 72 nn 
 •11 pj 
 10 Din 
 37 Finn 
 
 80 nsnn 
 
 " ^ID 
 
 1.45 •^y^n 
 ., ., nK^n 
 -. ,. im 
 „ .. fi^n 
 
 73 jnn 
 
 B4 ^ij>>pn 
 
 u]<) |n 
 
 1G4 pn 
 49 n''3n 
 
 154 i-tpn 
 
 47 nTpn 
 123 -ibn 
 'ia jnpn 
 118 Y^n 
 
 95 -.yn 
 
 26 "ivn 
 
 1.35 nnv"'!^n 
 
 75 pn 
 
 154 ipn 
 
 78 npn 
 
 n 
 
 133 "p^n 
 
 132 D$n 
 
 ^" P^n 
 
 1.31 on 
 
 123 -ibn 
 
 51 non 
 
 I-4G n»n 
 
 10 n)3n 
 
 T - 
 
 48 an 
 ., ninn 
 
 T 
 
 166 Dnn 
 
 89 |»|ph 
 
 48 -liDn 
 202 -non 
 "onon 
 91 ti'on 
 
 93 Q^tj''»n 
 
 1 1 n*n / '•n 
 
 148 n''n 
 
 141 Di»n 
 
 164 xt2n 
 
 72 "pHn 
 
 75 -Tin 
 
 69 D3n 
 
 T T 
 
 80 no?n 
 
 5 Dnn 
 
 11 ihn 
 
 " n^n 
 
 •• n^a'pn 
 
 " P^i'n 
 
 105 n$n 
 
 „ n^n 
 
 163 DiVn 
 
 49 p^n 
 
 72 •>'?n 
 
 1G6 pan 
 
 78 nn-un 
 
 1. 31 an 
 
 89 nn 
 
 57 jrnh 
 
 142 cj>-jn 
 
 64 mn 
 
 1. 31 u-in 
 
 ., .,yin 
 
 37 Din 
 
 172 ^-in 
 
 77 nrn 
 
 I- 27 nrh 
 
 63 |v-m 
 
 107 prn 
 
 •' Pin 
 
 150 ni^rn 
 
 88 ptn 
 
 I. 27 X3t2 
 
 150 CDJ?t3 
 
 149 D"lt2 
 
 1. 27 rh^ 
 
 70 xpD 
 
 107 X?30 
 
 149 3.1t3 
 I. 31 >-10 
 
 49 nj??!? 
 132 Vntp 
 
 85 2it3 
 
 68 '^)rM^ 
 
 107 -inu 
 
 „ "ino 
 
 18 y-i. 
 37 dV 
 
 57 nn''T. 
 1. 27 n^ 
 
 SI nn» 
 
 1.32 -Jl-Il 
 
 162 -|JH 
 30,51 Ti 
 
 134 {^a** 
 68 tir
 
 REGISTER OF WORDS. 
 
 307 
 
 I. 27 nv^iy 
 24 2\yi 
 
 134 "pi 
 
 70 1^1 
 
 154 y^l 
 
 84 1^;* 
 
 T T 
 
 33 hii'p\ 
 
 70 in^ 
 
 C5 -),^> 
 134 N-|J 
 
 I. GG nsT 
 134 nn^ 
 
 44 j-^-l^ 
 33 D^^^.1T 
 
 156 nhj 
 
 10 HT 
 
 134 ^b'' 
 7G ns; 
 
 150 n\j 
 
 137 2T 
 
 T 
 
 118 ^3^ 
 
 81 nVs^ 
 
 135 "lV 
 IGl "q^J 
 
 45 nn^! 
 
 74 D'' 
 
 137 nr 
 
 134 pb-- 
 
 1C7 D»V 
 
 132,47 njV 
 
 3y P|p1> 
 
 1. 27 •<pV 
 
 172 nm 
 1C2 nb"* 
 
 T 
 
 I.4G •>•• 
 49 p* 
 
 ICG nb* 
 
 81 n-i5)3 
 
 44 jy35 
 
 162 ipis 
 
 44 ins 
 
 G4 3S3 
 
 12G Wlb^ 
 
 127 1133 
 
 75 ^3 
 
 1G9 l-IS 
 
 12 nns 
 
 119 nna 
 
 C9 FIJS 
 
 S3 3^3 
 
 100, 1C9 J3 
 
 •■ 'i^'s 
 
 1-33 nbn? 
 
 49 ><D3 
 
 21 n'Ss 
 
 02 D13 
 
 .. ni33 
 
 154 D-13 
 
 150 nbs 
 
 78 n^3 
 
 G4 n3 
 
 .. nn33 
 
 44 ^013 
 
 6G n-iD3 
 
 54 '•^3 
 
 108 m^ 
 
 " "I?? 
 
 GO nns 
 
 83 ^^p3 
 
 50 nv^s 
 
 172 13 
 
 45 b'na 
 
 107 ah3 
 
 T 
 
 81 nDD3 
 
 1G2 ^3^3 
 
 64 D"-? 
 
 T ; • 
 
 57 n^hs 
 
 '^^ ^p? 
 
 150 nrs'ps 
 
 37 n33 
 
 07 ]m^ 
 
 70 Fjns 
 
 128 D'ya 
 
 170 ni^s 
 
 07 3313 
 
 T 
 
 74 ns 
 
 81 mns 
 
 1.31 ;^3 
 
 173 103 
 
 ,,133 
 
 37 nb 
 
 C5 n-i^ 
 
 142 |.-1^ 
 
 72 in"? 
 
 h 
 
 154 ^2h 
 
 173 «'?.'»'? .1^ 
 
 09 p"? 
 
 I T T 
 
 11 njiV 
 .. nab!? 
 
 69 aaj? 
 173 nn^ 
 G5 t^^n^ 
 
 1.27 ^'•2^ 
 
 172 K^ 
 
 132 nsj^ 
 172 t:)s^ 
 
 52 2h
 
 308 
 
 179 Y^ 
 
 130 np^ 
 
 3 jiB?^ 
 
 85 njyp 
 
 79 nnyp 
 
 70 nbyp 
 
 73 -|bj;» 
 
 167 ^53P 
 
 73 nrifjD 
 
 25 N\'a 
 
 81 nn->;o 
 
 126 nivp 
 
 141 n^-i^*p 
 
 101 Dnyp 
 
 189 tr"^pp 
 
 G8 Dip» 
 
 15 lipo 
 
 73 "ppn 
 
 21 n:pp 
 66 {<npp 
 
 88 -1)0 
 
 1.31 -lb 
 142,75 nx-iD 
 
 KJ3 ^pp 
 
 I. 3G n-nitt 
 
 REGISTER OF WORDS. 
 
 8 njyS 
 
 168 13 Q^ 
 
 109 D'-JS^ 
 
 81 non^p 
 68 Y'hjp 
 
 7 ^"^D 
 
 65 n-i3^p 
 
 84 trp^p 
 
 51 i:zi''ni:3^p 
 27 n^h^^ 
 
 82 n^L"pp 
 79 n2D 
 
 7 ^-ly^p 
 52 j;:r3 
 78 npp 
 
 67 1]D0 
 73 I5PP 
 
 ■' "ippp 
 
 67 yDP 
 
 I. 30 -)Spp 
 
 75 TiyO 
 
 00 t3j;p 
 7 '?''j;p 
 72 i^^yp 
 7 n'pyo 
 
 107 np^ 
 
 173 jyp^ 
 173 inn 
 
 tt: t 
 
 1-30 nrinp 
 
 21 npp 
 
 ,. ntsp 
 
 173 n^p 
 
 65 pOpP 
 27 y^p 
 51 D^o 
 
 64 I'.p 
 
 77 nsp 
 
 78 nsp 
 
 127 ibp 
 
 185 nnpp 
 73 K'ri3p 
 
 70 Ji^O 
 
 84 -rj^^p 
 53 n3ti)p 
 05 c^>.•|2^p 
 
 1-37 n^p 
 13 n$p 
 
 31 n^o 
 
 149 nbj' 
 
 15 
 
 nb^ 
 
 167 -inp 
 
 " nnnp 
 
 I- 67 ynio 
 
 173 'p.10 
 
 82 nnViD 
 67 imo 
 
 66 -|p-10 
 
 74 nyin 
 
 79 nyyp 
 
 74 nciD 
 
 66 svi» 
 
 74 B>pio 
 
 66 snio 
 
 1. 27 nniD 
 
 79 n^hio 
 
 85 'pt^io 
 
 138 nio 
 
 70 nio 
 
 73 narp 
 
 65 -liDTp 
 
 ■*' njnp 
 
 95 ITIVOP 
 
 4 ^3t^•^o 
 
 T T -; - 
 
 83 nnno 
 
 38 nrh 
 
 72 ^'.^ 
 
 37 n^^.^ 
 
 173 IV^D 
 
 50 nxp 
 84 -lixip 
 
 173 TXP 
 
 51 D.'-JTN'n 
 
 173 pxp 
 
 21 !?3Slp 
 
 154 DSO 
 I. 37 ^.UP 
 
 68 pnp 
 84 n^^^np 
 173 n^3p 
 
 1.37 ^|p 
 
 27 n^jp 
 
 39 innp 
 18 n'np 
 ,. -jhjp 
 
 170 y-np 
 
 27 y^p 
 
 100 no 
 
 162 npnp 
 
 168 |J<!p
 
 REGISTER OF WORDS, 
 
 309 
 
 «3 :r)f^ 
 88 pinb 
 
 171 ^no 
 17 n^nro 
 
 27 ns'^^p 84 n'psbo 
 77 njc'o 
 
 81 ri-ip;:'p 
 
 22 "pj^t^Jp 
 
 52 ^K>0 
 
 12G y^^D 
 
 53 nnsK'D 
 
 07 ay^p 
 
 05 n'-nt^'p 
 
 07 |3:jJp 
 
 81 mbb'D 
 
 142 ''3'n-iD 
 03 nnsio 
 
 CO t<'5<,'p 
 
 I'j ^3:^'0 
 
 I. 33 -|-1J 
 
 I. 31 DJ 
 
 46 nni 
 
 132 yij 
 
 1. 33 nN3 
 
 5 fj-n-}: 
 
 55 •^003 
 
 124 DHJ 
 
 1. 32 n3 
 
 89 niX3 
 
 156 m: 
 
 7 hvA 
 
 21 r\b: 
 
 79 ni-ij 
 
 i'*^ n5.^3 
 
 I. 45 xb^3 
 
 26 -lyj 
 
 27 ybj 
 
 68 nnj 
 
 • T 
 
 108 |>KJ 
 
 106 y^j^j 
 
 41 rriy;. 
 
 45 JDSJ 
 
 108 jnj 
 
 142 }i3J 
 
 1. 45 ^--ba 
 
 • T 
 
 24 VqJ 
 
 133 nbj 
 
 85 Dnb 
 
 41 N'-n: 
 
 50 i3-.t^3 
 
 55 l-jaj 
 
 49 >-)53 
 
 35 -inj 
 
 154 y^j 
 
 154 n»^3 
 
 128 JjJqJ 
 
 123 lb J 
 
 T 
 
 173 nDJ 
 
 " n^23 
 
 1. 77 P|^5 
 
 1. 32 VJ 
 
 49 n*"i33 
 
 *<4 rhn: 
 
 "' ^-H 
 
 132 pb'J 
 
 37 nv3 
 
 105 Pibp3 
 
 105 n^nj 
 
 •• n3:3 
 
 130 in: 
 
 132 3^3 
 
 100 Qn^j 
 
 03 nom 
 
 *" 1A? 
 
 52 iTIJ 
 
 64 -)3 
 
 52 n'PD? 
 
 45 n^m 
 
 24 m: 
 
 154 -ibD 
 
 I. 32 DD 
 
 78 rj3D 
 
 73 nniD 
 
 151 32D 
 
 T 
 
 107 ^pD 
 
 11 nyn 
 
 74 Sp 
 
 57 DID 
 
 152 nap 
 
 " '?I!!P 
 
 74 PIP 
 
 31 D^D 
 
 44 ^J-iD 
 
 173 3*2D 
 
 80 inp 
 
 '"'^ 1??D 
 
 142 y^D 
 
 1C2 -irnnp 
 
 I. 32 -liD 
 
 43 nnaj? 
 
 127 nnj? 
 43 nay. 
 
 76 mnj? 
 
 10 t2''D3y 
 
 133 n3j; 
 35 nny 
 
 16 3y_ 
 
 84 3J?
 
 310 
 
 REGISTER OF WORDS. 
 
 I. 51 a-nj; 
 73 nny 
 
 62 DilJJ 
 
 149 r±>)i 
 
 I. 57 3b>j; 
 
 „ „ nb'v 
 
 13 i^y 
 
 „ }K>j; 
 
 133 -|K;y 
 83 -ii;;»j? 
 01 -)ii>j; 
 
 92 Dnbj^. 
 
 169 nv. 
 
 69 pj^y 
 
 88, 66 p3JJ 
 13 -)QJ? 
 „ -IBJ? 
 
 45 nioy 
 
 " YV. 
 
 79 nyy 
 
 68 p.-^'j; 
 52 '?yv 
 
 133 n'?vJ? 
 
 85 DVV. 
 
 26 D-i^j; 
 
 173 3I5J? 
 I. 70 -ly 
 
 I. 69 3-)y 
 
 80 np^j? 
 
 169 oVy 
 
 171 oy 
 
 .. ny 
 
 123 nbj? 
 
 65 -i-irsj; 
 
 171 n''py 
 
 173 n^)!? 
 
 155 Kb'oy 
 
 T T -; 
 
 203 pbj; 
 
 !7i n»y 
 
 1. 27 mv. 
 
 72 ijy 
 69 33y 
 29 nii^ 
 
 30 |)j; 
 
 80 -\))} 
 
 79 n-joy. 
 
 57 T-y 
 
 72 n»y 
 
 51, 40 |iy 
 
 I. 33 -i33y_ 
 
 I. 32 Ci'''33j; 
 
 7 ^y 
 
 73 3^y 
 
 ,. n^.sj 
 ., ii^ 
 
 ^3 ''i?y. 
 
 60 iy 
 173 ny 
 
 .. niy 
 
 I. 27 iny 
 
 C7 33-iy 
 
 7 ^1V 
 
 ., VViy 
 11 Pjiy 
 64 -iiy 
 70 ^i;; 
 
 127 pj; 
 
 73 -i.-i;j 
 
 75 ty 
 
 126 ycj»s 
 
 - T 
 
 74 ns 
 
 173 Di^ns 
 
 108 nhs 
 
 '■ nns 
 
 72 ina 
 
 in aanQ 
 1G4 n-iv 
 
 26 n^jpsi 
 
 I. 32 IB 
 
 I. 35 ins 
 
 248 r-iD'"is 
 72 ns 
 
 68 p|-jQ 
 127 yK^s 
 
 04 pl-Tiy 
 
 79 riDiv 
 
 71 Vy> 
 
 173 Dye 
 
 110 lbs 
 
 ' T 
 
 115 nps 
 ., n-ips 
 
 If 
 
 74 nv 
 
 I. 27 K^^ 
 
 76 t»>;^2 
 168 |S 
 
 149 nbB 
 
 50 0135 
 
 22 ^ys 
 
 .. Sy.Q 
 
 72 t^y 
 
 79 nss 
 
 132 yJB 
 
 18 nh3 
 
 I. 27 ns 
 
 173 ns 
 
 I. 32 IS 
 
 I. 02 ins 
 
 06 KVXV
 
 REGISTER OE WORDS. 
 
 31 
 
 C4 -|y 
 
 78 mv 
 
 T T 
 
 72 ny 
 
 76 neiv 
 190 nby 
 
 G5 -lisy 
 
 70 n'-QV 
 
 143 xpy 
 
 88 Tyvf 
 
 27 "pV 
 
 40 nW 
 •^7 ^$y 
 
 G9 ytpv 
 
 236 "l^V 
 78 n*1''V 
 I. 32 py 
 
 127 T>>f 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 '3 nnp. 
 
 78 nnvi-? 
 
 88 ^[5 
 
 t. 32 pp 
 
 142 ibi? 
 
 •• 2"7i? 
 
 '^ r^! 
 
 152 ^^p 
 
 37 -lip 
 
 ^^ ">?i?. 
 
 •• nnnp 
 
 HI nvi") 
 
 ^' r^p 
 
 130 nnp 
 
 ir> nnip 
 
 " i?"li? 
 
 21 -iVp^ 
 
 78 nop 
 
 -•^ m 
 
 23 K'-Tlp 
 
 83 nnj? 
 
 " i^VR 
 
 -" \P. 
 
 87 Jbj? 
 
 *27 D"Ip 
 
 M9 pp 
 
 ^^ iVfJ 
 
 89 HNJp 
 
 4G nnbp 
 
 71 cnp 
 
 204 t^np 
 
 52 I^Vi? 
 
 21 nil? 
 
 139 Qi'p 
 
 17G Knnp 
 
 89 n^i? 
 
 25 tilf? 
 
 " n3i5 
 
 G4 -I'.p 
 
 57 Vip 
 
 49 n^i? 
 
 13 ni"i|'^ 
 
 ■' n2p 
 
 52 |>^p 
 
 137 D.-1P 
 
 48 nj;T 
 88 n^yn 
 83 pvn 
 52 nVn 
 107 n>;"i 
 
 83 j;jj»-| 
 
 172 p1_ 
 I. 32 pT 
 
 84 3pn 
 
 190 nO"! 
 83 nn 
 154 p-j 
 
 52 yn 
 
 83 j;-i 
 
 117 2V-} 
 
 C8 pny^-^ 
 
 142 nj;-) 
 150 n'vn 
 
 51 D^nn 
 
 132 ^H") 
 
 50 D'-pni 
 101 pinn 
 I. 09 nn 
 173 Dpn. 
 G2 ti'n 
 74 -r)-) 
 133 t^-ian 
 
 04 D1 
 
 1G3 ^n 
 
 25 ^■^<■J 
 
 26 yjT 
 
 7G riN-i 
 
 107 t)nn 
 
 62 t»n or t»>Kn 
 
 '• ^11 
 
 7 e'N-i 
 
 4 mi 
 
 •• n"'L"Xl 
 
 137 nn 
 
 .. |iL;'X") 
 
 ., nn 
 
 112 3'-i 
 
 52 )>.-)-) 
 
 51 Nin-i 
 
 71 inn 
 
 94 *y^3i 
 
 ^-2 ainn 
 
 40, 14 ^n
 
 312 
 
 REGISTER OF WORDS. 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 1G3 ytj'Vt^ 
 
 48 yjpy 
 
 1G3 n'^b 
 
 83 taib 
 
 64 -IK^ 
 
 51 nab 
 
 B'l ny-'iDt^' 
 
 63 in'pb 
 
 I. 32 nb 
 
 ,, -11 Kb 
 
 48 nns^ 
 
 16 nb^ 
 
 65 ptO^b 
 
 83 nj;ib 
 
 65 nnsb 
 
 27 tDb^ 
 
 14 lOtJ' 
 
 - T 
 
 149 Sbb 
 
 50 p.lb 
 
 84 Vsb 
 
 41 \2Zk} 
 
 36 -lOb' 
 
 ■' ^W 
 
 85 ppib 
 
 149 "pxb 
 
 •' ritoab^ 
 
 10 J^J^t?' 
 
 80 noVc?' 
 
 67 |blb 
 
 62 yji3b 
 
 G9 JS*^ 
 
 75 J^ 
 
 68 b''^b 
 
 50 -lib 
 
 81 nVab 
 
 I. 45 12^ 
 
 15 ,s:b 
 
 91 nb^b 
 
 26 inb 
 
 64 ^''3b 
 
 150 pb» 
 
 73 Xjb 
 
 94 *t^l^[»> 
 
 52 ^nb 
 
 83 t32b 
 
 162 npi^ 
 
 15 ns?b 
 
 92 n^i^hf 
 
 57 -inb 
 
 94 •'y^nb 
 
 54 -ijpj;^ 
 
 50 njj^' 
 
 T T 
 
 173 nib^b 
 
 52 "Itib 
 
 93 □'•ynb 
 
 64 T^ 
 
 T 
 
 78 njK' 
 
 6. 44 Qb 
 
 78 nn-'b 
 
 17 nbb 
 
 T 
 
 „ -^^ 
 
 94 1J{i> 
 
 173 Ob 
 
 T 
 
 42 -)"ib 
 
 19 fnsb 
 
 46 n-jb 
 
 91 D^jtj; 
 
 80 nnpb 
 
 ,. nn-b 
 
 91 ynb 
 
 15 C^-IJ^ 
 
 -, D^JIS;^ 
 
 51 D-'Ob 
 
 116 3bb 
 
 76 nab 
 
 I. 33 0''2"1K' 
 
 11 n-jy^ 
 
 80 n^pb 
 
 107 nbb 
 
 82 nnb 
 
 91 nE^K> 
 
 „ '\'<]}b 
 
 49 jDEJ? 
 
 154 "pab 
 
 19 -i-nb 
 
 93 D''E<'E^ 
 
 45 n^yb 
 
 ■91 njbb 
 
 T : 
 
 118 j3b 
 
 " "1?^ 
 
 68 pJJ>b> 
 
 70 ly^ 
 
 94 '<yK>b 
 
 179 -iDb 
 
 30 nnb 
 
 V T 
 
 88 n3^B> 
 
 C9 nyb 
 
 93 n^3b^ 
 
 65 -liab 
 
 137 n-ib 
 
 162 nht^ 
 
 H nyb 
 
 125 j;bb 
 
 127 ni^b 
 
 ■.. aib 
 
 78 nnw 
 
 72 ^w 
 
 82 
 
 nVnin 
 
 46 n^33ri I 
 
 181 ."inn 
 
 31 n^nn 
 
 52 nsi-inri 
 90 nj-nn 
 
 133 15^ 
 
 71 "INJI 
 
 I- 27 naFi 
 126 hin 
 
 62 Nn 
 171 DKn 
 
 T
 
 REGISTER OF WORDS. 
 
 313 
 
 93 u'v.^'n 
 
 173 i>pri 
 83 nnvh 
 
 C5 j-ijyn 
 75 Pi'n 
 
 149 b'DD 
 
 1. 32 ^ri 
 172 Viori 
 
 7r. Dh 
 
 171 on 
 
 CG c^i-i'^ri 
 133 ph 
 
 Ki njpsn 
 57 T«o'?n 
 
 «i nyVin 
 
 77 nsruji 
 173 nnn 
 
 INDEX 
 
 OF 
 
 BIULICAL PASSAGES CITED AND EXPLAINED IN THIS AVOKK. BY THE 
 
 REV. r. ILIFF, D.D., HEAD MASTER OF THE ROYAL 
 
 INSTITUTION SCHOOL, LIVERPOOL. 
 
 Note — Tlie * marks the page in the First Part of the Grammar. 
 
 Genesis. 
 
 1:1. *83 
 
 — *87 
 
 — 214 
 
 — 236 
 
 — 246 
 
 2. 181 
 
 — 216 
 
 3. *87 
 
 — 218 
 
 4. *83 
 _ 249 
 
 5. *8.5 
 
 6. 249 
 
 7. *S3 
 
 — *S7 
 
 — *88 
 
 — 249 
 11. 237 
 14. 236 
 \h. *8.'> 
 21. *40 
 26. 201 
 28. *88 
 30. *S4 
 
 189 
 
 2: 4. 106 
 
 6. 22.') 
 
 8. 189 
 10. 100 
 
 Gene 
 2:12. 
 
 SIS. 
 
 *25 
 
 13. 
 
 *84 
 
 
 
 209 
 
 14. 
 
 *84 
 
 
 
 100 
 
 15. 
 
 *84 
 
 16. 
 
 228 
 
 17. 
 
 208 
 
 
 
 232 
 
 
 
 230 
 
 18. 
 
 227 
 
 23. 
 
 *88 
 
 
 
 106 
 
 24. 
 
 *S4 
 
 
 
 *8.5 
 
 2.'j. 
 
 206 
 
 3: 2. 
 
 108 
 
 3. 
 
 108 
 
 
 
 246 
 
 4. 
 
 106 
 
 7. 
 
 100 
 
 
 
 224 
 
 8. 
 
 106 
 
 13. 
 
 109 
 
 22. 
 
 213 
 
 
 
 220 
 
 
 
 233 
 
 4: 2. 
 
 219 
 
 — 
 
 231 , 
 
 C 
 
 ENE 
 
 SIS. 
 
 4 
 
 : 2. 
 
 246 
 
 
 3. 
 
 214 
 
 
 4. 
 
 219 
 
 
 .■i. 
 
 246 
 
 
 fi. 
 
 *88 
 
 
 7. 
 
 *84 
 
 
 8. 
 
 *87 
 
 
 9. 
 
 256 
 
 
 10. 
 
 237 
 
 
 12. 
 
 *84 
 
 
 15. 
 
 212 
 
 
 18. 
 
 106 
 
 
 24. 
 
 207 
 
 
 25. 
 
 *84 
 
 
 26. 
 
 209 
 
 5 
 
 : 2. 
 
 106 
 
 
 3. 
 
 95 
 
 
 14. 
 
 214 
 
 6 
 
 1. 
 
 228 
 
 
 4. 
 15. 
 
 209 
 208 
 
 
 18. 
 
 *40 
 
 
 20. 
 
 200 
 
 
 21. 
 
 106 
 
 
 
 
 219 
 
 7 
 
 4. 
 
 225 
 
 
 11. 
 
 106 
 
 
 22. 
 
 HT. 
 
 S 
 
 2. 
 
 :'r:,0 
 
 Gene 
 8: 2. 
 
 SIS. 
 
 lOG 
 
 5. 
 
 lOG 
 
 
 
 208 
 
 8. 
 
 230 
 
 11. 
 
 224 
 
 12. 
 
 231 
 
 13. 
 
 208 
 
 21. 
 
 247 
 
 9: 2. 
 
 194 
 
 18. 
 
 185 
 
 23. 
 
 237 
 
 24. 
 
 224 
 
 10: 9. 
 
 lOG 
 
 21. 
 
 *90 
 
 11: 7. 
 
 201 
 
 
 
 233 
 
 9. 
 
 238 
 
 14. 
 
 12 
 
 19. 
 
 95 
 
 12: 1. 
 
 *85 
 
 
 
 192 
 
 5. 
 
 229 
 
 12. 
 
 214 
 
 13. 
 
 *S5 
 
 19. 
 
 22G 
 
 13: 2. 
 
 192 
 
 5. 
 
 100 
 
 9. 
 
 *S5 
 
 — 
 
 240 
 
 Genesis. | 
 
 14: 9. 
 
 204 
 
 10. 
 
 202 
 
 15: 1. 
 
 232 
 
 2. 
 
 256 
 
 10. 
 
 211 
 
 12. 
 
 214 
 
 13. 
 
 210 
 
 — 
 
 222 
 
 15. 
 
 222 
 
 16: 1. 
 
 213 
 
 5. 
 
 2.53 
 
 17: 5. 
 
 219 
 
 18. 
 
 234 
 
 21. 
 
 *80 
 
 23. 
 
 192 
 
 25. 
 
 *80 
 
 18: 1. 
 
 214 
 
 
 
 216 
 
 
 
 224 
 
 3. 
 
 332 
 
 4. 
 
 232 
 
 11. 
 
 238 
 
 15. 
 
 *89 
 
 18. 
 
 230 
 
 21. 
 
 *89 
 
 21. 
 
 220 
 
 24. 
 
 233 
 
 20. 
 
 233 
 
 27. 
 
 120 
 
 Genesis. 
 
 18:29. 204 
 181 
 256 
 
 19: 2. *89 
 — 232 
 
 8. 213 
 
 9. 204 
 
 12. 213 
 
 13. 225 
 17. 229 
 
 19. 239 
 
 20. 121 
 22. 227 
 
 20: 7. 232 
 
 13. 236 
 
 21: 1. 221 
 
 7. 235 
 
 8. 121 
 17. 210 
 24. 209 
 
 248 
 22: 2. 192 
 
 12. 232 
 20. 208 
 
 239 
 
 135 
 
 23: 6. 211 
 
 13. 221 
 17. *87 
 
 Genesis. 
 
 24: 7. 2.52 
 12. *88 
 14. 214 
 
 — 228 
 
 33. *89 
 
 34. *89 
 44. 209 
 55. 238 
 67. 190 
 
 226 
 
 2!J6 
 
 25: 1. 231 
 
 6. 197 
 
 9. 121 
 
 28. 214 
 
 26: 1. 242 
 
 14. 181 
 
 18. 231 
 
 27: 1. 229 
 
 2. 215 
 
 — 225 
 4. 210 
 
 — 233 
 
 — 247 
 6. 235 
 
 20. 231 
 
 25. 233 
 
 33. 241 
 
 38. 2(^9
 
 314 
 
 INDEX OF BIBLICAL PASSAGES. 
 
 Gene 
 
 SI.S. 
 
 28:12. 
 
 223 
 
 
 189 
 
 29: 4. 
 
 *58 
 
 9. 
 
 198 
 
 19. 
 
 228 
 
 30:27. 
 
 247 
 
 34. 
 
 234 
 
 
 186 
 
 31: 6. 
 
 225 
 
 8. 
 
 237 
 
 13. 
 
 190 
 
 24. 
 
 106 
 
 
 
 209 
 
 29. 
 
 330 
 
 30. 
 
 230 
 
 32. 
 
 201 
 
 36. 
 
 *60 
 
 37. 
 
 206 
 
 38. 
 
 145 
 
 42. 
 
 234 
 
 44. 
 
 238 
 
 
 
 253 
 
 47. 
 
 190 
 
 48. 
 
 190 
 
 32: 5. 
 
 192 
 
 
 
 200 
 
 8. 
 
 239 
 
 9. 
 
 233 
 
 13. 
 
 204 
 
 15. 
 
 204 
 
 33:13. 
 
 239 
 
 19. 
 
 21 
 
 
 213 
 
 34: 5. 
 
 220 
 
 7. 
 
 *89 
 
 2,5. 
 
 211 
 
 35: 3. 
 
 108 
 
 37: 2. 
 
 213 
 
 3. 
 
 239 
 
 8. 
 
 205 
 
 
 
 230 
 
 13. 
 
 243 
 
 17. 
 
 235 
 
 29. 
 
 186 
 
 38: 8. 
 
 256 
 
 9. 
 
 224 
 
 16. 
 
 233 
 
 17. 
 
 21 
 
 39: 5. 
 
 247 
 
 40: 3. 
 
 196 
 
 19. 
 
 220 
 
 41:10. 
 
 239 
 
 15. 
 
 241 
 
 .53. 
 
 237 
 
 42: 1. 
 
 224 
 
 18. 
 
 233 
 
 27. 
 
 204 
 
 43:16. 
 
 210 
 
 44: 3. 
 
 12 
 
 25. 
 
 189 
 
 45: 1. 
 
 211 
 
 21. 
 
 12 
 
 4G:33. 
 
 216 
 
 47: 4. 
 
 12 
 
 13. 
 
 12 
 
 24. 
 
 95 
 
 48: 1. 
 
 239 
 
 2. 
 
 239 
 
 7. 
 
 229 
 
 16. 
 
 *H9 
 
 Gene 
 
 SIS. 
 
 48:20. 
 
 *40 
 
 49: 1. 
 
 106 
 
 8. 
 
 209 
 
 22. 
 
 237 
 
 Exodus. | 
 
 1:20. 
 
 238 
 
 2: 6. 
 
 188 
 
 18. 
 
 231 
 
 3: 1. 
 
 214 
 
 8. 
 
 229 
 
 11. 
 
 233 
 
 16. 
 
 217 
 
 16. 
 
 232 
 
 5: 1. 
 
 217 
 
 10. 
 
 186 
 
 16. 
 
 221 
 
 19. 
 
 212 
 
 7: 9. 
 
 213 
 
 8: 1. 
 
 193 
 
 10. 
 
 202 
 
 9: 
 
 135 
 
 33. 
 
 226 
 
 10: 5. 
 
 216 
 
 8. 
 
 193 
 
 12. 
 
 220 
 
 14. 
 
 220 
 
 24. 
 
 211 
 
 
 120 
 
 12:11. 
 
 242 
 
 30. 
 
 243 
 
 37. 
 
 242 
 
 13: 
 
 162 
 
 14: 3. 
 
 218 
 
 11. 
 
 228 
 
 
 
 244 
 
 25. 
 
 242 
 
 15: 9. 
 
 222 
 
 
 226 
 
 16: 3. 
 
 234 
 
 29. 
 
 211 
 
 17: 9. 
 
 216 
 
 18:14. 
 
 221 
 
 20: 8. 
 
 239 
 
 10. 
 
 212 
 
 21: 2. 
 
 256 
 
 4. 
 
 236 
 
 
 
 238 
 
 5. 
 
 225 
 
 11. 
 
 2.53 
 
 17. 
 
 246 
 
 29. 
 
 236 
 
 
 121 
 
 27:34. 
 
 198 
 
 28:17. 
 
 197 
 
 20. 
 
 *40 
 
 30:33. 
 
 211 
 
 36. 
 
 231 
 
 32: 1. 
 
 201 
 
 3. 
 
 202 
 
 4. 
 
 201 
 
 16. 
 
 185 
 
 33:23. 
 
 218 
 
 34: 3. 
 
 211 
 
 35: 5. 
 
 208 
 
 11. 
 
 193 
 
 38:10. 
 
 204 
 
 39:33. 
 
 193 
 
 40:12. 
 
 204 
 
 E 
 
 VODUS. 1 
 
 40:18. 
 
 204 
 
 35. 
 
 118 
 
 41: 4. 
 
 204 
 
 Leviticus. | 
 
 4: 2. 
 
 238 
 
 7.18. 
 
 120 
 
 11:13. 
 
 193 
 
 47. 
 
 249 
 
 12: 4 
 
 189 
 
 13: 3. 
 
 107 
 
 28. 
 
 107 
 
 14: 
 
 122 
 
 21: 
 
 122 
 
 24: 5. 
 
 237 
 
 25:19. 
 
 242 
 
 50. 
 
 228 
 
 
 237 
 
 2G:46. 
 
 192 
 
 27: 5. 
 
 92 
 
 Numbers. | 
 
 1:47. 
 
 122 
 
 3:46. 
 
 204 
 
 7:13. 
 
 204 
 
 9. 6. 
 
 237 
 
 16. 
 
 225 
 
 11:29. 
 
 234 
 
 12: 4. 
 
 206 
 
 
 
 253 
 
 
 238 
 
 13:25. 
 
 229 
 
 14:22. 
 
 214 
 
 19:13. 
 
 200 
 
 20:11. 
 
 200 
 
 13. 
 
 200 
 
 21: 8. 
 
 217 
 
 22:14. 
 
 227 
 
 24: 7. 
 
 *40 
 
 32: 5. 
 
 193 
 
 Deuter- 
 
 onomy. 
 
 1: 2. 
 
 205 
 
 11. 
 
 247 
 
 16. 
 
 230 
 
 3: 3. 
 
 117 
 
 5: 5. 
 
 255 
 
 6:13. 
 
 253 
 
 11:30. 
 
 244 
 
 12:10. 
 
 242 
 
 13:14. 
 
 231 
 
 14:12. 
 
 193 
 
 21. 
 
 230 
 
 15 
 
 13. 
 
 253 
 
 16 
 
 20. 
 
 202 
 
 17 
 
 8. 
 
 249 
 
 22 
 
 8. 
 
 235 
 
 16. 
 
 253 
 
 21. 
 
 244 
 
 24: 2. 
 
 193 
 
 25: 1. 
 
 107 
 
 13. 
 
 202 
 
 28:43. 
 
 244 
 
 67. 
 
 234 
 
 31: 7. 
 
 214 
 
 32: 
 
 119 
 
 7. 
 
 217 
 
 
 .50. 
 
 233 
 
 Josh 
 2: 1. 
 
 UA. 
 242 
 
 3:14. 
 
 190 
 
 4: 4. 
 
 204 
 
 5: 9. 
 
 190 
 
 7:21. 
 
 190 
 
 10: 
 
 119 
 
 13:11. 
 
 119 
 
 14. 
 
 237 
 
 15:19. 
 
 210 
 
 24:19. 
 
 201 
 
 Judges. 
 
 4:20. 
 
 243 
 
 8: 1. 
 
 242 
 
 9:28. 
 
 233 
 
 11:14. 
 
 215 
 
 24. 
 
 201 
 
 37. 
 
 220 
 
 12: 2. 
 
 220 
 
 13:19. 
 
 238 
 
 14:18. 
 
 234 
 
 20:25. 
 
 92 
 
 41. 
 
 239 
 
 Ruth. | 
 
 1: 6. 
 
 222 
 
 2: 9. 
 
 210 
 
 12: 3. 
 
 120 
 
 1. Samuel. 
 
 1;12. 
 
 231 
 
 2: 3. 
 
 231 
 
 
 
 244 
 
 4, 
 
 237 
 
 4:16. 
 
 200 
 
 9:11. 
 
 243 
 
 14:29. 
 
 12 
 
 15: 
 
 121 
 
 16: 7. 
 
 191 
 
 18. 
 
 198 
 
 18: 3. 
 
 206 
 
 29. 
 
 214 
 
 21. 8. 
 
 198 
 
 22:10. 
 
 12 
 
 25:27. 
 
 237 
 
 2. Samuel. 
 
 6: 
 
 131 
 
 12: 1. 
 
 *63 
 
 17: 9. 
 
 235 
 
 29. 
 
 117 
 
 18:22. 
 
 232 
 
 23. 
 
 232 
 
 33. 
 
 202 
 
 19:16. 
 
 240 
 
 30. 
 
 238 
 
 
 131 
 
 20: 
 
 131 
 
 24:24. 
 
 145 
 
 1. Kings. | 
 
 3: 7. 
 
 225 
 
 
 
 228 
 
 8:28. 
 
 198 
 
 17:15. 
 
 238 
 
 1. Kings. 
 
 19:11. 223 
 20: 7. 247 
 
 2. Kings. 
 
 1: 2. 231 
 
 2: 147 
 
 4: 1. 180 
 
 5: 9. 198 
 
 26. 256 
 
 6:10. 207 
 
 32. 229 
 
 7:12. 117 
 
 10: 2. 229 
 
 13:11. 180 
 
 17. 160 
 
 14:10. 119 
 
 15.16. 190 
 
 35. 252 
 
 16: 7. 138 
 
 18:31. 189 
 
 25:27. 220 
 
 Job. 
 
 1: 5. 226 
 
 7. 229 
 
 9. 254 
 
 14. 214 
 
 3: 2. 29 
 
 12: 7. *74 
 
 197 
 
 14: 1. *70 
 
 22: 8. 193 
 
 9. 237 
 
 32: 131 
 
 34:33. 209 
 
 38:21. 237 
 
 42:15. 237 
 
 Psalms. 
 
 1: 1. 185 
 
 5. 244 
 
 5: 4. 210 
 
 6: 5. 256 
 
 7:10. 233 
 
 8: 6. 162 
 
 9:19. 244 
 
 15: 5. 196 
 
 24:11. *66 
 
 34: 199 
 
 36: 6. 33 
 
 51:15. 240 
 
 66:17. 189 
 
 Psalms. 
 
 72:17. 232 
 
 74:17. 193 
 
 81: 5. 196 
 
 88:15. 168 
 
 94: 1. *75 
 
 99:11. 97 
 
 102:27. 209 
 
 103:15. *73 
 
 104: 3. 199 
 
 5. 199 
 
 105:25. 239 
 
 29. 239 
 
 114- 
 
 8. 1H9 
 
 116 
 
 121 
 
 118 
 
 119 
 
 121 
 
 119:168.2,59 
 
 135:17. 170 
 
 170 
 
 139:7. *76 
 
 Proverbs. 
 
 1:15. 232 
 
 26. 229 
 
 131 
 
 3:18. 237 
 
 35. 199 
 
 5:23. 243 
 
 6: 6. *G8 
 
 15. 254 
 
 19. 249 
 
 7 
 
 1. *07 
 
 8 
 
 34. 235 
 
 11 
 
 14. 243 
 
 12 
 
 1. 234 
 
 11. 235 
 
 28. 244 
 
 18: 3. 229 
 
 20:14. 203 
 
 21. 197 
 
 21: 3. 227 
 
 27: 9. 238 
 
 Eccle- 
 
 SIASTES. 
 
 1: 4. 226 
 
 6: 6. 334 
 
 12; 9. 240 
 
 Canticles. 
 
 1: 5. 117 
 
 15. 189 
 
 2:10. *69 
 
 — 29 
 
 16. 97 
 
 5 
 
 10. 117 
 
 6 
 
 2. *70 
 
 8 
 
 197 
 
 Isaiah. 
 
 5: 9. 242 
 
 8:13. 194 
 
 12: 3. 202 
 
 14: 6. 244 
 
 17:10. 197 
 
 23:17. 222 
 
 26:10. 240 
 
 29 
 
 .14. 117 
 
 Isaiah. 
 
 30:20 200 
 
 31: 3. 181 
 
 33: 9. 238 
 
 37:28. 228 
 
 51:12. 188 
 
 .52: 121 
 
 54: 1. 188 
 
 63:11. 191 
 
 Jeremiah. 
 
 10: 3. 237 
 
 20. 210 
 
 17: 4. 240 
 
 22:29. 202 
 
 51: 8. 254 
 
 Lamenta- 
 tions. 
 
 1: 1. 213 
 
 9. 242 
 
 2: 120 
 
 3:29. 233 
 
 EZEKIEL. 
 
 3:15. 217 
 
 14: 4. 121 
 
 18:23. 243 
 
 24: 3. 135 
 
 27: 131 
 
 31. 119 
 
 34: 5. 212 
 
 43: 6. 215 
 
 Daniel. 
 9: 197 
 
 HOSEA. 
 
 5: 6. 232 
 
 Amos. 
 9: 4. 188 
 
 Jonah. 
 2: 9. 235 
 
 6: 6. *78 
 7: 131 
 
 Habakkuk. 
 1:16. 237 
 
 Haggai. 
 
 2:11. 240 
 
 Zechariah. 
 
 1: 5. 2.56 
 7: 5. 230 
 10: 3. 222 
 
 Malachi. 
 
 1: 6. 195 
 
 — 199 
 
 3: 1. 254 
 
 J. If'ertheimer S( Co., Printers, Circus Place, Finsbury Circus.
 
 University of California ^^^„ ,^ 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
 
 Return this material to the library 
 
 from v»hlch it was borrowed.
 
 A 000 049 634 9 
 
 «^ 
 
 // 
 
 
 77/ 
 
 f 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 N 
 
 
 W h 
 
 i